JP6765601B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

In pachinko machines and other game consoles, obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, and a winning opening, starting opening, and variable winning opening where the game ball can win are provided in the game area of the game board. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).

In addition, some of these game consoles are equipped with display means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-20302

However, there is room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a characteristic display means.

The first game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
Display means and
Operation means and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display as the meter display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second meter display as the meter display.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises.
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises.
When the meter of the first meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game which is advantageous to the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full.
When the meter with the second meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter with the second meter display is not full.
The first display may be displayed depending on the operation of the operating means.
It is characterized by that.
The second game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
Display means and
Operation means and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display as the meter display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second meter display as the meter display.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises.
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises.
When the meter of the first meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game which is advantageous to the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full.
When the meter with the second meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter with the second meter display is not full.
The first meter display may change to the second meter display depending on the operation of the operating means.
It is characterized by that.
The third game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display as the meter display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second meter display as the meter display.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises.
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises.
When the meter of the first meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game which is advantageous to the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full.
When the meter with the second meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter with the second meter display is not full.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a change display that changes the first meter display to the second meter display.
It is characterized by that.
The fourth game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display as the meter display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second meter display as the meter display.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises.
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises.
When the meter of the first meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game which is advantageous to the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full.
When the meter with the second meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter with the second meter display is not full.
When the game ball wins the winning opening, the first display may be displayed.
It is characterized by that.
The fifth game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display as the meter display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second meter display as the meter display.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises.
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises.
When the meter of the first meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game which is advantageous to the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full.
When the meter with the second meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter with the second meter display is not full.
When the game ball passes through the gate, the first display may be displayed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view which saw the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative pattern is shown. (C) An example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure is shown. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a figure which shows an example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect which entwined the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the execution timing about the effect which entwined the operation means A and the effect which entwined the operation means B. It is a flowchart which shows the execution timing about the effect which entwined the operation means. It is a figure which shows an example of a meter effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 14 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example which a meter effect is performed and a big hit is performed stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 16 step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect by the change ball icon cI described with reference to FIG. 16 step by step. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail about various kinds of meter displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the rank-up effect which fortune-tells whether the meter display changes step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 20 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the re-lottery which may continue from FIG. 22 (41) step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the mini-game which fortune-tells whether the meter display appears step by step. It is a figure which shows the example in which the big hit is decided by the fluctuation when the meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example which the meter display is displayed in the holding frame stepwise. It is a figure which shows the example step by step which the mini-item is acquired and stocked when the meter of a meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which a plurality of items are stocked in one full tank of a meter display step by step. It is a figure which shows the example step by step that the meter display in a full tank state may be carried over to the next symbol variation display. It is a figure which shows the example step by step that the item is digested without being stocked even if the meter display becomes full and an item appears. It is a figure which shows the example in which two meter displays are displayed and both disappear stepwise. It is a figure which shows the example in which two meter displays are displayed stepwise and only one disappears. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 32 step by step. , It is a figure which shows the example in which the display is started stepwise in the state where the meter display of an increase type is accumulated halfway. It is a figure which shows an example of the meter effect by the meter display which shows a numerical value step by step. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 35 changes according to the operation of the operating means. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect different from the meter effect described so far step by step. It is a figure which shows an example step by step when an error occurs during the display of a meter display. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the error display ER1 shown in FIG. 38 step by step. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine to which this invention is applied seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. An example is shown, and FIG. 1D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. (A) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on processing, (b) is a flowchart of the return activation processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation processing. It is a flowchart of the main control part main loop processing. It is a flowchart of the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of the special figure-related lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special figure per lottery process. It is a flowchart of the process during a symbol change. It is a flowchart of the special figure display confirmation weight processing. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start weight process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special electric function opening process. It is a flowchart of a special electric function operation process. It is a flowchart of a special electric duty control process. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of the special electric service operation pattern data table, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the contents of the special electric service operation data table. It is a flowchart of the special electric function residual sphere detection processing. It is a flowchart of the special electric duty operation end processing. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight processing. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit / fail determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of processing, (c) is the flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is the flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control processing. (A) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206. It is a figure explaining the effect example applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 69 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 70 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the effect shown in FIG. 71. It is a figure which shows the content of the customization which can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the option menu screen in the state where the member service is not used. It is a figure which shows an example which calls an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from a demo screen. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 76. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 77. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 76. It is a figure which shows the other modification example. (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen, and (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen. It is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows the top menu screen and the Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows the model customization screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect using a variable icon. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 85. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the example shown in FIG. 85. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the change effect of the hold icon and the change effect of the variable icon by the navigator character YM. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 88 and the modification example. It is a figure which shows the effect example that the holding frame becomes invisible temporarily. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS. It is a figure which shows the modification and the like shown in FIG. 91. An example of an effect in which the effect of the button hold icon is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which there is a period that a navigator character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example which has another period in which a navigation character YM is not displayed. This is an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed. An example of the production in which the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which the change notice display is standby display. It is a figure which shows the effect example using the hold frame different from the hold frame explained so far. It is a figure which shows the example which the icon I1 of the treasure box which has been used as the icon of the change notice notification appears as a hold icon. An example of the production in which the meter effect is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 101. It is a figure which shows still another modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 101. An example of a production in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entwined the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of another effect which entwined the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entwined the navigator character YM by the effect device 206 provided with the 2nd display device below the decorative pattern display device 208 (the first display device). It is a figure which shows an example of the case where another effect is executed during the execution of the effect selected by a player. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 109. It is a table summarizing the music which can be output from a speaker 120. It is a figure which shows the example in which the music selection described with respect to FIG. 111 is performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 112. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 114. It is a figure which shows the example which the holding frame selected by a player is changed. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 116. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine which was set to the auto button mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 118. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 118. It is a figure explaining the overlap relationship between the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the dish full tank error, and each of the brightness adjustment window BW with other displays. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal notification. It is a figure which shows the example which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed. It is a figure which showed an example of the error which the main control part 300 of a pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is a figure which showed an example of the error which the payout control unit 600 of a pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is a figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the error notification by a pachinko machine 100. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine to which this invention is applied seen from the front side (player side).

Hereinafter, a ball game machine (including an enclosed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The enclosed type referred to here means an enclosed game machine or the like that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3) as external structures. .. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facility or the like) provided in a game machine installation store. The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 to serve as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in the present specification, a lamp having an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, or the like is referred to as a lamp if it emits light. The one that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

A game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a door opening sensor 609 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

Further, the front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 that is different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 can rotate in the front-rear direction about a drive shaft (not shown) provided at the bottom. Further, the transmission unit 190 has a built-in light emitting diode (LED). The transmission unit 191 of the transmission unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. The transparent portion 191 functions as an operating means (button) and also corresponds to an example of a movable means.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and a chance button lamp 138 that emits the chance button 136. And. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operation means. The chance button 136 is also an example of the movable means, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, this chance button 136 can execute an advance / retreat operation. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 has a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided on the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod (not shown) that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod. Equipped with a launching mallet. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the discharge port 152a and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play games according to this configuration. Pay out the ball to the person.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-board case 162 for accommodating the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 for processing, and the second sub for performing control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that configures a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls, and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk. Power is supplied to a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launching a game ball, and various electrical game devices. A power supply board including a power supply switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating 182 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are arranged.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed game board. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength with which the game ball is launched by the operation of the player, the normal drawing start port 228 and the second special figure start port 232, which will be described later, and the second It can be divided into 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (left side in the game area) provided with the first special drawing start port 230 by arranging the game nail 238 or the like with respect to the game area 124 is the second. A game ball that is configured to make it difficult or impossible to enter the special figure start port 232 and, conversely, rolls in a second area (right side in the game area) provided with the second special figure start port 232. 1 It is configured so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special figure starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board of the right-handed machine, but can be widely applied to the pachinko machine provided with the general game board.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device may be referred to. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also short. However, the display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N should be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the mode. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device also shown in FIG. The left end side portion of the 208N overlaps the front side portion of the right end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is located outside the first decorative symbol display device 208L (first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position away from the left side. Further, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is located outside the first decorative symbol display device 208L (on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be located at a distance). Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the directions in which they come into contact with each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. Further, the number of decorative symbol display devices is not limited, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine equipped with only one or a pachinko machine equipped with only two. It may be a pachinko machine equipped with one or more. Further, the positional relationship of the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. For example, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut that imitates a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion to which the light is irradiated. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M, there are a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A hold lamp 218, a second special symbol hold lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The effect device 206 will be described later.

The three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and are configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display can be displayed. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix. Other display devices including a display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is composed of a 7-segment LED here. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs here. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and here, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure changing games (details will be described later) being held, and here, a predetermined number of special figure changing games are held. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur to a high probability state. Turns on when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Further, around the effect device 206, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, and a second special drawing starting port 232. A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are arranged.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (when the general winning opening 226 is won). , The payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Hereinafter, the ball to be paid out to the player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and the ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Sometimes called a ball (game ball).

The normal drawing start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and here, 1 is on the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged. For this reason, it is expected that the game ball will enter the opening 228 in the normal drawing by hitting right. Unlike the ball that has passed through the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

Only one first special figure start port 230 is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

Only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged below the normal figure start port 228. That is, the second special drawing start port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and it is expected that the ball will enter by hitting the right side. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special drawing start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the second special drawing start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 are closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal drawing variable game is won and the normal drawing display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and go to the second special drawing start port 232. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is the easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting region in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other size, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. When the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is a variable start area is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure start port 230 that is the fixed start area. Figure There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning openings. The central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is arranged below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, the right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to the second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is arranged under the second special figure starting opening 232, and the ball is entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening is sometimes called a large winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are sometimes called an attacker. The central variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the non-electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 keeps the closed state until the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. That is, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first open / closed state (here, closed state) and a second opened / closed state (here, open) in which the game ball is easier to win than the first open / closed state. It is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one of the states) to the other, and when the special figure variable game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol. The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variable game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 has a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, the closed state does not necessarily have to be a completely closed state, and even if it is opened a little, it may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball. .. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. Discharge to 126. Both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

According to the arrangement of the normal drawing starting port 228, the first special drawing starting port 230, the second special drawing starting port 232, the central variable winning opening 234, and the right variable winning opening 235 described above, in the electric support state, the right side. Hitting is a hitting method that is advantageous to the player, and in a non-electric support state, left hitting is a hitting method that is advantageous to the player.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146. And, by the launching mallet 148, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed and launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning openings (general winning opening 226, central variable winning opening 234, right variable) Win a prize at the winning opening 235) or the starting port (1st special drawing starting port 230, 2nd special drawing starting port 232), without winning any winning opening or starting port, or at the normal drawing starting port 228. The out port 240 is reached only by passing through.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, the above-mentioned three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200, or the like can be rolled, and a passing ball is placed in the central portion of the stage 244 in the first special drawing start port 230. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the ball.

When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are fully opened (fully open state), the player can visually recognize a part or all of the display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, which decorative symbol the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is. It is possible to shield only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify it. Further, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed state), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Shield all of. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are the effect display means, are both a shielding means and an effect movable means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each of them moves in the vertical direction according to the effect content. Is configured to allow Further, both the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

The above-mentioned chance button 136 capable of executing the forward / backward operation and the transmissive portion 191 capable of rotating in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect movable means.

Further, as the effect movable means, a family crest accessory 224E (see FIG. 14 and the like) (not shown) is prepared here. The family crest accessory 224E is arranged at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the family crest accessory 224E starts operation, it rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side). In the initial position, the family crest accessory 224E is in a state in which it is more difficult for the player to see than in a state in which the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped from the front side. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted. It is mainly composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be composed of one circuit board, or the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 is controlled by the control means (for example, the main control means (300), the first sub control means (400), and the second sub control means (500). ))), One of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a control means, and the main control unit 300 is used as the first control means. One unit including the 1 sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as the second control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 has a random number value generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit has two built-in random number value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, or the like. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor and a lower plate full tank sensor and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random number value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined sensor circuit 322. To control the display of a symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210. Drive circuit 326 and various status display units 328 (for example, normal drawing hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) for display control. The drive circuit 330 and various solenoids 332 that open and close and drive predetermined movable members such as the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234, and the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

The random number value generation circuit 318 generates a random number value used in the basic circuit 302. There are roughly two types of random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to perform an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of a random number, and derive the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number.

The random number value generation circuit 318 acquires irregular values by using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number value generation circuit 318 is used when the value thus acquired is used as an initial value of a counter for counting up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. ..

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. The random number value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It is stored in the random number value storage register corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is also the same. The value in is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 built in the random number value generation circuit 318.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main processing of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 send and receive communication confirmation commands when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both are capable of two-way communication. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. , The first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. It is equipped with a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, and the like. The ROM 406 in which is stored is connected.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative symbol. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a position detection sensor 430 for detecting the current position of each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. , Detection signals from the detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 has been pressed, and the operation key unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the position detection sensor 430, the detection unit 710 of the chance button 136, and the operation key unit 181. Is read out from the sensor circuit 428 that outputs to the basic circuit 402 and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 to generate a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and three decorative symbols are displayed. A VDP434 (video display processor) that displays an image on each of the devices 208L to N is connected.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program, data, and an image display for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500. A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, in the basic circuit 502, various movable means (chance button 136 capable of performing forward / backward movement, transparent portion 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction, Yatsushiro accessory 224F, general accessory 224Fb, family crest accessory 224E) Based on the drive circuit 516 for performing drive control, various movable means sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E, and detection signals from various movable means sensors 424. The sensor circuit 518 that outputs to the circuit 502 is connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game board frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game underframe lamp 542, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls various movable means 136, 191. Although 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E are controlled, the second sub-control unit 500 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls various movable means 136,6. 191,224Fa, 224Fb, 224E may be controlled, or one of the sub-control units may control both.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 also controls the display of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

Further, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the door open command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Further, when a payout error occurs, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

Regarding the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without going through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. The door opening sensor 609 may transmit a door opening command to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 sends the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may directly supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may supply the voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 may supply a predetermined voltage from the first sub-control unit 400. The launch control unit 630 may supply a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, etc.) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 at substantially the same time. The payout control unit 600 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, or at least one of them. The first sub-control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300, or at least one of them.

Further, the second sub control unit 500 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 at substantially the same time as the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is set so that a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. You may. The second sub control unit 500 may directly supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

At the island facility installed in the game machine installation shop, the 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with a 24V AC current. The 24V alternating current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the DC current of 12 V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V) is further reduced. ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted into a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the supply current of 12V drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338, in which a DC current of 12 V flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. Corresponds to. The low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 outputs the input 24V alternating current as it is, or converts it into a 36V direct current and outputs it. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a current having an operating voltage (here, 5 V) via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

Further, the start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT3141 times out, there are cases where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a programming error or a voltage drop due to a lightning strike or fraudulent activity. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT3141. The start-up signal from the start-up signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT3141 are input to the CPU 304 by a common signal line, but they may be input by a dedicated line. The start-up signal output from the start-up signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT314, which have been described here, correspond to an example of a predetermined start-up signal.

In the case of a momentary power failure in which the power is cut off and immediately recovers, that is, in the case of automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a stop voltage signal is output and WDT3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 resets. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when executing the system reset operation, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. Subsequently, the security check process is executed. In the security check process, whether or not the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct is recalculated. If the verification code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a fixed time plus a randomly selected random time. When the extension process is completed, the main process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, is executed, and the game control is started. On the other hand, even when the user reset operation is executed, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. After that, the main process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, is executed, and the game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 The types of special drawings and general drawings to be stopped and displayed will be explained. FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on condition that the first special figure start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232. 2 The variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of symbol variation display. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. After that, a definite display is performed to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec).

Therefore, after starting the "variation display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 is stopped and displayed and the final display is completed, or after starting "variation display of special figure 2", the special figure The period from the stop display of the stop symbol mode of 2 to the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be performed a plurality of times in succession. FIG. 5A shows 10 types of special figures from “special figure A” to “special figure J” as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

"Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the time is shortened. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state, and the state of not shifting to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special figure A" is in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "special figure B" is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These "special figure A" and "special figure B" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively large amount of profit.

"Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure C" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure D" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure B" which is 15R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Both "Special Figure E" and "Special Figure F" are 2R and do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, and "special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. That is, the "special figure G" and "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", but the effects displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are different between the two, and even in the same state, "special figure G" By providing "Special Figure G", "Special Figure H" and "Special Figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

Further, "Special Figure I" is the first out-of-print symbol, and "Special Figure J" is the second out-of-line symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is also provided with a symbol other than the “special figure A” as a 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns here, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In each symbol display area of the symbol display area 208c, the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform "variable display of decorative patterns" to switch the display with. At the beginning of the variable display of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed (scroll display) for each symbol display area. Then, in the case of notifying the 15R jackpot of "special figure B", a symbol combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot correspond to the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are arranged. 1 ”and“ Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" "Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the 2R jackpot called "Hidden Probability Change" of "Special Figure E", the sudden 2R jackpot called "Special Figure F", or the first small hit of "Special Figure G", "Special Figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying the 2R jackpot called "special figure C" sudden change, or the 2R jackpot called "special figure D" sudden time reduction, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is used. Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "Special Figure I" and the second deviation of "Special Figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 3 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

Further, the fifth symbol may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The fifth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. For example, the decorative design shown in FIG. 5B may be reduced, or the number may be different from the display mode of the decorative design shown in FIG. 5B. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are also a kind of symbol display means. The fifth symbol may be displayed in an area outside the symbol display areas 208a to 208c even in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M. The fourth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol indicating that the symbol is in the variable display or the stop display.

FIG. 5C shows an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure, "Public figure A" which is a hit symbol and "Public figure B" which is a missed symbol. Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "variable display of normal map". Then, "Fu-zu A" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the normal-figure variable game, and "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the deviation of the normal-figure variable game. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6A, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, for each of the special figures 1 and 2, a counter for generating an initial value of a random number counter for determining a special figure at the time of a big hit, a random number counter for determining a special figure at the time of a big hit, and a random number at the time of a small hit Special figure determination random number counter Initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. Further, in the RAM 308, the number of holds, the random value for determining the big hit, the random value for determining the special figure at the time of big hit, the random value for determining the special figure at the time of small hit, and the special figure at the time of loss are determined for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Random value, hit / miss pre-judgment result, special figure pre-judgment result, hit / fail judgment result, special figure decision result, and special figure timer decision result are stored. Further, in the RAM 308, the reserved storage units of the special figures divided into the maximum number (4 in this example) areas where the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be held are separately set in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It is prepared. In the hold storage unit of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 1 determination random value, the small hit special figure 1 determination random value, and the special figure 1 determination random value at the time of loss are stored. These four random value values are set as one set, and one set of each of these four random value values is stored in each area in the winning order (holding order). Further, in the hold storage unit of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 2 determination random value, the small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and the lost special figure 2 determination are stored. The four random values of the random values are set as one set, and these four random values are stored in each set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, first, as the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, and various types are stored in the RAM 308. Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT314, setting of initial values, etc. are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT314. Next, the value of the counter of the WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, the power management unit 660 is the main control unit via the second sub control unit 500. When the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to the WDT process, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the initial process is performed. Make setting 2. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, the first 1 Output port to the sub-control unit 400) to output a clear signal, set to allow writing to RAM 308, and the like.

Next, in step S103, after setting interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In the basic random number initial value update process here, there are three initial values for generating the initial values of the random number counter for determining the special figure at the time of big hit, the random number counter for determining the special figure at the time of small hit, and the random number counter for determining the special figure at the time of loss. Update the value generation counter. After the completion of this basic random number initial value update process, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, the effect random number update process is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with random number counters for determining timer numbers for special figures and normal figures, and all of these counters determine timer numbers that can take values in the range of 0 to 99. Generate a random number value for. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After the completion of this effect random number update process, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 6B. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every about 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of this timer interrupt processing, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area, and the WDT314 is periodically (for example, once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt). ) Restart.

First, in step S201, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read out from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in this step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal recording area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores prize determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined prize determination pattern information (for example, no detection signal before the previous time, presence of the previous detection signal, presence of the current detection signal). 226, central variable winning opening 234, right variable winning opening 235, first special figure starting opening 230, and second special drawing starting opening 232, or normal Figure It is determined that the start port 228 has passed. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228 have been awarded. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the general winning opening 226 is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In the basic random number initial value update process (step S203), the values of the counters for generating various random number counter initial values are updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update process (step S205), the values of the various random number counters are updated. It is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and for example, the value of the generation counter is set in the random number counter for determining the special figure 1 at the time of big hit every time the random number counter for determining the special figure 1 at the time of big hit makes one round. The same applies to other random number counters.

In step S207, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is clocked. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for clocking, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time , Update various timers including a timer for timing a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

Subsequently, the winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228, the prize provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value of the ball number storage area is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Subsequently, in this winning determination process, the number of special figure variable games held at the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If, the predetermined start information is stored. That is, if the number of reservations is less than a predetermined number, the jackpot determination random value and various special figure determination random values are stored. The jackpot determination random value is a processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) obtained from the random value storage register of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a processed value of the software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value + 1). A combination of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the random number counter for determining a special figure provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information derivation means. Various random number values (starting information) are stored as one set of starting information in a vacant area according to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of the special figure provided in the RAM 308. The hold storage unit of this special figure has a predetermined upper limit number of start information derived based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232 (here, four). It corresponds to an example of a start information storage means that can store up to. At this time, various random value (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the hold storage unit of the special figure. In this case, the temporary area is started. The information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of reserved special figures is incremented by 1. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the holding means.

In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228 and the number of reserved normal figure variable games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the normal figure winning random number at that timing The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in the random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308, which is different from that for the special figure, as the normal figure winning random number value which is the starting information.

Further, in this winning determination process, a predetermined ball detection sensor is used to reach the first special figure starting port 230, the second special drawing starting port 232, the normal drawing starting port 228, the central variable winning opening 234, or the right variable winning opening 235. When the winning (winning ball) is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the normal figure start port 228, and the central variable. Winning reception information indicating whether or not there is a winning (winning ball) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

If the number of reservations is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of the start information of the special figure or the start information of the normal figure, the process proceeds to step S211 without storing the start information.

When the winning determination process (step S209) is completed, the look-ahead process is called. In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the previously executed look-ahead processing. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds so far (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt processing, which is called the old hold number), and the CPU 304 stores the number of holds. The number of holds at the time of executing the current look-ahead process after the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the number of old holds, and it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased. If the number of holds has not increased, this look-ahead process ends without pre-reading the start information. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is increasing, the increase in the random number value for determining the jackpot of special figure 1 in the holding storage unit of special drawing 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or the special feature in the holding storage unit of special drawing 2 is read. Fig. 2 Pre-read the increase in the random value for jackpot determination. As for the look-ahead here, only the increase is read ahead, but all may be read ahead. Note that the lookahead here means that the start information is read before the hit / fail judgment (final lottery), but in the subsequent lookahead processing, the word lookahead is used as the result of the lookahead (win / fail judgment (main lottery)). ) May be used to mean reading.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is in a control state of either a special figure low probability state in which the probability of winning a big hit is relatively low or a special figure high probability state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. Being in a special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability change flag. When this probability fluctuation glag is set to on, the special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to off, the special figure low probability state is set.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a table for pre-determining whether or not the result is used in the look-ahead processing. In this pass / fail pre-determination table, a random number range is defined separately for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value is completed, this time, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value is pre-determined. Determine which random number range in the table to belong to. That is, with reference to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random value is in a predetermined numerical range. Occasionally, the hit / miss pre-judgment result is pre-determined as "big hit", and otherwise, the hit / miss pre-judgment result is pre-determined as "miss". In the special figure-related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B), which will be described later, the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variation game is performed again using the hit / miss judgment table having the same contents as the hit / miss pre-judgment table. The determination result here is only the result of the preliminary determination.

If the result of the pre-judgment is "big hit", the random value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of big hit in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2. Special figure 2 at the time of big hit Pre-read the random value for determination. If the result of the pre-judgment is "small hit", the random value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of a small hit in the hold storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or the hold memory of the special figure 2 is stored. Special figure 2 for small hits in the department Pre-read the random value for determination. If the result of the pre-determination of whether or not the result is "missing", the random value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or the random value for determining the special figure 1 is read ahead Special figure 2 at the time of loss Pre-read the random value for determination. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure pre-determination table used in the look-ahead processing. The special figure pre-judgment table defines a random number range corresponding to each of the 10 types of stop symbol modes (“special figure A” to “special figure J”) shown in FIG. 5 (a), and the read-ahead special figure. The special figure pre-determination result (which stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 5A is stopped and displayed) is obtained depending on which random number range the drawing determination random number value belongs to. It should be noted that the determination result of the special figure here is also the result of the preliminary determination to the last, and the determination of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure-related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B) described later. ..

The pre-reading of the start information described above and the pre-judgment using the pre-read start information are executed before the pass / fail judgment (final lottery) of the special figure-related process (S213) described later is performed. The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 jackpot determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random values corresponds to an example of the first start information look-ahead means, and the special figure 2 jackpot determination random value and various types. The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the random value for determination in Special Figure 2 corresponds to an example of the second start information pre-reading means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs the pre-determination based on the special figure 1 jackpot determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random values corresponds to an example of the first pre-determination means, and the special figure 2 jackpot determination is performed. The main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the random number value and various special figure 2 determination random value values corresponds to an example of the second pre-determination means.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a look-ahead information temporary storage unit for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a look-ahead information temporary storage unit for special figure 2 which is also divided into areas for each hold. Has been done. Information representing the special figure pre-determination result (also referred to as information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as look-ahead information) is stored in the corresponding hold area of the look-ahead information temporary storage unit.

If the number of holds has not increased, the look-ahead information "no hold" is stored in the corresponding hold area of the look-ahead information temporary storage unit. Further, in the look-ahead process, when the jackpot game is in progress, or when the current control state is the electric support state (the time saving flag is on), the look-ahead and advance judgment of the start information of the special figure 1 are performed. However, in these cases, the "undetermined" information indicating that the pre-determination of the stop symbol based on the start information of the pre-read special figure 1 has not been performed is stored in the corresponding hold area of the pre-read information temporary storage unit. Remember in. That is, it is acquired during the big hit game and during the electric support based on the fact that the ball enters the starting port (the first special figure starting port 230 in which the state is a fixed starting area) in which the pair of blade members 2321 is not provided. The preliminary judgment based on the start information is not performed, and the notification of the preliminary judgment result (pre-reading notice) is not performed. By doing so, the fairness of the player is guaranteed. It should be noted that the start information itself may not be pre-read, but the pre-reading may be performed and the pre-judgment and the result notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed. Further, the pre-reading and the pre-judgment are performed, but the pre-judgment result is performed. (Pre-reading notice) may not be given.

In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, the winning determination process in step S209 is followed by the general diagram-related process (step S211). In this normal map-related process, first, as the normal map state update process, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state is performed. For example, in the process during the normal symbol variation display (the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

Further, in the processing at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the normal symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol (The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the normal figure display device 210 is performed so as to have one of the display modes of the normal figure B shown in FIG. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal drawing-related processing here but also in various processing. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a definite display of one of the hit symbol and the lost symbol. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed winning symbol is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for driving the opening / closing of the blade, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is lost, the normal map loss flag is turned on. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive.

Subsequently, in this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure fluctuation game and the opening / closing control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure is on hold. When the number of fluctuating games is 1 or more, the result of the fluctuating game is won or not won by a random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number storage area. A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and when winning, the hit flag provided in RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random number value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal map variable games is stored in the normal map reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal map variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, a special figure-related process (step S213) is performed following the normal figure-related process in step S211 described above. In this special figure-related process, first, the special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed, and then the special figure state update process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update process). Processing). The special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), in the special figure related lottery process described later. Based on the special figure determination result (the stop symbol mode of the special figure), the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate that. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time saving symbol (special symbol). FIG. D), hidden probability variation symbol (special symbol E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), first small hit symbol (special symbol G), second small hit symbol (special symbol H), first lost symbol (special symbol) A definite display of any one of the symbol I) and the first lost symbol (special diagram J) is performed. After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In that case, the time reduction flag is turned off unless the special figure probability is changing. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state) or the small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is set to the non-electric support state (first approach rate control state) when it is in the big hit game state and the small hit game state (during the special game state).

In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S215) described later is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and a symbol for stopping the variable display is displayed. The processing is terminated after the special figure 2 identification information indicating that the special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later.

The RAM 308 also has a jackpot flag, and if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the jackpot flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, an image notifying the player that a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the jackpot game is to be started is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to wait for the period of time. Further, in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233), 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the door member of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235 until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235. A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 351 in the open state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the 2351, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 or the right side of the central variable winning opening 234 is used. A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 351 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable winning opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and is provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closing period in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a big hit. An effect is produced in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period during which the image notifying the player that the game is to be ended is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Set the information indicating the waiting period.

As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 during the jackpot gaming state (during the special gaming state). It corresponds to an example of a variable winning control means for controlling. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing pattern of the door members 2341 and 351. get.

Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to on at the same time as the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol mode represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON when the special figure determination result is "special figure A" or "special figure C" in the special figure lottery process described later. .. When the special figure determination result is "special figure E", only the probability change flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to on. Further, when the special figure determination result is "special figure B" or "special figure D", only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to ON, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is used. Set the number of electric support times to 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the approach rate control state, which is the state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special figure start port 232 (variable start area) is controlled. It corresponds to an example of the approach rate changing means for changing between the non-electric support state which is the approach rate control state and the electric support state which is the second approach rate control state.

Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, the RAM 308 is also provided with a loss flag, and if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When this loss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next process without doing anything.

When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is read as "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process described above is completed, the special figure-related lottery process is performed this time. In the special figure-related lottery process, the process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is first performed, and then the process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the winning determination process in the main control unit timer interrupt process started at the same timing (a predetermined trigger). When the start information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 230 in S209), and the start information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start opening 232. Or, when the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied. Even if there is, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize at the second special figure start port 232. The notification of the result of the lottery based on is given priority over the notification of the result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special figure start port 230, and the start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure are provided as the start information in which the lottery is not performed. If only the start information of special figure 1 remains among the start information of 2 and the start information of special figure 2 is newly stored, it is based on the newly stored start information of special figure 2. The notification of the lottery result is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result based on the already stored start information of the special figure 1. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the lottery means (win / fail determination means).

In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the lottery (win / fail determination) is executed, the special figure to be stopped and displayed is determined, and the timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the predetermined validity / rejection determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is displaying the special figure fluctuation display or the stop display, and if either display is being performed, the main control unit timer interrupt processing is performed. Return, if it is not in any of the displays, it is determined whether it is set while the special figure is operating or not, and if it is set while the special figure is operating, the timer interrupt process of the main control unit Returning to, if it is set while the special figure is not operating, it means that the hit / fail judgment prohibition condition has not been satisfied, and this time, it is determined whether or not the predetermined pass / fail judgment condition is satisfied. The determination here refers to the hold storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308, and determines whether or not the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is greater than 0. If the number of holds is 0, the process returns to the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, and if it is 1 or more, a predetermined hit / fail determination condition is satisfied.

If a predetermined hit / fail judgment condition is satisfied, a set of random values (special figure 2 jackpot judgment random value), which is the start information stored in the past, is stored in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , The random value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of big hit, the random value value for determining special figure 2 at the time of small hit, and the random value value for determining special figure 2 at the time of loss) are taken out, and the start information (random value) still stored in the hold storage unit is taken out. Move the set of numbers) from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, if the start information stored in the past is taken out from the hold storage unit of special figure 2 and the start information is further stored in the hold storage unit of special figure 2, the Nth oldest start information is held in special figure 2. This means that it is set as the N-1th oldest start information in the storage unit. In addition, the number of holds stored in the RAM 308 is subtracted by 1. One set of random values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (special figure 2 big hit determination random value, big hit special figure 2 determination random value, small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and loss The main control unit 300 that performs the process of extracting the special figure 2 determination random value) corresponds to an example of the second start information acquisition means.

Next, a hit / fail determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a winning / failing determination table. The contents of the pass / fail determination table are the same as the contents of the pass / fail pre-determination table described above. In this hit / fail judgment process, the probability change flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the random number value for the special figure 2 jackpot judgment is set in the hit / fail determination table according to the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state). Based on which random number range of the above, a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "loss" is derived as a winning / failing determination result. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Derivation of a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "loss" corresponds to a win / fail determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the win / fail determination process here corresponds to a lottery means (win / fail determination means). Corresponds to one example. In addition, the "big hit" corresponds to an example of a specific hit / fail judgment result.

When the execution of the hit / fail judgment process is completed, the process proceeds to the symbol determination process of the special figure. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special drawing determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure pre-determination table described above. In the symbol determination process of this special figure, when the hit / fail determination result is "big hit", the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of big hit belongs to which random number range in the special figure determination table. The special figure determination result is determined to be one of "special figure A" to "special figure F". In addition, when the hit / fail determination result is "small hit", the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of small hit belongs. Determined to be "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H". Further, when the result of determining whether or not the result is "missing", the result of determining the special figure is set to "special" based on which random number range in the table for determining the special figure belongs. It is decided to be "Fig. I" or "Special figure J". The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the symbol determination process of the special symbol corresponds to an example of the symbol determination means.

Following the symbol determination process of the special figure, the variation display period in the variation stop display of the special figure is determined in the variation time determination process. In this fluctuation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is acquired from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the random number for determining the timer number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure fluctuation, but it may be the timing for acquiring the start information. The timer number determination table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special figure display device 214 or the first special figure display device 212 starts to change the symbol to when the stop symbol indicating the result of the hit / miss judgment is displayed, that is, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner. Although it represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time), it may be the fluctuation table time period of the decorative symbol.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 2 seconds, which is a super-shortened special figure fluctuation time, and timer 2 is that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 5 seconds, which is a shortened special figure fluctuation time. Represents to be. It should be noted that determining the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure variation. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In the timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 3 has no reach.

The timer 4 indicates that the special symbol variation stop period is 12 seconds, and when the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the normal reach, a decorative symbol whose two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are the same is generally stopped and displayed (strictly speaking, temporarily stopped) (first stop and second stop are performed). ), The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is in a variable display state, that is, the variable display symbol display area is a specific symbol (stop-displayed symbol display area). It is a state in which a predetermined combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed when the stop display (third stop or final stop) is displayed. The timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, the timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, super reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Super reach is a normal reach with a special variation display added to improve the effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, a special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The special variation includes a special multi-line reach, a full rotation reach, a special full rotation reach, and the like, and when the timer 8 is determined, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. To. The probability that the timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that another timer is selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to the premier reach.

The term "reach" simply means a variation pattern of a decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

This reach is performed after the hit / fail judgment is performed so that the result of the hit / miss judgment (main lottery) in the special figure-related processing becomes a specific hit / fail judgment result (a predetermined result with a high advantage of the player). It is a notice effect that notifies the player in advance before notifying the result of the hit / miss judgment, and whether or not to perform the reach is determined after the hit / miss judgment is made.

In the fluctuation time determination process here, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired random number for determining the timer number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of holds, the number of holds in the current special figure 2 can be used in addition to the random number for determining the timer number. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

The timer number representing the special figure fluctuation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

Before the special figure lottery-related process is executed (for example, the above-mentioned winning determination process S209), the special figure pre-determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers that are one or a plurality of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected based on or by a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and here, the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table. In determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for determining the timer number), or the timer number may be uniquely determined even if the lottery is not performed. .. Further, the timer selection table may be selected in this special figure lottery-related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may select the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the timer selection table.

When the fluctuation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special figure 2 related lottery process ends.

Subsequently, in the special figure-related processing, the special figure 1-related lottery process is performed. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process of replacing "special figure 2" with "special figure 1" in the content explained in the special figure 2 related lottery process described above, the explanation thereof is described. Omit.

With the above, the special figure-related processing (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 6B is completed, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission processing (step S215). In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are commands. Types (for example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, number of winning rounds specification command, large winning opening opening command, large winning opening closing command, power recovery command, RAM The command type can be specified, such as a clear command, a special figure hold increase command, and a normal figure hold increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol change start command, the command data includes information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control status (information indicating the setting status of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and information indicating the timer number. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the information indicating the special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), the information indicating the control state, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect start command and the end effect start command. , Information indicating the control state, etc., and in the case of a command for specifying the number of hit rounds, information indicating the control state, the number of hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 230 has been won, whether or not the second special figure start port 232 has been won, and whether or not the central variable winning port 234 has been won. Includes the presence or absence of a prize, the presence or absence of a prize in the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

Further, in the above-mentioned general command rotation start setting transmission process, the information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), the information indicating the control state, the information indicating the timer number, and the hold, which are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being played is set. In the above-mentioned general command rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 are set in the command data. In the above-mentioned general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command referred to here corresponds to the jackpot game start command. In the above-mentioned general command end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the control state, the number of reserved first special figure variable games or the number of second special figure variable games, and the like are set. Upon receiving the end effect start command, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the end effect control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Upon receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 displays an image notifying the player that the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the jackpot game is finished, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. The jackpot game ends. The end effect start command referred to here corresponds to the jackpot game end command. In the above-mentioned general command large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set as the command data of the large winning opening opening command. .. In the above-mentioned general command large winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the current number of rounds stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, and the reserved first special figure variable game are used as the command data of the large winning opening closing command. Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games and the like is set.

Further, in this step S215, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, the special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, and the control state. Information representing the above, and information representing the stop symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance (special figure preliminary judgment result) are set.

Further, in this step S215, the general command general command hold increase process is also performed. In this general command hold increase process, information indicating the control status is set in the command data of the hold increase command. Further, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as a command related to the normal map, a normal map fluctuation start command indicating that the fluctuation display of the normal map has started is also transmitted. From the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, a command to stop the fluctuation of the normal figure indicating that the fluctuation display of the normal figure has stopped (or) and a pair of blade members 2321 have started (to) open. It is also possible to send an electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until the end of all the winning rounds based on the number of winning rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

Further, in this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, and the bit 7 is the strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that the data is set), and the bit 6 is the power-on information. (If it is on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after the power is turned on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are after encryption processing. The number of withdrawal requests is shown.

Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error, and the front frame door is opened. When an error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, device information indicating the presence / absence of the front frame door opening error or the presence / absence of the lower plate full tank error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special drawing start port 232, the central variable winning opening 234, and the right variable winning opening 235, or via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

When the device monitoring process in step S219 is completed, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A, but before the return, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is returned to the original register. Set or set interrupt permission. Also, before returning, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on, and if the low voltage signal is on (when it detects that the power supply is cut off), it returns to the state at the time of power failure when the power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for this purpose is saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, power cut processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed, and then the main control unit main processing is restored. May be good.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization process, the input / output port is initialized, the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized, and the like.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. The effect involving the operating means, which will be described below, is also controlled by this effect control process. That is, when a symbol variation start command including information on the symbol variation time is received, whether or not to execute an effect involving the operation means according to the length of the variation time is determined in this effect control process. When it is determined by the lottery process and executed, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. Image display control in each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is executed in step S313 according to the effect data read out here, and for the movable means control, the effect read out here by the second sub-control unit 500. A control command according to the data is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 is pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. When the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected as a result of the determination here, a process of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or pressing the chance button 136. When the operation is valid, a process of preparing the effect data corresponding to the operation reception effect described later is performed.

In step S313, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S319, if there is an operation command (movement command or rotation command) to the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the effect data read in step S309, this The command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, if there is a control command (for example, a control command related to various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, , Set to output this control command, and return to step S303. If a door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the door opening command is set to be output to the second sub control unit in step S321.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with the timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in a cycle.

In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 8A. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, the effect random value value is updated, and the like.

Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S601, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Processing of the second sub control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S701 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in S701. In this initialization process, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S709, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S713, the movable means control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable means control process here, from the first sub-control unit 400, various movable means (chance button 136 capable of executing forward / backward operation, transparent unit 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction, and Yatsushiro accessory that can move up and down). When a control command related to 224Fa, a general character 224Fb, and a family crest character 224E that can move up and down is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E. Control each operation.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute with.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 8A. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Subsequently, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the button effect step by step. In FIG. 9, time elapses in the order of the alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to the following figures unless otherwise specified). In addition, the time interval between the alphabet etc. written in parentheses and the alphabet etc. written in parentheses next may be equal intervals or different intervals in one figure. , Equal intervals and different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the following figures).

In FIG. 9, of the three decorative symbol display devices 208208L to N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, a variable icon display area 208e is provided in the central portion of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 208f is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 208e. Is provided. A frame-shaped image showing the position of the variable icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the variable icon display area 208e. This frame-shaped image is always displayed, but when the display conditions are satisfied (for example, when the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, or when it is displayed in the opposite direction, a reach effect is performed. It may be displayed only when it is not displayed. It should be noted that only one of the variable icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

One or more hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. Four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9A. All of these four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed as black circles, and the display of the white circles by the dotted lines indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure or the start of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure is suspended, and the number of hold icons displayed is basically that of the special figure variation game. It is the same number as the number on hold. However, before and after the hold digestion, there may be a timing when the display number of the hold icon does not represent the hold number. The hold icon includes a hold icon of special figure 1 and a hold icon of special figure 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to be a display area for each of both icons. In addition, the hold icon can give a pre-reading notice as to whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. Animations related to the hold icon include, for example, an increase animation that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, and the hold rank changes due to the previous hold being exhausted, and the hold is held. The movement animation executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position next to the left), the change animation executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc., the hold is digested. Erase animation executed when the hold icon is deleted, and save animation executed when the hold icon of the special figure on the non-priority side is saved when the hold of the special figure on the priority side increases in the priority variable machine. And so on. In addition to the above animation, a standby animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the above animation during execution (for example, a period during which there is no increase / decrease in hold or change in the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the above animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repetitive animation of a fixed length animation) can be given as an example. In addition, each animation of increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting of the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

One variable icon can be displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. A star-shaped variable icon c is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9B. The variable icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the variable icon display area 208e, the moving icon is called a variable icon, or the variable icon is expressed as moving. You may. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. In addition, the variable icon may consist of a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice of whether or not the change is correct (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing earlier than the timing at which the result of the change is notified, the same timing, or a later timing.

Animations related to both the hold icon and the variable icon include the hold icon with the oldest start winning timing displayed in the hold icon display area 208f, and the variable icon display area 208e when the hold is exhausted. There are a movement animation that moves the icon as a variable icon and a change animation that changes the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and performed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variable icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

Animations related to the variable icon include a standby animation executed during the execution of the special figure variable game, an erase animation executed when the variable icon is deleted after the special figure variable game ends, and a variable icon. There is a change animation and the like that are executed when the display mode of is changed in the middle. These animations may be combined with each other and performed at the same time. In addition, the standby animation of the variable icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the moving animation or the changing animation.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed on the upper right. The fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round display, and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 is a quadrangular display. In each of the fourth symbols 2081, 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the jackpot symbol is in the stop display (confirmed display), and white indicates that the lost symbol is in the stop display (confirmed display). Represents that. These fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 are also a kind of decorative symbols.

Further, in FIG. 9, in addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first special symbol hold lamp 218, and the second special symbol hold lamp 220 are shown. It is shown.

In addition, in FIG. 9, a chance button 136 is also shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 has a white display indicating the white lighting state or the extinguishing state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and the hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Indicates a red lighting state. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which the chance button 136 is urged to be pressed. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. Further, although "lighting" is used here, it may be "blinking" (hereinafter, the same applies).

The background image of the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 is a background image of the castle town. When the background image is a background image of a castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is in the castle town mode among a plurality of types of production modes prepared. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

In FIG. 9A, both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (confirmed display) the lost stop symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a disjointed pattern. A certain "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1" is displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed in white while stopped. Four of the first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9A are lit, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays four black circle hold icons, which are the hold displays of the special figure 1. The variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

In FIG. 9B, the first special symbol display device 212 has started the variable display of the special symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has also started the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are continuously updated (variable display) in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9B are lit, and there are three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3) in the hold icon display area 208f in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ) Is displayed, and the star-shaped variable icon c is displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. Of the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in the figure (a), the hold icon h1 having the earliest start winning timing becomes a variable icon, and the variable icon is displayed from the hold icon display area 208f. This is the result of moving to the area 208e. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to the changing display (gray).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9C, the reach effect is started. The variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced to the left corner and is in the reach state by the number 3. ..

In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is a production that predicts the development to super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that predicts the type of super reach that is developing. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9D, in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 and an operation of the chance button 136 are performed. The arrow display 136b and the character display "press" as a promotion display for prompting (press), and the remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding the period (operation valid period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid. Are displayed as a set of three. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 9 (d) starts to light in red to encourage pressing.

In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a short time (see FIG. 9 (f)). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which had been lit in red until then, is switched to lit in white or turned off.

When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a cut-in notice suggesting whether or not it is likely to develop into super reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (g), the display "CHANGE" interrupts the background image so as to overlap, and then develops into Super Reach A as shown in FIG. 9 (h). are doing. The characters "Super Reach A" are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (h), indicating that the production of Super Reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the production display of Super Reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Further, when the effect display of Super Reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and become invisible. On the other hand, the frame-shaped image showing the positions of the fourth symbol 2081, 2082, the variable icon c, and the variable icon display area 208e continues to be displayed. The fourth symbol 2081, 2082, the variable icon c, and the frame-shaped image may also be erased to make them invisible. Super Reach A is not a super reach with a confirmed jackpot, and just because it has evolved into Super Reach A does not mean that it will be a jackpot. In addition, even if a display called "CHANGE" that is expected to develop into a super reach is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. In some cases. Further, the display "CHANGE" shown in FIG. 9 (g) may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even if the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (g') showing another example following from FIG. 9 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed as "sorry", and then "sorry" is displayed. As shown in the figure (h'), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not develop into a super reach, and the decorative symbols of "decoration 3"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" are lost. The combination is displayed as stopped. Even if the message "Sorry" is displayed, it may be a big hit due to the reverse effect.

The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation valid period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state in which the execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated (operation valid state). However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, and control may be performed to accept only the acceptance period.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of executing an advance / retreat operation and a transmission unit 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 10A shows that the chance button 136 and the transmissive portion 191 are in their respective initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmission portion 191 is also in a state of being substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinking. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound can be output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be able to vibrate only at the pushed position.

FIG. 10B shows a state in which the transmission portion 191 rotates about a drive shaft (not shown) provided at the lower part from the initial position and tilts forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmission unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmitting portion 191 may also vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in the state of being inclined forward as shown in FIG. 10B, it is possible to vibrate in the front-rear direction or the lateral direction. Further, the transmitting portion 191 may rotate in small steps in the front-rear direction as a strong vibration having a large vibration width. Even when the transmissive unit 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmissive unit 190 can be lit or blinking, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or a directing sound. The state (second state) of the transparent portion 191 shown in FIG. 10B is closer to the player than the state at the initial position (first state) shown in FIG. 10A. The player can operate the transparent portion 191 by manually pushing it toward the initial position, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of the operating means. Even when the transmissive unit 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED built in the transmissive unit 190 lights up or blinks, and a sound effect or a directing sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission unit 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

FIG. 10 (c) shows how the chance button 136 has begun to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound is output from the speaker 120. Further, FIG. 3D shows how the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can also be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in multiple stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and vibrates in the lateral direction or the vertical direction in the advanced (protruded) state. At this time as well, the chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound can be output from the speaker 120. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights up or blinks, and a sound effect or a directing sound is output from the speaker 120. Further, the chance button 136 may be one that automatically retreats toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

The vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission unit 191 may be functions that are exhibited only in a certain set state. For example, the function may be expressed by the setting by the effect customization function by the player or the setting of the switch on the game clerk side. That is, depending on the set state, it may not vibrate at all, or it may vibrate only partially.

FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving operating means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

Here, as the operating means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 10 will be referred to as the operating means A, and the transparent portion 191 will be described as the operating means B. Comparing the operating means A and the operating means B here, the operating means B is an operating means larger than the operating means A (an operating means having a large operating surface), and the operating means A can be operated even at the initial position, but the operation is performed. There is a difference that the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, but the operating means B and the operating means A may be reversed, and both may be operating means of the same size, or the initial position may be the same. It may be an operating means that can be operated together, or it may be an operating means that cannot be operated together. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of types of examples of the operation means listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be good.

Further, the operating means described as the transparent unit 191 in the following description can be replaced with another operating means such as a second chance button provided separately from the chance button 136.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transparent unit 191) is a big hit than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Expectations are high. Further, although both functions A are provided, function B is provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at the operating position and a function of shining. Examples of the function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating even at the initial position. As shown in FIG. 11A, the operating means B is inferior in the number of functions to the operating means A.

However, as shown in FIG. 11B, both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. An example of the function C is a function capable of performing strong vibration.

The number of functions may be the same in the operating means A and the operating means B.

FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is "liquid crystal", the operation data in the Yashiro accessory 224Fa and the general accessory 224Fb and the family crest accessory 224E is "movable means", and the audio output data from the speaker 120 is "movable means". "Sound", the frame lamp 122, the LED, and the light emission data of various built-in lamps are displayed as "LED", and the vibration data of the operating means A is displayed as "vibe". “...” in the figure indicates omission of data. Production No. The data of "vibe" in 1 is "E0", and this "E0" indicates that it does not vibrate. Production No. The data of the "vibrator" in 2 is "E1", and this "E1" indicates that the operating means A is vibrated before the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. Each of the effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable means", "sound", and "LED" in 2 becomes the effect data after the operation of the operation means A, and the operation means A vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, according to each of these effect data, the effect after the operation is started. Production No. The data of "vibe" in 3 is "E2", and this "E2" indicates that the operating means A is vibrated after the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. Each of the effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable means", "sound", and "LED" in 3 becomes the effect data after the operation of the operation means A. Production No. 2 data and production No. The data of 3 may be called even when the operating means B (transparent unit 191) is operated. This is because each effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable means", "sound", and "LED" can be used as the effect data after the operation of the operation means B. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the effect No. 2 data or production No. The effect according to each effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable means", "sound", and "LED" in the data of 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data of "E1" or "E2". That is, the production No. The data of 2 includes data (E1) that vibrates the operating means A before the operation of the operating means A, and other data such as "liquid crystal" is data after the operation of the operating means A, but the operating means B By the operation of, the production No. When reading the data of 2, the data of the "vibe" is also executed after the operation of the operation means B in accordance with other data such as the "liquid crystal". In addition, the production No. Data of 2 and production No. When the data of "liquid crystal" is different from the data of 3 at least as "A1" and "A2", and the data of "liquid crystal" of "A1" is used after the operation means B is operated. Is the production No. Not the data of No. 3, but the production No. It is necessary to read the data of 2.

The effect data related to the operation means B may also be called when the operation means A is operated, and after the operation means A is operated, the "liquid crystal", the "movable means", and the effect data related to the operation means B The effect according to each effect data of "sound" and "LED" is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of "vibe". However, the effect data related to the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an execution timing relating to an effect involving the operation means A and an effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12, time elapses from the left to the right of the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c), the “operation means B-related effect” started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transparent unit 191), and the operation means B operates in order from the top. When the operation means B related effect is started, the "operation means B operation enabled state", the "operation means B operation" indicating that the operation means B has been operated, and the operation means A (chance button 136) "Operation means A-related effect" started in response to the operation, "operation means A operation enabled state" in which the operation means A-related effect is started when the operation means A is operated, and the operation means A is operated The "operation means A operation" indicating that is shown. The "operation means B-related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and also includes an effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. Further, the "operation means A-related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and also includes an effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. However, the "operation means A-related effect" may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. Note that the notification prompting the operation of the operation means B may or may not be performed during the "operation means B operation valid state", and the operation may be performed even during the "operation means A operation valid state". A notification prompting the operation of the means A (operation promotion notification) may or may not be performed. If these notifications are performed, the player can know that the operation is in the valid state, but if not, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the operation means B was not operated while the operation means B operation was enabled, but the operation means B-related effect was started at the same time as the end of the operation means B operation enable state. As described above, the "operation means B-related effect" may be started even if the operation means B is not operated. The "operation means B-related effect" may be an effect that is always started even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the content of the "operation means B-related effect" may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect is started at the same time as the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the "operation means A operation valid state" and without operating the operation means A. .. As described above, the "operation means A-related effect" may also be started even if the operation means A is not operated. The "operation means A-related effect" may also be an effect that is always started even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the content of the "operation means A-related effect" may be different depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Start at the same time and end at the same time.

In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when the operation means B is operated and the operation means B is operated while the operation means B operation is enabled, the operation means B related effect is executed from the operation means B operation enable state. Switch. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A-related production starts at the same time as the operation means B-related production starts without going through the "operation means A operation valid state" and without operating the operation means A. Has been done. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Start at the same time and end at the same time.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the operation means B is operated and the operation means B is operated while the operation means B operation is enabled, the operation means B related effect is executed from the operation means B operation enable state. Switch. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A-related production starts at the same time as the operation means B-related production starts without going through the "operation means A operation valid state" and without operating the operation means A. Has been done. In the example shown in FIG. 12 (c), the execution period of the operation means B-related effect is longer than the execution period of the operation means A-related effect. The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but the vibration of the operating means A ends first, and after the vibration of the operating means A ends, the vibration of the operating means B ends.

The start time may be the same, and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B-related effect. Alternatively, the start time is different, the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, the operation means A-related effect ends first, and then the operation means B-related effect ends. You may. On the contrary, even if the operation means A-related effect starts first, then the operation means B-related effect starts, the operation means B-related effect ends first, and then the operation means A-related effect ends. Good. Further, the end time may be the same, the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, and the operation means B-related effect and the operation means A-related effect end together. On the contrary, the operation means A-related effect may start first, then the operation means B-related effect may start, and the operation means A-related effect and the operation means B-related effect may end together. ..

Further, when the operation means B-related effect is executed without operating the operation means B as described with reference to FIG. 12A, for example, the operation means B-related effect is effective for the operation means B operation. In the mode in which the operation means is executed from the start of the state until the first time elapses, the operation means B may be operated at an earlier stage so that the execution time of the operation means B-related effect becomes longer. become able to.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operating means. The arrows in each of FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (c) represent the vibration period of the operating means A.

The example shown in FIG. 13A is an example during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and when the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transparent unit 191) is being performed, the operation is performed. The vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, and the judge effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. The judge production here is a judge production for a big hit, and corresponds to an example of the first production. This first effect is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Further, the first effect is not a notice effect regarding the operation means A (chance button 136). When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the shaking fluctuation display. Eventually, the shaking fluctuation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13A, if the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the entire decorative symbol has already been determined, so that the vibration fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols is displayed. The execution period of the operation means A is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the execution period of the shortened shaking fluctuation display.

As shown in FIG. 13A, before the notification of the result related to the profit of the player such as the confirmation display, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is terminated so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result related to the profit. I have to.

The example shown in FIG. 13B is an example during the big hit game, and when the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and the judge effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. The judge in the judge production here is a judge who is linked to whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L notifies that the specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) is aimed at in the next round. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of this notification. Eventually, the next round will start, and it will be notified again that the specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) is aimed at.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13B, if the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum permissible time for one round has already been determined, so that a specific winning opening is aimed at in the next round. The execution period for notifying the fact is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened execution period for the notification.

As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the rounds that should be aimed at the specific winning opening are limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, it will shift to the probabilistic state after the big hit game is over. For this reason, the round that should aim at the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the start of the round that leads to the profit of the player, the production such as the vibration of the operation means A is finished, and the player I am trying to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

Further, the example shown in FIG. 13A and the example shown in FIG. 13B are examples in which the vibration period of the operating means A does not change and is constant even if the operating timing of the operating means B changes.

The example shown in FIG. 13C is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the operation means B operates while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transparent unit 191) is being performed. Then, the vibration of the operating means A (chance button 136) is started, and the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. The vibration of the operating means A continues until the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol ends, and at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol ends, the vibration of the operating means A also ends. Then, the next pseudo-variation display is started, the number of pseudo-reams becomes the nth time, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in this nth pseudo-variation display.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (c), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. , The vibration of the operating means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the shortened pseudo-continuous symbol ends.

In the example shown in FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation means B changes, the vibration period of the operation means A also changes.

In summary, including the above description, the operating means A can vibrate at least during the period when the judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is executed. Further, the operating means A may be vibrable during at least a part of the period during which the judge effect corresponding to one example of the first effect is being executed. For example, the vibration may end at the same time as the end of the judge effect, the vibration may continue even after the end of the judge effect, or the vibration may end before the end of the judge effect. Further, the vibration period during which the operating means A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on the presence or absence of operation of the operating means B and the operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 13D is an example in which the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operating means A. The final judge effect is a judge who decides whether or not a big hit will occur in the variable display during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or a judge who indicates the end of the reach effect (the final stage reach effect such as strong SP reach). There is. In this upper example,
The period during which the operating means A vibrates is the period during which the operation of the operating means A is treated as valid, and when the operating means A is operated, the vibration ends and the final judge effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operating means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes long, and the period during which the operating means A vibrates becomes long. Further, even if the operating means A is not operated, the final judge effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a certain period length.

On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 13D, the final judge effect is started according to the operation of the operating means B, and the vibration of the operating means A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are the same, and the period length between the two becomes zero. However, the period during which the operating means A is vibrating can be secured for a certain period of time. The final judge effect here also corresponds to an example of the first effect, and is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136), and is not a notice effect regarding the operation means A (chance button 136).

In addition, while the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operating means B, the vibration of the operating means A is upward when it is started by operating the operating means A after the operation of the operating means B. If the operation of the operating means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judge effect and the vibration start timing of the operating means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operating means A vibrates becomes longer.

Next, the meter effect will be described.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of meter production step by step.

In FIG. 14 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown in the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is shown on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shown on the right side.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E, which was not shown in FIG. 3, is shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 14 (1) corresponds to the initial position. Regarding the front-back relationship (positional relationship in the depth direction) between the family crest accessory 224E and the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the family crest accessory 224E is on the front side and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the most. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged between the family crest accessory 224E and the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the rear side.

Not shown in FIG. 14, the variable display symbol (special figure) executed by the first special figure display device 212 (see FIG. 1 etc.) and the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 1 etc.) are executed. The variable display symbol (special symbol) corresponds to the first symbol. Further, the variable display symbol (general diagram) executed by the non-illustrated general diagram display device 210 (see FIG. 1 and the like) corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of the variable display executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third decorative symbol pd3. That is, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 5B, which is variablely displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is an effect symbol that represents the first symbol (not shown) with enhanced decoration. The display of the first symbol is controlled by the main control unit 300, and the display of the third symbol pd3 is controlled by the sub control units 400 and 500. As described above, the sub-control units 400 and 500 side execute the timer interrupt process at predetermined intervals. Therefore, between the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag occurs by a predetermined cycle of the timer interrupt processing on the sub-control unit 400,500 side, but when the first symbol starts the variable display, the third symbol The symbol pd3 also starts the variable display, and when the first symbol becomes the stop display, the third symbol pd3 also becomes the stop display. Hereinafter, the description will be made using the third symbol pd3 or based on the third symbol pd3, but the same applies even if the third symbol pd3 is replaced with the first symbol.

Further, in FIG. 14, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the general accessory 224Fb are shown above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is shown on the right side of the shogun's character 224F. The fourth symbol pd4 has a square display and a circle display, the square display corresponds to the special figure 1, and the circle display corresponds to the special figure 2. Regardless of whether it is a square display or a circle display, the gray display indicates that the loss stop symbol is being displayed on the special figure display device (212, 214), and the black display indicates that the special figure display device is displaying. (212, 214) indicates that the jackpot stop symbol is being displayed, and the white display indicates that the special symbol display device (212, 214) is displaying the symbol variation. The fourth symbol pd4 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208M. It may be displayed on the device 208N, or may be displayed on other display means or dedicated display means. It should be noted that the lighting of the LED lamp or the like on the board may be used to distinguish between the variable display and the stop display. Further, a mini-decorative symbol in which the third symbol pd3 is reduced and displayed is shown in the upper portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, and this mini-decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The display mode of the fifth symbol pd5 may be different from that of the third symbol pd3, as long as it is smaller than the size of the third symbol pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. Good. The fifth symbol pd5 also performs variable display and stop display, and like the fourth symbol pd4, has a role of clearly indicating the variable display and the stop display of the third symbol pd3. Therefore, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. A plurality of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed. The third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 all correspond to decorative symbols in a broad sense.

The state shown in FIG. 14 (1) is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost in both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is a display of a gray square and a display of a gray circle, and both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 indicate that the stop display is in progress.

Further, the hold frame UI is shown in the effect display area 208d of the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 14 (1). This hold frame UI can be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area, and can also be seen as a user interface that provides various information to the player. Further, in the hold frame UI, a variable icon display area is arranged in the center, a hold icon display area is arranged on the left side thereof, and an effect display area is arranged on the right side thereof. In the hold icon display area, four stages hs1 to hs4 corresponding to the maximum number of hold balls of special figure 1 or special figure 2 are prepared, and one hold icon is displayed for each stage. It should be noted that a stage corresponding to a total number (for example, eight) of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 may be prepared. In the variable icon display area, stages cs that are higher and larger than the four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the hold icon display area are prepared, and the variable icons are displayed on the stage cs. Further, the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 14 (1) is provided with a base icon UIb extending to the left and right with a vertical stripe pattern, and four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the hold icon display area, and The stage cs prepared in the variable icon display area can also be seen as a stage icon displayed so as to overlap the base icon UIb from the front side. Further, the tutorial display ts is displayed in the effect display area shown in FIG. 14 (1). This tutorial display ts can also be seen as a tutorial icon that overlaps the base icon UIb from the front side.

One hold icon h1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 14 (1), and it is notified that the number of holds of the current special figure is one. That is, the hold icons are displayed for the number of hold balls in the special figure, and the older the winning timing, the closer to the center (right side). The first hold hold icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 14 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a red display mode which is a look-ahead notice display mode. In addition to the white display mode, which is the default display mode, various display modes are prepared for the hold icon, and for each display mode, the expected degree of jackpot (reliability) in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold. ). However, even if the display mode has a high expectation of a big hit, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold does not always result in a big hit, and it may be lost. That is, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the easier it is that the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the first symbol. In addition, after the hold icon starts to be displayed in the look-ahead notice mode or starts to be displayed in the default display mode, the timing of changing to the look-ahead notice mode is at the start, change, stop, and hold of the look-ahead target. The time of winning is given.

Further, on the stage cs of the variable icon display area shown in FIG. 14 (1), the variable icon c in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is displayed. In FIG. 14 (1), as described above, both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are in the stop display, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also in the stop display, but in FIG. 14 (1), the stop display is in progress. It is the state immediately after becoming, and the variable icon c does not disappear and still remains. In FIG. 14 (2), the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon c disappears.

Further, a numerical display hn of the number of holds is displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 14 (1). The numerical display hn of the number of holdings here indicates that the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 is "1" and the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 is "0". Further, a mini character display (hereinafter, referred to as "mini character") is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This mini character is a display (so-called constant display) that is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol) is in variable display or stopped display, and is displayed over a plurality of times in the variable display of the third symbol pd3. To. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the display of the character cd of the main character, the lord, is displayed on the display stage ss. The posture of the character cd of the lord shown in FIG. 14 (1) is the initial posture.

Further, an information display unit ST1 is provided at the lower part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 14 (1). In the example shown in FIG. 14, the name of the background stage is displayed on the information display unit ST1. Here, it is a castle town stage, and "castle town" is displayed on the information display unit ST1, and the townscape of the castle town is commonly displayed on the background of the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to N. In the information display unit ST1, the effect mode may be displayed, the current control state (for example, during probabilistic change) may be displayed, the pre-reading notice may be displayed, and the currently performed symbol may be displayed. A notice (normal notice) for the variable display may be displayed.

Further, in FIG. 14 (1), the speaker 120 is shown in the left corner, and the chance button 136 (corresponding to the first operating means) is also shown in the lower left corner. A second chance button 137 (corresponding to the second operating means) is also shown on the right side of the chance button 136. The second chance button 137 may be an OK button 181b of the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1, or may be an operation means newly provided separately from the chance button 136.

The display position, size, and number of displays of the various displays described with reference to FIG. 14 are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when the movable means such as the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb overlap the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol from the beginning. 5 A plurality of symbols pd5 may be displayed, or the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

As shown in FIG. 14 (2), after the stop symbol is confirmed and the variable icon c disappears, in FIG. 14 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 14 (2) is shown. The symbol variation display based on the hold of is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 14 (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and the variable display is also started in the fifth symbol pd5. It should be noted that the third symbol pd3 is a low-speed fluctuation because the fluctuation display has just started. The thick, short white arrows represent low-speed fluctuations (the same applies hereinafter). During low-speed fluctuation, it may be possible to recognize the fluctuating symbol. Further, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 14 (2) moves to the stage cs of the variable icon display area, and the variable icon c in the red display mode is displayed on the stage cs. Here, the display mode (red) of the icon when it was a hold icon up to that point and the display mode (red) of the icon after it became a variable icon match. The display mode of the variation icon represents the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot in the symbol variation display being displayed. That is, the notice is usually executed depending on the display mode of the variable icon. Even if the display mode has a high expectation of a big hit, it is not always a big hit in the symbol variation display being displayed, and it may be lost. In FIG. 14 (3), the hold icon disappears, and the numerical display hn of the number of holds displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side becomes “0” for both special figures 1 and 2. Further, in the fourth symbol pd4 shown in FIG. 14 (3), the display of the square corresponding to the special figure 1 is changed from gray to white, indicating that the variable display of the special figure 1 is in progress. In FIG. 14 (3) when the symbol variation display is started, there is no change in the display content of the tutorial display ts.

The third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 14 (4) fluctuates at high speed. The thin, long white arrows represent high-speed fluctuations (the same applies hereinafter). With high-speed fluctuations, it becomes difficult to recognize the fluctuating symbols. In FIG. 14 (4), a meter display appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display position of the meter display is above the third symbol pd3, but the display position is not limited to this position. Further, the display size of the meter display is larger than the hold icon and larger than the variable icon c, but the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter display is when the third symbol pd3 changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon c is completed, and when a prize is awarded to the special symbol start port (when the hold increases). At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-reading notice at the time of winning), at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of the first stop of the third symbol pd3, at the time of temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo continuous production Alternatively, it is possible to enumerate at the time of continuation (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, and the like. That is, the appearance timing of the meter display may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. When the meter display appears, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed to the display content related to the meter display. In the meter display shown in FIG. 14 (4), the meter frame mf is white, and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. This white meter display MW corresponds to an example of the first meter display. Further, the meter display includes an increase type, a decrease type, and an increase / decrease type. The meter display in the example shown in FIG. 14 is an increasing type, has five scales, and fills up at the sixth stage. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 14 (4) has started to be displayed in an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0). This empty state corresponds to an example of the first state.

In FIG. 14 (5), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 14 (6), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here, "" Decoration 7 ") becomes recognizable. Further, in FIG. 14 (6), the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 7 (7) following FIG. 14 (6), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and the shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, the meter rise item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This meter rising item UpI corresponds to the first mini item or the first mini icon (hereinafter, the same applies), and the display position of this meter rising item UpI is a decorative pattern that sways (temporarily stops). The position overlaps from the front side, but the display position is not limited to this position. Further, the display size of the meter rising item UpI is smaller than the decorative symbol that is swaying (temporarily stopped), but the display size is not limited to this size. Further, the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI is, in addition to the timing of the first stop, when the third symbol pd3 changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon c is completed, and to the special symbol start port. At the time of winning (when the hold increases), at the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-reading notice at the time of winning), at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo continuous production, or continuation Time (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state, at the start of the super reach, during the super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. The meter raising item UpI is an item for raising the meter on the meter display. The meter rise item UpI shown in FIG. 14 (7) is white, but as will be described later, a plurality of types of meter rise item UpI are prepared, and the meter rise rate differs depending on the type.

In FIG. 14 (8), the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI displayed at the position overlapping from the front side with the decorative pattern that is shaking (temporarily stopped) is displayed on the white meter display MW. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 14 (9), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here, “decoration 6”) becomes recognizable. In addition, the meter rise item UpI has disappeared, and the meter of the white meter display MW has risen (increased) by one scale. The color of the meter itself that increases or decreases is different from the meter frame mf (blue in this case), but it may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which this meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter increases, is the timing of the second stop, when the third symbol pd3 changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon c is completed, and the special figure. At the time of winning the start port (when the hold increases), at the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-reading notice at the time of winning), when a certain production succeeds, the provisional third symbol pd3 in the pseudo continuous production It is possible to enumerate when stopped or continued (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, and the like. That is, the timing of meter increase may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

In FIG. 14 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops and starts shaking fluctuation (second stop), and the second meter rising item UpI appears. The display position of the second meter rising item UpI is a position that overlaps from the front side with the right symbol that has started the shaking fluctuation (temporary stop). In FIG. 14 (11), the movement animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 14 (12), the meter rise item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW rises (increases) by one scale again. With this, the meter of the white meter display MW has risen to the second scale.

In FIG. 14 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and the middle symbol becomes recognizable. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 14 (14), the pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 14 (15), the cut-in display of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In the cut-in display here, the main character, the lord, appears and the line "Still more" is displayed, which encourages the possibility that re-variation will start. In FIG. 14 (16), the cut-in display disappears, and the state in which the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”-“decoration 6”) is temporarily stopped is displayed again and is temporarily stopped. The character display of "x2", which is the number of continuations, is displayed so that a part of the symbol on the left overlaps. In FIG. 14 (17), the re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start high-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 14 (18), the character display of “x2”, which is the continuation number display, is reduced and displayed in the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 14 step by step.

In FIG. 15 (19) following from FIG. 14 (18), while the three symbols of the third symbol pd3 continue to fluctuate at high speed, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side starts a notice that a mini item will appear. .. That is, the treasure box icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 15 (20), the closed treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the information display unit ST1. This treasure chest icon I1 becomes a notice icon for the appearance of mini items. In FIG. 15 (21), the icon I1 of the treasure box opens, and the meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box. Here, a white meter rising item UpI has appeared.

In addition, the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 15 (20) disappears without opening and remains closed, or nothing appears even if it is opened, or an item different from the meter rising item UpI (for example, a question mark item). Items marked with or x, items with unfortunate characters, etc.) may appear. That is, even if the treasure box icon I1 is displayed, it may be a false notice as a notice that the mini item will appear.

Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI appearing on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 18 (22), the moving meter raising item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it seems that the left half of the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, a part of the meter rising item UpI cannot be seen because the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is obstructed.

In FIG. 15 (23), the meter rising item UpI reaches the white meter display MW and is displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 15 (24), the meter rise item UpI disappears, the meter of the white meter display MW is further raised by one scale, and the white meter display MW is raised to three scales.

When the meter rise item UpI is displayed, the meter may rise, but the meter may not rise in some cases. For example, the meter rise item UpI may disappear without reaching the meter display, or the meter may not rise even if it reaches the meter display.

In FIG. 15 (25), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. 15 (26), the reach state is entered. That is, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the shaking fluctuation is started. The “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 15 (26). In FIG. 15 (27), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slower, and in the following FIG. The right symbol, which has moved to the upper left corner of the 208L and has also fluctuated, moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 15 (29), it has evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the background screen of the castle town is changed to the swordsman visit screen. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N still display the background screen of the castle town, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N still displays the display of the character cd of the lord on the display stage ss. The information display unit ST1 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. However, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the treasure box icon I1 has disappeared.

In addition, when it develops into a super reach production, the hold frame UI disappears, and the tutorial display ts also disappears. In addition, the hold icon did not remain here, but if the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. However, only the fluctuation icon c corresponding to the symbol fluctuation currently being performed is continuously displayed. However, the variable icon c may also disappear. Alternatively, if the hold icon remains, the display of the hold icon may continue. Further, the display of the tutorial display ts may be continued, and the display of the hold frame UI may be continued.

In FIG. 15 (30), all the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are switched to the background of the wilderness, the display of the information display unit ST1 disappears from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display is displayed. The display of the display stage ss and the character cd of the lord disappears from the device 208N. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the numerical display hn of the number of pending numbers is still displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (30), and the duel scene between the two is started. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top here.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (31), the white meter display MW is enlarged and displayed, and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are hidden by the enlarged white meter display MW. The enlarged white meter display MW shown in FIG. 15 (31) is a state in which the meters are accumulated up to three scales (corresponding to an example of the second state). The word "power-up" is also displayed to warn that the main character, the lord, will power up as much as the meters are accumulated. From FIG. 15 (32) to FIG. 15 (33), the meter is used, the white meter display MW decreases, and in FIG. 15 (33), the state becomes 0 (corresponding to an example of the first state). I'm back. In FIG. 15 (34), the white meter display MW that has been enlarged and returned to the 0 state disappears, and a green aura icon OI1 is added behind the character of the main character, the lord. The color of the aura icon OI1 represents the degree of expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display. For example, a green aura icon has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a blue aura icon, a red aura icon has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a green aura icon, and a golden aura icon has a rich jackpot. The rainbow-colored aura icon that changes to seven colors has the highest expectation of a jackpot, and corresponds to a level higher than the jackpot rich (for example, jackpot confirmation).

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (35), a scene after the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman cut each other is displayed, and in the same figure (36), the scene in which the character of the lord is defeated. Is displayed, and "Decoration 3", which is different from "Decoration 4" displayed in the upper left corner and the upper right corner, is displayed in a large size as a middle pattern. After that, the symbol variation display ends, and the third symbol pd3 of "decoration 4"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second decorative symbol display device On the 208M, the fifth symbol pd3 of "decoration 4"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. The super reach production here was a hazeless pare reach production.

The example shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 described above is an example in which the white meter display MW does not change from the empty state (the state where the meter is 0) to the full tank state, and the jackpot symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed. Become.

FIG. 16 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which a meter effect is performed and a big hit is made.

Hereinafter, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 14 to 15 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

The state shown in FIG. 16 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 14 (1), and both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are stop indications of the combination of the lost decorative symbols. However, here, it is a combination of "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6". Further, the hold icon (first hold icon) h1 of the first hold shown in FIG. 16 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a green display mode which is a look-ahead notice display mode. There is. The green display mode has a lower jackpot expectation than the red display mode.

In FIG. 16 (2), the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, and after the variable icon c disappears, in FIG. 16 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. Based on the symbol variation display is started. On the stage cs of the variable icon display area shown in FIG. 16 (3), the variable icon c in the green display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 16 (4), the white meter display MW appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 16 (4) is also an increase type, and the display is started in an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0).

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 16 (5), the line "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the lord. The display of the line "Ikuzo" also corresponds to the notice that a mini item will appear. In FIG. 16 (6), the changing ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of the lord bears the changing ball icon cI. In FIG. 16 (7), the character cd of the lord throws the change ball icon cI, and the movement animation of the change ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 16 (7), the changing ball icon cI has moved from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 16 (8), the changing ball icon cI is displayed on the white meter MW. It hits the white meter display MW and is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. The display mode of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 16 (8) has changed, and the effect display ed1 has been added. In FIG. 16 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 is added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with the red meter display MR. The effect in which the character cd of the lord continues to appear, which is shown in FIGS. 16 (6) to 16 (8), corresponds to an example of the meter change effect. Further, the red meter display MR corresponds to an example of the fourth meter display. This red meter display MR has a higher rank than the white meter display MW (for example, the appearance rate is low), and the meter change effect shown in FIGS. 16 (6) to 16 (8) is a kind of rank-up effect. Corresponds to. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 (9) is also in an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0). Further, a sound effect for notifying a change in the meter display is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 16 (9).

In FIG. 16 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 16 (11), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here, "" Decoration 7 ") becomes recognizable. In addition, the character cd of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has returned to the initial posture. In FIG. 16 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 16 (12), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and the shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). Further, as in FIG. 14 (7), the white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. In FIG. 16 (13), as in FIG. 14 (8), the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI moves to a position overlapping the red meter display MR from the front side. In FIG. 16 (14), the meter rise item UpI disappears, and the meter of the red meter display MR rises (increases) by 3 scales at a stretch. This means that the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 is more likely to accumulate meters than the white meter display MW shown in FIG. In other words, the probability that the red meter display RM displayed in the empty state will change to the full state is higher than the probability that the white meter display MW displayed in the empty state will change to the full state. It is configured to be. This is the amount of one state change in the red meter display MR (the amount of increase due to one meter rise item UpI) rather than the amount of one state change in the white meter display MW (the amount of increase due to one meter rise item UpI). There will be more. The color of the meter itself that increases or decreases is different from the red color of the meter frame mf (also blue), but it may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter is increased is the same as the timing variously described with reference to FIG. Further, in FIG. 16 (14), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 begins to slow down, and in FIG. 16 (15), the fluctuation of the right symbol becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here, “decoration”). 7 ”) becomes recognizable, and eventually it enters the reach state. In FIG. 16 (16), the reach state is reached, and the second meter raising item UpI appears on the right symbol so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 16 (17), the movement animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves to a position overlapping the red meter display MR from the front side. In FIG. 16 (18), the meter rise item UpI disappears, the meter of the red meter display MR rises (increases) again by 3 scales, and the red meter display MR is in a full tank state. The “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 16 (18), in which the meter raising item UpI has disappeared and the raising effect of the red meter display MR has been completed.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 16 step by step.

In FIG. 17 (19) following from FIG. 16 (18), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes slower, and in the following diagram (20), the left symbol that fluctuates swaying. , The right symbol that has been shaken and fluctuated moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 17 (21), it has evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and as in FIG. 14 (29), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold frame UI disappears and the castle town The background screen of the swordsman has changed to the screen of the swordsman. However, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top. In the super reach effect here, as shown in FIG. 17 (22), the background of only the first decorative symbol display device 208l among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N is switched to the background of the wilderness, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. The background of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is still the background of the castle town, and further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the fifth symbol pd5 and the information display unit ST1 remains. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display stage ss and the display of the character cd of the lord remain. Also, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top here as well. The super reach effect shown in FIG. 15 may be the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. 17, and conversely, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 17 is the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. It may be.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 17 (23), the red meter display MR in the full tank state is enlarged and displayed, and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are hidden by the enlarged red meter display MR. There is. The word "power-up" is also displayed to warn that the main character, the lord, will power up as much as the meters are accumulated. Here, because the meter is full, the lord will greatly power up and win, that is, the expectation of a big hit will be high. From FIG. 17 (24) to FIG. 17 (25), the meter is used, the red meter display MR decreases, and after passing through the fifth state, the state of 0 (fourth state) in FIG. It corresponds to an example of the state). In FIG. 17 (26), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the character of the main character, the lord. As described above, the color of the aura icon OI2 corresponds to the color suggesting the jackpot richness in the currently performed symbol variation display. The color of the aura icon OI2 may be a rainbow color corresponding to a level higher than the jackpot rich (for example, jackpot confirmed).

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 17 (27), the scene after the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman cut each other is displayed, and in the figure (28), the scene in which the character of the lord wins. Is displayed, and the same "decoration 7" as the "decoration 7" displayed in the upper left corner and the upper right corner is displayed in a large size as a middle pattern. Then, in FIG. 17 (29), three third symbols pd3 of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" are swayed and displayed, and in FIG. 17 (30), these three third symbols are displayed. The pd3 is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability variation has been won.

The example shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 described above is an example in which the red meter display MR changes from an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0) to a full tank state, and the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. become. When the red meter display MR changes from the empty state to the full state, the jackpot symbol finally becomes larger than when the red meter display MR remains empty and does not change to the full state. Easy to confirm. Further, in the red meter display MR, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the state changes from the empty state to the full state than when the state does not change from the empty state to the full state. Further, the super reach effect described with reference to FIG. 17 corresponds to an example of a notice display in which the display is started when the red meter display MR changes to the full tank state.

FIG. 18 is a diagram stepwise showing a modified example of the effect of the changing ball icon cI described with reference to FIG.

18 (1) to 18 (6) are the same as those of FIGS. 16 (1) to 16 (6). In FIG. 18 (7), the character cd of the lord throws the change ball icon cI and changes. The movement animation of the ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 18 (7), the change ball icon cI is moving from the third decorative symbol display device 208N toward the variable icon c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 18 (8), the change ball icon cI is moving. The icon cI hits the variable icon c, and a part of the variable icon c is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. Further, the display mode of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 18 (8) has changed, and the effect display ed2 has been added. The effect display ed2 here is the same effect display as the effect display ed1 when the meter display is hit as shown in FIG. 16 (8), but may be a different effect display. In FIG. 18 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed2 is added disappears, and the change icon c, which was previously green, has changed to red. The red variable icon has a higher probability of being a big hit in the displayed symbol variable display than the green variable icon, and is ranked up here. In addition, the rank may be lowered by the change ball icon cI. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 18, although the changing ball icon cI changes the display mode of the variable icon c, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining various types of meter displays in detail. The meter display described with reference to FIG. 19 is of the increasing type.

The meter displays shown in FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (f) correspond to the white meter display MW (one example of the first meter display) shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 and 16 (4) to (8). ). That is, the meter frame mf is a white meter display. The white meter display MW is the default meter display. Further, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19A is an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0), and corresponds to an example of the first state. In addition, FIG. 19 (a) also shows the white meter rise item UpI. The meter rise item UpI is an item in which the rate of rise of the meter changes depending on the type of meter display, and the white meter rise item UpI is an item that raises the meter on the meter display by the first amount.

FIG. 19B shows a state in which the meter of the white meter display MW, which was in an empty state, is raised by one scale by the white meter raising item UpI shown in FIG. 19A. The white meter raising item UpI is an item that raises the white meter display MW by one scale. The state of the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19B corresponds to an example of a second state which is a state between a full tank state and an empty state.

FIG. 19C shows a blue meter rise item UpIb that has the same color as the meter itself that increases or decreases. This blue meter raising item UpIb is an item that raises the meter on the meter display by a second amount.

FIG. 19 (d) shows a state (second state) in which the white meter display MW meter, which was in an empty state, is raised by two scales by the blue meter raising item UpIb shown in FIG. 19 (c). Has been done. The blue meter raising item UpIb is an item that raises the white meter display MW by two scales.

In FIG. 19 (e), the red meter rising item UpIr is shown. This red meter raising item UpIr is an item that raises the meter on the meter display by a third amount.

FIG. 19 (f) shows a state (second state) in which the white meter display MW meter, which was in an empty state, is raised by four scales by the red meter raising item UpIr shown in FIG. 19 (e). Has been done. The red meter raising item UpIr is an item that raises the white meter display MW by 4 scales.

In addition, a golden meter rising item may be displayed. The white meter display MW meter, which was empty, becomes a state where it is raised by 5 scales (second state) or a full tank state (state where it is raised by 6 scales) depending on the golden meter rising item. .. As described above, the rate of increase of the meter may not be constant and may change depending on the lottery result or the like.

The meter display shown in FIGS. 19 (g) to 19 (l) is a red meter display MR (corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display) shown in FIGS. 16 (9) to 16 (18). That is, the meter frame mf is a red meter display. The red meter display MR has a larger amount of meter accumulation than the white meter display MW. In the increase type meter display, the closer to the full tank state, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot. Therefore, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is higher in the state where the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state where the white meter display MW is displayed. The higher the expectation of the big hit, the easier it is that the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the first symbol. Further, the expectation of winning an advantageous jackpot may be higher in the state where the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state where the white meter display MW is displayed. The advantageous jackpot referred to here is, for example, a jackpot with a probability variation or a jackpot with a large number of rounds with a ball.

FIG. 19 (g) shows the default white meter rise item UpI, and FIG. 19 (h) shows the empty red meter display MR meter, which is the white meter rise item. UpI shows a state in which the value is raised by 3 scales at a stretch (fifth state). The white meter raising item UpI is an item that raises the red meter display MR by 3 scales.

FIG. 19 (i) shows the blue meter rise item UpIb, and FIG. 19 (j) shows the meter of the red meter display MR that was in an empty state by the blue meter rise item UpIb. It is shown that the tank has risen by 6 scales at a stretch, that is, the tank is full (sixth state). The blue meter raising item UpIb is an item that raises the red meter display MR by 6 scales (all scales).

As described above, in the state where the red meter display MR is displayed, the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item UpI is tripled as compared with the state where the white meter display MW is displayed.

FIG. 19 (k) shows the green meter rise item UpIm. This green meter raising item UpIm is an item that raises by 9 scales with respect to the red meter display MR. In the meter display, when the tank is full, the surplus scale (overflow scale) may be invalidated, but here, in order to effectively handle the surplus scale, the empty meter display is additionally displayed. Will be done. The type of meter display additionally displayed may be the same type as the type of meter display that is full, or may be ranked up. That is, in FIG. 19 (l), the same type of red meter display MR as the type of meter display that is full is additionally displayed below the meter display that is full. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 19 (l), a meter display in which the meter frame mf is gold may be displayed under the red meter display MR that is full. The additionally displayed red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 (l) has risen to three scales corresponding to the surplus scale.

The meter display shown in FIGS. 19 (m) and 19 (n) is a rainbow meter display MN in which the meter frame mf is a rainbow color. This rainbow meter display MN also corresponds to an example of the fourth meter display. In the state where the rainbow meter display MN is displayed, the rainbow meter display MN is always full regardless of the color of the meter rising item displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (m), even if the rainbow meter display MN is empty and the white meter rising item UpI, the rainbow meter display MN is full as shown in FIG. 19 (n). Become a tongue. In such a rainbow meter display MN, when the meter rises, the tank is always full, and the big hit is confirmed.

However, in the rainbow meter display MN, even if the tank is full and there is an extra scale (overflow scale), the jackpot is confirmed, so a new meter is shown as shown in FIG. 19 (l). The display is not additionally displayed, and the remaining scale is invalidated.

In addition, when one meter rising item is displayed regardless of the color, the meter rising item may always be raised by the same scale (for example, one scale). In this case, the color of the meter rising item becomes the expected degree of jackpot.

In addition, the appearance timing of the meter rising item has been described above, but supplementing here, the meter rising item is a big hit during symbol fluctuation, long-term fluctuation, before super reach, during super reach, and provisional decorative symbol. It may be easy to appear when stopped.

The meter display described above may be a big hit notice (so-called normal notice) in the symbol change display (the change) being displayed at the time when the meter display starts to be displayed, or is started after the change. It may be a big hit notice (pre-reading notice) in the symbol variation display. That is, when the degree of expectation of a big hit is mentioned above, it may be the degree of expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation, or it may be the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display started after that.

Further, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (f), the red meter display MR shown in FIGS. 19 (g) to 19 (l), and FIGS. 19 (m) and (n). ), The color of the meter frame mf may be different, the display sizes may be different from each other, and the display positions may be different from each other. Further, in the white meter display MW, the red meter display MR, and the rainbow meter display MN, the colors of the meters themselves may be different so that all the colors are different.

Further, when viewed with one meter display, the first state is the state in which the meter frame is white and empty as shown in FIG. 19 (a) and the like, and FIG. 19 (b), FIG. The intermediate state shown in (f) where the meter frame is white and neither empty nor full is the second state, and the state where the meter frame is white and full is not shown in FIG. 19 is the third state. The fourth state is the state in which the meter frame is red and empty as shown in FIG. 19 (g) and the like, and the intermediate state in which the meter frame is red and is neither empty nor full as shown in FIG. 19 (h). Is the fifth state, and the state in which the meter frame is red and the tank is full, as shown in FIG. 19 (j), is the sixth state.

Hereinafter, the meter effect will be described, but the description may be omitted for matters that overlap with the matters described so far.

FIG. 20 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a rank-up effect fortune-telling whether the meter display changes.

The state shown in FIG. 20 (1) is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost in both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. However, here, it is a combination of "decoration 5"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 3". In this state, there is no reservation of the special figure, and the first symbol pd1 continues the stop display until the special figure start ports 230 and 232 are won. Further, the white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 20 (1). The white meter display MW here is in an empty state. The white meter display MW has been continuously displayed from the stage before FIG. 20 (1), and may already be continuously displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In FIG. 20 (2), there is one ball entering the first special figure start port 230, and in FIG. 20 (3), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. Then, on the stage cs of the variable icon display area, the display of the variable icon c in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is started. Further, even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the white meter display MW in the empty state is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the white meter display MW in the empty state is displayed. Continues until FIG. 20 (18).

Even in FIG. 20 (4) in which the symbol of the special figure 1 is changing, there is one ball entering the first special figure start port 230, and the first stage hs1 of the hold icon display area shown in the same figure (5) has a ball. The display of the hold icon (first hold icon h1 in FIG. 1) in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, has started. Further, in FIG. 20 (6), there is one ball entering the first special figure start port 230, and the pre-reading notice is displayed in the second stage hs2 of the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 20 (7). The display of the hold icon (second hold icon h2 in FIG. 1) in the green display mode is started.

In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 20 (8), "decoration 7"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (9), the loss is displayed. The combination of decorative symbols of the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon c in the white display mode disappears from the stage cs of the variable icon display area. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed even during the period during the stop display (including the final display) of the third symbol pd3 in FIGS. 20 (1) and 20 (8) to (9). In some cases, the meter display is always displayed. That is, the meter display may be displayed across a plurality of fluctuation displays in the third symbol pd3.

In FIG. 20 (10), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 due to the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the variable icon c. are doing. The variable icon c shown in FIG. 20 (10) is the default display mode as in the display mode of the hold icon. In FIG. 20 (9), the hold icon that was the second hold icon h2 in the look-ahead notice display mode is shifted and moved as it is, and in FIG. 20 (10), it becomes the first hold icon h1. There is.

In FIG. 20 (11), a rank-up effect for predicting whether the meter display changes is started, and a change icon I2 gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. In FIG. 20 (12), information is displayed. The change icon I2 is displayed on the display unit ST1. The character "Weird" is written on the change icon I2.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 20 (13), the character cd of the lord draws a bow, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 20 (13), the tutorial display ts is "arrow If it hits, it has been changed to.

In FIG. 20 (14), the character cd of the lord shoots an arrow, and the arrow icon representing the arrow is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. Flying towards the displayed change icon I2. In FIG. 20 (15), the icon of the flying arrow is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it seems that the left half of the arrow icon is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, a part of the arrow icon is not visible because the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the way.

In FIG. 20 (16), the arrow icon brilliantly hits the change icon I2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 20 (17), the hit arrow icon disappears and the change icon disappears. The display mode of I2 has changed, and the effect display ed3 has been added. The effect display ed3 here is also an effect display similar to the effect display ed1 shown in FIG. 16 (8), but may be a different effect display such as different colors. It should be noted that the character cd of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a different pose from the initial posture. In FIG. 20 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is white. It is displayed on the meter display MW so as to overlap from the front side.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 20 step by step.

In FIG. 21 (19) following from FIG. 20 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). It's changing. That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with the red meter display MR. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 21 (19) is also in an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0). In the rank-up effect described above, the meter display has succeeded in upgrading from the white meter display MW to the red meter display MR, but it may fail. For example, an icon different from the change icon I2 (for example, an icon with a question mark) appears, and the character cd of the lord disappears without pulling the bow, or the arrow of the arrow drawn. The icon disappears without hitting the icon, and even if the arrow icon hits, the effect display disappears without being added, or even if the effect display is added, the white meter display MW In some cases, the icon disappears without moving, and the meter display remains the white meter display MW and does not change at all. Similarly, even with the change icon I2, the character cd of the lord does not draw a bow, the arrow icon does not hit, the effect display is not added, or it does not move to the white meter display MW. Then, the change icon I2 may disappear, and the meter display may remain the white meter display MW without any change. Further, even if the effect display ed3 overlaps the added change icon I2 or the unadded change icon I2 from the front side on the white meter display MW, the meter display itself does not rank up, but the meter may rise. On the contrary, the meter does not have to rise. Further, the meter display itself may be ranked down (for example, the red meter display MR is changed to the white meter display MW).

In FIG. 21 (20), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Character cd has returned to its initial posture. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown. In FIG. 21 (21), the final display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variable icon c disappears. The red meter display MR continues to be displayed even during the period when the third symbol pd3 is stopped or confirmed. The red meter display MR here is in an empty state.

In FIG. 21 (22), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 21 (21) is started, and the low-speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed according to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the meter display. In FIG. 21 (23), the third symbol pd3 starts to fluctuate at high speed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 21 (24) starts a notice that a mini item appears. That is, as in the example shown in FIG. 15, the treasure box icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 21 (25), the closed treasure box icon is displayed on the information display unit ST1. I1 is displayed. In FIG. 21 (26), the icon I1 of the treasure box opens, and a white meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box.

Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI appearing on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the red meter display MR displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 21 (27), the moving meter rising item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 21 (28), the meter rising item UpI is red. It is displayed on the meter display MR so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 21 (29), the meter rise item UpI disappears, and in the red meter display MR where the meter is more likely to accumulate than the white meter display MW, the meter rises by three scales at once.

In FIG. 21 (30), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. 21 (31), the reach state is entered. That is, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the shaking fluctuation is started. In FIG. 21 (32) that follows, the left symbol that has fluctuated has moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that has also fluctuated has moved to the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to the corner. Then, in FIG. 21 (33), as in the example shown in FIG. 15, the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect) is developed, and in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the background screen of the castle town is changed to the swordsman visit screen. It's changing. However, the red meter display MR is still displayed with three scales accumulated.

In FIG. 21 (34), the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are all switched to the background of the wilderness, and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The duel scene has begun. The red meter display MR is still displayed with 3 scales accumulated.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 21 (35), the red meter display MR is enlarged and displayed in a state in which three scales are accumulated (corresponding to an example of the fifth state). The word "power-up" is also displayed to warn that the main character, the lord, will power up as much as the meters are accumulated.

It should be noted that the meter of the white meter display MW may rise between FIGS. 20 (3) and 20 (10) before the meter display changes.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step.

From FIG. 21 (36) to FIG. 22 (37), the meter is used, the red meter display MR decreases, and in FIG. 22 (37), the state becomes 0 (corresponding to an example of the fourth state). I'm back. In FIG. 22 (38), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the 0 state disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 that suggests a big hit is added behind the character of the main character, the lord.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 22 (39), the scene after the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman cut each other is displayed, and in the figure (40), the scene in which the character of the lord wins Is displayed, and the same "decoration 4" as the "decoration 4" displayed in the upper left corner and the upper right corner is displayed in a large size as a middle pattern. Then, in FIG. 22 (41), three third symbols pd3 of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" are swayed and displayed, and in FIG. 22 (42), these three third symbols are displayed. The pd3 is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with a short time (electric support) has been won.

In the example shown in FIG. 15 and the examples shown in FIGS. 21 to 22, the meter display is in a state where the same three scales are accumulated, but in the example shown in FIG. 15 which was the white meter display MW, the loss super reach effect is produced. In contrast, in this example, which was a red meter display MR, it was a jackpot super reach effect. In this way, apart from the accumulation of meters, the expectation of big hits changes depending on the meter display itself (here, the meter frame mf). That is, if the accumulation of meters (including the empty state) is the same, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the red meter display MR than in the white meter display MW.

FIG. 23 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a re-lottery that may continue from FIG. 22 (41).

In the example shown in FIG. 22, a red meter display MR having a higher expectation of a big hit than the white meter display MW was displayed, and the red meter display MR was not in an empty state but in a state in which three scales were accumulated. .. Therefore, there is a high expectation that an advantageous jackpot will be won, and as shown in FIG. 23, a re-lottery may be performed. That is, a jackpot with 3 scales accumulated on the red meter display MR is more advantageous than a jackpot with 3 scales accumulated on the white meter display MW (for example, a jackpot with probability variation or a jackpot with many rounds with balls). The degree of expectation to do is high.

Here, FIG. 23 (42') shows the state in which three third symbols pd3 of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" shown in FIG. 22 (41) are swayed and displayed. As shown, the button effect is started at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The button effects here are a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136, an arrow display 136b and a character display of "press" as a promotion display for prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136. The remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding the period for accepting the operation as valid (operation valid period) is displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. The button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to encourage pressing.

In FIGS. 23 (43') to (44'), the chance button 136 is not pressed, the operation validity period is reduced, and the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing of FIG. 23 (45'). As shown in FIG. 23 (46'), in response to the pressing of the chance button 136, the shaking display of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" is changed to "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-" The display changes to the shaking display of "Decoration 7", and in the figure (47'), the combination of "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability variation has been won. There is. That is, it has been promoted from a jackpot with a short time (electric support) to a jackpot with a probability change.

Even if the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation validity period, after the operation validity period elapses, the shaking display of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" is displayed as "decoration 7"-"decoration". It changes to the shaking display of "7"-"Decoration 7", is confirmed, and is promoted to a jackpot with probability change.

FIG. 24 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a mini-game fortune-telling whether or not a meter display appears.

In FIG. 24 (1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. .. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown. In FIG. 24 (2), the final combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is confirmed, and the variable icon c disappears.

In FIG. 24 (3), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 1 (2) is started, and the low-speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. In addition, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed according to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the mini game such as "If you win the comparison with drinking". In FIG. 24 (4), the third symbol pd3 has started high-speed fluctuation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 24 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image that used to be the townscape of the castle town is changed to the background image of the mini game in which the lord and the old man drink and compare. are doing. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 continues to be displayed. In FIG. 24 (6), an explanatory display indicating that the sword dance meter (meter display) is displayed when the lord wins the mini game to the grandfather is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the background image of the mini game. In FIG. (7), a drinking comparison mini-game has started. In FIG. 24 (8), the victory of the lord in the mini game is notified, and in FIG. 24 (9), it is displayed that the sword dance meter has been acquired.

In FIG. 24 (10), the effect display ed4 is displayed together with the sword dance meter on the display of the third symbol pd3 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize how many colors the sword dance meter is displayed due to the effect of the effect display ed4. In addition, when the term "difficult to see" is used in the present specification, it means that it is relatively difficult to see the state before and after that. In FIG. 24 (11), the effect display ed4 disappears and the white meter display MW, which is a sword dance meter, is clearly displayed.

If the lord is defeated in the mini-game, the sword dance meter will not be displayed. The effect of the mini-game described with reference to FIG. 24 also corresponds to the effect of acquiring the meter display.

FIG. 25 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which a big hit is determined by the fluctuation when the meter display is full.

25 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 14 (1) to (9). In FIG. 25 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation has started (second stop), and the golden meter rising item UpIg has appeared. As described above, the golden meter raising item UpIg raises the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales or 6 scales. In FIG. 25 (10), the white meter display MW accumulated by one scale is displayed, and the appearance of the golden meter rising item UpIg means that the jackpot is confirmed by the fluctuation. That is, the appearance of a meter rising item (gold here or red shown in FIG. 19E) in which the meter is easy to accumulate is a big hit than the case in which a meter rising item (for example, white) in which the meter is difficult to accumulate appears. Expectations are high. In FIG. 25 (11), the gold meter rising item UpIg moves to a position where it overlaps the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 25 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. In the case of an increase of 6 scales, there is a surplus of 1 scale, but since the jackpot is confirmed by the fluctuation and the next fluctuation is after the end of the jackpot game, the remaining 1 scale is up to the next fluctuation. It cannot be carried over and will be invalidated. Further, the voice "Congratulations" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 25 (12). The voice output here corresponds to a jackpot notification sound that notifies that the meter is full and the jackpot is confirmed.

In FIG. 25 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and the middle symbol (here, “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable. Then, in FIG. 25 (14), three third symbols pd3 of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" are swayed and displayed, and in FIG. 25 (15), these three third symbols are displayed. The pd3 is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability variation has been won.

The example shown in FIG. 25 described above is an example in which the white meter display MW changes from an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0) to a full tank state, and the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. The final jackpot symbol is when the white meter display MW changes from the empty state to the full state than when the white meter display MW remains empty and does not change to the full state. Is easy to confirm. Further, even in the white meter display MW, the case where the empty state is changed to the full state is more than the case where the empty state is not changed to the full state as in the examples shown in FIGS. 14 and 15. However, the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the meter display is displayed in the holding frame.

The hold frame UI'shown in FIG. 26 is also provided with a base icon UIb'with a vertical stripe pattern extending to the left and right, but the base icon UIb'shown in FIG. 26 is a base icon UIb shown in FIG. Higher than. Further, in the effect display area provided on the right side of the hold frame UI'shown in FIG. 26, an empty white meter display MW is displayed instead of the tutorial display ts. Since the base icon UIb'shown in FIG. 26 is high, this white meter display MW is completely embedded in the hold frame UI'and is integrated with the hold frame UI', but the meter display is a hold frame. It suffices if a part of the UI'is covered. In other words, the meter display may partially or completely overlap the hold frame UI', and the hold frame UI' corresponds to an example of a hold display area in a broad sense, and also an example of an icon display area. Equivalent to. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 26, the meter display is always displayed in the holding frame UI'. That is, the meter display is also displayed during the period when the hold frame UI'is displayed, and when the hold frame UI' disappears, the meter display also disappears. However, the tutorial display ts may be displayed at all times, and the meter display may be displayed instead of the tutorial display ts only when the meter is produced.

In FIG. 26 (1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. .. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown. In FIG. 26 (2), the definite display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variable icon c disappears.

In FIG. 26 (3), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 1 (2) is started, and the low-speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3, and FIG. Then, the third symbol pd3 has started high-speed fluctuation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 26 (5), the line "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the lord, and the mini item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 26 (6), a white meter rising item UpI appears, and the character cd of the lord is responsible for the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 26 (7), the character cd of the lord throws the meter rising item UpI, and the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI'. The meter rise item UpI shown in FIG. 26 (7) does not overlap with the white meter display MW, but only partially overlaps with the base icon UIb', but partially or partially overlaps with the white meter display MW. They may be displayed so that they all overlap.

In FIG. 26 (8), the meter rising item UpI has disappeared, and the white meter display MW has changed to a state in which one scale has been accumulated. A tutorial display such as "continue when the meter is full" is displayed in the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 26 (9).

In FIG. 26 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 26 (11), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here, "" Decoration 7 ") becomes recognizable. Further, in FIG. 26 (11), the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 26 (12), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and the shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. In FIG. 26 (13), the movement animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves to the top of the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI'. In FIG. 26 (14), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here, “decoration 6”) can be recognized. In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg has disappeared, and the white meter display MW meter has risen (increased) to full at once.

In FIG. 26 (15), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and the middle symbol becomes recognizable. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 26 (16), the pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 26 (17), similarly to FIG. 14 (15), the cut-in display of the pseudo continuous effect is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 26 (18), the cut-in display disappears, the re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous production is started, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start low-speed fluctuation, and the left symbol is started. The character display of "x2", which is the number of continuation times, is displayed so that a part of it overlaps with. The white meter display MW that was in the full tank state continues to be displayed until the re-variation is started, but the white meter display MW returns to the empty state according to the start of the re-variation. Then, after the pseudo-continuous production continues, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display currently being performed.

In the pseudo-continuous effect described with reference to FIG. 26, the meter display (here, the white meter display MW is used, but other meter displays (for example, the red meter display MR) may be used) is full. This corresponds to an example of a notice display that starts displaying when it changes.

The white meter display MW may continue to be displayed in a full state until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the white meter display MW in the full tank state may be displayed only until the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol (start of the pseudo-continuous effect) in FIG. 26 (16), and may return to the empty state.

In addition, regarding the timing when the meter display returns to the empty state, it may be the symbol variation display (including the symbol variation display to be notified when the meter display is a normal advance notice) or the meter display. If is a look-ahead notice, it is the symbol change display immediately before the look-ahead notice target symbol change display, or in the look-ahead notice target symbol change display, it is empty at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. You may return to the state of. For example, in each of the above symbol variation displays, the empty state may be returned when the symbol is stopped without being filled. That is, the second state may return to the first state, or the fifth state may return to the fourth state. Further, in the second state or the fifth state, the lost symbol may always return to the empty state at the timing when the stop display or the definite display is displayed. Alternatively, even in the third state or the sixth state, the configuration may be such that the lost symbol always returns to the empty state at the timing when the stop display or the definite display is displayed. In addition, the meter display may return to the empty state and continue to display the empty state only after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the next symbol fluctuation display starts immediately without any subsequent hold. If not, the meter display may disappear, but may continue to be displayed in an empty state. In addition, if there is a subsequent hold and the next symbol variation display is started immediately, the meter display may continue to be displayed in an empty state.

Further, the white meter display MW may be changed to the red meter display MR in the holding frame UI', or the red meter display MR may be displayed from the beginning.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of acquiring and stocking mini-items when the meter of the meter display is full.

27 (1) to 27 (6) are the same as those of 14 (1) to 14 (6), and in FIG. 27 (7), the left design (here, "decoration 7") is temporarily stopped. , The shaking fluctuation has started (first stop). In addition, the red meter rising item UpIr appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This red meter rising item UpIr is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

In FIG. 27 (8), the movement animation of the red meter rising item UpIr is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW in the empty state from the front side. In FIG. 27 (9), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here, “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable. In addition, the red meter rise item UpIr has disappeared, and the meter of the white meter display MW has risen (increased) by 4 scales.

In FIG. 27 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swaying fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as or before or after the formation of the reach state. In FIG. 27 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to a position overlapping the white meter display MW accumulated by four scales. In FIG. 27 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. The golden meter raising item UpIg here is an item that raises the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales, and if the white meter display MW has accumulated 4 scales, 3 scales are left over (overflow). However, in Fig. 27 (12), no extra scale is displayed, and in Fig. 27 (13), the mini item is displayed at the right end of the full white meter display MW. Along with the appearance of a kind of pseudo-ream notice item NI, the character display of "GET" is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol or the like that is temporarily stopped in the third symbol pd3 from the front side. The pseudo-ream notice item NI is an icon that gives a notice that the pseudo-ream effect will be started after this, and the character display of "GET" is a character display indicating that the pseudo-ream notice item NI has been acquired.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27 (14), the “decoration 7” is in the reach state. In the reach state, the white meter display MW, which was previously full, changes to an empty state, the character display of "GET" disappears, and the pseudo-ream notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Then, it is displayed on the information display unit ST1. The second decorative symbol display device 208M functions as a means for displaying the stocked icon, which means that the pseudo-continuous notice item NI has been stocked.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27 (15), three scales of the remaining scales are added to the white meter display MW in the empty state. That is, the display of the overflowed portion when the tank is full is started at this timing. The chance to raise the white meter display MW continues after this.

The white meter display MW in FIGS. 27 (12) to 27 (15) described above is not downgraded, but the portion that is full is replaced with the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the surplus portion. Is displayed again.

In FIG. 27 (16), the pseudo-continuous notice item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI is digested. In addition, the character display of "activate" is displayed under the pseudo-continuous notice item NI displayed at the position of the middle symbol. The character display of this "activation" is a character display indicating that the pseudo-ream notice item NI has been activated, and the pseudo-ream effect is started immediately after that.

In FIG. 27 (17), the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, sways and fluctuates (temporarily stops). The middle symbol here is a pseudo-ream symbol ("continuation"), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation"-"decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-ream production starts. Will be done.

In the example described above, when the meter display is full, various mini-items appear without being limited to the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the appearing mini-items can be stocked. If the mini item that appears is an item related to a jackpot (for example, a pseudo-ream notice item NI), the fact that the meter display is full corresponds to a higher expectation of the jackpot, and by extension, Finally, the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 28 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which a plurality of items are stocked in one full tank of the meter display.

28 (1) to (6) are the same as those of FIGS. 14 (1) to (6), and in FIG. 28 (7), the left design (here, "decoration 7") is temporarily stopped. , The shaking fluctuation has started (first stop). In addition, two meter rise items, a red meter rise item UpIr and a blue meter rise item UpIb, appear at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. That is, a plurality of meter rising items are appearing at the same time.

In FIG. 28 (8), the movement animation of the two meter rising items is started, and both the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb move to a position where they overlap the white meter display MW in the empty state from the front side. To do. As explained earlier with reference to FIG. 19, the red meter raising item UpIr is an item that raises the meter of the white meter display MW by 4 scales, and the blue meter raising item UpIb is an item that raises the meter by 2 scales. is there. In FIG. 28 (9), both the red meter rise item UpIr and the blue meter rise item UpIb have disappeared, and the white meter display MW meter, which was previously empty, is replaced with the red meter rise item. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 28 (9) is in a full tank state, with the increase of 4 scales for UpIr and the increase of 2 scales for the blue meter rise item UpIb.

In FIG. 28 (10), two pseudo-ream notice items NI, which are a kind of mini items, appear at the right end of the white meter display MW in a full tank state, and the “decoration 7” of the right pattern that is temporarily stopped, etc. One character display of "GET" is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the example shown in FIG. 27 above, the white meter display MW is full with one red meter rise item UpIr, but in this example, there are two items, the red meter rise item UpIr and the blue meter rise item UpIb. The white meter display MW is full with the meter rise item. Whether it is the red meter rise item UpIr or the blue meter rise item UpIb, the meter rise rate is higher than the default white meter rise item UpI, and the red meter rise item UpIr and the blue meter rise item UpIb , It can be said that it is an item that makes it easy to store meters. From this, it can be said that it is more likely that a plurality of items can be stocked when a meter rising item that makes it easy to store the meter appears. The red meter display MR may be more likely to be able to stock a plurality of items than the white meter display MW.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 28 (11), the white meter display MW, which had been full until then, changes to an empty state, and the character display of "GET" disappears. The two pseudo-continuous notice item NIs move to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the two pseudo-continuous notice item NIs are stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (12), the white meter display MW in the empty state is still displayed, and the chance to raise the white meter display MW still remains after this. If there is no chance, or conversely, if the jackpot is confirmed, the white meter display MW may be erased when it becomes empty, or it may be erased after returning to the empty state. In addition, one of the two pseudo-ream notice item NIs stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and under the pseudo-ream notice item NI, " The text display of "Activate" is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 28 (12), one pseudo-continuous notice item NI is first digested, and the entire third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped once and the revariation is started. Then, the second temporary stop and the start of the re-variation are performed by the second pseudo-continuous notice item NI in stock.

Among the items stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, there are items that can be carried over to the next symbol change display or later (for example, pre-reading notice type items), but they cannot be carried over and are currently being carried out. There is also an item (for example, a pseudo-ream notice item NI) that is digested during the symbol variation display.

Further, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 28, a plurality of items may be stocked in one meter full tank, but conversely, items may not be stocked even when the meter is full. You may. For example, when the white meter display MW is filled with the white meter rising item UpI, the pseudo-continuous notice item NI itself does not appear, or even if it appears, it is not stocked.

FIG. 29 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the meter display in the full tank state may be carried over to the next symbol variation display.

FIGS. 29 (1) to (8) are the same as those of FIGS. 28 (1) to (8). In FIG. 28 (9), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 fluctuates at a low speed. Then, the right pattern (here, "decoration 1") becomes recognizable. In addition, both the red meter rise item UpIr and the blue meter rise item UpIb have disappeared, and the white meter display MW meter, which was previously empty, is now full in the example of FIG. 29. It has become. However, as shown in FIG. 29 (10), in this example, items such as the pseudo-continuous notice item NI do not appear, and the full state of the white meter display MW is maintained. Further, in the third symbol pd3, "decoration 1" different from the left symbol of "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped on the right symbol, and the shaking fluctuation is started. That is, it has not entered the reach state as in the example shown in FIG. 28. Further, in FIG. 29 (10), the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed according to the full tank of the white meter display MW, and the display content is related to the look-ahead notice such as "next chance". ..

In FIG. 29 (11), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and the middle symbol (here, “decoration 1”) becomes recognizable. Then, in FIG. 29 (12), three third symbols pd3 of "decoration 7"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" are swayed and displayed. This combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" is a chance eye, and in FIG. 29 (13), the first decorative pattern display device 208L is corresponding to the shaking display (temporary stop) of the chance eye. The flash pattern fd emits light from the transparent light guide plate arranged on the front side of the. Instead of the light guide plate, the flash symbol may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 29 (14), the third symbol pd3 of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown. In FIG. 29 (15), the third symbol pd3 of the chance eye is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon c disappears. Further, in response to the confirmed display of the third symbol pd3, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed again, and the display content suggests a chance eye such as "the arrangement of 711". Even if the third symbol pd3 is stopped and further displayed, the white meter display MW in the full tank state is still displayed. In FIG. 29 (16), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 29 (15), that is, the next symbol variation display is started, and the low speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. Has been done. The white meter display MW in the full tank state is still displayed in the full tank state even when the next symbol variation display is started, and is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. The full white meter display MW in FIGS. 29 (9) to 29 (15) corresponds to a look-ahead notice, and the full white meter display MW in FIG. 29 (16) corresponds to a normal notice.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which even if the meter display is full and an item appears, it is digested without being stocked.

FIGS. 30 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 14 (1) to (6), and in FIG. 30 (7), the left design (here, "decoration 7") is temporarily stopped. , The shaking fluctuation has started (first stop). In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This golden meter rising item UpIg is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

In FIG. 30 (8), the movement animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to a position overlapping the white meter display MW in the empty state. In FIG. 30 (9), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here, “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable. In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg has disappeared, and the meter of the white meter display MW is in a full tank state.

In FIG. 30 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swaying fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. In addition, at the same time as the formation of the reach state, or at the timing before and after that, the operation means notice display icon 136I, which is a kind of mini item, appears at the right end of the white meter display MW in the full tank state, and the third symbol pd3. Among them, the character display of "GET" is displayed so as to overlap the temporarily stopped right symbol or the like from the front side. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon that gives a notice that the operation means notice (for example, button notice) will be started after that, and the character display of "GET" has acquired the operation means notice display icon 136I. It is a character display that indicates that. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon imitating the operation means (here, the chance button 136), and the operation means notice display icon 136I shown in FIG. 30 (10) is a white icon. The white color here means that no change occurs even if the operating means is operated. That is, the effect (for example, the advance notice effect) corresponding to the operation of the operating means is not started. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the operating means was not accepted, and it can be said that the operation was invalidated if it was accepted. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operating means is invalid by combining the fact that the operation of the operating means is not accepted and the operation is invalidated if it is accepted, and the white color here indicates the operating means. A color that indicates that the operation of is invalid.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 30 (11), the white meter display MW, which was previously full, changes to an empty state, and the character display of "GET" disappears and continues. In FIG. 12 (12), the operation means notice display icon 136I displayed at the right end of the white meter display MW moves to the position of the middle symbol during high-speed fluctuation to change the display mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 30 (13), the button effect is started in the middle symbol. In the button effect here, as in the button effect shown in FIG. 23, the button image 136a, the arrow display 136b and the character display "press" as the promotion display, and the remaining period meter display 136c are one set. Is displayed. Further, red is a color that prompts the operation of the operating means, the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to encourage pressing.

In FIG. 30 (14), the chance button 136 is not pressed and the operation valid period is reduced, but the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing of the next figure (15). In response to the pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 30 (16), the character display "Gekiatsu" is displayed so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 from the front side. This character display usually corresponds to a notice.

In the example shown in FIG. 30 described above, the item acquired by filling the meter is used immediately. That is, the acquired item is used without moving to a decorative symbol display device different from the decorative symbol display device from which the display is started. It is also used during the symbol variation display that is being performed when the display is started. However, the operation means notice display icon 136I may be kept in white until the operation validity period of the operation means is reached, and in some cases, it may be stocked until the next and subsequent symbol variation displays. May be good.

Even if the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation valid period, the character display "Gekiatsu" is displayed after the operation valid period elapses, and the normal notice is executed.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which two meter displays are displayed and both disappear.

In FIG. 31 (1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. The four symbols pd4 are also displayed as gray squares and gray circles, showing the loss of special figure 1. In FIG. 31 (2), the final combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is confirmed, and the variable icon c disappears.

In FIG. 31 (3), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 1 (2) is started, and the low-speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. As shown in FIG. 31 (4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, an empty white meter display MW (for example, an empty white meter display MW) is displayed on the upper left of the third symbol pd3. , Corresponds to an example of the first meter display) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 31 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display) is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol pd3. Here, the two white meter display MWs are started to be displayed separately, but the two may be started to be displayed together.

In FIG. 31 (7), a red meter rising item UpIr appears in the left symbol of the temporarily stopped “decoration 7”, and in FIG. 31 (8), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed in the white meter display MW on the left side. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 31 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr disappears, and only the meter of the white meter display MW on the left side rises by four scales.

In FIG. 31 (10), a golden meter rising item UpIg appears in the right pattern of the temporarily stopped “decoration 7”, and in FIG. 31 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg appears in the white meter display MW on the right side. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 31 (12), the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and only the meter of the white meter display MW on the right side rises by 5 scales.

In FIG. 31 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and in FIG. 31 (14), the middle symbol becomes recognizable. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 31 (15), the pseudo-continuous symbol sways (temporarily stops) and overlaps the pseudo-continuous symbol from the front side. Three white meter rise items UpI are displayed. As shown in FIG. 31 (16), two of these three white meter rise items UpI move to the white meter display MW on the left side, and the other one moves to the meter of the white meter display MW on the right side.

In each of the two white meter display MWs shown in FIG. 31 (17), the meter is raised by the moved meter raising item UpI. That is, the white meter display MW on the left side rises by two scales and becomes full, and the white meter display MW on the right side rises by one scale and becomes full. Furthermore, when the tank is full, the chance-up item CUI appears on the left white meter display MW, the character display of "GET" is displayed, and the swordsman reach item RI appears on the right white meter display MW. As it appears, the character display of "GET" is displayed. The chance-up item CUI that appeared on the white meter display MW on the left side is an icon that indicates that the expectation for a big hit has increased in the current symbol variation display, and the swordsman reach item that appeared on the white meter display MW on the right side. RI is an icon that announces that it will develop into a swordsman reach, which is a kind of super reach production, in the pattern variation display currently being performed.

In FIG. 31 (18), each of the two white meter display MWs that were in the full tank state disappeared, the character display of each "GET" disappeared, the chance-up item CUI, the swordsman reach item RI, and the second decorative pattern. It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is possible to change each of the two white meter display MWs that were in the full tank state to an empty state without erasing them, but if it is confirmed that a big hit will be made in the current symbol variation display. , As shown in FIG. 31 (18), the meter display may be turned off.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one disappears.

In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 32 (1), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (2), the loss is displayed. The combination of decorative symbols of the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon c in the white display mode disappears from the stage cs of the variable icon display area.

In FIG. 32 (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 due to the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the variable icon c. are doing. The variable icon c shown in FIG. 32 (3) is the default display mode as in the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 32 (2), the hold icon which was the second hold icon h2 in the look-ahead notice display mode is shifted and moved as it is, and in FIG. 32 (3), it becomes the first hold icon h1. There is.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (4), after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the white meter display MW in an empty state (for example, the first) is displayed on the upper left of the third symbol pd3. Corresponds to an example of the meter display of) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display) is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol pd3.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 32 (6), the line "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the lord, and a mini item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 32 (7), the changing ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of the lord bears the changing ball icon cI. In FIG. 32 (8), the character cd of the lord throws the change ball icon cI, and in FIG. 32 (9), the change ball icon cI hits the white meter display MW on the right side and the white meter display MW on the right side. It is displayed on the right end so that it overlaps from the front side. The display mode of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 32 (9) has changed, and the effect display ed1 has been added. At the right end of the white meter display MW on the right side, the change ball icon cI displayed with the effect display ed1 added is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is. In FIG. 32 (10), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 is added disappears, and only the white meter display MW on the right side changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). There is. That is, it corresponds to an example in which the fourth meter display changes from the first state to the fourth state. The plurality of meter display MWs may change at the same time. That is, according to this example, the white meter display MW on the left side may be changed to the red meter display MR together with the white meter display MW on the right side in an empty state (the state where the meter is 0).

In FIG. 32 (11), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 32 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and starts shaking fluctuation (first). Stop). In addition, the blue meter rising item UpIb appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. That is, one blue meter rising item UpIb is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of "Decoration 7" from the front side.

In FIG. 32 (13), the split animation of the blue meter rising item UpIb is started, one blue meter rising item UpIb is split into two, and the white meter display MW in the empty state on the left side and the white meter display MW on the right side. Red meter display in the empty state A blue meter rise item UpIb is displayed for each MR. As described above, the blue meter raising item UpIb is an item that raises the white meter display MW by 2 scales and the red meter display MR by 6 scales. In FIG. 32 (14), the left and right blue meter rise items UpIb disappear, and the white meter display MW meter on the left side rises by only two scales, while the red meter display MR meter on the right side. It has risen to full at once. Then, the swordsman reach item RI appears on the red meter display MR on the right side when the tank is full, and the character display of "GET" is displayed. No item has appeared on the left white meter display MW that has not reached the full tank state.

In FIG. 32 (17), of the two meter displays, only the red meter display MR on the right side, which was in a full tank state, disappears, the character display of "GET" also disappears, and the swordsman reach item RI is the second decorative symbol. It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, in FIG. 32 (17), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown. In FIG. 32 (18), the third symbol pd3 is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon c disappears. After all, the stocked swordsman reach item RI was not used in the symbol variation display at the time of appearance. Therefore, the swordsman reach item RI here corresponds to a look-ahead icon that announces that it will develop into a swordsman reach, which is a kind of super reach production, in the next symbol variation display.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 32 step by step.

In FIG. 33 (19) following FIG. 32 (18), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the red first hold icon h1, which is the look-ahead notice mode of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 32 (18), is started. Low speed fluctuation is started in 3 symbol pd3. The variable icon c is also displayed in a red display mode, and usually functions as a notice. In addition, the white meter display MW on the left side, which is shown in FIG. 32 (18) and has accumulated up to two scales, is still displayed even when a new symbol variation display is started, and is carried over to the next symbol variation display. become. That is, with the meters accumulated, the continuous symbol fluctuation display is straddled.

In FIG. 33 (20), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 33 (21), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 33 (22), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes slower, the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable, and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also fluctuates from high speed to low speed. Has changed to.

In FIG. 33 (23), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and the shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, the white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that.

In FIG. 33 (24), the movement animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started, and the white meter rising item UpI moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 33 (25), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is raised by one scale. Further, at the timing of FIG. 33 (25), the reach state is entered, and the voice "reach" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 33 (25).

In FIG. 33 (26) after entering the reach state in this way, the swordsman reach item RI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M is activated, and the character display of "activate" is activated in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is displayed. In FIG. 33 (27), the left symbol that has fluctuated has moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that has also fluctuated has moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to. The white meter display MW displayed in the upper left also moves to the center position. Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (28), it has evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the background screen of the castle town is changed to the swordsman visit screen. The swordsman reach item RI disappears from the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 33 (28). The swordsman reach production started in this way is the same as the swordsman reach production shown in FIGS. 17 (22) and later, and a detailed explanation is omitted, but here, the white meter display MW was stored only up to 3 scales. Nevertheless, in FIG. 33 (33), a golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the character of the lord. In the example shown in FIG. 15, in the power-up from the white meter display MW in which only up to 3 scales were stored, the green aura icon OI1 was shown as shown in FIG. 15 (34). In the example, when multiple meter displays are displayed in the previous symbol fluctuation display, it is easier to hit the jackpot than when only one meter display is displayed, and the color of the aura icon is also the color with high expectation of jackpot. It becomes easy to become. Further, even when a plurality of meter displays are displayed, a meter display different from the white meter display MW (for example, a red meter display MR, etc.) is displayed rather than displaying only the default white meter display MW. Is displayed, it is easier to hit the jackpot, and the color of the aura icon is more likely to be a color with a higher expectation of the jackpot.

All of the meter displays so far have been of the increasing type, and the display was started in the empty state (the state where the meter is 0), but the meter display is between the empty state and the full tank state. The display may start in the state of (second state or fifth state).

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the display is started with the increase type meter display accumulated halfway.

In FIG. 34 (1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. .. In FIG. 34 (2), the definite display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variable icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown.

In FIG. 34 (3), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 1 (2) is started, and the low-speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. In addition, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed according to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and here, a character string such as "when the meter appears in a state where it is slightly accumulated" scrolls to the tutorial display ts. Is displayed.

In FIG. 34 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts to fluctuate at high speed, and the display is started in a state where the white meter display MW is accumulated from the beginning to the middle on the third symbol pd3. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 34 (4) is a state in which one scale is accumulated, and corresponds to an example of the second state. Further, the voice of "chance" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 34 (4) in accordance with the appearance of the meter display in the state where the meter is halfway accumulated.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 34 (5), the line "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the lord, and a mini item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 34 (6), the golden meter rising item UpIg appears, and the character cd of the lord is responsible for the golden meter rising item UpIg. In FIG. 34 (7), the character cd of the lord throws the golden meter rising item UpIg, and the golden meter rising item UpIg is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ing. In FIG. 34 (8), the golden meter rising item UpIg hits the white meter display MW and is displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 34 (9), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW changes from the state in which one scale is accumulated to the state in which the tank is full. Since the golden meter rise item UpIg is an item that raises the meter by at least 5 scales, if the display is started with the meter display halfway accumulated, when the golden meter rise item UpIg appears, The meter is full.

In the white meter display MW, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed when the state is changed from the half-stored state to the full tank state than when the half-stored state is not changed to the full tank state. Easy to display. Further, in the white meter display MW, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the display is started in the state where the display is halfway accumulated than when the display is started in the empty state. The same applies to the red meter display MR.

In the state where the meter is stored halfway (second state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item is increased. For example, the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item may be doubled as compared with the state where the meter is 0 (first state).

So far, the bar type (gauge type) meter display has been described, but the meter display may be a display indicating a numerical value.

FIG. 35 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of meter effect by meter display showing numerical values.

In FIG. 35 (1), the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed, and the tutorial display ts has a display content such as "when the meter is red". A white numerical meter display DW appears in the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 35 (2), and a sound effect (appears) from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 35 (2) in accordance with the appearance. Sound) is being output. The white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 35 (2) corresponds to an example of the first meter display, and the state is a state where the numerical value is 00%, and this state is an example of the first state. Equivalent to. Further, in FIG. 35 (2), the tutorial display ts is changed to have a display content such as "When the meter MAX is reached".

In FIG. 35 (3), the Yatsushiro accessory 224F, which is one of the movable means, falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In response to the operation of this movable means, as shown in FIG. 35 (4), a white meter raising item UpI appears. However, the falling Yatsushiro accessory 224F is located in front of the white meter rising item UpI, and a part of the white meter rising item UpI is relatively difficult to see. In FIG. 35 (5), the white meter-raising item UpI moves downward, the overlap with the falling Yatsushiro accessory 224F is eliminated, and the visibility of the meter-raising item UpI is improved. In FIG. 35 (6), the Yatsushiro accessory 224F rises and returns to the initial position, and the movement animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started. The white meter raising item UpI moves from the front side to a position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 35 (6) is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the white meter rising item shown in FIG. 35 (7). UpI is displayed at a position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW. The numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 35 (7) is temporarily difficult to see due to the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 35 (8), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, the visibility of the numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW is restored, and the numerical display rises from 00% to 10%. There is. The state of the white numerical meter display DW showing a numerical value of 10% shown in FIG. 35 (8) corresponds to an example of the second state.

In FIG. 35 (9), the general character 224Fb falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 35 (10), a changing ball icon cI appears at a position behind the general accessory 224Fb according to the operation of the general accessory 224Fb, which is a movable means. A part of the changing ball icon cI is relatively difficult to see. In FIG. 35 (11), the changing ball icon cI moves downward, the overlap with the falling general character 224Fb is eliminated, and the visibility of the changing ball icon cI is improved. In FIG. 35 (12), the shogun's accessory 224Fb rises and returns to the initial position, and the change ball icon cI moves from the front side to a position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. are doing. In FIG. 35 (13), the change ball icon cI disappears, and the white numerical meter display DW up to that point is changed to the red numerical meter display DR (corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display). That is, it has been replaced with a different type of meter display. The change in the meter display here is not performed by the accumulated numerical values, but by a change effect (here, an effect using the change ball icon cI). Further, the rate of increase of the numerical value changes depending on the relationship between the color of the numerical meter display and the color of the meter rising item, that is, the relationship between the type of the numerical meter display and the type of the item, as in the explanation using FIG. To do.

In FIG. 35 (14), there is one ball entering the first special figure start port 230, and the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 is in the first stage hs1 of the hold icon display area shown in FIG. Should be displayed. However, in FIG. 35 (15), the green meter rising item UpIm is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h1, and it is difficult to confirm the existence of the first hold icon h1. .. In FIG. 35 (16), the green meter raising item UpIm moves to a position where it overlaps the red numerical meter display DR from the front side, and in the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. The existence of the hold icon h1 can be confirmed. In addition, the hold icon may be displayed on the front side of the meter rising item.

The appearance of the meter rising item here is triggered by the winning of the first special figure starting port 230, but it may be triggered by the winning of the general drawing starting port accompanied by the prize ball, or accompanied by the prize ball. Regardless of whether or not it is, it may be triggered by passing the game ball at the normal drawing start gate, or it may be triggered by winning a prize at the second special drawing starting port 232 (electric chew), or there is only a prize ball. It may be triggered by winning a prize in the general winning opening 226, or it may be triggered by entering a ball in the out opening for production.

In addition, when the meter display is displayed, the item (not limited to the meter rising item, for example, a chance-up item, is not limited to the meter rising item, but is not limited to the meter rising item, for example, by winning a prize or winning a ball at the special figure start opening 230, 232, etc. CUI, swordsman reach item RI, etc.) are likely to appear.

In FIG. 35 (17), the green meter rise item UpIm disappears, and the numerical display of the red numerical meter display DR has risen from 10% to MAX. This MAX is, for example, a display representing 100%. The state of the red numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 35 (17) corresponds to an example of the sixth state.

In the meter effect shown in FIG. 35, when the numerical meter display is in the MAX display state, as shown in FIG. 35 (18), the character display of "Gekiatsu" is displayed so as to overlap the numerical meter display from the front side. .. The character display of "Gekiatsu" may be a display indicating that the jackpot in the fluctuation is rich or the jackpot is confirmed.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 35 changes according to the operation of the operating means.

In FIG. 36 (1), the third symbol pd3 is fluctuating at high speed, and in FIG. 36 (2), there is one ball entering the first special figure start port 230, and the hold shown in FIG. In the first stage hs1 of the icon display area, the display of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 is started. The first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 36 (3) is a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 displayed in red on a white round icon prompting an operation. That is, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is the so-called button hold display mode. Further, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the operation, and in FIG. 36 (4), the chance button 136 is operated.

In FIG. 36 (5), the white numerical meter display DW is changed to the red numerical meter display DR in response to the operation of the chance button 136. On the other hand, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is such that the button image 136a is eliminated and only the white round icon, that is, the default display mode. Here, when the chance button 136 is actually operated, the first hold icon h1 does not change to the look-ahead notice display mode even though the first hold icon h1 is the button hold display mode. , The meter display has been replaced with a different type of meter display. This is an effect of notifying the big hit in the change, and in the case of the look-ahead notice for notifying the big hit after the next change, the first hold icon h1 may change to the display mode of the look-ahead notice. The numerical meter display can also be used as a look-ahead notice (for example, carry-over to the next fluctuation after the MAX display is displayed).

In this way, when the meter display is displayed, the hold icon for holding the button is more likely to be displayed when winning or winning a ball at the special figure starting ports 230, 232, etc. than when the meter display is not displayed.

FIG. 37 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect different from the meter effect described so far.

In FIG. 37, as in the meter display described so far, a display representing a certain amount or number is displayed, but here, the number of characters appearing is used instead of the meter. The display using the number of appearances of this character corresponds to an example of the first meter display or an example of the fourth meter display.

In FIG. 37 (1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. .. In FIG. 37 (2), the final combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is confirmed, and the variable icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown.

In FIG. 37 (3), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 1 (2) is started, and the low-speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. In addition, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed according to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is "when a character appears". In FIG. 37 (4), the third symbol pd3 has started high-speed fluctuation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image that used to be the townscape of the castle town also disappears, and below the character display such as "Chance with all members", The silhouettes of the four characters are displayed in a horizontal row. The state shown in FIG. 37 (5) corresponds to an empty state (a state in which the meter is 0) in the meter display, that is, a first state or a fourth state, in which no character display is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 37 (6), the character display cd1 of Princess Chibi appears at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to "three more people". In FIG. 37 (7), the character display cd2 of the grandfather appears at the left end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to "two more people". In FIG. 37 (8), the character display cd3 of the princess appears on the left side of the character display cd1 of the princess Chibi, and the character display changes to "one more person". Each of the state shown in FIG. 37 (6), the state shown in FIG. 7 (7), and the state shown in FIG. 37 (8) corresponds to the second state or the fifth state.

In the example shown in FIG. 37, when three people are gathered, as shown in FIG. 37 (9), the character display of "failure" is displayed, and all the members cannot gather, and the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. The display device 208L returns to the background image of the castle town, and the display of the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is also resumed. Then, in FIG. 37 (11), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. ing. In FIG. 37 (12), the final display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variable icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is shown.

Normally, the color of the silhouette of the character is gray, but when the remaining one is left, the silhouette of the remaining one character may be displayed in red. In this case, the gathering of all four people is confirmed, and the display of the red silhouette corresponds to a notice of success. The state in which all four people are gathered corresponds to the full state on the meter display, that is, the third state or the sixth state. In this example of gathering characters, when all four players are gathered, the expectation of a big hit is very high, and it may be a big hit rich or a level higher than the big hit rich (for example, a big hit confirmed). In addition, even if all four people do not gather, it may be given a certain degree of expectation of a big hit without making a "failure", and even if only three people gather, there may be a big hit due to the fluctuation. Alternatively, there may be a big hit in the symbol variation display that starts after the variation.

FIG. 38 is a diagram stepwise showing an example when an error occurs during the display of the meter display.

38 (1) to (4) are the same as those of FIGS. 32 (1) to (4), and in FIG. 38 (5), a dish full tank error occurs, which is shown in FIG. An error display ER1 such as "Please pull out the ball" is displayed in the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (directly above the third symbol pd3). This error display ER1 hides the right half or more of the empty white meter display MW displayed in the upper left of the third symbol pd3. That is, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the white meter display MW from the front side. At least a part of the error display ER1 (for example, it may be all) may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part (for example, it may be) of the white meter display MW from the front side. Further, the error display ER1 may be a transparent display, and may overlap the meter display or the like from the front side, or the overlapping portion may be seen through.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 38 (6), the left symbol in the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in the same diagram (7), the left symbol temporarily stops. , The shaking fluctuation has started (first stop), but a part of the error display ER1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the left symbol (here, "decoration 7") during the temporary stop from the front side. It should be noted that at least a part (for example, all of them) of the error display ER1 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part (for example, all of them) of the decorative symbol from the front side. As described above, the error display ER1 is preferentially displayed over the meter display and is preferentially displayed over the third symbol pd3.

Further, in FIG. 38 (7), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 from the front side, and in FIG. 38 (8), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed. However, it has moved to a position where it overlaps the white meter display MW from the front side. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps a part of this red meter rising item UpIr from the front side. In FIG. 38 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr should disappear and the meter of the white meter display MW should be raised by 4 scales, but the error display ER1 hides the right half or more of the white meter display MW. It is not possible to check how far the meter has risen because it has been closed. However, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 38 (9), one note is raised by one scale, and the sounds of four notes are output here. It should be noted that the accumulated state (rising state) of the meter can be notified not only by the output sound from the speaker 120 but also by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as a lamp or a frame lamp around the decorative symbol display device.

In FIG. 38 (10), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and in FIG. 38 (11), the right symbol temporarily stops and starts shaking fluctuation (second stop), 2 The white meter rise item UpI, which is the first meter rise item, appears on the right symbol so as to overlap from the front side. As shown in FIG. 38 (12), the white meter raising item UpI is also moved to a position where it overlaps the white meter display MW from the front side. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps a part of this white meter rising item UpI from the front side. In FIG. 38 (13), the white meter rise item UpI should have disappeared, and the meter of the white meter display MW should have risen by one scale, but since the error display ER1 still overlaps, how far the meter rises. Although it is not possible to confirm whether or not this has been done, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 38 (13).

In FIG. 38 (14), a white meter rising item UpI appears without the mini item appearance notice shown in FIG. 26 (5) and the like, and the character cd of the lord is responsible for the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 38 (15), the character cd of the lord throws the white meter rise item UpI, and the white meter rise item UpI hits the white meter display MW and should be displayed above the white meter display MW. However, since the error display ER1 overlaps, it is difficult to confirm the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 38 (16), the white meter display MW should have been raised by one more scale due to the white meter rise item UpI, but since the error display ER1 still overlaps, how far the meter has risen. However, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 38 (16). Although not shown in the figure, the white meter display MW partly shown in FIG. 38 (16) is in a full tank state, and the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 38 (17) emits a full tank notification sound. It is being output.

In FIG. 38 (18), a pseudo-continuous notice item NI, which is a kind of mini item, appears at the right end of the white meter display MW in a full tank state, and at the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3. Although the character display of "GET" is displayed, the error display ER1 overlaps with both the pseudo-ream notice item NI and the character display of "GET", and it is difficult to recognize that the pseudo-ream notice item NI has been acquired. ..

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the error display ER1 shown in FIG. 38 step by step.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (19) following from FIG. 38 (18), the character display of "GET" disappears, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (20), the white meter display MW, which was previously full, changes to an empty state. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed in an empty state. In FIG. 39 (21), the pseudo-ream notice item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the pseudo-ream notice item NI is digested. The error display ER1 overlaps from the front side of the pseudo-continuous notice item NI that has moved to the position of the symbol, and it is difficult to see. In FIG. 39 (22), the fluctuation of the middle symbol, which has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3, becomes slow, and the middle symbol becomes recognizable. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 39 (23), the pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 1 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. The error display ER1 also overlaps the pseudo-series symbol (“continue”) from the front side, and the error display ER1 is preferentially displayed over the pseudo-series symbol.

In FIG. 39 (24), the error display ER1 is still displayed, and in this example, the ball removal operation has not been performed until the end. That is, if the ball removal operation is performed, the error display ER1 such as "Please remove the ball" is automatically hidden. In other words, when the error is resolved, the error display ER1 disappears automatically.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the player cannot visually confirm the state of the meter display (for example, the accumulation condition), so that the player who is concerned about the state of the meter display May be able to perform the ball removal operation early by displaying the error display ER1 on the meter display. In addition, since the meter display tends to be good for the player when accumulated, it is easy for the player's line of sight to always gather, and by displaying the error display ER1 overlaid on the meter display, the error display ER1 can be easily noticed. It also has an effect.

Further, in this example, a winning abnormality error that is more serious than the dish full tank error occurs, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (24) has a display size larger than the display size of the previous error display ER1. Then, the error display ER2 for notifying the occurrence of the winning abnormality error is displayed. This error display ER2 overlaps the error display ER1 in addition to the third symbol pd3 from the front side, and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3 and the error display ER1. By superimposing another error display ER2 on the error display ER1, it may be possible to convey that a serious error has occurred. The error displays do not necessarily overlap, and the more serious the error, the larger the display size may be. As an example of the serious error mentioned here, an error detected by the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, an error that cannot be resolved without calling a clerk, and an error display are automatically displayed even if the error is resolved. It is possible to enumerate errors that do not disappear (do not disappear). That is, all of the above-listed serious errors may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. Alternatively, the more serious the error is, the more it is listed above in the list shown in FIG. 124, which will be described later. That is, the most serious error is a magnetic (magnet) detection error. On the contrary, as an example of a minor error, an error detected by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, an error that can be resolved only by the player, and an error display when the error is resolved are displayed. It is possible to enumerate errors that are automatically hidden (disappeared). That is, all of the above-listed errors may be used as minor errors. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. Further, among the minor errors, there may be an error in which the meter display is preferentially displayed or the third symbol pd3 is preferentially displayed.

Further, the error display in FIGS. 38 and 39 is the same as the display of various errors described in FIGS. 124 to 126 described later. In particular, the notification content described as "liquid crystal display" in the "mode" in FIG. 126, which describes the notification mode of error notification of various errors, can be replaced with the error display in FIGS. 38 and 39.

In addition, the description to the effect that "a certain display overlaps another display from the front side" in the present specification should be read as "at least a part of a certain display overlaps at least a part of another display from the front side". It is possible that all of one display may overlap all of the other displays from the front, all of one display may overlap some of the other displays from the front, or one of the displays. A part may overlap all of the other displays from the front side, or a part of one display may overlap a part of another display from the front side. Further, the description to the effect that "a certain display overlaps another display from the front side" in the present specification can be read as the opposite, that is, a description such as "another display overlaps a certain display from the front side".

In the above description, the meter display is an increase type in which the display representing a certain amount or number only increases, but even if the meter display is an increase / decrease type in which the display representing a certain amount or number increases or decreases. Often, it may be of a reduction type that only reduces the indication of a certain amount or number.

The meter displays include the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, the red meter display MR, the rainbow meter display MN, the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, and the red numerical meter display DR. The display using the number of appearances of the characters shown in 37 has been described, but the display is not limited to these, and the display may indicate a certain amount or number of hands, or may be a display using the number of displayed figures or symbols. May be good.

Further, although the red meter display MR changes from the white meter display MW, the display of the red meter display MR itself may be started independently instead of the change from the white meter display MW. Alternatively, conversely, the red meter display MR may be a meter display that is not displayed unless it changes from the white meter display MW.

Further, the red meter display MR may change in a state where the white meter display MW is accumulated halfway, and the meter of the white meter display MW may be taken over and the display may be started in the state where the white meter display MW is accumulated halfway. Alternatively, the display of the red meter display MR itself in the state of being accumulated halfway may be started independently. In these cases, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when the display is started in a state where the display is halfway accumulated than when the display is started in an empty state.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the case where the red meter display MR is halfway accumulated than in the case where the white meter display MW is halfway accumulated.

In the above explanation, it is easy to confirm the big hit symbol in the end. The statement to that effect is "easier to win an advantageous jackpot than a disadvantageous jackpot." It can be replaced with a statement to that effect.

The example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (pachinko machine) has been described in detail above, but the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to the spinning machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko machine (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used, and a slot or the like (1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot, Jankyu) is fine. More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, a winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, and when a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a specified number of medals are paid out. It may be a reeling game machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are fired into the game area to play a game, and the player is given a predetermined game value based on the fact that the enclosed balls win a prize in the predetermined approach area. It may be an enclosed ball type game table that can be circulated by firing the enclosed ball that has won the prize in the predetermined approach area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game consoles, and will be described in more detail below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 40 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 40, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 into the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

FIG. 41 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 41), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged are stored on the outer peripheral surface of the slot machine 1000. It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a backlight (not shown in FIG. 41) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, the down winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that this game can be re-played (no medal insertion is required) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and two bets are inserted when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal slot 1034 is a slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034, and the insertion means that both are included. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is executed in which a lottery is performed to determine which of the plurality of types of combinations is won, and the slot machine 1000 is operated. It is decided whether to make the state relatively advantageous or relatively disadvantageous to the player.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1080 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 composed of two right doors 1063a and a left door 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) arranged on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and the left door 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). It has a structure that appears on the side). It should be noted that even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured so as to be able to display various production images and various game information. It may be a display device or the like. In addition, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 described above, as the operation means, the bet button 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop button 1037 to 1039 and the like, and the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And the effect button 1091 (an example of the second operating means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, the display panel 1070 displaying the title of the device or the like can be projected toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 41 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, a pushing operation can be performed, and the display panel 1070 functions as an operating means (button) in the same manner as the transparent portion 191 and is an example of the operating means (for example, the first). It corresponds to an example of one operating means) and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)].
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, and a red display means. Numerical meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.] is a means that can be displayed.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, and the meter display on the left side shown in FIGS. 31 (4) to (17). , The meter display on the left side shown in FIGS. 32 (4) to 32 (18), or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36].
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the fourth meter display [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 and the meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 31 (5) to (17). , The meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 32 (5) to 32 (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of characters appearing in FIG. 37]. ,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state [for example, the empty state (the state where the meter is 0)] to the third state [for example, the full state].
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state [for example, the empty state (the state where the meter is 0)] to the sixth state [for example, the full state].
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state than when the first meter display does not change to the third state while remaining in the first state. [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 25 and the example shown in FIG. 31], the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state than when the fourth meter display does not change to the sixth state while remaining in the fourth state. [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and the example shown in FIG. 32], the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Here, the first meter display may be an analog type meter display or a digital type meter display. The fourth meter display may be an analog type meter display or a digital type meter display. Further, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be meter displays having different display modes. Further, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displayed at the same time for a period of time. That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displays that are always displayed at the same time, or may be displayed at the same time. Alternatively, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displays that are displayed separately without the period.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of meter displays. Further, the first meter display may be a display that always changes from the first state to the third state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that always changes from the fourth state to the sixth state.

Also,
"The fourth meter display displayed in the fourth state is the sixth, rather than the probability that the first meter display displayed in the first state changes to the third state. It is configured so that the probability of changing to the state of
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the amount of one-time state change in the fourth meter display may be larger than the amount of one-time state change in the first meter display.

Further, when the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, it is more than when the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. , Finally, the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed.

Also,
"The first meter display is a display in which there is a case where the display is started in the first state [for example, in the case of FIG. 16 (4)].
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in the first state is changed [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 (9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the fourth meter display is a display in which the display may be started in the fourth state, and the fourth meter display in the fourth state is changed from the first meter display in the first state. It may change to the meter display of the above, or it may change from the first meter display of the first state to the fourth meter display of the fifth state.

Further, although the first meter display in the third state does not change to the fourth meter display, the first meter display in the second state changes to the fourth meter display. If you do, you may.

The first meter display may be a display in which the display is always started in the first state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display in which the display is always started in the fourth state. Further, when the display changes from the first meter display to the fourth meter display, the display always changes from the first meter display in the first state to the fourth meter display in the fourth state. Alternatively, the display may always change from the first meter display in the first state to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

Also,
"The fourth effect may be started while the first meter display in the first state is displayed.
The fourth effect is an effect of changing the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, a meter using the change ball icon cI shown in FIGS. 16 (6) to 16 (8). Change production],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth effect may be a so-called rank-up effect. More specifically, it may be an operation means effect (button effect), and the first meter display may be changed to the fourth meter display in response to the operation of the operation means.

The fourth effect may be always started while the first meter display in the first state is displayed.

Further, the first meter display is a display whose display is terminated by the fourth effect, and the fourth meter display is a display whose display is started by the fourth effect. May be good. That is, the first meter display disappears and the display of the fourth meter display starts. For example, when the first effect is started while the first meter display in the first state is displayed and the first effect is completed, the first meter display disappears and the first effect is displayed. It may be configured so that the display of the four meter display is started.

Also,
"The fourth effect is an effect using the fourth character.
When the fourth character is displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable display of decorative symbols by the display means [for example, FIGS. 16 (1) and 16 (2) and (3) and later). ] Is a certain character [for example, the character cd of the lord],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the "variable display of the decorative symbol" means that the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, and includes the display of the variable display when the variable display is started again with the stop display in between. Further, the period from the start of the variation display to the final display can be regarded as one variation. Further, "straddling" means sandwiching a period of stop display (fluctuation stop period) of the decorative symbol. Further, the fourth character may be a character that is continuously displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be a character that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the character may be continuously displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, may be a character that temporarily disappears in the middle, or may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. It may be a character that is present.

The fourth character may be a character that is always displayed across the continuous variable display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
"The first meter display may be displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol by the display means [for example, FIG. 20 (1) and FIGS. 20 (8) to (9). ) Is the white meter display MW],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first meter display may be a display in which the display may be started during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display may be started during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display may be continued until the stop display is displayed.

The first meter display may be a display that is always displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Further, further, the first meter display is a display in which the state may change during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol by the display means, and the fourth meter display is the display of the decorative symbol by the display means. It may be a display in which the state may change during the display of the variable display. The first meter display may be a display whose state always changes during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the fourth meter display is always displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol. The display may change state.

Further, the fourth meter display is a display in which the display may be started during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol by the display means, and the fourth meter display is the display of the decorative symbol by the display means. When the display is started during the display of the variable display, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be stopped and displayed than the lost symbol when the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. That is, the display of the fourth meter display is started when the variable display of the decorative symbol whose the jackpot symbol is stopped is displayed rather than when the variable display of the decorative symbol whose the lost symbol is stopped is displayed. Cheap. When the display is started, the fourth meter display may be a display in which the display is always started during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern a plurality of times.
The variation display of one of the plurality of decorative symbol variation displays is the variation display of the first decorative symbol [for example, the variation display stopped and displayed in FIG. 20 (1)].
The variable display of one of the plurality of decorative symbol variation displays is the second decorative symbol variation display [for example, the variation display of FIGS. 20 (3) to (9)].
The variable display of one of the plurality of decorative symbol variation displays is the fourth decorative symbol variation display [for example, the variation display of FIGS. 20 (10) to 21 (21)].
The variable display of one of the plurality of decorative symbol variations is the fifth decorative symbol variation display [for example, the variation display of FIGS. 21 (22) to 22 (42)].
The variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol are continuous variable displays of the decorative symbol.
When the state of the first meter display is different between the variation display of the first decorative symbol and the variation display of the second decorative symbol [for example, the first meter display is empty at the timing of FIG. 20 (1). On the other hand, when the meter rises at the timing of FIG. 20 (7)] is displayed.
The variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol are continuous variable displays of the decorative symbol.
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may differ between the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol [for example, empty at the timing of FIG. 21 (19). The meter is rising at the timing of FIG. 21 (29), whereas it is in the state of],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is completed, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started, and after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is completed, the fourth decorative symbol is completed. After the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol is completed and the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol is completed, the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol is started, and after the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol is completed, the sixth The variable display of the decorative symbol of is may be started. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed when the variation display of the fifth decorative symbol is completed, or the jackpot symbol may be stopped when the variation display of the sixth decorative symbol is completed. It may be displayed.

In addition, the first meter display may be a display in which the state is always different between the variation display of the first decorative symbol and the variation display of the second decorative symbol, and the fourth meter display is The variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol may be displayed in different states without fail.

Also,
"The fourth meter display is a display in which the display is started in the fourth state [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 (9) or the like],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

As described above, the fourth state may be an empty state.

By doing so, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the change to the sixth state (for example, the meter is full) from the time when the meter appears or changes.

The fourth meter display may be a display in which the display may be started in the fourth state, or may be a display in which the display is always started in the fourth state. ..

Also,
"The fourth meter display is from the fourth state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 16 (9)] to the fifth state [for example, the state in which the three scales shown in FIG. 16 (14) are accumulated]. It is a display that may change to
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 16 (18)].
The fourth meter display is a display in which the display may be started in the fourth state [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 (9) or the like].
The fourth meter display is a display in which the display may be started in the fifth state.
When the fourth meter display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth meter display is more likely to change to the sixth state when the display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state. It may be an embodiment.

Further, the fourth meter display may be a display in which the display may not be started in the fifth state, or may be a display in which the display may be started in the fifth state. May be good.

Further, the fifth state may be a state representing a fifth quantity or number, and the fifth quantity or number is a combination of the fourth quantity or number and the sixth quantity or number. It may be an amount or number in between.

The fourth meter display may be a display in which the display always starts in the fourth state, or may be a display in which the display always changes from the fourth state to the fifth state. Further, the display may always change from the fifth state to the sixth state. Alternatively, the fourth meter display may be a display in which the display always starts in the fifth state, or may be a display in which the display always changes from the fifth state to the sixth state. ..

Also,
"The first meter display is from the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 25 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state accumulated up to one scale shown in FIG. 25 (9)]. It is a display that may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 25 (12)].
The first meter display is a display in which the display may be started in the first state [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 25 (4) or the like].
The first meter display is a display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 34 (4)] in which the display may be started in the second state.
When the first meter display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first meter display is more likely to change to the third state when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state. It may be an embodiment.

Further, the first meter display may be a display that may or may not start the display in the third state, or may start the display in the third state. May be good.

Further, the second state may be a state representing a second quantity or number, and the second quantity or number is a combination of the first quantity or number and the third quantity or number. It may be an amount or number in between.

The first meter display may be a display in which the display always starts in the first state, or may be a display in which the display always changes from the first state to the second state. Further, the display may always change from the second state to the third state. Alternatively, the first meter display may be a display in which the display always starts in the second state, or may be a display in which the display always changes from the second state to the third state. ..

Also,
"The first meter display is from the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 25 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state accumulated up to one scale shown in FIG. 25 (9)]. It is a display that may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 25 (12)].
The fourth meter display changes from the fourth state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 16 (9)] to the fifth state [for example, the state in which the three scales shown in FIG. 16 (14) are accumulated]. It is a display that may change,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 16 (18)].
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the fourth meter display is in the fifth state than when the first meter display is in the second state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first meter display may be a display in which the display may be started in the first state, and the first meter display may start the display in the second state. The fourth meter display may be a display that may be started, or the fourth meter display may be a display that may start the display in the fourth state. , The display may be started in the fifth state.

Further, the case where the first meter display is started in the fifth state is finally a big hit than the case where the display is started in the second state. The design may be easily displayed.

Here, the display start pattern of the first meter display is summarized. The first meter display is a display in which the display is started in the first state and may change to the second state, and the display is started in the first state and the second state. It is a display that may change to the third state through the above, a display that starts in the first state and may change to the third state, and is displayed in the second state. Is started and may change to the third state, the display is started in the first state, the fourth state is passed, and then the fifth state is passed to the sixth state. It is a display that may change to the fourth state, the display is started in the fourth state, and the display may change to the fifth state, the display is started in the fourth state, and the sixth state. It is a display that may change to the state of, the display is started in the fourth state, the display may change to the sixth state through the fifth state, and the fifth state. The display is started at, and may change to the sixth state. The same applies to the display start pattern of the fourth meter display.

It is not necessary that the display is started in the fourth state and does not change to the first state. Further, the display may be started in the second state and may not change to the first state.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons.
The icon of one of the plurality of types of icons is the first icon.
The first meter display is described by displaying the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 19 (c)] the first time [for example, three times]. It is a display that changes from the first state to the third state.
The fourth meter display is described by displaying the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 19 (i)] a fourth time [for example, once]. It is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state.
The fourth number is less than the first number,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the fact that the state changes with a small number of times means that the amount of change at one time is large.

Also,
"The first meter display is a display that may be started by the first effect [for example, the effect by the mini game shown in FIG. 24].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect may be the acquisition effect of the first meter display.

The first meter display may be a display in which the display is always started by the first effect.

Also,
"The display means can display the hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h1, the second hold icon h2, etc.] according to the number of hold balls in the hold display area [for example, the hold frame UI'shown in FIG. 26]. Means,
The first meter display is a display in which a part or the whole overlaps with the hold display area.
The fourth meter display is a display in which a part or all of the display overlaps with the hold display area.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display area may be an icon display area. Further, for example, the first meter display is a display displayed integrally with the hold display area, and the fourth meter display is also a display displayed integrally with the hold display area. There may be.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a hold icon corresponding to the number of hold balls in the hold display area. Further, the display means may be a means for always displaying the hold icon in the hold display area when the hold icon is displayed.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of meter displays is the seventh meter display [for example, the rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 19 (m) and 19 (n)].
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, when the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot may be rich. Further, when the seventh meter display changes from the seventh state [for example, empty state] to the ninth state [for example, full tank state], even if the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. Good. Further, the seventh meter display may be a display that always changes from the seventh state to the ninth state.

Further, when the first meter display changes to the third state, the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the first meter display changes to the third state. When the jackpot symbol is always confirmed and the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state, the fourth meter display is displayed on the display means when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display, and is
The notice display is a display in which the display may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state [for example, the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 26].
The notice display is a display that may start when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state [for example, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 17].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, as the notice display, a pseudo continuous effect display, an operation means related display, a notice display for a big hit (normal notice display or a look-ahead notice display), a notice display for a production (for example, a super reach effect), and the like are listed. Can be done. That is, the notice display may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a pseudo continuous effect display, and the pseudo continuous effect display may start to be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state. It is a display, and the pseudo-continuous effect display may be a display in which the display may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the pseudo continuous effect display may be a display in which the display is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the pseudo continuous effect display is the fourth meter. The display may be started whenever the display changes to the sixth state.

The notice display may be a display in which the display is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and in the notice display, the fourth meter display is the sixth. The display may be started whenever the state changes to.

Here, also, the operation means provided at a position where the player can operate is provided, the display means is a means capable of displaying the operation means-related display, and the operation means-related display is a display related to the operation means. The operation means-related display is a display in which the display may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means-related display is the fourth meter display. The display may be started when is changed to the sixth state. The operation means-related display may be a display imitating the operation means, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display), or an operation of the operation means. It may be a display relating to the validity period (more specifically, a display of the remaining period of the operation validity period (remaining period display)), or a display reminiscent of the operation means, or these displays. It may be a combination of, or it may be a display including at least one of these displays. Further, the operation means-related display may be a display in which the display is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means-related display may be a display in which the fourth meter display is started. May be a display in which the display is always started when is changed to the sixth state.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying the normal notice display, and the normal notice display is a variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the display of the normal notice display is started. The normal notice display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the normal notice display is the first. The display may be started when the meter display of the fourth changes to the sixth state. Here, the normal notice display may be, for example, a super reach effect display. Further, the normal notice display may be a display in which the display is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and in the normal notice display, the fourth meter display is the display. The display may be started whenever the state changes to the sixth state.

Also,
"The first state in the first meter display is a state representing the first quantity or number [for example, an empty state or vice versa, a full state].
The third state in the first meter display is a state representing a third quantity or number [for example, a full tank state or vice versa, an empty state].
The fourth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a fourth quantity or number [for example, an empty state or vice versa, a full state].
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a sixth quantity or number [for example, a full tank state or vice versa, an empty state].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first quantity or number and the third quantity or number are different quantities or numbers, and the fourth quantity or number and the sixth quantity or number are different quantities or numbers. You may.

Also, the third quantity or number is less than the first quantity or number, and the sixth quantity or number is less than the fourth quantity or number. It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display decreases, and the fourth meter display is the above. The case where the fourth state changes to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display decreases.

Further, the third quantity or number is a larger amount or number than the first quantity or number, and the sixth quantity or number is larger than the fourth quantity or number. It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display increases, and the fourth meter display is the above. The case where the fourth state changes to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display increases.

Further, the first state is a full tank state, the third state is an empty state, the fourth state is a full tank state, and the sixth state is an empty state. May be present, or conversely, the first state is an empty state, the third state is a full tank state, the fourth state is an empty state, and the sixth state. The state may be a full tank state.

Further, the first meter display may change from the fourth state [for example, the meter frame is red and empty] to the sixth state [for example, the meter frame is red and full]. There is also a case where the fourth meter display changes from the first state [for example, the meter frame is white and empty] to the third state [for example, the meter frame is white and full]. is there.

Also,
"The first meter display and the fourth meter display are partially [for example, only the meter frame mf] or all colors are different [for example, white and red, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the different colors make it possible to distinguish between the first meter display and the fourth meter display. The colors may be continuously different. Alternatively, the colors may be different for a certain period of time. That is, the color may change and may differ between the first state and the fourth state, or may differ between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, the second state and the fifth state, which will be described later, may be different. Further, it is sufficient that the colors when the display is started are different from each other. Alternatively, the colors at the end (disappearance) of the display may be different from each other.

Further, the first meter display includes a frame display and an increase / decrease display that increases / decreases in the frame display, and the fourth meter display increases / decreases in the frame display and the frame display. The increase / decrease display is included, and the first meter display and the fourth meter display may differ only in the color of the frame display, or may differ only in the color of the increase / decrease display. , The colors of both the frame display and the increase / decrease display may be different. The frame display may be circular or rectangular, and the shape is not limited.

The colors of only a part of the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be different.

Also,
"The first meter display and the fourth meter display are different in size.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by the difference in size (display size). The size may be continuously different. Alternatively, the size may be different only for a certain period of time. That is, the magnitude may change and may differ between the first state and the fourth state, or may differ between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, the second state and the fifth state, which will be described later, may be different. In addition, the sizes when the display is started may be different from each other. Alternatively, the sizes at the end (disappearance) of the display may be different from each other.

Also,
"The display position of the first meter display and the fourth meter display are different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different display positions. The display position may be continuously different. Alternatively, the display position may be different only for a certain period of time. That is, the display position may change, and may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, the second state and the fifth state, which will be described later, may be different. Further, it is sufficient that the display positions are different from each other when the display is started. Alternatively, the display positions when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

The "meter display" in the above description may be replaced with a "display representing a certain quantity or number", the "first meter display" is the "first display", and the "fourth meter display" is " It may be replaced with "fourth display".

In the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)].
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, and a red display means. Numerical meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.] is a means that can be displayed.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 16 and 19, the left side shown in FIGS. 31 (4) to (17). The meter display of the above, the meter display on the left side shown in FIGS. 32 (4) to 18 (18), or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36].
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the fourth meter display [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 and the meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 31 (5) to (17). , The meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 32 (5) to 32 (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of characters appearing in FIG. 37]. ,
When the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state [for example, shown in FIG. 25. In the case of an example or the example shown in FIG. 31,] is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily.
When the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state [for example, FIGS. 16 and 16 and FIG. In the case of the example shown in 17 and the example shown in FIG. 32], the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end.
The fourth meter display displayed in the empty state is configured to be more easily changed to the full tank state than the first meter display displayed in the empty state.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons.
One of the plurality of types of icons is the first icon [for example, the icon of the white meter rising item UpI].
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise by the first amount [for example, one scale].
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise by a fourth amount [for example, by 3 scales].
The fourth amount is a larger amount than the first amount.
The fourth effect may be started while the first meter display is displayed.
The fourth effect is an effect in which the fourth display [for example, the character cd of the lord] changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, FIGS. 16 (6) to 16 (6) to FIG. 9) Meter change effect using the change ball icon cI].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb].
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise by a second amount [for example, two scales].
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise by a fifth amount [for example, by 6 scales].
The fifth amount is a larger amount than the second amount.
The second amount [for example, two scales] is larger than the first amount [for example, one scale].
The fifth amount [for example, six scales] is larger than the fourth amount [for example, three scales].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)].
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, and a red display means. Numerical meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.] is a means that can be displayed.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 16 and 19, the left side shown in FIGS. 31 (4) to (17). The meter display of the above, the meter display on the left side shown in FIGS. 32 (4) to 18 (18), or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36].
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the fourth meter display [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 and the meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 31 (5) to (17). , The meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 32 (5) to 32 (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of characters appearing in FIG. 37]. ,
When the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state [for example, shown in FIG. 25. In the case of an example or the example shown in FIG. 31,] is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily.
When the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state [for example, FIGS. 16 and 16 and FIG. In the case of the example shown in 17 and the example shown in FIG. 32], the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end.
The fourth meter display displayed in an empty state is configured to be more likely to change to a full tank state than the first meter display displayed in an empty state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Also,
"The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed [for example, the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 (9)].
The size and display position of the first meter display and the fourth meter display are the same [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 16 (4) and the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 (9). ],
The first meter display and the fourth meter display differ in some or all colors.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display on a certain background screen [for example, the background of a castle town] [for example, FIG. 16 (4)].
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fourth meter display on the certain background screen [for example, FIG. 16 (9)].
The certain background screen is a background screen in a certain production stage [for example, a castle town stage].
In the certain effect stage, if the first meter display is not displayed, the fourth meter display may be displayed [for example, when shown in FIGS. 16 (9) to 16 (25)]. If the fourth meter display is not displayed, there is a case where the first meter display is displayed [for example, when shown in FIGS. 16 (4) to (8)]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"It is configured so that the first meter display in the empty state may change to display the fourth meter display in the empty state [for example, FIGS. 16 (6) to 16 (6) to FIG. (9)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons.
One of the plurality of types of icons is the first icon [for example, the icon of the white meter rising item UpI].
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise at the first rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase of one scale].
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise at the fourth rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase of three scales].
The fourth rate of increase is a higher rate than the first rate of increase.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"When a game ball wins a prize opening [for example, 1st special drawing start port 230, 2nd special figure start opening 232, normal drawing start opening, general winning opening 226], the first icon may be displayed. It is configured to be,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb].
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise at the second rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase of two scales].
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise at a fifth rate of increase [for example, a rate of increase of 6 scales].
The fifth rate of increase is a higher rate than the second rate of increase.
The second rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase for two scales] is higher than the first rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase for one scale].
The fifth rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase for six scales] is higher than the fourth rate of increase [for example, the rate of increase for three scales].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The fourth effect may be started while the first meter display is displayed.
The fourth effect is an effect in which the fourth character [for example, the character cd of the lord] changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, FIGS. 16 (6) to 16 (6) to FIG. 9) Meter change effect using the change ball icon cI].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The fourth character may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of decorative symbols [for example, FIGS. 16 (1) and (2), and (3) and subsequent figures." ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first icon is an icon that may appear at the display position of the fourth character [for example, the white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 26 (6)].
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the first meter display [for example, FIG. 26 (8)].
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the fourth meter display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon related to a symbol variation display.
The second production may start with the hold icon displayed,
The second effect is an effect in which the fourth character changes the display mode of the hold icon [for example, the example shown in FIG. 18].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The display means can display the hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h1, the second hold icon h2, etc.] according to the number of hold balls in the hold display area [for example, the hold frame UI'shown in FIG. 26]. Means,
The first meter display is a display in which a part or the whole overlaps with the hold display area.
The fourth meter display is a display in which a part or all of the display overlaps with the hold display area.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of error displays [for example, display of various errors shown in FIGS. 124 to 126].
A certain error display [for example, a dish full tank error display] among the plurality of types of error displays is a display in which a part or all of the error display may overlap a part or all of the first meter display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The certain error display is a display that may overlap with the portion of the first meter display indicating the accumulation state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"Equipped with a storage plate that can store game balls,
The certain error display is a dish full tank error display, and is
The plate full tank error display is a display that urges the player to eject the game ball from the storage plate [for example, a character display such as "please pull out the ball"].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first meter display may be displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol by the display means [for example, FIG. 20 (1) and FIGS. 20 (8) to (9). ) Is the white meter display MW],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern a plurality of times.
The variable display of one of the variable display of the decorative symbol of the plurality of times is the variable display of the first decorative symbol [for example, the variable display stopped and displayed in FIG. 20 (1)].
The variable display of one of the variable display of the decorative symbol of the plurality of times is the variable display of the second decorative symbol [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 20 (3) to (9)].
The variable display of the decorative symbol of one of the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 20 (10) to 21 (21)].
The variable display of the decorative symbol of one of the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 21 (22) to 22 (42)].
The variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol are continuous variable displays of the decorative symbol.
When the state of the first meter display is different between the variation display of the first decorative symbol and the variation display of the second decorative symbol [for example, the first meter display is empty at the timing of FIG. 20 (1). On the other hand, when the meter rises at the timing of FIG. 20 (7)] is displayed.
The variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol are continuous variable displays of the decorative symbol.
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may differ between the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol [for example, empty at the timing of FIG. 21 (19). The meter is rising at the timing of FIG. 21 (29), whereas it is in the state of],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first meter display is a display that may be started by the first effect [for example, the effect by the mini game shown in FIG. 24].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display, and is
The notice display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to a full tank state [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 26].
The notice display is a display that may start when the fourth meter display changes to a full tank state [for example, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 17].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)].
Operation means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, and a white numerical meter shown in FIGS. 35 and 36. Display DW, red numerical meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.]
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the display of the meter rising item].
The display means is the first meter display as the meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 16 and 19, the left meter display shown in FIGS. 31 (4) to (17), and FIG. 32. It is a means capable of displaying the meter display on the left side shown in (4) to (18), or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36.
The display means is a second meter display as the meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 31 (5) to (17), and FIG. 32 (5). It is a means capable of displaying the meter display on the right side shown in FIG. (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of characters appearing shown in FIG. 37.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises [for example, one scale rises].
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises [for example, rises by 3 scales].
When the meter of the first meter display is full, a special game that is more advantageous for the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full [for example, a big hit game, a small hit game, a probability change With big hit game, etc.] is easy to start,
When the meter of the second meter display is full, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter of the second meter display is not full [for example, a big hit game, a small hit game, a probability change With big hit game, etc.] is easy to start,
The first display may be displayed depending on the operation of the operating means [for example, FIG. 101 (17)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.
Also,
"Display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)].
Operation means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, and a white numerical meter shown in FIGS. 35 and 36. Display DW, red numerical meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.]
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the display of the meter rising item].
The display means is the first meter display as the meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 16 and 19, the left meter display shown in FIGS. 31 (4) to (17), and FIG. 32. It is a means capable of displaying the meter display on the left side shown in (4) to (18), or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36.
The display means is a second meter display as the meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 31 (5) to (17), and FIG. 32 (5). It is a means capable of displaying the meter display on the right side shown in FIG. (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of characters appearing shown in FIG. 37.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises [for example, one scale rises].
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises [for example, rises by 3 scales].
When the meter of the first meter display is full, a special game that is more advantageous for the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full [for example, a big hit game, a small hit game, a probability change With big hit game, etc.] is easy to start,
When the meter of the second meter display is full, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter of the second meter display is not full [for example, a big hit game, a small hit game, a probability change With big hit game, etc.] is easy to start,
The first meter display may change to the second meter display in response to the operation of the operating means [for example, FIG. 36 (5)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
Also,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, and a white numerical meter shown in FIGS. 35 and 36. Display DW, red numerical meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.]
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the display of the meter rising item].
The display means is the first meter display as the meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 16 and 19, the left meter display shown in FIGS. 31 (4) to (17), and FIG. 32. It is a means capable of displaying the meter display on the left side shown in (4) to (18), or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36.
The display means is a second meter display as the meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 31 (5) to (17), and FIG. 32 (5). It is a means capable of displaying the meter display on the right side shown in FIG. (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of characters appearing shown in FIG. 37.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises [for example, one scale rises].
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises [for example, rises by 3 scales].
When the meter of the first meter display is full, a special game that is more advantageous for the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full [for example, a big hit game, a small hit game, a probability change With big hit game, etc.] is easy to start,
When the meter of the second meter display is full, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter of the second meter display is not full [for example, a big hit game, a small hit game, a probability change With big hit game, etc.] is easy to start,
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a change display that changes the first meter display to the second meter display [for example, a meter change using the change ball icon cI shown in FIGS. 16 (6) to 16 (9). Display of production],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
Also,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, and a white numerical meter shown in FIGS. 35 and 36. Display DW, red numerical meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.]
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the display of the meter rising item].
The display means is the first meter display as the meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 16 and 19, the left meter display shown in FIGS. 31 (4) to (17), and FIG. 32. It is a means capable of displaying the meter display on the left side shown in (4) to (18), or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36.
The display means is a second meter display as the meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 31 (5) to (17), FIG. 32 (5). It is a means capable of displaying the meter display on the right side shown in FIG. (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of characters appearing shown in FIG. 37].
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises [for example, one scale rises].
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises [for example, rises by 3 scales].
When the meter of the first meter display is full, a special game that is more advantageous for the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full [for example, a big hit game, a small hit game, a probability change With big hit game, etc.] is easy to start,
When the meter of the second meter display is full, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter of the second meter display is not full [for example, a big hit game, a small hit game, a probability change With big hit game, etc.] is easy to start,
When the game ball wins a winning opening [for example, the first special drawing starting port 230, the second special drawing starting port 232], the first display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
Also,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, and a white numerical meter shown in FIGS. 35 and 36. Display DW, red numerical meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.]
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the display of the meter rising item].
The display means is the first meter display as the meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 16 and 19, the left meter display shown in FIGS. 31 (4) to (17), and FIG. 32. It is a means capable of displaying the meter display on the left side shown in (4) to (18), or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36.
The display means is a second meter display as the meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 31 (5) to (17), and FIG. 32 (5). It is a means capable of displaying the meter display on the right side shown in FIG. (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of characters appearing shown in FIG. 37.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises [for example, one scale rises].
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises [for example, rises by 3 scales].
When the meter of the first meter display is full, a special game that is more advantageous for the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full [for example, a big hit game, a small hit game, a probability change With big hit game, etc.] is easy to start,
When the meter of the second meter display is full, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter of the second meter display is not full [for example, a big hit game, a small hit game, a probability change With big hit game, etc.] is easy to start,
When the game ball passes through the gate [for example, the normal drawing start gate], the first display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, and a white numerical meter shown in FIGS. 35 and 36. Display DW, red numerical meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.]
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the display of the meter rising item].
The display means is the first meter display as the meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 16 and 19, the left meter display shown in FIGS. 31 (4) to (17), and FIG. 32. It is a means capable of displaying the meter display on the left side shown in (4) to (18), or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36.
The display means is a second meter display as the meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 and the like, a meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 31 (5) to (17), and FIG. 32 (5). It is a means capable of displaying the meter display on the right side shown in FIG. (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of characters appearing shown in FIG. 37.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises [for example, one scale rises].
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises [for example, rises by 3 scales].
When the meter with the first meter display is full, it is easier to hit the jackpot than when the meter with the first meter display is not full.
When the meter with the second meter display is full, it is easier to hit the jackpot than when the meter with the second meter display is not full.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Also,
"When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the amount of increase of the meter of the first meter display is the first amount of increase [for example, one scale. Amount of increase]
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the amount of increase of the meter of the second meter display is the second amount of increase [for example, an increase of three scales. Amount]
The second amount of increase is larger than the amount of the first increase,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The display of one of the plurality of types of display is the second display.
The second display is a change display that changes the first meter display to the second meter display [for example, a meter change using the change ball icon cI shown in FIGS. 16 (6) to 16 (9). Display of production],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"Operating means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operating means, etc.]
The first display may be displayed depending on the operation of the operating means [for example, FIG. 101 (17)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"Operating means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operating means, etc.]
The first meter display may change to the second meter display in response to the operation of the operating means [for example, FIG. 36 (5)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the game ball wins a prize opening [for example, the first special drawing start opening 230, the second special drawing start opening 232], the first display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the game ball passes through the gate [for example, the normal drawing start gate], the first display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the meter of the meter display is full, a certain effect [for example, pseudo-continuous effect] may be started [for example, FIG. 26 (16)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"A notification suggesting that the certain effect is started when the meter of the meter display is full before the meter of the meter display is full [for example, the character display of" continue when the meter is full ". ] May be performed [for example, FIG. 26 (9)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"After the meter of the meter display is full, the meter display of an empty meter may be displayed [for example, FIG. 26 (18)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
One of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display.
One of the plurality of types of meter displays is the fourth meter display.
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states.
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is the first state.
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is the third state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state.
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states.
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is the fourth state.
The state of one of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is the sixth state.
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state.
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, it is more than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. , High expectations for big hits,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. , High expectations for big hits,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
In the game table described in Appendix 1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is higher than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. high,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern.
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game console described in any one of Appendix 1 to 3.
The fourth meter display is a display that starts to be displayed in the fourth state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game console described in any one of Appendix 1 to 4.
The state of one of the plurality of states in the first meter display is the second state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state.
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state.
The first meter display is a display that may be started in the first state.
The first meter display is a display that may be started in the second state.
The expectation of a big hit is higher when the first meter display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 5.
Of the plurality of types of displays, one display is the first icon.
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by displaying the first icon the first number of times.
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state by displaying the first icon a second number of times.
The second number is less than the first number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 6.
One of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display.
The third state in the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the third state is displayed.
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the sixth state is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game console described in Appendix 7.
The second state of the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the second state is displayed.
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the fifth state is displayed.
The jackpot display is more likely to be displayed when the fifth state is displayed than when the second state is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 8.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a pseudo-continuous effect.
The pseudo-continuous notice is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The pseudo-continuous notice is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 9.
One of the plurality of types of displays is an operation promotion display of the operation means.
The operation promotion display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The operation promotion display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 10.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a certain effect.
The certain effect is an effect in which the jackpot display is likely to be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the certain effect is displayed.
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game table characterized by that.

It should be noted that the above description of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the variable display of the symbol (more specifically, the special symbol), and the description of the stop display of the decorative symbol is the symbol (more specifically). Specifically, it may be a stop display (special figure).

In addition, "may be" in the above may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", and "○○ is possible" in the above. It may be replaced with "must be XX".

Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be changed to another embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendix, etc. are applied to other embodiments, the embodiment, and the modification. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, appendices, etc., it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, other game consoles that can be applied to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a spinning machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 42 to 128. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 128 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 42 to 128, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 42 to 128 are shown. In the description using FIG. 128, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 128 are prioritized.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 42. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facility or the like) provided in a game machine installation store. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker that outputs bass) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, it is electrically connected (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102). Is provided with a pair of floating connectors, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are connected), and the sound can be output from the speaker 120. Become.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (game store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a treble speaker that outputs treble) and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Has been done. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED light source is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode fluorescent lamp, or the like that emits light may be referred to as a lamp, and the one that emits light is an example of a light emitting means. Corresponds to.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. A door sensor with a ball storage plate that detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened may be provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, the chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 44) by the operation of the player, and the chance button 136 that is built in the chance button 136. The chance button lamp 138 that emits light, the ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and the card unit is instructed to return the player's balance. It includes a return operation button 142 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. In this operation key unit 137, the up and down keys of the up key and the down key, and the left and right keys of the left key and the right key are arranged as cross keys, and the enter key is arranged at the center of the cross keys. There is. In addition, a cancel key is also arranged below the cross key to the right. The pachinko machine 100 does not have a door 108 with a ball storage plate, and the front frame door 106 has an upper plate 126, a lower plate 128, a ball removal button 130, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball launch handle 134, a chance button 136, and a chance button. All or part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the lower plate full tank detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided.

When the front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown) and the front frame door 106 (may include the door 108 with a ball storage plate) is open to the main body 104. If the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the effect means (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the chance) provided on the front frame door 106. Button lamp 138. If the front frame door 106 is provided with an effect movable body, the effect movable body is also included), the display of the ball rental display unit, the chance button 136, the ball rental operation button 140, the return operation button 142 and It is configured so that the operation key unit 137 can be operated and the lower plate full tank detection sensor can be detected.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 in which the power supply board 182 constituting the power supply control unit 660 described later is housed is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102 and the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray) are attached. The door 108 may be included), and the game board 200 is configured so that the power supply voltage is supplied from the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means. The ball launch handle 134 has a launch stop switch (not shown) that invalidates the launch (injection) of the game ball accompanying the operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the operation of the player, and the player touches the ball launch handle 134. It is equipped with a touch sensor capable of detecting. It should be noted that a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while being operated may be provided. Further, when the touch sensor detects that the ball launch handle 134 has been operated from the unoperated state during the display of the demo screen, a dedicated effect may be performed. .. For example, an effect display by a display means, an effect sound by a sound output means, a light emission effect by various decorative LEDs and a light guide plate, and an effect movable body (provided on a game board or a frame) can be mentioned. The production may be performed by four types of production means, or may be performed by one or more types of production means. Further, even if the same type of production means is used, there may be a production means that performs a dedicated production and a production means that does not. (For example, the production movable body of the frame performs a dedicated production, but the production movable body of the game board does not perform a dedicated production, or the production movable body A of the game board performs a dedicated production, but the production movable body B of the game board. Does not perform a dedicated production, etc. This example can be applied to other production means.)
The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 42, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 44.

FIG. 43 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 42 as viewed from the rear side.

The upper part of the back surface of the main body 104 of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls and the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole formed at the bottom of the slingshot to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the rear view is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is provided on the main body 104 and is detachable from the main body 104, and when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152 are temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 45) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 45) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 45) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 45). (See FIG. 45), a payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 (FIG. 45) for performing control processing related to launching a game ball. A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 45), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged. The main board case 158 in which the main board 156 is housed, the first sub board case 162 in which the first sub board 160 is housed, and the second sub board case 166 in which the second sub board 164 is housed are the game board 200. A power supply including a payout board case 172 in which a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 is housed, a launch board case 176 in which a launch board 174 is housed, a power supply switch 178, and a RAM clear switch 180. The power supply board case 184 for accommodating the board 182 and the CR interface unit 186 are provided on the main body 104.

FIG. 44 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative symbol and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro-Luminence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect, and is a decorative symbol. The display device 208 may also be used as a predetermined symbol display means.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are a predetermined number. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (details will be described later) that are held, and this implementation In the form, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number of special figure variable games (for example, four, eight in total for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term "hold" as used herein means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on the start information described later.

The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to perform a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the jackpot game, and not to notify the current symbol control state thereafter. There is. Further, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a time saving state (electric support state), and a probability change state, and a state with a special symbol probability change and a state with a probability change. It may be one of the states without the special figure probability change.

In this specification, the term "controlled state", which refers to the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), will be used, but the term "controlled state" includes the concept of the so-called gaming state.

Further, around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged. ing.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). (When a prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 43 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 42 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". It is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is formed. One is arranged in. Unlike the ball that has passed through the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 43 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

In this embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged below the first special figure start port 230. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special drawing start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the second special drawing start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 are closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal drawing variable game is won and the normal drawing display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and go to the second special drawing start port 232. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is the easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting region in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other size, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. When the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is a variable start area is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure start port 230 that is the fixed start area. Figure There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special drawing starting port 232 are provided, but three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting ports, two first special drawing starting ports may be provided, one second special drawing starting port may be provided, and conversely, one first special drawing starting port is provided. It may be provided and two second special figure starting ports may be provided. Further, when there is only one special figure display device, the three start ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more starting ports may be provided.

In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are the stationary states, the closed state is the predetermined first stationary state, and in the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is in a stationary state. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. In addition to the completely closed state, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly open to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 44, as long as the game ball wins a prize by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided, but two variable winning openings may be provided. Here, when two variable winning openings are provided, the other variable winning opening is always closed while one of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is open. However, both variable winning openings may be open. Further, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The ball housed in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In the pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach. An out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out-sensor is a game ball that has passed through the sensors of the winning openings (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234), and a game that has passed through the sensors of the starting opening (first special drawing starting port 230, second special drawing starting port 232). It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the out port. It should be noted that the sensor may be configured so that only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening and the out opening can be detected.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a game nail 238, or the like can roll, and a passing ball enters the first special figure start port 230 in the central part of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to ball is provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player cannot easily see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer edges of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may be able to visually recognize a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice hole, or the shoji portion of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body to be rearward. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely blocked (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 42, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 correspond to the effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208. Corresponds to an example of decorative pattern display means.

Further, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is attached to the game board 200 at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 45. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) and a predetermined movable member, for example, an ordinary electric accessory. 2 Special figure for controlling various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the starting port 232 and a driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory. The drive circuit 334 is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly set. Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the machine.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main processing of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246. , The sensor circuit 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 is from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, and the button sensor 426 that detects the pressing of various buttons constituting the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a CPU 504. VDP (Video Display Processor) 516 that reads out image data and the like stored in ROM 506 based on the signal from, generates a display image using the work area of VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And, are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. The ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like. If it is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the control unit 630 is supplied with the power supply of the predetermined voltage, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 46A to 46D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. Explain the types of special drawings and general drawings.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment in the "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of the "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 46 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 46 (a), nine types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure I", are shown. In FIG. 46 (a), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“Special Figure A” to “Special Figure G”) are prepared as stop symbols for the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, while you can expect to get the ball out in 5 of the 15 rounds, you can not expect to get the ball out in the remaining rounds, it is a real 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special Figure D" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 out of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that you can expect to get a ball in one round, but you can not expect to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure E" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 4 out of 15 rounds It is a real 4R-RUB that can be expected to get a ball in the round, but cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds, "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure G" is a 2R jackpot. It is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation that cannot be expected to get a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long the round in which the winning of the ball can be expected will continue at the start of the big hit, and is a specific round (for example, 5 rounds). It is a big hit that tells the player whether or not the round that can be expected to get a ball will continue when the eye or the 9th round is reached.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the jackpot game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal figure low probability state (non-electric support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the normal figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation and shortness). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2321 is easier to open more than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2321, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This may be disadvantageous to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed, but at least of these. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure E" are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (normal figure high probability state) after the end of the big hit game to be performed after that until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special Figure F" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 100 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the 101st time is non-electric. It shifts to the support state (low probability state in the normal figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure G”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure A" to "special figure E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum for each operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 46 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing number and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game in which "Special Figure G" is stopped and displayed and shifted. The number of times and the opening time) are substantially the same, but may be different. For example, at least one of the number of opening times and the opening time may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 46 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 46 (b), six types of special figures, "special figure a" to "special figure f", are shown, and five kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure f"). Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15 It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to get a ball out in all rounds, and "special figure c" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it is expected to get a ball out in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected to get a ball in 4 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball, and "Special Figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 46 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. In the pattern display area, "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying the actual 5R probability variation jackpot ("special figure B"), 5R normal jackpot ("special figure F"), and 2R normal jackpot ("special figure e"), "decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative symbols with the same numbers other than "3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 1" Decorative 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB, and substantial 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols having the same numbers, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the lord. The combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 1-lord-decoration 1", "decoration 4-lord-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”) which is the big hit of 2R, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is set in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

FIG. 46 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 lights up all seven segments and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of normal map" (variable game of normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 46 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the main control unit power-on processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 47 (a) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on processing, FIG. 47 (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 47 (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

First, in step S101, the stack pointer is initialized. In this stack pointer initial setting, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

Subsequently, in step S102, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (this). In the example, it is determined whether or not it is 9V) or more. When the voltage value of the power supply is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), the weight is waited until the voltage value of the power supply becomes the predetermined value or more, and when the voltage value exceeds the predetermined value (step S102: Yes). The process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the internal register is initialized. In this internal register initial setting, the WDT 314 is started, the access permission of the RAM 308, the process of setting the numerical value that determines the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit described later in each register of the timer circuit 312, and the process of setting the main control unit 300 After processing such as initial setting of serial communication between the payout control unit 600 and the maximum value setting of the hardware random number, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of a game store is on (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the basic circuit 302 is set to the initial state in step S108. Proceed and execute the initial startup process described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, the power supply status information stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and it is determined whether or not the power supply status information is information indicating suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to bring the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and the initial start-up process described later is executed. On the other hand, if the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

In step S106, a checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register having a 1-byte structure having an initial value of 0, and the calculated check is performed. Determines if the sum result is a particular value (eg 0) (whether the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to return to the state before the power failure. Execute the startup process. On the other hand, when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal) (step S106: No), the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state in step S108. Proceed and execute the initial startup process described later.

Here, the return activation process will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (b). When the return start process is started, in step S201, the initial setting at the time of return start is performed. Specifically, the process of setting the information indicating "recovery start" in the power status information, the process of setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to off, and the device error (error flag due to magnetic detection, winning abnormality, etc.) Performs processing such as clearing, clearing the previous device error status, and clearing the device error status for security signals.

Subsequently, in step S202, after setting the address after the storage area that was initially set in step S201 as the address for starting the RAM clear, the return activation process is terminated.

In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area, and a power recovery command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the sub-command transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later. ..

Next, the initial startup process will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (c). When the initial startup process is started, in step S301, the soft random numbers are initially set. Specifically, the soft random numbers used in the lottery for special drawings and ordinary drawings are initially set.

Subsequently, in step S302, after setting the address after the storage area that was initially set in step S301 as the address for starting the RAM clear, the initial startup process is terminated.

In addition, in the initial startup process, for example, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial start processing of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the command setting transmission processing (step S405) in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), after the return start process or the initial start process is executed, the RAM clear process is performed in step SS109. In this RAM clear process, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

Subsequently, in step S110, the sub-control-related activation setting is performed. In this sub-control-related start setting, the start wait counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 transmits the sub-command to the first sub-control unit 400 three times. Therefore, the process of setting the initial value of the sub-control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

In step S111, the output port is set. In this output port setting, symbol data, launch position designation signal, error status signal, prize ball signal, normal figure hit signal, normal electric accessory (2nd special figure start port 232, electric chew) operating signal, normal figure operation Medium signal, easy-to-win status signal, special figure hit signal, special figure small hit signal (however, limited to models equipped with small hit), special figure fluctuation signal, special figure fluctuation time shortened state signal, special electric accessory (variable prize) Port 234, attacker) Operating signal, condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, grand prize opening solenoid signal, ordinary electric accessory solenoid signal, symbol LED data, external terminal board signal, etc. are set. Set the output port, etc. Further, after the processing of step S111 is completed, the process proceeds to the main control unit main loop processing. Here, the easy-to-win state may indicate an electric support state.

Next, the main control unit main loop processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 48. It is a flowchart of the main control part main loop processing.

When the main control unit 300 finishes executing the above-mentioned main control power-on processing, the main control unit 300 then starts executing the main control unit main loop processing. In step S401 of the main control unit main loop processing, interruption is prohibited. After making the setting, in step S402, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted (restarted). In step S403, the basic random number initial value update process is performed (step S403). In this basic random number initial value update process, a process of updating the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure and the random number counter for generating the initial value for generating the initial value of the random number counter for determining the normal figure is performed. To update the initial value generation random number counter, for example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

In step S404, after setting the interrupt permission, in step S405, the subcommand transmission process is performed). In this subcommand transmission process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, a process of transmitting the command or the like is performed. In step S406, after performing other determination random number update processing, the process proceeds to step S407. In the other determination random number update process, processing such as updating the special figure fluctuation time determination random number and the normal figure fluctuation time determination random number is performed.

In step S407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9V), and if it is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (step S407). : Yes), the process returns to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop processing, and if it is less than a predetermined value (step S407: No), the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, a power failure process is performed. In this power interruption process, after setting interrupt prohibition, the power status information is set to "suspend". Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register having a 1-byte structure having an initial value of 0, and the predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is performed. Store in the area. Then, after setting to prohibit access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal of the main control unit triggers the timer interrupt. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S502 and step S503, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S403 is updated, and then the special figure determination random number counter used by the main control unit 300 is used. , The random number counter for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the random number counter for determining the normal figure fluctuation period are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as a certain random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original value is obtained. Random number counter Stored in the storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter, set in the random number counter, and the random number counter makes one round next. In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value of the special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value of the special figure 2 may be provided separately.

In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated), and if the interrupt function is limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated). In the case) (step S504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S519, and if the interrupt function is not limited (when the first sub-control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Here, the term "interrupt function limited" means that the start wait counter of the first sub-control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on processing is not set to 0, that is, in step S504, the first If it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub-control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. When bidirectional communication is possible with the first sub-control unit 400, a command for confirming whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (magnetic detection error in the present embodiment) is occurring, and if a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If a specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the timer for updating the symbol display symbol for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for clocking, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening period , Update various timers including a timer for timing a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S507, processing such as updating the input port state is performed. In this input port state update processing, etc., the special figure start port (first special figure start port 230, second special figure start port 232), normal figure start port 228, and out port 240 are passed through the input port of the I / O 310. , Variable winning opening (attacker) 234, winning opening (general winning opening 226), and other switches are monitored for input of signals and stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read out from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time. Further, when it is determined that the winning of the starting port and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area is deleted as the winning is invalid.

Further, in step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning opening winning process, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal recording area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S507 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if detection is continuously performed for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input, it is determined that a prize has been won. If the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it may be determined that the prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S507, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226 and 234 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won.

For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the general winning opening 226 is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

Further, in the winning opening winning process in step S508, the winning opening counter update process is also performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, the RAM 308 is filled with each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set to the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in the winning opening winning process in step S508, the winning acceptance process is also performed. In this prize acceptance process, whether or not the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the normal figure start port 228, and the variable prize opening 234 have been won or not match the prize determination pattern information. Judgment is made using the judgment result. When the first special figure start port 230 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is set from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 1 winning random number value. In addition to acquiring the value as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value, the value is stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

Further, when the second special figure start port 232 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. It is acquired as a random number value, and the value is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a prize in the normal figure start port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired as the normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. When the random number of the special figure is acquired, the special figure look-ahead process (pre-reading judgment, symbol, and variable time look-ahead lottery) is also performed. The special figure look-ahead processing will be described in detail later.

In step S509, a winning-related error check process is performed. In this prize-related error check process, a process of confirming and monitoring a prize-related abnormality and setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Note that some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, the outswitch input update process is performed. In this out switch input update process, the number of game balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for the production.

In step S511, serial command management processing is performed. In this serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. The command transmitted by the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 is a communication confirmation command (communication status with the payout control unit 600) transmitted after the lapse of the start waiting time of the first sub-control unit 400 after the power is turned on. (Command to notify the activation method (initial activation, return activation) of the main control unit 300), and the prize ball number command to instruct the payout of the game balls for the designated prize balls.

The commands received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600 include a communication confirmation return command (a response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300) and a test firing test signal. Command (prize ball signal output request), command including information on the occurrence status of payout error (including no error), and prize ball payout operation status command (during / non-operation of prize ball payout) There is a command to indicate and a display (instructing the first sub-control unit 400 to turn on / off the LED or the like) indicating that the payout is in progress).

Next, in step S512, the special figure state update process for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the special figure processing state. The special figure state update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

In step S513, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the display mode is the outlier symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a definite display of one of the hit symbol and the miss symbol. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, during 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive of the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal-figure variable game is out of order, the non-normal-figure flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this out-of-normal flag is on, even in the normal-figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S514 without doing anything.

Further, in step S513, the drawing-related lottery process is also performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the normal figure state is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random number value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal map variable games is stored in the normal map reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal map variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S507 are read out, the presence or absence of a predetermined error is monitored, and when a predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified. Set the device information indicating the presence or absence of an error in the transmission information to be transmitted. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display are displayed via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S515, the external output signal management process is performed. In this external output signal management process, a process of preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, the subcommand management process is performed. In this subcommand management process, preparations are made for transmitting various commands to the first subcommand unit 400. The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and the bits 15 are strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is set). Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, The command type can be specified, such as a RAM clear command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol change start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included. , In the case of the jackpot round number specification command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 230 has won a prize, whether or not the second special figure start port 232 has won a prize, and whether or not a variable winning port 234 has won a prize. Including presence / absence. In the present embodiment, when there is a prize in the variable winning opening 234, a large winning opening winning command is set.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are selected. Information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 and is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game table frame lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the control information, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set.

Further, in the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game table frame lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period stored in the RAM 308. Information indicating the effect control information to be performed, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game. Set information indicating the number and so on. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. Further, in this step S516, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S517, the display display setting process is performed. In this display display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as "number of reserved balls, symbol combination", status (during electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. of normal and special figures is displayed. Performs processing such as setting the data to be output. In step S518, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting the control signal set in each process to the solenoid or the LED, a process of transmitting the prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

In step S519, the sub-control start wait wait process is performed. In this sub-control start-wait wait processing, in order to wait for the first sub-control unit 400 to start and become communicable, one sub-control start-wait counter is subtracted, and this start-wait counter becomes 0. If so, prepare to send the specified command. In addition, as a predetermined command, a power-on command, a command related to the payout control unit 600, one or more commands (for example, a command indicating that all errors are cleared, and a lower plate full tank error have occurred). Command indicating that there is, an error indicating that an insufficient number of payout balls error has occurred, a main control communication error command (a command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnected error There is a command indicating that is in the generated state, a firing position command (a command for notifying the firing position according to the state), and the like.

In step S520, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S501 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop processing. ..

Next, the special figure state update process (step S512) in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the special figure state update process.

In step S601, the special figure processing state address is acquired and saved, and in the next step S602, processing is executed according to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308. Specifically, here, based on the value indicated by the special figure processing state, the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 51 (a), the symbol changing process shown in FIG. 52, and the special figure shown in FIG. 53 will be described later. Display confirmation weight processing, hit start weight processing shown in FIG. 54 (a), special electric combination operation processing shown in FIG. 55, special electric combination remaining ball detection processing shown in FIG. 58, special electric combination operation end processing shown in FIG. One of the following hit end display weight processing is executed.

In step S603, the winning easy status is set to ON. Further, in step S604, the state change of the special figure processing state is determined, and in the next step S605, the presence or absence of the state change of the special figure processing state (change of the value indicated by the special figure processing state) is determined, and the special figure processing is performed. If there is no change in the state of the state (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S605: No), the special figure state update process is terminated and there is a change in the state of the special figure processing state. If (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the "variation waiting state", and if applicable (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not applicable (step S606). : No), the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the "hit start display weight state", and if applicable (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not applicable (step S607: Yes). Step S607: No), the special figure state update process is terminated.

In step S608, the transmission request of the subcommand is set (in the present embodiment, after setting the transmission request of the game state command including the game state of the special figure and the normal figure, the launch position including the information of whether or not it is in the right-handed state. After setting the command transmission request), the special figure status update process is terminated. The order of transmission requests for subcommands is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or transmission requests for a plurality of commands may be collectively performed in one process.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 51 (a) is a flowchart of the special figure-related lottery process executed in the special figure state update process.

This special figure-related lottery process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "variation waiting state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

In step S701 of the special figure-related lottery process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S702, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 0, and the number is 0. In the case of (when there is no hold of the special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S703, and when it is other than 0 (when there is a hold of the special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: Yes). No), the process proceeds to step S705 in order to execute the process related to the special figure 2.

In step S703, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S704, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 0, and if it is 0 (special figure 1). When there is no hold of the variable game (step S704: Yes), the special figure-related lottery process is completed, and when it is other than 0 (when there is a hold of the special figure 1 variable game) (step S704: No). , Step S705 proceeds to execute the process related to the special figure 1.

In step S705, when the process related to the special figure 2 is executed, the value of the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 stored in the RAM 308 is subtracted by one, and when the process related to the special figure 1 is executed, the RAM 308 is used. The value of the stored special figure 1 number of reserved balls is subtracted by one. In step S706, the special figure random number transfer process is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process related to the special figure 2 is executed, the random number value stored in the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 2 to 4 of the special figure 2 is transferred to the hold 1 to the special figure 2. When shifting to the random number storage area corresponding to 3 and clearing the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 of the special figure 2 and executing the process related to the special figure 1, the hold 2 to 4 of the special figure 1 is supported. The random number value stored in the random number storage area is shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 1 to 3 of the special figure 1, and the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 of the special figure 1 is cleared. As described above, the game console (pachinko machine) in the present embodiment is the special figure 2 priority variable machine. In addition, up to four special drawings 2 and four special drawings can be stored.

In step S707, a lottery process for each special figure is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this special drawing per lottery process, the winning / failing of the special figure 2 variable game (or the special figure 1 variable game) is determined. In step S708, the display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, the second special figure is based on the result of the special figure per lottery process and the random number value in step S707 with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table (or the special figure 1 symbol determination table). A lottery is performed for the special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212).

FIG. 62 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 62 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the display symbol data of the special figure 1 in the display symbol lottery process of step S708, refer to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 62 (a), and refer to the special figure 1 symbol lottery process of step S707. The display symbol data of the special figure 1 is selected based on the hit / fail result of FIG. 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. In the present embodiment, when the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, any one of the special figures A to G is selected, and when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, If the special figure H is selected and the result of the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

Further, when determining the display symbol data of the special figure 2 in the display symbol lottery process of step S708, the special figure 2 symbol lottery process of step S707 is referred to with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 62 (b). The display symbol data of the special figure 2 is drawn by lottery based on the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected, and when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure f is selected. After the symbol to be displayed is determined, the symbol data to be displayed on the special symbol display device is set. The symbol data set here is acquired again in the display display setting process (step S517) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, and is controlled to be displayed on the special figure display device. After the symbol data is set, the determined symbol (symbol type information) is determined, and if there is a loss, this process ends.

When the determined symbol (symbol type information) is a big hit or a small hit symbol, a process of setting the data set for the hit end (data setting process after the hit end) is performed. The post-hit data setting process is a process of setting the game state to be set after the hit according to the symbol determined by the lottery.

Returning to FIG. 51 (a), in step S709, the special figure variation time lottery process is performed. In this special figure variation time lottery process, the variation time table (not shown) is referred to, and the result of the special figure 2 (or special figure 1) by the special figure per lottery process in step S707 and the numerical range of the random number value are used. After selecting the timer for the special figure fluctuation time, the special figure-related lottery process is terminated.

<Lottery processing per special figure>
Next, the special drawing per lottery process (step S707) will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b). FIG. 51 (b) is a flowchart of the special figure per lottery process (step S707) in the special figure related lottery process.

In step S801 of the special figure per lottery process, the special figure per lottery is performed with reference to the winning / failing determination table. In the present embodiment, the lottery for each special figure is performed using the same table for determining whether or not the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are used, but different tables for determining whether or not the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are used. You may prepare it.

FIG. 61 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability table for hit / fail determination, and FIG. 61 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability table for hit / fail determination. When the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is performed in the lottery process per special figure in step S801, in the case of the special figure high probability state, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. In the case of the low probability state shown in FIG. 61, the low probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

Further, when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is performed in the special figure per lottery process in step S801, similarly, in the case of the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for hit / fail judgment shown in FIG. 61 (a). Then, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the hit / fail determination low probability table shown in FIG. 61 (b) is referred to. Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, a big hit or a loss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

Returning to FIG. 51 (b), in step S802, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the special drawing hit lottery in step S801 is other than the “big hit”, and if it is other than the “big hit” (step S802). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S803, and in the case of a “big hit” (step S802: No), the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, the special figure small hit lottery process is performed using the small hit determination table.

FIG. 61 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. In the special figure small hit lottery process of step S803, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 61 (c) is referred to, and the special figure is based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determination table and the acquired random number value. Select the winning / failing judgment result of the small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 1, a small hit is selected as the winning / failing judgment result with a probability of 2000/65536, and a loss occurs with a probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, if the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

Returning to FIG. 51 (b), in step S804, the RAM 308 is based on the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the special figure winning lottery in step S801 and the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the special figure small winning lottery in step S803. One of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss" information is set in the hit / fail judgment type stored in. In the next step S805, information indicating "special figure is changing" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the symbol changing process shown in FIG. 52 is called and executed.

In step S806, the value of the special figure determination random number stored in the RAM 308 is cleared, in the next step S807, a transmission request for a subcommand (special figure fluctuation start command) is set, and in the next step S808, the special figure is set. After setting the basic signal information (for testing) indicating that 2 (or special figure 1) is changing, the lottery process for each special figure is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a symbol changing process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the symbol changing process executed in the special figure state update process. This symbol change processing is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates "special figure changing" in step 602 of the special figure state update process.

In step S901 of the symbol change processing, the special figure operation type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and the address of the RAM to be updated is calculated according to the special figure operation type. ..

In step S902, by referring to the address destination calculated in step S901, the timer of the special figure fluctuation time set in step S709 of the special figure-related lottery process is acquired, and whether the timer of the special figure fluctuation time is 0. Judge whether or not. As a result of the determination, if the timer for the special figure fluctuation time is 0 (when the set special figure fluctuation time has elapsed) (step S902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S905, and if it is not 0 (the set special figure fluctuation time). If has not passed) (step S902: No), the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not it is not the update timing of the special symbol display symbol, and if it is not the update timing (step S903: Yes), the processing during symbol change is terminated, and if it is the update timing (step S903: No). ), Proceed to step S904. In step S904, after updating the special symbol display symbol data, the process during symbol change is terminated.

By this special figure display symbol data update process, in the case of special figure 1, the first special figure display device 212 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. "Variation display of special figure 1" is performed, and in the case of special figure 2, the second special symbol display device 214 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. "Variation display of special figure 2" is performed.

In step S905, the special figure display symbol data selected in step S708 of the special figure-related lottery process is acquired and set, and in the next step S906, information indicating "special figure display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. To do. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure display confirmation weight process shown in FIG. 53 is called and executed.

In step S907, the display symbol update data is cleared, and in the next step S908, basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) is stopped is set, and the next step In S909, by setting the symbol confirmation number information signal stored in the RAM 308 to ON, the symbol confirmation number information signal is output from the external terminal board 349.

In step S910, a transmission request for a subcommand (special figure fluctuation stop command) is set, and in the next step S911, the symbol type information stored in the RAM 308 (the symbol of special figure 1 shown in FIG. 46 (a), or the symbol of special figure 1 shown in FIG. After acquiring any of the symbols of special figure 2 shown in FIG. 46 (b) and setting the special figure display confirmation timer indicating the time for maintaining the stop display of the special figure based on this symbol type information, the symbol End the processing during fluctuation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the special figure display confirmation weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the special figure display confirmation weight process executed in the special figure state update process. This special figure display confirmation weight process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "special figure display weight state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. Is.

In step S1001 of the special figure display confirmation weight process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display confirmation timer set in step S911 of the symbol change processing process is larger than 0, and if it is larger than 0 (special figure display confirmation time). If it has not passed (step S1001: Yes), the special figure display confirmation weight process is completed, and if not (when the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1001: No), step S1002 Proceed to.

In step S1002, the symbol confirmation number information signal set in step S909 of the symbol changing process is cleared (set to OFF), and in the next step S1003, the special symbol variation time shortening status (special symbol variation game) when the symbol is stopped. (In this embodiment, the status indicating any of the normal gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state) is stored in the RAM 308 as the storage special figure variation time shortening status described later.

In step S1004, the winning / failing determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing-related lottery process is acquired, and in the next step S1005, it is determined whether or not the acquired winning / failing determination type is "big hit". As a result of this determination, if the hit / fail judgment type is "big hit" (step S1005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the hit / fail judgment type is other than "big hit" (step S1005: No), the process proceeds to step S1006. Proceed and update the time reduction number of the special figure stored in the RAM 308 (subtract one time reduction number).

In step S1007, the winning / failing determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing-related lottery process is acquired, and in the next step S1008, it is determined whether or not the acquired winning / failing determination type is "small hit". As a result of this determination, if the hit / fail judgment type is "small hit" (step S1008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the hit / fail judgment type is other than "small hit" (step S1008: No), the step Proceed to S1009, and set the information indicating the "variation waiting state" in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 51 (a) is called and executed.

In step S1010, basic signal information (for testing) indicating the special figure winning / failing type and the symbol type is set, and in the next step S1011, the RAM clear in the designated range is executed. Here, the winning / failing type, the number of times the special electric function is operated, the number of winnings of the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234), the operation pattern of the special electric role, the operating state of the special electric role, the total number of winnings, the flag related to the winning abnormality of the large winning opening, In addition to clearing information such as the hit end display timer type, at the time of a big hit, the winning easy status and the special figure general map status are also cleared.

In step S1012, information indicating a "hit start display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit start weight process shown in FIG. 54 (a) is called and executed. In step S1013, the total number of winning prizes is set to 0, and in the next step S1014, a transmission request for a subcommand (winning start command) is set.

In step S1015, the symbol type information is set, in step S1016, the hit start display timer corresponding to the symbol type information set in step S1015 is set, and in step S1017, the symbol type information set in step S1015 is set. After setting other information signal setting types, the special figure display confirmation weight processing is terminated.

Next, the hit start weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 54A is a flowchart of the hit start weight process executed in the special figure state update process. This hit start weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "hit start display weight state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. ..

In step S1101 of the hit start weight process, it is determined whether or not the hit start display timer set in step S1016 of the special figure display confirmation weight process is larger than 0, and if it is larger than 0 (the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed). If not (step S1101: Yes), the hit start weight process is completed, and if not (when the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1102.

In step S1102, after executing the special electric function opening process described later, the hit start weight process is terminated.

Next, the special electric function opening process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). FIG. 54B is a flowchart of the special electric function opening process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process.

In step S1201 of the special electric service opening process, information indicating the "special electric service operating state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric service operation process shown in FIG. 55 is called and executed.

In step S1202, the value of the number of winnings of the large winning opening in the RAM 308 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “main control unit winning counter”) and the operating state of the special electric function are cleared, and in the next step S1203, the subcommand (special electric power) is cleared. Set the transmission request of the role release command). As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 can recognize that the round has started. In step S1204, the symbol type information set in step S1015 of the special figure display confirmation weight processing is acquired, and in the next step S1205, the special electric service operation pattern data table is set based on the acquired symbol type information. As shown in FIGS. 57 (a-1) to 57 (a-3), for example, the special electric service operation pattern data table is prepared for the number of types of special figures that are big hits and small hits. Note that FIG. 57 illustrates only a part of them. The special electric service operation pattern data table stores special electric service operation data indicating the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning opening 234 for each round. As shown in FIGS. 57 (b-1) to 57 (b-3), the special electric service operation data includes information (open timer pattern, closed timer pattern) indicating the open / closed state of the variable winning opening 234, and the open state or the closed timer pattern. It is configured by storing one or a plurality of timer pattern data including information on the time for maintaining the closed state (special electric function opening / closing timer). This makes it possible to give various variations to the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 during one round.

For example, in the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the special figure A, as shown in FIG. 57 (a-1), in the 1st to 15th rounds, the special electric service operation data 1 shown in FIG. 57 (b-1) is referred to. Then, after the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 29,500 ms by the opening timer pattern 2, the variable winning opening 234 is closed by the closing timer pattern 3 to end the operation.

Further, in the big hit game in the case of the big hit in the special figure C, as shown in FIG. 57 (a-2), the above-mentioned special electric service operation is performed in the 1R to 4R, the 6R to 8R, and the 10R to 15R. While the data 1 is referred to and the above-described operation is performed, at the 5th and 9th rounds, the special electric function operation data 4 shown in FIG. 57 (b-3) is referred to, and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 is performed. Be controlled. That is, in the 5th and 9th rounds, the variable winning opening 234 is first opened by the opening timer pattern 1 for 180ms, and then the variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the closed state by the closing timer pattern 1 for 2820ms four times. After that, the open timer pattern 3 opens the variable winning opening 234 for 17,500 ms, and then the closing timer pattern 3 controls the variable winning opening 234 to close and end the operation.

Further, in the big hit game in the case of the big hit in the special figure E, as shown in FIG. 57 (a-3), in the 1st to 4th rounds, the above-mentioned special electric function operation data 1 is referred to and the above-mentioned operation is performed. On the other hand, in the 5th to 15th rounds, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 is controlled with reference to the special electric function operation data 2 shown in FIG. 57 (b-2). That is, in the 5th to 15th rounds, the variable winning opening 234 is first opened by the opening timer pattern 1 for 180ms, then the variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the closed state by 2820ms by the closing timer pattern 1, and then the closing timer pattern. By 3, the variable winning opening 234 is controlled so as to be maintained in the closed state as it is and the operation is terminated. In addition, another closing pattern timer (for example, closing pattern timer 1 or the like) may be set before the closing pattern timer 3 is set.

In step S1206, the number of operations (number of rounds) of the special electric service is acquired, and in the next step S1207, the number of operations (number of rounds) of the acquired special electric service is updated. Subsequently, in step S1208, the operation pattern of the special electric service is set by reading the special electric service operation data corresponding to the updated operation number of the special electric service (number of rounds). Then, in step S1209, a special electric combination control process (details will be described later) is performed, and in the next step S1210, after clearing the special electric combination winning detection timer, the special electric combination release process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the special electric service operation process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the special electric service operation process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric function operation process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "special electric power operation state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

In step S1301 of the special electric service operation process, the maximum number of winnings stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in step S1302, the number of winnings stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In step S1303, the acquired maximum number of prizes is compared with the number of prizes, and it is determined whether or not the number of prizes is smaller than the maximum number of prizes. If the number is small (when the number of prizes <maximum number of prizes) (step S1303). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1304, and if not (the number of winnings> = the maximum number of winnings) (step S1303: No), the process proceeds to step S1308.

In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the special electric function opening / closing timer corresponding to the running open timer pattern or the closing timer pattern set in step S1208 of the special electric function opening process is larger than 0, and if it is large (special electric function). If the open / close timer has not elapsed (step S1304: Yes), the special electric function operation process is terminated, and if not (when the special electric function open / close timer has elapsed) (step S1304: No), step S1305 Proceed to. In step S1305, the special electric function control process (details will be described later) is performed, in the next step S1306, the special electric function opening / closing timer pattern is acquired, and in the next step S1307, the closing timer pattern among the acquired special electric function opening / closing timer patterns is acquired. It is determined whether or not the special electric service is in operation (whether or not the closing timer pattern is set in the information indicating the end of operation (closing timer pattern 3)).

As a result of the determination, when the special electric service is operating (when the closing timer pattern is not set to the information indicating the end of operation (closed timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: Yes), the special electric service operation process is terminated. If the special electric service is not in operation (when the closing timer pattern is set to the information indicating the end of operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: No), the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, information indicating the "remaining sphere detection state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric function remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 58 is called and executed.

In step S1309, the special electric service operation interval timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, in step S1310, the other information signal transmission determination timers are cleared, and in step S1311, a subcommand (large winning opening closing command) transmission request is made. To set.

In step S1312, the special electric function winning detection timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. Here, the special electric role winning detection timer is a timer for effectively detecting the game ball remaining inside the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) after the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) is closed. Is. In step S1313, after setting the drive signal (large winning opening solenoid signal) for driving the solenoid (332) of the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) to OFF, the special electric function operation process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 changes to a difficult-to-enter state when the maximum number of winning game balls pass through the passing area after the easy-to-enter state. It functions as an example of variable winning means.

Next, the special electric service control process (step S1209, step S1305) executed in the special electric service opening process and the special electric service operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the special electric service control process executed in the special electric service opening process and the special electric service operation process.

In step S1401, the special electric service control data stored in the ROM 306 is acquired. Specifically, among the operation patterns of the special electric service to be executed, which are set by reading the special electric service operation data in step S1208 of the special electric service opening process, the control data of the operation pattern to be executed this time is acquired. To do. For example, if the operation pattern of the special electric function shown in the special electric service operation data 1 is set and the round is started, the “open timer pattern 2” shown in “(1)” of FIG. 57 (b-1) is set. The control data of "" will be acquired. Further, after the operation pattern shown in the control data shown in "(1)" of FIG. 57 (b-1) is completed, the "closed timer" shown in "(2)" of FIG. 57 (b-1) is completed. The control data of "Pattern 3" will be acquired.

Subsequently, in step S1402, opening / closing information indicating whether to open or close the variable winning opening 234 is acquired based on the acquired control data of the operation pattern of the special electric service. For example, in the case of the "open timer pattern", the data (opening information) for opening the variable winning opening 234 is acquired, and in the case of the "closing timer pattern", the data for closing the variable winning opening 234 (closing). Information) is acquired.

Then, in step S1403, the opening / closing timer of the special electric function is acquired based on the control data of the operation pattern of the special electric function acquired in step S1401 and the opening / closing information acquired in step S1402. For example, when the "open timer pattern 2" is acquired and the open / close information is "open information", a 29500 ms open timer is acquired. Further, when the "closed timer pattern 1" is acquired and the open / close information is the "closed information", the closed timer of 2820 ms is acquired.

In step S1404, information indicating that acceptance is possible is set in the special electric service winning / non-winning status stored in the RAM 308. It is possible to accept that the game ball has passed through the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1 of the variable winning opening 234) provided in the variable winning opening when the information indicating that the special electric role winning permission status is acceptable is set. If there is information indicating that acceptance is not possible, the game ball becomes invalid even if it passes through the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1) provided in the variable winning opening. In step S1405, the special electric function signal information (test signal) is set, and in step S1406, preparation for updating the large winning opening solenoid signal is performed. In this process, preparations are made for driving the large winning opening solenoid, and a drive signal is output in the output management process (step S518) in the timer interrupt process described above. In step S1407, after setting the special power combination opening timer or the special power combination closing timer among the special power combination opening / closing timers, the special power combination control process ends. That is, in this process, the open timer or close timer acquired in step S1403 is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the special electric function remaining ball detection process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the special electric function remaining ball detection process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric function residual sphere detection process is a process called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "remaining sphere detection state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

In step S1501 of the special electric service remaining ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the special electric service operation interval timer set in step S1309 of the special electric service operation process is operating, and if it is operating (the special electric service operation interval time elapses). If not (step S1501: Yes), the special electric function remaining ball detection process is completed, and if not (when the special electric function operation interval time has elapsed) (step S1501: No), step S1502 is performed. move on.

In step S1502, the special electric service operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S1503, information indicating "special electric service operation end state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric service operation end process shown in FIG. 59 is called and executed. That is, it is in the state of the interval between rounds.

In step S1504, after clearing the special electric service signal information (test signal), the special electric service remaining ball detection process is terminated. After clearing the signal intelligence signal information, a subcommand transmission request (for example, an inter-round interval start command) may be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the special electric service operation termination process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the special electric service operation end process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric service operation end process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "special electric power operation end state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

In step S1601 of the special electric service operation end process, it is determined whether or not the special electric service operation delay timer set in step S1502 of the special electric service remaining ball detection process is operating, and if it is operating (step S1601: Yes). ), The special electric service operation termination process is terminated, and if not (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, the symbol type information is acquired, it is determined whether or not the special figure winning / failing type is a small hit, and if it is a small hit (step S1602: Yes), the small hit is dealt with in step S1603. After acquiring the hit end display timer, the process proceeds to step S1608. On the other hand, if the special figure winning / failing type is not a small hit (step S1602: No), the process proceeds to step S1604, and a predetermined number of times is set as the maximum number of times the large winning opening stored in the RAM 308 is opened. In step S1605, the maximum number of times the special electric function is opened is compared with the number of times the special electric function is opened, and it is determined whether the number of times the special electric function is opened is less than the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened, that is, whether or not the hit is not completed. .. If the hit is not completed (step S1605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1606 to execute the above-mentioned special electric service opening process, and the special electric service operation end process is completed. That is, a process for starting the next round is performed. On the other hand, when the hit is completed (step S1605: No), the process proceeds to step S1607.

In step S1607, the hit end display timer corresponding to the symbol type information is acquired, and in step S1608, the hit end display timer acquired in step S1603 or step S1607 is set. In step S1609, information indicating "hit end display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit end display weight process shown in FIG. 60 is called and executed. In step S1610, after setting the transmission request of the sub command (hit end command), the special electric service operation end process is ended.

Next, the hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process. This hit end display weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "hit end display weight state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

In step S1701 of the hit end display weight process, it is determined whether or not the hit end display timer set in step S1608 of the special electric service operation end process is operating, and if it is operating (step S1701: Yes), The hit end display weight process is completed, and if not (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the symbol type information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 308 is saved in the stack area, in step S1703, the basic signal information (for testing) is cleared, and in step S1704, the special figure processing state is "variable". Set the information indicating "waiting state". As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 51 (a) is called and executed.

In steps S1705 to S1707, the display symbol data, the symbol type information, and the total number of winnings are cleared. In step S1708, the saved symbol type information is reset, and in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the process ends with a small hit, and if it ends with a small hit (step S1709: Yes), the hit end display weight process is performed. If it ends and ends with a hit other than a small hit (if it ends with a big hit) (step S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, the set data (probability change, time saving, hidden probability change) is acquired after the hit is completed, and in step S1711, the data corresponding to the set data after the hit is completed (probability change status (special figure probability state status, normal figure probability state status)). , Time saving number (special figure fluctuation time shortening fluctuation number, fluctuation time correction fluctuation number, winning easy status change number), time saving status (special figure fluctuation time shortening status, normal figure fluctuation time shortening status, opening extension status), fluctuation time lottery The state (information for determining the variable time lottery table, etc.) is set, and after the setting data is cleared after the winning end, the winning end display weight processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 functions as an example of the game control means capable of executing the jackpot game.

Next, the special figure look-ahead process in the winning opening winning process in step S508 shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure pre-reading process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process, and predetermines the stop symbol (special figure). The pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (c)) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result is stored. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data ranks. Is processed so as to be carried up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing (step S508a). The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area. Special figure 2 Perform by comparing with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 look-ahead number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S508b, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S508d.

In step S508b, the increased special figure 2 start information (set of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) is stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area before the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. Look ahead from. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 61, and the special symbol symbol determination table shown in FIG. 62, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is illustrated. Prior to the display symbol lottery process S708 in the special figure-related lottery process shown in 51, a determination is made in advance. It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S508c following step S508b, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S508d.

In step S508d, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing. The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 look-ahead number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S508e, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S508e, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S508f, and if it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support (high probability state in the normal figure)), the process proceeds to step S508h. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game in addition to being in non-electric support.

In step S508f, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value) is stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area before the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. Look ahead from. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 61, and the special symbol symbol determination table shown in FIG. 62, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is illustrated. Prior to the display symbol lottery process S708 in the special figure-related lottery process shown in 51, a determination is made in advance. It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S508g following step S508f, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In step S508h, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the “undetermined” information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 as the pre-read result result for special figure 1 instead of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-mentioned command setting transmission process (step S405), only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be stored. All the read-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 63, the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2 and the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the look-ahead result.

FIG. 64 illustrates a state in which the look-ahead result information and the like are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 64A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 64 (a), the storage area "hold 1" stores "special figure I" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "hold 2" stores "special figure I" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored," special figure A "(15R probability variation jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area" hold 3 ", and" special figure I "as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area" hold 4 ". "(Off) is remembered.

FIG. 64B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 64 (b), "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 64 (b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 64 (c) shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 64 (c), "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned stop symbol information, the hit / fail judgment result and the special figure fluctuation time are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit and is stored in the first sub-control unit 400 as the pre-reading result information. Can be sent.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 65A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S4001 of FIG. 65A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization process, the input / output port is initialized, the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized, and the like.

In step S4003 following step S4001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4005. .. In step S4005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S4007 following step S4005, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S4009 following step S4007, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S4007, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S4011, which is next to step S4009, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S4009 is converted into the effect data corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S4013 following step S4011, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S4009, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S4015 following step S4013, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the game board lamp 442 or the game table frame lamp 452 in the effect data read in step S4009, this command is given to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table. Output to the frame lamp drive circuit 450.

In step S4017 following step S4015, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S4009, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S4019 following step S4017, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S4009, a setting is made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S4003.

FIG. 65B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S4031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 65 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S4041 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S4003 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S4003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S4043 following step S4041, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S4019) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 66A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S5001 of FIG. 66A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S5001. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S5003 following step S5001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S5005. .. In step S5005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S5007 following step S5005, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S5009 following step S5007, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S5007, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If is necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S5011 following step S5009, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S5009, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S5003.

FIG. 66B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S5031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 66 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S5041 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S5003 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S5003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S5043, which is next to step S5041, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 66D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S5011 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S5051, transfer instructions for image data (movie data and texture data described later) are given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S5053 following step S5051, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S5053: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5055. If not (step S5053: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S5055, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S5051, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S5057 following step S5055, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S5059 following step S5057, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S5059: Yes), The process proceeds to step S5061, otherwise (step S5059: No), the generation end interrupt signal is waited to be input.

In step S5061, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, an example of the configuration of the effect device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. Here, FIG. 67A is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and FIG. 67B is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the effect device 206.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with the decorative members constituting the effect device 206 so that a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. .. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may also be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are shown. It is omitted.

In the decorative design display device 208, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on the left side thereof, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 can be displayed in a manner mounted on the pedestal h0s, and when the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is notified that the symbol variation is being displayed. When the symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The navigator character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character YM does not have to be displayed all the time, and N specific notices and effects using the navigation character YM (for example, pre-reading notice, notice in the symbol variation display, and hold of symbol variation display are accumulated). It may be displayed at the time of the effect (such as the effect sometimes displayed), or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 67A, since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are reserved, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), but the display mode is adjusted according to the progress of the game. May change. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice.

The variable icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon may be called the variable icon or expressed as the variable icon moves. Good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. In addition, the variable icon may consist of a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice of whether or not the change is correct (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing earlier than the timing at which the result of the change is notified, the same timing, or a later timing. The variable icon h0 does not have to be displayed.

Further, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is displayed as stopped. The second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Part or all of the combination of symbols (1 or 2 decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (here, “4” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. The second hold number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

Further, the background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background display corresponding to the effect and the game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the result of the winning / failing determination. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or two or more of a normal gaming state, a probabilistic state, a hidden probabilistic state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may be changed with a law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A → .... If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order.

Further, below the decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved or rotated in the vertical direction according to the effect content. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 67 (a), the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest accessory 224E is lower than the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set to an appropriate position. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 208, the first large board behavior character 224Ga, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is given the letters "large", and the second is given the letters "board". The large board behavior character 224Gb, the third large board behavior character 224Gc with the characters "shake", and the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd with the characters "Mai" are arranged. Each of these 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. Further, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

Further, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a Senryo box accessory 224H, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect content. .. The Senryo Box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryo Box accessory 224H has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryo box accessory 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end portion of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 67 (a), the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol, for example, depending on the light emitting mode of the LED. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special symbol is stopped, but blinks or is turned off while the special symbol is changing. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be lit and displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be turned off while the symbol is stopped.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device may be used. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidably movable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. It should be noted that the effect operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured so as to be able to perform all of them, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured so that it can be used. Further, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of effect operations that can be performed is different. Or, the production operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can be moved and rotated to the right, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be moved in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured so that the effect operation can be performed. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may operate, and one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. 1 Only the decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. The front surface side of the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is covered with decorative members constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof is invisible. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are shown. It is omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The variation icon h0 is displayed on the left side of the first UI unit 280 in a manner of being placed on the pedestal hs0, and notifies that the symbol variation display is in progress. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 67B, since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are reserved, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In FIG. 67B, the variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round patternless and white display mode), but the progress of the game. The display mode may change depending on the situation. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice.

Further, in the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is stopped and displayed in combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but it may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Part or all of the combination of symbols (1 or 2 decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second reserved number display may be divided into different decorative symbol display devices for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be done. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. In this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the result of the winning / failing determination. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or two or more of a normal gaming state, a probabilistic state, a hidden probabilistic state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may be changed with a law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A → .... If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be in a frameless form. Further, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. .. In the example shown in FIG. 67 (b), the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 67 (b) is the upper end of the family crest accessory 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

Further, above the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the above-mentioned Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. The Senryo Box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

The above-mentioned light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices, family crest accessory 224E and Senryo box accessory 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The movement of each production movable body is made visible.

Further, in FIG. 67B, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Next, an effect example using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67A or FIG. 67B will be described with reference to FIG. 68. Here, FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect applicable to the present embodiment.

68 (A1) to 68 (A2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (a). That is, when the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H operate from the state shown in FIG. 68 (A1), the mode shown in FIG. 68 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd are until the characters "large", "board", "swing", and "mai" are first facing the front. Each rotates and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the Senryo box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to a position where it overlaps at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are the Senryo box accessory. Compared to the case where it does not overlap with 224H, it is difficult to see. It should be noted that the Senryo box accessory 224H may be configured so as not to overlap the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Further, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the 1000-car box accessory 224H and may be configured to overlap the 1000-car box accessory 224H.

In FIG. 68 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (a), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL may be made more visible by reducing the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 or various lamps. ..

In FIGS. 68 (C1) to 68 (C4), the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (a) is shown. Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 68 (C1) to 68 (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided in place of the family crest accessory 224E. The POV display 224I, also referred to as a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction and is configured to be overlappable on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is set below the decorative symbol display device 208, but it can be set to any position. The POV display 280 has an elevating arm and an LED array rotatably attached to the tip of the elevating arm. The elevating arm can be elevated by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row in the LED array, and the posture extending in the horizontal direction is the initial posture of the LED array. The LED provided in the LED array may be a full-color LED or a single-color LED. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) controls the lighting of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on the versa data which is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing so, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs change during the rotation of the LED array, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated in the rotation locus of each LED, and a pattern is represented. Further, the POV display 224I is arranged on the front side of the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd and the Senryo box character 224H. Can be set.

FIG. 68 (C1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

FIG. 68 (C2) shows that the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the elevating arm, and the LED array overlaps the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display screen is more difficult to see than in the case where the POV display 224I does not overlap.

FIG. 68 (C3) shows how the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. LED arrays are accelerating rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

In FIG. 68 (C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the characters “heat” are displayed, and a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. Further, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the emission brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is lowered to improve the visibility of the image displayed by the POV display 224I. May be good. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be set to dark display while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 68 (D1), the light guide plate IL emits light in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b), and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced to guide the light. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

In FIGS. 68 (E1) to 68 (E2), the family crest accessory 224E is shown to be operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (E1), the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM. It is considered to be more difficult to see than when at least a part of the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM do not overlap. After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (E2), the family crest accessory 224E is rotated in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest accessory 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may vibrate with or in place of rotation. Further, it may be performed only ascending and not rotating or vibrating. It is also applicable to the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (a).

FIG. 68 (F1) shows how the Senryo box accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). Specifically, it is shown that the Senryo Box accessory 224H is moving from the initial position to a position where it overlaps with the front side at the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (F1), it is considered that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped because the Senryo box accessory 224H is overlapped. In this production example, when the Senryo box accessory 224H operates, the family crest accessory 224E is not operated so that the Senryo box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E do not interfere with each other. In addition, there may be a case where both the Senryo box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are in operation. Further, when the Senryo box accessory 224H operates, the evacuation operation may be performed to move the family crest accessory 224E further downward.

In FIG. 68 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved by sliding so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is also scrolled. That is, with respect to the background image, the area that was not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N were slid and moved can be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. Can be displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M may slide upward and move to the second position. 3 The decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

In FIG. 68 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged to display the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. It is shown that the display straddles the device 208N. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The enlarged first decorative symbol does not have to be displayed across the two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the enlarged first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the enlarged left symbol. The enlarged middle symbol may be displayed only, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

In FIGS. 68 (I1) to 68 (I2), the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b) is shown. Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 68 (I1) to 68 (I2), the above-mentioned POV display 224I is provided in place of the family crest accessory 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (I1), the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

In FIG. 68 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps with the front side at the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates and rotates constantly. It is shown that the character "heat" is displayed after reaching the speed and rotating at a constant speed.

In FIG. 68 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is displayed. It is shown that the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281. That is, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIGS. 68 (K1) to 68 (K4), the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b) is shown. In the examples shown in FIGS. 68 (K1) to 68 (K4), the outer circumference of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is also visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIG. 68 (K1) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial positions.

FIG. 68 (K2) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M slide and move to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls according to the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are adjusted to the slide movement. By scrolling the display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can perform a unified display. As shown in FIG. 68 (K2), the family crest accessory 224E moves downward from the initial position to the evacuation position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 68 (K2'), the displays on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid and moved without scrolling. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may rotate or vibrate at the initial position when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating. It may vibrate while rotating.

In FIGS. 68 (K3) to 68 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other and counterclockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that they are rotating together in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 68 (K4) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are matched with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A display is performed that rotates around the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may appear that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated, but the displayed image is not rotated.

FIG. 68 (L1) shows a modified example of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 68 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest accessory 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. In the sub-display device 208S, the respective displays in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) described above are displayed. That is, on the sub-display device 208S, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub-display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right side to the left side, but a part of it overlaps with the sub display device 208S and is sub. It is said that it is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the display device 208S. As shown in FIG. 68 (L1'), the display image (background image, Sabohani character SBH, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

FIG. 68 (M1) shows the operation modes of the sub-display device 208S and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. That is, the sub-display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position on the front side of the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are rotated to the positions where the characters "large", "board", "shaking", and "mai" are in front of each other, and then the decorative symbol display device 208. It has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub-display device 208S which has moved to a position on the front side in the substantially center of the above. At this time, the sub display device 208S performs the cut-in display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image, indicating that a predetermined advance notice effect or a look-ahead advance notice effect is being performed. ing.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72. Here, FIG. 69 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 70 stepwise, and FIG. 72 is a diagram showing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 71 stepwise. ..

In FIG. 69, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a normal figure hold The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following description, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (a) will be applied, but the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b) can also be applied. Further, in the following, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the Senryo box accessory 224H, and the light guide plate IL are not shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (coastal background image) as shown in FIG. 67A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative symbol. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 69 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 69 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the second UI unit 281, a hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 69 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 69 (1), the hold icons that are not actually displayed are shown by broken lines in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281. Further, in FIG. 69 (1), for ease of explanation, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are divided by broken lines, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 69 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. I am trying not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 69 (1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon of special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is the start of fluctuation in the special symbol display device → the start of blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → the start of fluctuation of the second decorative symbol → the start or deletion of the movement animation of the hold icon → decoration It is performed in the order of the start of fluctuation of the symbol, but this order may be changed.

In FIG. 69 (2), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and decoration are performed. The design has not changed yet. The symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may start at the same time, or the variation display of the fourth symbol after the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 starts. May start, or the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 may start after the variation display of the fourth symbol has started.

In FIG. 69 (3), the display of the number of reserved numbers is updated from 2 to 1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. The update display of the second hold number display and the start of the change display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second hold number display is performed. The display may be started, or the update display of the second reserved number display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 69 (4), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement (decrease) animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves toward the pedestal hs0 of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time as the start, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 67). .. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 69 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 69 (6), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the pedestal hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and then the change of the first decorative symbol. The display starts. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. The end of the movement animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the movement animation is completed. 1 The movement animation may end after the variable display of the decorative symbol starts.

FIG. 69 (7) shows how the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (8), it is shown that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice starts, a balloon in which the characters "opportunity" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is high.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (9), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the navigation character notice is being performed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" displayed together with the character of the lord is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon has changed from the character display of "opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation for the big hit is increasing. The timing at which the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. May be updated to "No", or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "No". It should be noted that there may be cases where the effect of promoting from the previously displayed notice (for example, "opportunity") to the later displayed notice (for example, "super heat") (for example, "no") is not performed. .. In addition, the navigation character notice is not only a notice in the symbol variation display, but also a look-ahead notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be performed, and an explanation display (various notices, game states, characters appearing in the production of the pachinko machine 100). , Explanation of the stage of the production, etc., also called tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the player to press the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of. At the timing shown in FIG. 69 (10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. In addition, the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (10), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "No" to the character display of "Intense heat", and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of this balloon overlaps with a part of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. The timing at which the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed and the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat" may be the same, or after the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed, in the balloon. The display may be updated to "super heat", or the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat". As described above, in this production example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display of the same size as in FIG. 69 (9) is still displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (larger or smaller) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. It may be different in size (larger or smaller) from the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (11). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 69 (11).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 69 (12) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (13), the game is played. It is shown that a person is pressing the chance button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 69 (12), the navigation character notice has ended and the balloon display has been erased. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 69 (14), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, the characters "It's intense heat" are displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. May occur. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "It's intense heat" may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation validity period is long without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed even when it has passed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (15), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (16), after "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, "decoration" is displayed on the right symbol as shown in FIG. 69 (17). 7 ”is stopped and a reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to indicate that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 69 (17) to (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach start animation. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be adopted. By watching this reach start animation, the player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 69 (20) to (21), the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 fluctuates. While leaving the icon h0, the frame is out below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 displayed in the second UI unit 281 (in the production example shown in FIG. 69 (20), the hold icon h11) are also framed out. .. The start of the movement display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started. After the frame-out display of each image in the above is started, the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (22), the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 69 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It should be noted that the light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior There may be a case where only the operation of the accessory 224Gd is performed and the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is not performed, or only the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior is performed. Even if the operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or even if the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 70 (25), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position. It should be noted that the light emitting of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd have returned to the initial positions, respectively, or the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the first The start of movement of the four large board behavior accessory 224Gd to the initial position and the end of light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed at the same time. Here, in FIGS. 69 (22) to (24), it is better to perform a series of productions performed by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light guide plate IL. It may be configured so that it is more likely to be a big hit than when no production is performed.

FIG. 70 (26) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (26) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (27) follows a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. Animation is displayed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (28) displays the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT, indicating that the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (29), the operation of the chance button 136 by the player can be accepted.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 70 (30) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (31), the player can see the player. It is shown that the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 70 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. .. The cut-in image CI3 of the lord overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or even when the operation valid period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (33), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is erased, and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect has been started since the development into super reach. ing. After that, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (35), the operation of the chance button 136 by the player can be accepted.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 70 (36) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (37), the player can see the player. It is shown that the chance button 136 is pressed. It should be noted that the operation validity period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the first button effect after developing into super reach. In this case, it develops into super reach. The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect after the development of super reach. In addition, the operation validity period in the first button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the second button effect after developing into super reach, or after developing into super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development of super reach may be the same length.

When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 70 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and also displays the first large panel. The behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character. It is considered to be more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 70 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be displayed in some cases. Further, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is performed. Further, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are performed, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th is performed after the effect image is displayed. The operation of the large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is started, or the effect image. And the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect display that causes a loss may be performed without performing the effect shown in FIG. 70 (38), and further, the effect display that causes a loss may be displayed. After that, the revival effect may be displayed so that a big hit effect display is performed. When the effect shown in FIG. 70 (38) is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

After that, in FIG. 70 (39), the Senryo box accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. It is shown that it is. Further, after that, FIG. 70 (40) shows how the light guide plate IL is emitting light. The display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryo box accessory 224H, and the order in which the light guide plate IL starts emitting light are limited to those described above. It can be set as appropriate. Further, the display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryo box accessory 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may all be performed. The part may not be performed.

FIG. 70 (41) shows how the light guide plate IL has finished emitting light. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (42), the Senryo box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 70 (43), the effect image fades out, and then, as shown in FIG. 70 (44), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd move toward the initial position, respectively. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene in which the display was interrupted is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed.

After that, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 70 (46). In FIG. 70 (46), the main character, the lord, defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 70 (47), "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 71 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure A. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (50), the first special figure display device 212 was stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 did not receive the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol determination has stopped, the first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 71 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped.

After that, when the jackpot game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 71 (52), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot start effect. The display starts. This time, since the jackpot game was started as a jackpot by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the "special bonus" and the game. It has been notified to the person that it is a 15R probability variation jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (52), a mini right-handed display instructing right-handed is performed in the upper left corner of the display area. Note that the mini right-handed display may not be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to hit right is displayed, and then the first round is started as shown in FIG. 71 (54). When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display and displays "decoration 7" indicating a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is done. In addition, a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and "1R", which is the current round, is displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive villas may be displayed.

After that, when the jackpot game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 71 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display, and in the upper right corner of the display area, The current round "15R" is displayed.

FIG. 71 (56) shows that the jackpot game is completed and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the jackpot end effect. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability change big hit, the game state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state with electric support) after the big hit game ends. Therefore, in the jackpot end effect display, "Yoshimune RUSH rush" is displayed to that effect, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probability change state with electric support.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (57), a display (warning display) is performed to call attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 45). In addition, this warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the game state that is not in the electric support is completed, or the big hit regardless of the situation where the big hit is made. It may be displayed whenever the game is finished.

FIG. 71 (58) shows a state before the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the probability variation state with electric support, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probabilistic state with electric support, the background image is the background image for the probabilistic state with electric support, and the decorative symbol is also displayed in a different display mode from the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). .. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed in the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold icons of special figure 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a quadrangular patternless and white display mode, and the display mode (here, the shape) is different from the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the player Can be identified at a glance. The default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2. In addition, in FIGS. 71 (58) to (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold that is not actually displayed is held. The icon is shown by a broken line. Further, in FIGS. 71 (58) to 71 (63), the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is divided by a broken line for easy explanation, but the broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probabilistic state with electric support, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed, but it may be displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (58), a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the characters “bonus × ○” indicating the number of consecutive villas are displayed below the mini right-handed display. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, a "bonus x 1" indicating that fact is displayed.

Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (60) instructs the player to strike right. Right-handed notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the characters "Please right-handed" are displayed on the translucent band image. The right-handed notification overlaps with the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric support state in which the first jackpot game is completed and shifted, but it may be displayed even in the electric support state in which the jackpot game other than the first jackpot game is completed and shifted. For example, it may be displayed every time the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the electric support state. Further, after shifting to the electric support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is hitting left. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has won a prize. In some cases, it may be determined that a left-handed hit has been made and a right-handed hit notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (60), the second hold number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (61) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handed notification is displayed, the right-handed notification is hidden as shown in FIG. 71 (62). In addition, the mini right-handed display is continuously performed.

FIG. 71 (63) shows how the symbol variation display of Special FIG. 2 is held for four times. That is, in the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are lit to indicate that there are four holdings in the special drawing 2, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h21 to h24 in the special drawing 2 are turned on. Is displayed. Further, also in the second hold number display, "4" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 2 is four is displayed.

FIG. 72 (49a) shows another production example following FIG. 70 (48). In addition, in FIGS. 69 to 70, the case where "decoration 7" is in the reach state and "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol has been described, but here, "decoration 6" is in the reach state and is in the middle. A case where "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (49a), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is shaken and fluctuated by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”. As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (50a), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure B. At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (50a), the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, and therefore has not determined that the symbol determination stop has occurred. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 72 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are each decorated with "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot is either a substantial 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot.

After that, when the jackpot game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 72 (52a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot start effect. The display starts. This time, since the jackpot game was started as a jackpot by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "bonus" and the player. It is informed that it is either a real 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

FIG. 72 (38b) shows another production example following FIG. 70 (37). FIG. 72 (38b) shows that the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that a loss occurs. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 71 (40b), the variable icon h0, the second hold number display, and the second decorative pattern are displayed. It is left and hidden.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 72 (41b) to 72 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) scroll in from the lower part of the display area, and the hold icon is displayed. And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol starts to sway with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (43b), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure I. At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (43b), the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, and therefore has not determined that the symbol determination stop has occurred. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 72 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are each decorated with "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (45b) displays the variable icon erasing animation. In the variation icon erasing animation display, the variation icon h0 gradually becomes smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 72 (46b), the variation icon h0 disappears in the animation display. The variable icon erasing animation may be started before the special figure is stopped.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment can be customized in various ways.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the contents of customization that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the symbol variation display is not started even after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the symbol variation display was stopped, the mode shifts to the demonstration mode, and the decorative symbol display device 208 The demo screen is displayed. From the time when the special symbol symbol variation display is stopped until the transition to the demonstration mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the combination of the decorative symbol stop symbols, and the operation means such as the chance button 136 is used. When you operate it, a dedicated animation may be displayed. On the demo screen, a dedicated animation is displayed, or when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (decorative symbols are composed of images such as characters and character images (including numbers), images of characters etc. are displayed on the demo screen. Only is displayed and the character image may be hidden, or both the character image and the character image may be displayed), or a movie including the model title (Note that the degree of expectation) In addition to displaying a production introduction movie that introduces high notices and reach with high expectations, there is also a period when menu icons, volume adjustment icons, and brightness adjustment icons are displayed. .. In addition, the demonstration mode may include a state in which a combination of stop display of decorative symbols is displayed.

When the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is operated while the menu icon, the volume adjustment icon, and the brightness adjustment icon are displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an option menu. Further, by operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 1, a volume adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the volume of the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 1 and the like can be increased or decreased. Further, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137, a brightness adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, such as the game board lamp 442 and / and the game underframe lamp 452 shown in FIG. The amount of light from the LED can be increased or decreased. Here, the game board lamp 442 includes the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 67 and the like, but may not be included. If the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 are operated while the volume adjustment window is displayed, the brightness adjustment window is displayed, and conversely, the operation key unit 137 is displayed while the brightness adjustment window is displayed. If you operate the left and right keys of, the volume adjustment window will be displayed.

As will be described in detail later, an icon for "returning to the demo screen" is provided in the option menu, and if you operate the chance button 136 with the cursor on this icon, you will return to the demo screen. be able to. Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started, the option menu is automatically terminated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol. Furthermore, if there is no operation for a certain period of time (for example, 1 minute) while the option menu is displayed, the demo screen is automatically returned.

If the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume is determined, the demo screen is returned from the volume adjustment window, and the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137. When pressed, the amount of light is determined, and the screen returns to the demo screen from the brightness adjustment window. Further, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the demo screen is automatically returned after a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed after the operation of the left / right key or the up / down key. Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started, the volume adjustment window and the brightness adjustment window automatically disappear, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 73B is a diagram showing the configuration of the option menu.

In the option menu, it is possible to roughly divide and perform "effect customization", "character selection", "hold frame selection", "hold display selection", and "background display selection".

The "auto button mode" in the "effect customization" may be the same response effect as when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated without operating the operation means such as the chance button 136. It is a mode. Note that ON / OFF described in the "option" of FIG. 73B means setting / non-setting or valid / invalid. "Long-press auto-continuous hitting" means that the operation means such as the chance button 136 is simply long-pressed, and the pressing is repeated at high speed during the long-pressing period (continuous hitting). ) It is a function that produces the same response effect as at the time, and the speed of repeated hits can be selected. The "group notice" is a kind of normal notice (notice of the change), and in this option menu, the player can select the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot of the group notice. For example, there is a 100% confidence that the fluctuation with the group notice displayed will be a big hit! ?? Although it is lower than, if you want to increase the frequency of appearance of the group notice as a notice of the change, set the reliability to 50%, and set the frequency of the group notice to appear as the notice of the change to 50%. Although it is low, if you want it to be displayed in the fluctuation as a notice of big hit rich (big hit confirmed), the reliability is 100%! ?? Set to. "Prize sound notice" is a kind of pre-reading notice when a prize is won at the special figure start opening and the number of holds increases. The winning sound notice may be a notice of the change. The back button means that the operation valid period of the operation means such as the chance button 136 has started and / or does not notify that the operation valid period of the operation means is in progress. When "Navigation" is turned on (set), for example, the chance button lamp 138 lights up during the operation validity period of the operation means, or a character display such as "It may be good to operate the operation means" is displayed. Will be done. "No look-ahead notice" does not mean all look-ahead notices other than the look-ahead notice by the display mode of the hold icon (for example, the look-ahead notice by the movable means (directing movable body) and the look-ahead notice display other than the hold icon by the display means) ( (Equivalent to "ON"). "Premier up" is a setting that increases the frequency of appearance of a big hit rich or big hit confirmed effect (corresponding to "ON"). “No change in hold” is a setting that does not give a pre-reading notice (corresponding to “ON”) depending on the display mode of the hold icon. A "one-shot notification" is a specific notice about a big hit rich or big hit confirmation (for example, a directing operation by a directing movable body, a big hit rich (big hit confirmed) sound by a sound output means, a frame or a game board. A notice by a light emitting effect by a part or all of decorative LEDs can be mentioned.)

In addition, "big hit confirmation" in this specification means a symbol change in which the notice of big hit confirmation is displayed or a symbol change of pending look-ahead target when the notice of big hit confirmation and / or the notice of pre-reading notice is displayed. When the pre-reading notice of the jackpot confirmation is displayed toward the target, it indicates that the change or the pre-reading target hold is always a jackpot (the same applies to the following explanation).

Further, the "big hit rich" in the present specification means that the expectation for the big hit is high, and even if the notice of the big hit and / or the pre-reading notice is displayed, the notice of the big hit is displayed. It is shown that even if a big hit rich look-ahead notice is displayed for the symbol change that has been made or the symbol change that is reserved for look-ahead, it may be lost (the same applies to the following explanation). In addition, the jackpot richness may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed (the same applies to the following description).

Further, the description of "hot" in the present specification also means that the expectation for a big hit is high, but even if the notice of hotness and / or the notice of pre-reading notice is displayed, the symbol showing the hot notice is displayed. It shows that even if a hot look-ahead notice is displayed for fluctuations or symbol fluctuations that are reserved for look-ahead, it may be lost (the same applies to the following explanation). Further, "hot" may indicate that the expectation of the jackpot is lower than that of the jackpot rich, and "super heat" may indicate that the jackpot is rich or the jackpot is confirmed (the following explanation). The same applies to).

Further, "Daitomo" described in FIG. 73 (b) is a member service for accessing a Web server through an Internet line by registering as a member, and the level (lv) is obtained by accumulating experience points. It is a service that you can get various benefits depending on the level. When executing the membership service of "Daitomo", the pachinko machine 100 is set to the user mode. Some pachinko machines 100 have specifications that do not support the membership service of "Daitomo". For models with specifications that support the membership service of "Daitomo", if the user mode is set and the level of Daitomo reaches the 15th level, the setting of the back button navigation is released as a kind of production customization. Further, in FIG. 73B, the item described as "Daitomo setting" can be released only by registering as a member and setting the user mode. Therefore, even if the level is 0 at the time of joining Daitomo, the hold frame B can be used only by setting the user mode, for example, if the hold frame is selected. Here, the holding frame corresponds to a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. 67 and the like. The "initial setting" means that the user mode is automatically selected when the user mode is not set. In addition, "Daitomo" can be enrolled before formal membership registration, and the enrolled person can use the old character in character selection as a trial play.

In addition, as one of the above benefits of Daitomo, there is an item that cannot be selected without raising the level of Daitomo. That is, among "character selection", "hold frame selection", "hold display selection", and "background display selection", the item in which the Daitomo level (lv) is displayed in the "open condition" is the displayed level. It is an item that can be selected only after reaching (lv).

FIG. 74 is a transition diagram of the option menu screen when the member service is not used.

By operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, the cursor moves up and down on the option menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Of the items "Customize production", "Select character", "Select hold frame", "Select hold display", "Select background display", "Initialize", and "Return to demo screen", they are connected by arrows. The cursor moves by operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, and a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, if the cursor is moved to the item of "effect customization" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the production customization screen. If the cursor is moved to the item "Return to demo screen" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the demo screen.

On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "effect customization screen", "character selection screen", "hold frame selection screen", "hold display selection screen", "background display selection screen", and "initialization confirmation screen". Is displayed, and if you move the cursor to the "Back" icon and press the chance button 136, you can return to the option menu screen. Further, it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "back" icon.

Although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure start ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is the option menu screen, the "effect customization screen" is displayed. , "Character selection screen", "Holding frame selection screen", "Holding display selection screen", "Background display selection screen", and "Initialization confirmation screen" also shift to the screen of variable display of decorative symbols.

Subsequently, the matters described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 will be specifically described with reference to a display example in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of calling the option menu screen, the volume adjustment window, and the brightness adjustment window from the demo screen. The example described here is an example of a pachinko machine 100 having specifications that do not support the membership service of "Daitomo". The opening condition of FIG. 73 (b) is ignored, and any item is selected from the beginning. It is possible. In the following embodiments, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an icon indicating the appearance of the cross key (up key, down key, left key, right key) of the operation key unit and an icon indicating the appearance of the chance button. When the icon is displayed, the colorless and unpatterned icon indicates an inoperable operating means, and the icon displayed in another mode (colored or / and patterned) indicates an operable operating means.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The symbol change display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not started since the final display of the stop symbol of the special symbol has been performed. In this state, when a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI shown in FIG. 75 (1) is started. Even before a certain period of time has elapsed, the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the special symbol has expired, and the next symbol variation display has not started (for example, the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed when there is no hold). If it is (immediately after the display period has elapsed), these icons MI, VI, and BI may be displayed by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136, the cross key of the operation unit, etc.). Even if these icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed, in addition to the condition that a certain fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the final display period of the stop symbol of the special figure has ended. Good. Alternatively, even if the display of these icons MI, VI, and BI is started, for a certain period (for example, 3 seconds), even if the chance button 136 and the cross key of the operation key unit 137 are operated, the option menu screen and the volume adjustment are performed. The window and the brightness adjustment window may not be displayed.

Further, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI may include display (character display or image display) of the customized contents. For example, if the menu icon MI is used, the character display or icon display for customizing the effect, if the volume adjustment icon VI is used, the gauge display indicating the volume level is displayed, and if the brightness adjustment icon BI is used, the gauge display indicating the light intensity level is displayed. It may be included. Further, the menu icon MI may include the display of major items shown in FIG. 73 (b) (for example, "character selection"), or may not be included as shown in FIG. 75 (1). May be good.

In FIG. 75 (2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit is operated. It is the same even if the upper key 137u is operated. The cross key is lit in white when there is no operation, but the pressed key is lit in red, but the cross key may not be provided with a decorative lamp.

By operating the down key 137d, the luminance adjustment window BW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (3). The brightness adjustment window BW has a larger display than the brightness adjustment icon BI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (3), the menu icon MI disappears and the volume adjustment icon VI shifts to the position of the menu icon MI. The brightness adjustment window BW, which is about four times as large as the brightness adjustment icon BI, is displayed. In this example, the amount of light of LEDs such as the game board lamp 442 and / and the game underframe lamp 452 can be adjusted in 5 steps, and the initial value is the brightest 5 levels.

In FIG. 75 (4), the lower key 137d is operated again, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 75 (5), the brightness adjustment window BW is lowered by one step to 4 levels.

In FIG. 75 (6), the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 75 (7), the brightness adjustment window BW is raised by one step and returned to the fifth level. Even if the upper key 137u is operated in the state of 5 levels, the amount of light does not increase any more. Further, even if the down key 137d is operated in the state of one level, the amount of light does not decrease any more. If no operation is performed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the demo screen returns to the demo screen in which the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed, but if the up key 137d or the down key 137u is operated, the period is fixed. The count start can be updated. That is, the period until returning to the demo screen can be extended. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this 0 level, the LED will remain off.

In FIG. 75 (8), the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated. It is the same even if the left key 137l is operated.

By operating the right key, the volume adjustment window VW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (9). The volume adjustment window VW has a larger display than the volume adjustment icon VI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (9), the volume adjustment window VW is on the menu icon MI side and is about four times as large as the volume adjustment icon VI. The menu icon MI disappears, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the volume from the speaker 120 can be adjusted in 5 steps, and the initial value is 3 levels of the intermediate volume.

In FIG. 75 (10), the right key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again, and in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 75 (11), the level is raised by one step to four levels. Even if the right key is operated in the state of the loudest 5th level, the volume does not increase any more. Also, even if the left key is operated in the 1st level state, the volume does not decrease any more. Also, if no operation is performed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), the demo screen returns to the demo screen where the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed, but if the left key or right key is operated, the demo screen is restored. The period can be extended. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this 0 level, the speaker 120 maintains mute.

Since a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the last operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (13) displays a demo screen on which three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. I'm back.

In FIG. 75 (14), the chance button 136 is operated and the chance button 136 is operated, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (15) displays the option menu screen. The chance button 136 emits red light when the built-in chance button lamp 138 is pressed, but it may be lit in red even before it is pressed. On this option menu screen, the background display, hold frame UI, navigation character YM, 1st decorative symbol (3rd symbol), and 2nd decorative symbol (5th symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "Menu". , In order from the top in a vertical row, there are 7 types of icons such as production customization icon, character selection icon, hold frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization icon, and return icon to return to the demo screen. It is displayed. On the left side of any one of these seven types of icons, a cursor icon cs that can be moved up and down with the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 is displayed. In FIG. 75 (14), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the effect customization icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. Further, on the option menu screen, a picture of an operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, among the operation key units 137, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Further, among the chance button 136 and the cross keys, the designs of the cursor icon cs and the up and down keys 137u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. In the decision operation, the decision key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the decision key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

Here, even if the chance button 136 is operated during the brightness adjustment or the volume adjustment in FIGS. 75 (2) to (12), the option menu screen is not displayed, but it may be displayed. .. Further, the initial position of the cursor icon cs at the start of displaying the option menu screen may be the effect customization icon at the top, the back icon, or another icon. Alternatively, it may be the icon of the item currently being customized.

In FIG. 75 (16), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the effect customization icon, and as shown in FIG. 75 (17), the effect customization screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. A five-line list is displayed on the effect customization screen, and the list shows the five sub-items in the effect customization shown in FIG. 73 (b) from the top ("01 auto button mode" to "05 back". "Button navigation") and each option (for example, "OFF ON") are displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. Furthermore, below that, a confirmation icon for saving the setting changes, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, and an initialization icon for returning the settings to the initial values at once are arranged in a horizontal row from the left side. ing. Further, on the effect customization screen, a cursor display is used instead of the cursor icon. The initial position of the cursor display at the start of the effect customization screen display is the return icon for returning to the option menu screen. The back icon with the cursor display has a highlighted frame and is lit in red. In addition, among the displayed options, the currently set option is also displayed in red. For example, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 (17), the auto button mode is not set (OFF). Further, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are also displayed at the lower right of the effect customization screen. On the effect customization screen, the patterns of all the keys 137u, d, l, and r among the cross keys are displayed in red.

In FIG. 75 (18), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item of the auto button mode. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 (19), the frame of the item of the auto button mode is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation of the auto button mode is displayed.

In FIG. 75 (20), the right key 137r is operated while the cursor display is displayed in the item of the auto button mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 75 (21), the currently set option of the auto button mode is changed to ON. That is, it was switched from OFF to ON. If the left key 137l is operated while the currently set option is OFF, the key operation is invalid, but the result may be the same as when the right key 137r is operated.

In FIG. 75 (22), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item one item below the auto button mode (long press auto continuous hitting). That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 (23), the frame of the item of long-press auto-continuous hitting is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation about this item is displayed. When the up key 137u is operated instead of the down key 137d, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon when the setting is changed, and moves to the back icon when the setting is not changed. However, it may move to the confirmation icon or the back icon with or without the setting change.

After that, the down key 137d is operated three times, and the cursor display moves to the item of the back button navigation at the bottom. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 (25), the frame of the item of the back button navigation is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation about this item is displayed.

In FIG. 75 (26), the down key 137d is operated one more time, the list of five lines is updated as shown in FIG. 75 (27), and the auto is 01 in FIG. 73 (b). The button mode item has disappeared, and the cursor display has moved to the newly added item in FIG. 73 (b), which was 06 without pre-reading notice.

In FIG. 75 (28), the lower key 137d is further operated.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 75.

The list is updated in accordance with the operation of the down key 137d, and on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 76 (29) following FIG. 75 (28), the final sub-item of the effect customization in FIG. 73 (b) is 09. The cursor display has moved to the item of one notification.

As shown in FIG. 76 (30), when the down key 137d is operated again, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon and the confirmation icon is highlighted with a frame as shown in FIG. 76 (31). , Furthermore, it is lit in red.

In FIG. 76 (32a), the chance button 136 is operated as a determination operation, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which the cancel icon and the update icon are displayed) for confirming that the effect customization setting is to be updated may be displayed. On the notification screen shown in FIG. 76 (33a), a return icon for returning to the option menu screen is displayed, and the cursor display is displayed on the icon.

In FIG. 76 (34), the chance button 136 is operated to return to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 76 (35).

The return icon on the notification screen shown in FIG. 76 (33a) may be an icon for returning to the effect customization screen, and by operating the return icon arranged on the effect customization screen, the option menu screen can be displayed. You may be able to return.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (36) (see FIG. 76 (37)), FIG. 76 (38). ), The cursor icon cs that was previously displayed on the production customization icon has moved down by one, and this time the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is red. Lights up.

In FIG. 76 (39), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 76 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a character selection screen. Is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the character selection screen, and the list contains the top five options (“01 Yoshimune” to “05 Hani”) for character selection shown in FIG. 73 (b). It is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 76 (40), the cursor display is displayed in the item of Yoshimune, and the character pattern of the item in which the cursor display is displayed (here, the pattern of Yoshimune) is previewed on the left side of the character selection screen. Has been done. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for character selection is Yoshimune, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated. Also, at the bottom right of the character selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red chance used for the decision operation. The design of the button 136 is also displayed.

The character set by the character selection here is always displayed, always appears at the time of production, or appears more frequently than other characters.

As shown in FIG. 76 (41), when the down key 137d is operated once, as shown in FIG. 76 (42), the cursor display moves to the grandfather of the item one item below Yoshimune, and the grandfather's The picture is previewed.

In FIG. 76 (43), the lower key 137d is operated five more times, the list is updated in accordance with the operation of the lower key 137d, and the character selection screen shown in FIG. 76 (44) is shown in FIG. 73 (b). The cursor display has moved to the item of Copanda in 07, which is the last choice of character selection.

As shown in FIG. 76 (45), when the down key 137d is operated again, the cursor display moves to the back icon and the back icon is highlighted with a frame as shown in FIG. 76 (46). , And it is lit in red.

Here, when the down key 137d is operated only once instead of the chance button 136 (FIG. 76 (47)), the list is updated, and as shown in FIG. 76 (48), 01 Yoshimune is displayed. Returning to the first list at the top, the cursor display has moved to that Yoshimune item. Then, in FIG. 76 (49), the chance button 136 is operated. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 76 (50), an animation display indicating that a character is determined is performed in the area where the preview display was performed. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) for confirming that the character settings may be updated may be displayed, but in this example, an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed. When finished, the settings of the selected character are automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 76 (51).

Even if the animation display indicating that the character is determined ends, the character selection screen remains, and the option menu screen can be returned by operating the back icon placed on the character selection screen. Good.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 76 (52)), as shown in FIG. 76 (53), the character until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold frame selection icon, and the hold frame selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 76 (54), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the hold frame selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 76 (55), the hold frame is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The selection screen is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the hold frame selection screen, and the list shows the top five options in the hold frame selection shown in FIG. 73 (b) ("01 Hold frame A" to "05". Hold frame E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 76 (55), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the hold frame A, and in the window on the left side of the hold frame selection screen, the hold frame of the item in which the cursor display is displayed is a hold icon and a variable icon. It is previewed with. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting of the hold frame selection is the hold frame A, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated hold that cannot be selected here. A frame may be prepared. In addition, at the bottom right of the hold frame selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and the red color used for the decision operation. The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The holding frame set by the holding frame selection here is displayed as the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 76 (56), the down key 137d is operated once.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 76.

In response to a single operation of the down key 137d shown in FIG. 76 (56) following from FIG. 76 (55), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (57), the cursor display is 1 of the holding frame A. It moves to the hold frame B of the item below, and the hold frame B is previewed in the left window.

In FIG. 77 (58), the decision operation is performed by the chance button 136. On the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 77 (59), an effect display Ed1 that surrounds the window on the left side where the preview display is performed is generated, and when the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected hold frame is updated. Is automatically performed, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 77 (60). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) may be displayed to confirm that the hold frame setting is to be updated. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold frame selection screen remains, and the option menu screen may be returned by operating the return icon arranged on the hold frame selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 77 (61)), it is held until then as shown in FIG. 77 (62). The cursor icon cs displayed on the frame selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold display selection icon, and the hold display selection icon lights up in red. In this state, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 77 (63), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hold display selection screen. A five-line list is also displayed on the hold display selection screen, and the list shows the top five options (“01 icon A” to “05 icon”) in the hold display selection shown in FIG. 73 (b). "E") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 77 (63), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the icon A, and the icon of the item in which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed together with the hold frame in the window on the left side of the hold display selection screen. There is. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for the hold display selection is the icon A, but the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated icon that cannot be selected here may be used. You may prepare it. In addition, at the lower right of the hold display selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and the red color used for the decision operation. The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The icon set by the hold display selection here is displayed as the hold icon h1 to h4 or as the variable icon h0 in the hold frame UI.

After that, the down key 137d is operated twice, the cursor display moves to the icon C, and the icon C is previewed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation is performed by the chance button 136, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 77 (65), the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window in which the preview display is performed is generated again, and the effect display Ed1 is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected icon is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 77 (66). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which the cancel icon and the update icon are displayed) for confirming that the icon settings are to be updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold display selection screen remains, and the option menu screen may be returned by operating the back icon arranged on the hold display selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 77 (67)), it is held until then as shown in FIG. 77 (68). The cursor icon cs displayed on the display selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the background display selection icon, and the background display selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 77 (69), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the background display selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 77 (70), the background display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The selection screen is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the background display selection screen, and all five options (“01 background A” to “05 background E”) in the background display selection shown in FIG. 73 (b) are displayed in the list. Has been done. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the five-line list. In FIG. 77 (70), the cursor display is displayed on the item of the background A, and the background of the item on which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed in the window on the left side of the background display selection screen. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting of the background display selection is the background A, but the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated background that cannot be selected here may be used. You may prepare it. At the bottom right of the background display selection screen, there is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and the red color used for the decision operation. The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The background set by the background display selection here is displayed as the background display in the normal state in the decorative symbol display device 208. The background display in the normal state referred to here does not include the background display in the look-ahead mode, the background display as a notice of the jackpot of the fluctuation, and the background display in the electric support state. However, only the background display in the electric support state may be included.

After that, the down key 137d is operated four times, the cursor display moves to the background E, and the background E (empty background) is previewed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation is performed by the chance button 136, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 77 (72), the effect display Ed1 that surrounds the left window in which the preview display is performed is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the selected background setting is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 77 (73). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which the cancel icon and the update icon are displayed) for confirming that the background setting is to be updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the background display selection screen remains, and the option menu screen may be returned by operating the back icon arranged on the background display selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated twice while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 77 (74a)), as shown in FIG. 77 (75), until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the hold display selection icon moves to the bottom, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the back icon for returning to the demo screen, and the back icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 77 (76), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the back icon, and as shown in FIG. 77 (77), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a demo screen. Will be done. The demo screen here reflects the customized results. That is, the background has been changed to an empty background, the hold frame UI is different from the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 75 (1), and the frame RW at the upper right of the screen is set to ON by the effect customization. The mode name (here, auto button mode) is displayed. When the two modes are set to ON, they are displayed alternately in ascending order of customization numbers. For example, if the auto button mode of 01 and the back button navigation of 05 are turned on, the auto button mode and the back button navigation are alternately displayed in the frame RW on the upper right of the screen. If it is the same as the default setting, it may not be displayed in the frame RW, but it may be displayed even if it is the same. Further, when no setting is made, OFF may be displayed in the frame RW, or nothing may be displayed. Further, the group notice of the reliability setting and the long-press auto-continuous striking of the continuous striking speed setting may be set but not displayed in the frame RW. Further, the set mode may not be displayed in detail, but may be displayed only as, for example, "Production customization in progress".

In FIG. 77 (79), a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp are shown. 220 and a fourth symbol display device 284 are also shown. All of the ordinary symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 shown in FIG. 77 (79) are in stop display. Further, both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (79) are being stopped and displayed, and the fourth decorative symbol shown in FIG. 77 (79) is being displayed. The symbol display device 284 also represents a stop display. Further, the ordinary symbol holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218, and the second special symbol holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 77 (79) are all turned off, and are located in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the displayed second hold number display, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. Therefore, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not been started since the final display of the stopped symbol has been performed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 77 (80), one ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, and the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 77 (80) has started the symbol variation display. However, both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub-control unit 400,500 side shown in FIG. 77 (80) are decorative symbols. The variable display has not been started, and the fourth symbol display device 284, which is also controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500, still displays the stop display. In the fourth symbol display device 284 shown in FIG. 77 (80), the black square represents the stop display of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the gray circle represents the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The white square represents the variable display of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the white circle represents the variable display of the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (81), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol starts variable display and the second hold number displayed in the upper right corner. On the display, the number of reserved special figures 1 is displayed as "1" for a moment.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (82), of the second hold number display, the hold number of the special figure 1 which was previously displayed as “1” for a moment is “0”. In addition, since the first special figure start port 230 is won and immediately digested, the second hold number display may not be displayed as "1" even for a moment and may remain as "0".

In FIG. 77 (83), the increasing animation of the first hold icon h11 has started.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 77.

In FIG. 78 (84) following from FIG. 77 (83), the increase animation ends and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 78 (84) is an icon newly set in the hold display selection of the effect customization, and is displayed in the default display mode (diamond-shaped patternless and white display mode). There is.

In FIG. 78 (85), the variable display of the first decorative symbol has not been started yet, but the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the volume adjustment icon VI are delayed from the start of the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Erasing of three icons such as the brightness adjustment icon BI has started, and the display is transparent. The erasure here may be made by animation, but it does not necessarily have to be an erasure animation, and in FIG. 78 (86), the erasure of these three icons MI, VI, and BI is completed.

In FIG. 78 (87), the first hold icon h11 has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area, and in FIG. 78 (88), the movement of the first hold icon h11 is completed. On the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (diamond-shaped non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. Then, in FIG. 78 (89), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finally started, and the first decorative symbol is undergoing low-speed fluctuation. In addition, in detail in starting the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the left symbol starts the variable display first, then the middle symbol starts the variable display, and finally the right symbol starts the variable display. However, the order of starting the variable display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is not limited to this order, and these three left symbols, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may start the variable display at the same time. In addition, before the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, an animation by the decorative symbol (for example, an animation in which the decorative symbol is displayed once in a large size and then returns to the original size, or an image and characters in which the decorative symbol is a character or the like are displayed. When it is composed of an image (including numbers), an image such as a character may be animated before the first decorative symbol starts to fluctuate) may be displayed.

In FIG. 78 (91), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation. Even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, if the left key 137l or the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated (see FIG. 78 (92)), FIG. 78 (93) As shown in, a bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed on the hold frame UI. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. .. With the volume adjustment bar display VB displayed, operating the left key 137l reduces the bar display by one level and reduces the sound, and operating the right key 137r increases the bar display by one level and increases the sound. , The volume is adjustable.

In the present embodiment, only the volume adjustment is always possible even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started. Even if the volume adjustment is always possible, the bar display VB for volume adjustment may not be displayed. Moreover, even during the big hit game, only the volume adjustment is always possible. However, it may be regulated for a certain period of time. For example, during the start production of the jackpot game, during the interval between rounds, during the end production of the jackpot game, during the execution of the super reach effect, during the final display of the symbols on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214, and the decorative symbols. The result screen (for example, the number of balls or / and) at the end of the confirmation display, the confirmation display of the lost symbol, the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol, or the end of the electric support (time reduction) state (for example, the end of ST). The period during which the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used in the production may be restricted while the screen for displaying the number of consecutive villas and the like is being displayed. If the super reach effect is a game effect, it is regulated until the result of the victory or defeat is notified, and then it may be adjustable, or it may be adjusted after the three decorative symbols are aligned and the shaking display is started. It may be possible, or the entire period from the super reach effect to the stop display may be regulated.

In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started may be possible only in the special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy state. Further, even if the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, the light amount adjustment is not possible, but the light amount adjustment bar. The display may be displayed in the same manner as the bar display VB for adjusting the volume, and the amount of light may be adjustable, or the amount of light may be adjustable without displaying the bar. Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, the effect customization, character selection, and the like may be set.

Further, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated in a state where the volume adjustment icon VI or the like disappears, that is, while the symbol is changing, the bar display VB for volume adjustment is not displayed as in the present embodiment. The volume may be adjustable. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is configured to be erased if it is not operated for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), but when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated again before the certain period elapses. May be configured so that the count start for that fixed period can be updated (ie, the period before returning to the demo screen can be extended). If the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated during the execution of the animation in which the volume adjustment icon VI etc. is erased by the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, the erasing animation is canceled in the middle and immediately. The volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be erased, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed instead. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be redisplayed without canceling the erase animation, or the volume adjustment bar display VB may be displayed after the erase animation is performed to the end.

Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214 is started, the presence or absence of the display of the three icons MI, VI, and BI is determined until the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started. Regardless, the amount of light may be adjustable, and the production customization, character selection, and the like may be set.

Further, even if the volume adjustment and / or the brightness adjustment can be performed during the symbol variation, the adjustment bar display may not be displayed.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 76.

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 79 (32b) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 76 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 79 (33b1). The return icon is highlighted in a frame and lit in red. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 79 (33b2)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to return to the option menu screen is displayed on the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 79 (33b3)). ). On this confirmation screen, a back icon for approving the return to the option menu screen and a cancel icon for canceling the return to the option menu screen are displayed. In FIG. 79 (33b2), the cursor display is changed to the cancel icon. It is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (33b4-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the back icon (FIG. 79 (33b5-1)), or the cursor display is displayed on the cancel icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (33b4-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the effect customization screen (FIG. 79 (33b5-2)).

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 79 (32c) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 76 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 79 (33c1). When the right key 137r is operated one more time (FIG. 79 (33c2)), the cursor display moves to the initialization icon as shown in FIG. 79 (33c3). When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 79 (33c4)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize the effect customization is displayed on the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 79 (33c5)). )). On this confirmation screen, a "yes icon" that approves the initialization and a "no icon" that cancels the initialization are displayed. In FIG. 79 (33c5), the cursor display is the "no icon". Is displayed in. Then, when the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 79 (33c6-1), the cursor display moves to the “yes icon” (FIG. 79 (33c7-1), and in this state, FIG. 79 (33c8-1). When the chance button 136 is operated as shown in, the effect customization is executed. The initialization here returns to the initial value for all the settings made by the player in the effect customization. In particular, nothing in particular. It is possible to perform initialization even when it is not set, but it may not be possible. When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed on the production customization screen from the front side. (FIG. 79 (33c9-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 79 (33c6-2)), the effect customization screen reflecting the initialization is displayed. In this example, in particular. Nothing was set, but all the items are turned off by default.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing other modified examples.

When the lower key 137d is operated only once as shown in FIG. 80 (74b1) instead of the two operations of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 77 (74a), as shown in FIG. 80 (74b2). The cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the initialization icon, and the initialization icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 80 (74b3), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the initialization icon, and as shown in FIG. 80 (74b4), all the settings are set in the decorative symbol display device 208. A confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize is displayed on the option menu screen from the front side. On this confirmation screen, a "yes icon" that approves the initialization and a "no icon" that cancels the initialization are displayed. In FIG. 80 (74b4), the cursor display is the "no icon". Is displayed in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (74b5-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the “yes icon” (FIG. 80 (74b6-1)), or the cursor display is displayed in the “no icon”. In this state, the chance button 136 can be operated as shown in FIG. 80 (74b5-2) to return to the option menu screen (FIG. 80 (74b6-2)).

When the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor display is displayed on the “Yes icon” as shown in FIG. 80 (74b6-1) (FIG. 80 (74b7-1)), all the settings are initialized. To. In the initialization here, everything set by the player is returned to the initial value. It is possible to perform initialization even when nothing is set, but it may not be possible. When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed on the option menu screen from the front side (FIG. 80 (74b8-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 80 (74b9-1)), the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 80 (74b10-1).

When the player does not return to the option menu screen after making various customizations and does not operate the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 or the ball firing handle 134 for a certain period of time (for example, 5 minutes). May initialize various settings. Further, the confirmation screen of FIG. 79 (33c5) may be displayed instead of the confirmation screen of FIG. 80 (74b6-1). Alternatively, the "yes icon" may be removed from the confirmation screen so that it is initialized after a certain period of time has passed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Further, even if there is a "yes icon", if there is no operation, it may be configured to be initialized after a certain period of time has passed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Alternatively, it may be initialized only when "Initialize" is selected on the confirmation screen (here, when the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor display is displayed on the "Yes icon"). ..

Further, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment may be the same with respect to the initialization, and further, the initialization setting of various settings and the initialization of the volume and / or the brightness may be performed at the same timing. One may be initialized before the other. Also, when initializing the volume and brightness at the same timing as the initialization settings of various settings, do not display the initialization confirmation screen for volume initialization and brightness initialization. Alternatively, a confirmation screen may be displayed that initializes all the settings, volume, and brightness settings.

Further, a display for confirming whether to initialize the effect customization setting may be automatically displayed during the symbol change. For example, it is always displayed when it is displayed once in 100 fluctuations, when a fixed number of fluctuations have been made since it was last displayed, or when a fixed number of fluctuations have been made since the first fluctuation. It may be displayed randomly (for example, when it is won in the display lottery).

80 (I) to 80 (V') are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during a jackpot round.

In this example, for example, the player can select music in the first round or the second round, reach a certain round after the second round, and customize from the next round. A certain round here is a round in which a V-attacker can win a prize, and specifically, there are five rounds. In FIG. 80 (I), the decorative symbol display device 208 in the fifth round is shown, and the letter V that encourages the winning of the V attacker is displayed. In addition, the title of the music selected by the music selection is displayed at the lower left of the screen.

FIG. 80 (II) shows the period corresponding to the inter-round interval when the V-attacker closes. Even in the inter-round interval between the 5th and 6th rounds, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 5 rounds. Also, although the attacker is closed, the right-handed notification continues.

In FIG. 80 (III), the attacker has started opening and the sixth round has started. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (III) displays a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a symbol of the chance button 136. That is, in this example, the production customization can be executed in the sixth round, which is the next round of the fifth round in which the V attacker can win a prize. It may be possible to execute only in the sixth round, or it may be possible to execute in a plurality of rounds after the sixth round.

In FIG. 80 (IV), the chance button 136 is pressed, and on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (V), the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 and the like is reduced and displayed, and a five-line list is displayed. There is.

Further, in FIG. 80 (V') shown as a modification of FIG. 80 (V), a display relating to only one row (only one item) of the five-row list (here, a display relating to the auto button mode) is displayed. There is. In this modification, all the effect customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF of the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r. ..

In the example of FIG. 80 (V) and the example of FIG. 80 (V'), only a part of the effect customization may be changed.

In the example described above, customization can be performed from the next round of a certain round (for example, a round in which a V prize is won by a so-called V-certain machine). In addition, it is not limited to the V confirmation machine, and customization may be performed from a certain round.

Further, during the period during which the music can be selected during the jackpot game, the music cannot be customized, and the music may be customized from the round in which the selected music is output. The music selection may be completed in the middle of the round, and the music selected from the middle of the round may be output. In this case, even if the music is selected in the round, if the selected music is output. , Customization can be done within the round.

In addition, the music may be determined at the end of the specific round, and in this case, customization can be performed after the end of the specific round. In detail, customization may be possible from the end of a particular round at the same time as the end of a particular round, or from the beginning of the next round of a particular round, between a particular round and the next round. Customization may be possible from the inter-round interval.

In addition, customization may be feasible at any time during the jackpot round. In addition, customization may be performed at any time during the jackpot game. The term "during the jackpot game" as used herein means a period from the start of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot, which is between the eaves and includes the round.

From the point of view of the main control unit 300, the period from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed to the start of the first round is the period from when the accessory continuous operation device is turned on to the special electric accessory ( It is the period from off to on (attacker), but includes the period during which the jackpot game start effect is being executed. In addition, the display displayed in the jackpot game start effect (for example, the display of the special bonus) may continue to be displayed even after the first round is started, but it is one round until the attacker starts the first opening. It is the period until the eyes start. Further, the final display of the jackpot symbol is not based on the final display of the decorative symbol, but based on the final display of the symbol on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214. In addition, if the game table performs right-handed notification before the attacker is released (for example, in the case of the first hit in Special Figure 1 or every time a big hit is made), the timing at which this right-handed notification is started is also the big hit symbol. Is included in the period from the confirmation display to the start of the first round.

During the period from the final display of the jackpot symbol to the start of the first round, customization may not be possible, or vice versa.

In addition, customization may not be possible in the period from the end of the final round to the start of symbol variation at the earliest. For example, customization may not be possible during the jackpot end effect.

Further, while the prepaid card forget-to-remove warning is displayed, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed, or vice versa.

Further, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed during a specific production (for example, V winning production, music selection, probability change suggestion production, etc.). Further, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed during the period during which the effect selection (for example, music selection, effect mode selection, etc.) can be performed. Further, it may be configured so that the customization cannot be performed even during the execution period of the effect using the operation means used in the customization, or the customization may be restricted even before the effect is started. By doing so, the regulation of customization functions as a notice of the production.

Further, contrary to the examples shown in FIGS. 80 (I) to 80 (V'), it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed once a certain round is reached. For example, customization can be performed from 1R to 14R, but it may not be possible when it reaches 15R. Alternatively, customization can be performed from 5R to 12R, but it may not be possible after 13R.

Further, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed while the two-dimensional code is displayed. For example, when the two-dimensional code is displayed for a certain period during the jackpot game, or when the two-dimensional code is displayed by the operation of the player (for example, "press the button to display the two-dimensional code" is displayed. When a two-dimensional code is issued by operating a button while it is being executed), it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed. Alternatively, conversely, it may be configured so that it can be customized even while the two-dimensional code is being displayed. All or part of the display related to the two-dimensional code and customization may be displayed at a position where they overlap, or may be displayed at a position where they do not overlap. That is, a part or all of the two-dimensional code may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the display related to customization from the front side, and conversely, a part or all of the display related to customization may be displayed in two dimensions. It may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the code from the front side.

In addition, in FIGS. 80 (I) to 80 (V'), the jackpot effect of the pachinko machine having the variable winning opening having the probability variation region has been described, but the jackpot of the pachinko machine having the variable winning opening having no probability variation region has been described. It can also be applied to the big hits of so-called 1 type and 2 types of models in which the big hit starts by winning V.

FIGS. 80 (VI) to 80 (VIII) are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during the symbol variation display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (VI), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. is there. Further, in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (VI), it is displayed that the ode button mode is currently customized, and the effect customization is executed below it. A character display notifying that it is possible and a design of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 80 (VII), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (VII), the frame RW at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, one line shown in FIG. 80 (V') is displayed. The display related to only (only one item) (here, the display related to the auto button mode) is displayed. Also in this example, all the effect customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF of the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r.

80 (IX) to 80 (XI) are diagrams showing another example that can be customized during the symbol variation display.

Even in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (IX), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. is there. Further, in FIG. 80 (IX), the second display device 208P is arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the first display device). The display screen of the second display device 208P is smaller than that of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second display device 208P is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 80 (IX) is in the initial position and can be moved up and down. A part of the second display device 208P overlaps a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 even at the initial position, and when descending from the initial position, the degree of overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes large.

The model title is displayed on the second display device 208P, and a display RW'indicating that the ode button mode is currently customized is displayed so as to overlap the model title from the front side. .. Further, under the display RW', a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 80 (X), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 80 (XI), the entire screen is switched to the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 and the like. A part of the content of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 or the like (for example, the customized display being executed) may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining content may be displayed on the second display device 208P. Further, the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 or the like may be displayed straddling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second display device 208P. Further, the display using the second display device 208P can also be applied to the display related to customization during the big hit game.

It should be noted that the customization may be executed at any time during the symbol variation display. For example, it may be configured so that it can be customized even while the super reach effect is being displayed. Alternatively, conversely, it may be configured so that customization cannot be performed while the super reach effect is being displayed. The super reach production referred to here includes the production of the fanned part and the precursor production from the time when the reach state is reached until the start of the judge production such as the duel production. For example, the effect of changing the display position of the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol assumed to enter the reach state and the effect before the character display suggesting the development to super reach are included. In addition, when switching from a judge effect such as a duel effect to a display screen of a decorative pattern, the super reach effect is included until the screen is switched to the display screen of the decorative pattern.

In addition, it may be possible to customize the production of the fanned part or the precursory production, or vice versa. Further, after switching to the result display screen of the judge effect or the display screen of the decorative pattern from the judge effect, customization may be possible, or vice versa.

Further, even during the simultaneous production performed on a plurality of game consoles, customization may be possible, and conversely, it may not be possible during the simultaneous production. In addition, customization may be possible during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, or vice versa. Furthermore, during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, customization may be possible only when it finally becomes a big hit, or vice versa, and eventually it will be lost. Only in some cases, customization may be possible, or vice versa. Further, in a state where there is a hold, customization may be possible or may not be possible until the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts. Further, during the execution of a specific effect during the symbol variation display (for example, during the look-ahead mode), customization may be possible, or vice versa.

Further, if customization is performed during the symbol variation display, the setting change may be applied from the symbol variation display, or the setting change may be applied from the next symbol variation display. Good.

In addition, the mission list and game history (number of rotations, number of balls, number of missions cleared, etc.) achieved by the player operation (for example, display with the chance button, switching with the arrow keys, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo) , The number of big hits in this play, the maximum number of consecutive villas in this play, etc.) can be displayed, and the character, background, hold frame, hold display, etc. set by the user can be changed. It may have been. Furthermore, while the user mode (Daitomo) is being set, the mission list and game history achieved by the player operation (for example, display with the chance button, switching with the arrow keys, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo) It is configured to be able to display (number of rotations, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of big hits in this play, maximum number of consecutive villas in this play, etc.), characters set by the user, background, hold frame, etc. , Hold display, etc. may be changed.

Further, when the mission is completed during the setting of the user mode, an icon for notifying that the mission has been completed may be displayed.

Next, an example of the pachinko machine 100 having specifications compatible with the membership service of "Daitomo" will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of this specification, the opening condition shown in FIG. 73 (b) is adopted. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of this specification has a top menu. This top menu can be called by operating the chance button 136 while the demo screen is displayed. The top menu may be called by simply operating the chance button 136 without going through the demo screen. Alternatively, the demo screen may be automatically switched and displayed without operating the chance button 136. Furthermore, the demo screen may be replaced with this top menu.

The top menu has a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a back icon.

FIG. 81 (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen.

Also on the top menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor moves up and down by operating the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the items "Daitomo", "Model customization", "Initialize", and "Return to demo screen", you can operate the up key or down key of the operation key unit 137 between the items connected by the arrows. When the cursor moves and the chance button 136 is pressed, the screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed is displayed. That is, if the cursor is moved to the item of "Daitomo" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the Daitomo screen. If the cursor is placed on the item "Return to demo screen" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the demo screen.

On the other hand, the "Back" icon is displayed on each of the "Daitomo screen", "Model customization screen", and "Initialization confirmation screen", and move the cursor to the "Back" icon and press the chance button 136. Then you can return to the top menu screen. Further, the top menu screen may be returned to the top menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "back" icon.

Although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure start ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is the top menu screen, the "Daitomo screen" and "Daitomo screen" Even if it is the "model customization screen" or "initialization confirmation screen", the screen shifts to the variable display screen of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 81 (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen.

The transition diagram of the model customization screen shown in FIG. 81 (2) is the same except for the transition diagram of the option menu screen shown in FIG. 74, "Return to top menu" at the bottom, and "Top menu screen" on the right side thereof. Therefore, the duplicate description will be omitted. If the cursor is placed on the item "Return to top menu" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the model customization screen to the top menu screen.

FIG. 82 is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen.

On the Daitomo screen, the cursor moves up and down by operating the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the items "Trial play", "Password input", "Data save", "Data clear", "Quick start", and "Return to top menu screen", the operation key units are connected to each other by arrows. The cursor is moved by operating the up key or the down key of 137, and the screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, if the cursor is moved to the "trial play" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the trial play screen. From the trial play screen, you can move to the new registration screen or start the trial play by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and deciding the chance button 136, or the top menu screen. You can go back to. Furthermore, from the new registration screen, it is possible to move to the password input screen or return to the Daitomo screen by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and determining the chance button 136. ..

If the cursor is moved to the item of "password input" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the password input screen. On the password entry screen, the display is repeated until the correct password is entered, and if the entered password is correct, the demo screen is switched to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

If the cursor is placed on the "data save" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data save confirmation screen. On the data storage confirmation screen, if "Yes" is determined by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and determining the chance button 136, the screen shifts to the two-dimensional code issuing screen. However, if "Yes" is determined in the same way, a two-dimensional code is issued and it is possible to move to the demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set. On the other hand, "No" was determined by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and determining the chance button 136 on both the data storage confirmation screen and the two-dimensional code issuance screen. If so, each display is repeated.

If the cursor is placed on the "data clear" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data clear confirmation screen.

If the cursor is moved to the "quick start" item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the quick start start screen. The quick start start screen switches to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "trial play screen", "password input screen", "data save confirmation screen", "data clear confirmation screen", and "quick start start screen". If you move the cursor to the "Back" icon and press the chance button 136, you can return to the Daitomo screen. Further, it may be possible to return to the Daitomo screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "back" icon.

Although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure start ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is the Daitomo screen, the "trial pre-screen" Even if it is, the screen shifts to the variable display screen of the decorative pattern.

Further, the reference numerals in parentheses shown in FIG. 82 are associated with the numbers in parentheses in FIG. 83.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen.

The top menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (a). On this top menu screen, the background display, the holding frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "Menu", Four types of icons are displayed in a vertical row in order from the top: the Daitomo icon, the model customization icon, the initialization icon, and the back icon for returning to the demo screen. Further, in FIG. 82A, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the back icon at the bottom, and the back icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. The initial position of the cursor icon cs when the display of the top menu screen is started becomes the back icon. Also on the top menu screen, the pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red) and the pattern of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right.

On the screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (b1), the chance button 136 is displayed on the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83 (a) with the cursor icon cs displayed on the Daitomo icon. This is the Daitomo screen displayed when pressed. To return to the trial play icon, password input icon, data save icon, data clear icon, quick start icon, and top menu screen in a vertical row from top to bottom under the character display of "Daitomo" on this Daitomo screen. Six types of icons such as the back icon of are displayed. Further, in FIG. 82 (b1), the cursor display is displayed on the top trial play icon, and the trial play icon is highlighted in a frame and further lit in red. In addition, a character of Yoshimune appears on the right side of the six types of icons arranged in a vertical row, and an explanation about the trial play is displayed. Further, below the display of the explanation, a picture of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red) and a picture of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the trial play screen shown in FIG. 83 (b1-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

On the trial play screen shown in FIG. 83 (b1-1), options that can be selected by various customizations are displayed as a privilege of the membership experience of Daitomo. Below that display is a confirmation icon to save the setting changes, a back icon to return to the Daitomo screen, a "start icon" to start trial play, and a new registration to register as a new member. The icons are arranged in a horizontal row from the left. The cursor display is displayed on the "start icon", and this position is the initial position. In this state, if the right key 137r is operated once, the cursor display moves to the "new registration icon", and when the decision operation is performed by pressing the sodeko chance button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The new registration screen shown in FIG. 83 (b1-2) is displayed.

On the new registration screen shown in FIG. 83 (b1-2), a large two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed on the left side, and on the right side, the two-dimensional code is read by a communication terminal with a shooting function and displayed on the two-dimensional code QR1. A sentence is displayed that recommends accessing the website (Daitomo site) with the embedded URL and obtaining the password from it. Below the text display, a password input icon and a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen are displayed. In this example, the new registration screen is displayed via the trial play screen, but it may be possible to display the new registration screen without going through the trial play screen. For example, a new registration icon is provided on the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83 (b1) in addition to the trial play icon, and when the new registration icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, FIG. 83 (b1-b1-) The new registration screen shown in 2) may be displayed.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83 (b2), the cursor display is displayed on the password input icon, and the explanation about the password input is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the password input screen shown in FIG. 83 (b2-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

On the password input screen shown in FIG. 83 (b2-1), an 8-digit password input area pw and a dial kw of alphabets, symbols, and numbers are displayed below the area pw. The person who inputs the password moves the cursor (displayed in gray and T is specified in FIG. 83 (b2-1-1)) using the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r, and the character specified by the cursor. Is entered in the password input area pw by the determination operation with the chance button 136, character by character according to the password obtained from the Daitomo site (see FIG. 83 (b2-1-1)). Below the dial kW, a back icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, an erase icon for erasing the input characters in the password input area pw, and a completion icon indicating the completion of password input are arranged in a horizontal row from the left. Has been done.

When the password input operation is completed, the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor display displayed on the completion icon. If the password is entered incorrectly, the typo window shown in FIG. 83 (b2-1-2) is displayed, and when this window disappears, the password can be entered again. The password entered last time may be cleared from the password entry area pw, or may remain as it is. If the password is entered correctly, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the input completion window shown in FIG. 83 (b2-1-3) for a certain period of time, and then switches to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode. ..

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83 (b3), the cursor display is displayed on the data save icon, and the explanation about data save is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 83 (b3-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when trial play or quick start is performed, or when the password is not entered, the data save icon can not be selected or this data save confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

On the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 83 (b3-1), a "Yes" icon for accepting the data to be saved and a "No" icon for not saving the data are displayed. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the two-dimensional code QR2 is generated and issued by the pachinko machine 100 (FIG. 83 (b3-2)). In addition to the URL of the Daitomo site, the two-dimensional code QR2 includes the player's ID, the current game history information (for example, the number of games, the number of balls, the number of big hits, the number of consecutive villas, the level of the Daitomo mode, and experience. Values, mission achievement information, etc. are embedded), and this 2D code QR2 is read by a communication terminal with a shooting function, and the URL website (Daitomo site) embedded in the 2D code QR2 is embedded. ), The data is saved on the Daitomo site server. An end icon is displayed at the lower right of this data storage confirmation screen. When the reading of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, select the end icon and operate the chance button 136 to confirm the end. Is displayed.

In FIG. 83 (b3-2-1), the end confirmation screen is displayed, and a “yes” icon that acknowledges the end and a “no” icon that does not end are displayed. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set.

The data embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2, such as the game history information this time, may be deleted from the pachinko machine when the generation of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, and FIG. 83 (b3-2-1). It may be deleted from the pachinko machine 100 at the stage when the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, or it may not be deleted until the data is cleared, which will be described later.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83 (b4), the cursor display is displayed on the data clear icon, and the explanation about data clear is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 83 (b4-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when trial play or quick start is performed, or when the password is not entered, the data clear icon cannot be selected or this data clear confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

On the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 83 (b4-1), a "yes" icon for approving the deletion of the data such as the game history information this time and a "no" icon for not deleting the data are displayed. There is. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the data is erased from the pachinko machine and the erase completion screen is displayed.

The erasure completion screen is displayed in FIG. 83 (b4-1-1), and the erasure completion screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time and returns to the Daitomo screen.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83 (b5), the cursor display is displayed on the quick start icon, and the explanation about the quick start is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the quick start start screen shown in FIG. 83 (b5-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This quick start start screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode.

On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83 (b6), the cursor display is displayed on the back icon, and the return to the top menu screen is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the top menu screen.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a model customization screen.

When the second model customization icon from the top of the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83 (a) is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the model customization screen shown in FIG. 84 (c) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. On this model customization screen, under the character display of "model customization", in order from the top in a vertical row, the production customization icon, character selection icon, hold frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization Seven types of icons are displayed, such as an icon and a back icon for returning to the top menu screen. A cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 84 (c), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the effect customization icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. Further, on the model customization screen, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right. Further, among the chance button 136 and the cross keys, the designs of the cursor icon cs and the up and down keys 137u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. In the decision operation, the decision key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the decision key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

Although the effect customization screen is displayed in FIG. 84 (c1), the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 (17) is that the input sound notice option and the back button navigation option are not released. It's different. If the password of Daitomo is not entered or the level that satisfies the opening condition is not reached, the screen as shown in FIG. 84 (c1) is displayed.

Although the character selection screen is displayed in FIG. 84 (c2), the character selection screen shown in FIG. 76 (40) is different from the character selection screen in which all other options are unreleased except for Yoshimune's option. The difference is that the choices do not even show what kind of character they are. In addition, even if it is an unreleased option, a part or all of the character image may be displayed, a silhouette image in the shape of a character may be displayed, and a display mode in which the selectable character can be recognized ( For example, a display including "Princess opens at Daitomo Lv.20" etc.) may be displayed. Here, regarding the display related to the unreleased options, other customized displays (in this example, the hold frame, the hold display, and the background display) can also be applied. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 84 (c2) is displayed. Only Yoshimune can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the character selection screen shown in FIG. 84 (c2'), since the password is input or the trial play is selected, the grandfather's character can also be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the opening conditions.

Although the hold frame selection screen is displayed in FIG. 84 (c3), the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 76 (55) is such that all the other options are unreleased except for the option of the hold frame A. Yes, the difference is that the other options don't even show what the name of the hold slot is. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 84 (c3) is displayed. On this screen, only the hold frame A can be selected.

On the other hand, on the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 84 (c3'), since the password is entered, the hold frame B can also be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the opening conditions.

Although the hold display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 84 (c4), in the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 77 (63), all the other options are unreleased except for the option of the icon A. The difference is that the other options don't even show what the name of the hold display is. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 84 (c4) is displayed. Only icon A can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 84 (c4'), since the password is input, the icon B can also be selected. However, even here, after 03, it cannot be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the opening conditions.

Although the background display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 84 (c5), in the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 77 (70), all the other options are unreleased except for the option of background A. The difference is that the other options don't even show what the background name is. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen as shown in FIG. 84 (c5) is displayed. Only background A can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, on the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 84 (c5'), since the password is input, the background B can also be selected. However, even here, after 03, it cannot be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the opening conditions.

Although a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize all the settings is displayed in FIG. 84 (d1), the description is omitted because it is the same as the confirmation screen shown in FIG. 80 (74b6-1). Further, although the initialization completion screen is displayed in FIG. 84 (d2), the description thereof will be omitted because it is the same as the initialization completion screen shown in FIG. 80 (74b8-1).

FIG. 84 (e1) is a diagram showing an example of a demo screen set to the Daitomo mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (e1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The symbol change display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not started since the final display of the stop symbol of the special symbol has been performed. Further, below the second hold number display, the current Daitomo mode level (here, level 1) and the experience value (EXP) (here, 0) are displayed. That is, the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 84 (e1) corresponds to, for example, a screen immediately after newly registering and shifting to the demo screen.

Further, the corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 84 (e1). For example, if the quick start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the voice "Start Daitomo" is output, and if the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, "Trial" is displayed. When the voice "Start playing" is output and the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed, the voice "Start Daitomo. Let's do our best today" is output. In addition, different sound effects are output depending on whether the corresponding sound effect is started by trial play, when Daitomo is started by quick start, or when Daitomo is started by password input. , The same sound effect may be output in all cases, or the same sound effect may be output in two cases. In addition, the sound effect may change depending on the level of Daitomo, the previous game situation, and the like. Further, when returning to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 84 (e1) after the model customization, the sound effect may not be output, and the dedicated sound effect may be output. Also, an animation may be displayed with or in place of the corresponding sound effect. If the symbol variation start is started while the sound effect or animation is being performed, the corresponding sound effect or animation may be interrupted (cancelled) in the middle, or may be output as it is to the end.

Also, when the quick start is set and this demo screen is displayed, when the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, or when the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed. In the case of at least one of them, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 84 (c) may not be called for a certain period of time. It may be configured so that the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 84 (c) can be called without waiting. Alternatively, in all of the above cases, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 84 (c) may not be called for a certain period of time.

FIG. 84 (e1-1) shows how the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are additionally displayed after a certain period of time has passed since the demo screen shown in the figure (e1) was displayed. It is a figure which shows.

After displaying the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83A, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are restricted from being additionally displayed for a certain period (for example, 1 minute). May be good. If the chance button 136 or the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r are operated during this fixed period, the operation is invalid. However, it may be valid.

Further, even when the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are hidden (for example, immediately after the symbol variation display is stopped or shortly after the symbol variation display is stopped without holding), The volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in 75 can be called. Further, when the volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW is called and no operation is performed for a certain period of time, the screen may return to the screen shown in FIG. 84 (e1-1).

If the stop symbol is displayed without hold, the menu icon MI, volume adjustment icon VI, and brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed for a certain period of time, and FIG. 84 (c) ) May not be able to call the model customization screen.

Further, even during the period when the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 84 (c) cannot be called, the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 75 can be called. May be possible.

Further, when switching between the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 75 and the screen shown in FIG. 84 (e1-1), these windows VW and BW are also the screens shown in FIG. 84 (e1-1). In some cases, neither of them is displayed, and even in this state, the volume and brightness adjustment operations may be feasible or may be restricted so that they cannot be performed.

FIG. 84 (e2) is a diagram showing an example of a demo screen displayed via FIG. 83 (b3-2-1) after issuing the two-dimensional code in FIG. 83 (b3-2). As the output sound from the speaker 120 here, the voice "Thank you for your hard work" is output. In addition, the output sound effect may change depending on the state before this demo screen is displayed.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a variable icon.

Here, the variable icon h0 will be summarized again. The variation icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes the change icon h0 at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon h11 with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area HIS to the variable icon display area CIS, the moving icon is called a variable icon or expressed as a variable icon moving. You may. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area CIS is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. The variable icon h0 is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon h11 (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11, but they may have the same size. Further, the variable icon h0 may consist of a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon h11. The change icon h0 can give a notice of whether or not the change is correct (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon h0 can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing earlier than the timing at which the result of the change is notified, the same timing, or a later timing. Further, in addition to the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), a plurality of types of display modes of the variable icon h0 are prepared as normal notice display modes, and depending on the display mode, The reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is different. The higher the reliability of the jackpot, the easier it is for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed. In the following description, the color indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit. The default white is when "no change" is selected in the effect lottery for the display mode of the variable icon h0. The default white variable icon does not foretell the expectation of a jackpot, but you may foretell the expectation of a jackpot (in that case, the color of the icon with the lowest expectation of a jackpot). Blinking white has the lowest expectation of a big hit (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). The color of the display mode of the normal notice is the so-called rainbow color (rainbow color) that changes to white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and seven colors in ascending order of expectation of big hit. The gold color is a big hit, and the rainbow color has a higher expectation of a big hit. For example, it may be said that the big hit is confirmed. Note that this color relationship is the same for the color of the look-ahead notice display mode by the hold icon. Hereinafter, when the term is red or higher, it means red, gold, or rainbow.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) fluctuates at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A1). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord is displayed on the right base icon bIr in FIG. 85 (A1). In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (A1) is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays. For example, the display may be started at the same time as the start of a certain symbol variation display, and may be continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. In addition, the symbol variation display may end and may be continuously displayed even while the stop display is being displayed, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Then, during the display of the next symbol variation display that is continuously started, it may be continuously displayed, or it may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Alternatively, the display may end during the display of the next symbol variation display. In addition, it may be displayed only in a part or all of the whole period during the display of the symbol variation display once, and may not be displayed during the display of the next symbol variation display. This navigation character YM can be said to be a so-called constantly displayed character, but it does not have to be continuously displayed in any case. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. This point will be described in detail later.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A1), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

In FIG. 85 (A2-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display corresponds to a notice indicating that other icons and the like may change when the display is made. Other icons, such as the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and the decorative symbol. That is, the icon or the like displayed before the display of the change notice display is started becomes the target to be changed. However, even if the display is started at the same time as the display of the change notice display is started, or the display is started later, the target may be changed. At the time when the change notice display is started, the player may or may not know what will be changed. There may also be suggestions of what to change. Further, even if the change notice display is displayed, nothing may change depending on the change notice display, which may be a false notice. In addition, the change notice display may be determined to change only one object, or may be determined to be changed without fail.

The treasure chest icon I1 shown in FIG. 85 (A2-1) appears on the carpet icon I2. The carpet icon I2 is displayed only when it appears, and when the treasure box icon I1 reaches the display position of the effect icon display area DIS, it disappears on the spot or flies off the screen. The appearance timing of the icon of this change notice display is when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, and when a prize is awarded to the special figure start port (when the hold increases). , At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo continuous production (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state, at the time of super reach At the start, Super Reach Middle etc. can be listed. That is, the appearance timing of the change notice display icon may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. Further, there may be a plurality of display modes of the treasure box icon I1. For example, the ease of change of the navigation character YM or the like changes depending on the display mode of the treasure box or the carpet (difference in size, color, animation). May be good. In addition, if the display mode is different from the normal display mode, such as the carpet icon I2, which is displayed only at the time of appearance or exit, the probability of changing the display mode is high, which is advantageous for the player. Or the display mode may be changed to a higher probability. For example, the probability of changing to a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high may be high. Further, the change notice display may be a display that changes only the navigation character, but may change an effect display other than the navigation character (hold icon, change icon, notice display of the change, look-ahead notice display, etc.). There may be. In addition, among the effect displays other than the navigation character (hold icon, change icon, notice display of the change (timer notice, conversation notice, chance up meter, etc.), look-ahead notice display (timer notice, background display for look-ahead mode, etc.), etc. It may be configured so that the navigation character is not changed by the notice display that changes one effect display, a plurality of effect displays, or all effect displays), but even if the navigation character is changed. Good. Further, the change notice display may be configured so that the navigation character is changed more frequently than the effect display other than the navigation character is changed, but conversely, the frequency of changing the navigation character is other than the navigation character. The frequency may be less than the frequency with which the display is changed, and the two frequencies may be performed at the same frequency. Here, the effect display (effect display other than the navigation character and the navigation character) is changed by "notice for changing the effect display (change notice display, notice display for changing the effect display other than the navigation character. Hereinafter referred to as notice A)". When the effect display that is less frequently changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A, the effect display that is frequently changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A than when the effect display is changed by the notice A. May be configured to be easy to hit, or may not be configured.

In FIG. 85 (A3-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. The treasure chest icon I1 is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 85 (A4-1), the display mode of the treasure chest icon I1 changes. That is, the change animation is displayed, the treasure chest opens, the smoke image of the effect appears from inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, making it clearer than before the smoke image appeared. It becomes difficult to see. When an icon or the like other than the navigation character YM is displayed, the smoke image may cover a part or all of the display of the icon or the like other than the navigation character YM from the front side. In addition, the treasure chest may not open. Furthermore, even if the treasure chest is opened, other notices may be given. In FIG. 85 (A5-1), the smoke image disappears and the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed. That is, the dark blue (default color) kimono worn by the Navi character YM has changed to a red kimono. The change of the kimono of the lord of the navigator character YM to a red kimono may indicate that the change icon h0 is likely to change to red due to the change. It may be confirmed that the display mode of the navigation character YM changes when the treasure box icon I1 is displayed. In addition to the red kimono, it may be changed to a golden kimono or a rainbow-colored kimono. It may also blink white, change to blue, or change to green. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed according to the colors of the hold icon and / or the variable icon (for example, when the green hold is displayed on the hold 2, the navigation character YM is green. It changes to a kimono, etc.). Here, if the color of the navigation character corresponds to the color of the variable icon and / or the hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon and / or the variable icon changes a plurality, it is digested first. The color of the hold icon or variable icon may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigator character, or the color of the hold icon to be digested later may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigator character. The color with high jackpot expectation may be displayed preferentially, or conversely, the color with low jackpot expectation may be preferentially displayed, and the jackpot expectation level may be displayed regardless of the color of the hold icon or the variable icon itself. The color of the hold icon or variable icon with high is displayed, or the color of the hold icon or variable icon with low expectation of big hit may be displayed regardless of the color of the hold icon or variable icon itself, and it changes. The colors of the pending and / or variable icons may all be reflected in the color of the navigator, and the colors of the navigator are randomly displayed from among the changing colors of the pending and / or variable icons. May be done. Further, next to the navigation character YM whose display mode has changed, the treasure box icon I1 with the lid open is still displayed. The treasure chest icon I1 may disappear at the same time as the smoke image appears, or may disappear together with the smoke image. At the timing of FIG. 85 (A6-1), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and only the navigator character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Up to this point, the first decorative symbol continues to display high-speed fluctuations.

In FIG. 85 (A7), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and "decoration 7" is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In the second decorative symbol, the temporary stop is not performed, and the three decorative symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In FIG. 85 (A8), the background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the background screen of the wilderness, and the temporarily stopped left symbol is the decorative symbol display device, which has evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). The right symbol, which is also temporarily stopped, moves to the upper left of the 208, and moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the background screen h of the wilderness, a duel scene in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 have disappeared, and the first hold icon h11 has also disappeared. Further, although the height of the pedestal of the variable icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0'is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on the pedestal hs0'. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigator character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr. During the super reach effect, the entire hold frame UI may be hidden. That is, the pedestal hs0'of the variable icon display area CIS and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden during the super reach effect. Further, during the super reach effect, any one or two of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the variable icon h0 may be hidden. Furthermore, during the super reach production, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the variable icon h0 are all hidden, and the hold frame UI (left base icon bIl, four stages hs1 to hs4, pedestal hs0 (hs0')). , Right base icon bIr) may be displayed, or vice versa, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the variable icon h0 may all be displayed to hide the hold frame UI.

In FIG. 85 (A9), the navigator character YM of the lord, who had been standing facing the front until then, turns to the variable icon h0 and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and held. In FIG. 85 (A10), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, and in FIG. As described above, the variation icon in the red display mode has a considerably high expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display. In FIG. 85 (A12), the navigator character YM of the lord returns to the posture of standing facing the front. The navigator character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 85 (A12) remains in the display mode of the red kimono, but may return to the default display mode (display mode of the dark blue kimono).

Although not shown in FIG. 85 (A13), the button effect is started. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image and the remaining time display meter, and when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136. In the remaining time display meter, the above operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. After that, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in image of the lord, and a warning effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. The cut-in image of the lord overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than when the cut-in image of the lord is not displayed. The cut-in image of the lord may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or is displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be what is done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the cut-in image of the lord is erased, the animation display of the duel scene continues, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and the second button production after developing into super reach. Is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136.

In the remaining time display meter, the above operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. The operation validity period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the first button effect after developing into super reach. In this case, it develops into super reach. Then, the speed at which the gauge on the remaining time display meter in the second button effect decreases may be faster than the speed at which the gauge on the remaining time display meter in the first button effect develops into super reach. In addition, the operation validity period in the first button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the second button effect after developing into super reach, or after developing into super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development of super reach may be the same length.

When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and at the same time, the first large board behavior accessory shown in FIG. 67 (a). 224Ga to 224Gd of the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory operate, and they overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left and right symbols of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character. It is considered to be more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. The effect of operating the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation validity period has passed without any notice. Further, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is performed. Further, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are performed, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th is performed after the effect image is displayed. The operation of the large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is started, or the effect image. And the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, even if the effect of operating the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd is not performed and the effect display is lost. Often, the revival effect may be displayed after the effect display that is a loss is performed so that the effect display that becomes a big hit is performed. When the effect of operating the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

After that, the Senryo box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 67 (a) operates and moves downward, and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. .. Further, after that, the light guide plate IL emits light. The display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryo box accessory 224H, and the order in which the light guide plate IL starts emitting light are limited to those described above. It can be set as appropriate. Further, the display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryo box accessory 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may all be performed. The part may not be performed.

After the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, the Senryo box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, the effect image fades out, and subsequently, the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd start moving toward the initial position. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed.

After that, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 85 (A 14-1). In FIG. 85 (A 14-1), the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is displayed.

The animation of the navigation character YM in FIGS. 85 (A9) to 85 (A12) corresponds to an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon h0 (hereinafter, referred to as “change effect”). This change effect can be seen as a part of the super reach effect, but it can also be seen as a different effect from the super reach effect, which was started with the start of the super reach effect. As for the start timing of the change effect, in addition to the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, and when the special symbol start port is won (hold). (Increase), at the start of pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of success of a certain production, at the time of the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous production (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state , At the start of super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

In addition, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes is also during the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol changes start, when the movement of the variable icon h0 is completed, and a prize is given to the special symbol start port. Time (when the hold increases), when the pre-reading notice at the time of winning starts, when a certain production succeeds, when the first decorative symbol stops first, when the pseudo-continuous production temporarily stops or continues (when the re-variation starts), reach It is possible to enumerate the start of the state, the start of super reach, and the like. That is, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable. Further, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may overlap with the button valid period in the button effect described above. It should be noted that the display mode of the variable icon may not change after a certain period during the super reach effect. The super reach production explained here is also a game production, including a button production, and is a kind of so-called final judge production in which either the main character or the enemy wins. After the result of the final judge effect is displayed, the display mode of the variable icon may not be changed. Further, when the animation for changing the display mode of the variable icon is performed by the navigation character YM, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed without fail, or there may be a failure. You may. That is, the change effect may be an effect that always changes the display mode of the variable icon h0, and there are cases where the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed (success) and cases where the display mode is not changed (failure). There may be.

Further, the change animation of the variable icon by the navigation character YM may not be performed. In that case, at the end of the super reach effect, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the end screen of the super reach effect and the screen on which the decorative symbol is displayed are switched by the wipe. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be returned to the default display mode (display mode of the dark blue kimono) after being switched by the wipe, and the navigation character YM may be used as a pre-reading notice of the next symbol variation display. , The display mode as it is (the display mode of the red kimono) may be maintained.

In FIG. 85 (A 15-1), the scene in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role collapses and the hero's lord wins is displayed, and the lord's navigation character YM also poses for victory. However, the middle design is not yet displayed, and the middle design of "Decoration 7" is displayed in the same figure (A16-1), but the red variable icon h0 is still displayed, and the second decoration. The design is also being displayed in a variable manner. Moreover, at the stage of the figure (A16-1), each of the first decorative symbols (left middle right symbol) is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation). In addition, in FIG. 85 (A 15-1), an animation for a big hit may be executed by the main character, the lord.

Here, up to Fig. 85 (A15-1) before the middle symbol is displayed can be seen as a super reach effect, but it seems that the victory has been confirmed once the medium symbol is displayed (A16-1). ) Can be seen as a super reach effect, or further, it can be seen as a super reach effect until just before the stop display is performed. Further, as described above, the super reach effect here corresponds to an example of the final judge effect, and the super reach effect is being executed until the result of the final judge effect is confirmed (for example, until just before the stop display is performed). May be good.
After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and the first decorative symbol starts shaking with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) is displayed in the display mode of the special figure A. Although the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed, the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state of not receiving the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is determined that the symbol is confirmed and stopped. Therefore, the first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. 4 In the symbol display device, the display is performed in the mode that the symbol has stopped.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the big hit start effect display.

During super reach, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Here, when the button effect, which is the final judge effect, is started, a part or all of the hold frame UI may be hidden or disappear. For example, the right base icon bIr may have been displayed until then, but the right base icon bIr may be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Further, when the final judge effect is started, the variable icon h0 may be hidden or disappeared, or the navigation character YM may be hidden or disappeared, and the variable icon h0 and the navigation may be configured. Both of the characters YM may be configured to be hidden or disappear. Further, when the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may also be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started, if they have been displayed up to that point.

As shown in the figure (A2-2) instead of FIG. 85 (A2-1), a balloon display such as "Change !?" may be added to the navigation character YM of the lord, or the figure (A2-2). As shown in A 2-3), a balloon display such as "Preparing for change" may be added. After that, the process returns to FIG. 85 (A3-1), and the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed. The balloon display of the navigation character YM corresponds to a warning effect (precursor effect) of the start of the change notification display. That is, it is a notice that the navigation character itself may change, such as "change !?", or the navigation character is about to change ("preparing for change" is displayed, such as "preparing for change". It may be a notice suggesting that it will always change within the fluctuation or after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation where "Preparing for change" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (A-3-1) instead of FIG. 85 (A3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and again. The carpet icon I2 may appear, and the treasure chest icon I1 may fly away on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (A 4-2) instead of FIG. 85 (A 4-1), the smoke image may be red. Depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the change mode and easiness of change of the navigation character YM may be announced. In the case of FIG. 85 (A4-2), it is foretold that the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a kimono of the same color as smoke. Further, depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the expected degree of the change or the jackpot in the hold may be announced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (A5-2) instead of FIG. 85 (A5-1), the color of the kimono of the navigation character YM may not change, but the navigation character YM itself may become larger. .. As described above, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM may be a change in size or a change in shape (for example, pose) in addition to the change in color. The color of the kimono of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (A5-2) may be dark blue (default color), but may be changed to red. A part of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (A5-2) overlaps a part of the treasure box icon I1 from the front side. A part of the navigation character YM may overlap all the icons I1 of the treasure box from the front side. Alternatively, at least a part of the treasure box icon I1 may overlap at least a part of the enlarged navigation character YM from the front side.

In addition, the probability of changing the variable icon h0, and thus the expectation of a big hit, is higher in the display mode in which the default color is large than in the display mode in which the default color is small, and in the display mode in which the red color is small. The red and large display mode may be higher. Further, in terms of size and color, color may be prioritized, and for example, a display mode in which a red color is small may be higher than a display mode in which a default color is large. Alternatively, conversely, the size may be prioritized, for example, the display mode large in the default color may be higher than the display mode small in red. Further, regarding the size (display size) of the navigation character YM, there may be a plurality of sizes such as a large case and a small case, and an intermediate size thereof.

When the navigation character YM is in the display mode wearing a red kimono, the variable icon h0 changes to red, and when the navigation character YM is in the display mode wearing a golden kimono, the variable icon h0 changes to gold and the rainbow. When the display mode is wearing a colored kimono, the variable icon h0 may change to rainbow colors. Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the variable icon h0 may easily change to a color (red, gold, rainbow) whose jackpot expectation is red or higher. That is, if the change of the variable icon h0 is successful, it may be confirmed that the color changes to red or more, or it may be confirmed that the color changes to red or more. However, even if the navigation character YM is displayed in a red kimono, the expectation of the jackpot may change to a color lower than red (green, blue, blinking white, white). Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono which is the premier color, the color of the variable icon h0 may always change to the rainbow color. That is, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, it means that the display mode of the navigation character YM directly notifies that a big hit is made, and the navigation character YM is in another color. In the case of a display mode wearing a kimono (for example, red), if the display mode of the variable icon changes, it will be easier to make a big hit as a result, and the ease of big hit will be determined by the display mode of the navigation character YM. It can be notified indirectly.

Further, the navigation character YM may change the variable icon h0 even when the display mode has not changed. Alternatively, the variable icon h0 may be changed only when the display mode is changed. Further, the character of the main character, the lord, is a so-called constantly displayed character, but the navigation character YM that changes the variable icon h0 may be a character that is displayed only when the variable icon h0 is changed. Further, the character may be displayed only when giving a notice. Further, the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above may be used as the character that changes the variable icon h0, and only the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization has the variable icon. It may be possible to use it as a character that changes h0.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 85.

A change notice display so as to return to FIG. 85 (A7) via FIG. 86 (A6-2-1) to FIG. (A6-2-3) following FIG. 85 (A6-1). The navigation character YM may change a plurality of times until the treasure box icon I1 is hidden. The navigator character YM shown in FIG. 86 (A 6-2-1) is a red kimono, while the navigator character YM shown in FIG. 86 (A 6-2-2) is a golden kimono. The treasure box icon I1 may disappear once and be newly displayed. Further, the change notice display may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. In this case, the treasure chest icon I1 repeatedly opens and closes.

Further, following FIG. 85 (A6-1), a change animation as shown in FIGS. 86 (A6-3-1) to FIG. 86 (A6-3-1) may be displayed. That is, the navigation character YM may be further promoted by a notice (here, UFO icon UFI) different from the change notice display. In the figure (A6-3-3a) following FIG. 86 (A6-3-2), a golden beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI toward the navigator character YM wearing a red kimono. As shown in FIG. 86 (A 6-3-4a), the navigation character YM has changed to a display mode wearing a golden kimono. Alternatively, in the figure (A 6-3-3b) following FIG. 86 (A 6-3-2), a gray beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is directed toward the navigator character YM wearing a red kimono. After being irradiated, as shown in FIG. 86 (A 6-3-4b), the navigator character YM is enlarged while wearing a red kimono.

Although promotion has been described here, there may be cases where the navigation character YM does not change even when the beam is irradiated (so-called failure pattern), or when the beam is irradiated, the default display mode or There may be a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn, or a case where the display becomes smaller (when demoted).

In addition, FIG. 86 (A 14-2-1) may be displayed following FIG. 85 (A 14-1), which is a scene after the lord and the swordsman slash each other in the super reach production. That is, as the middle symbol, "decoration 6", which is different from the left and right symbols ("decoration 7"), is displayed in large size (shaking display), and in the following figure (A 14-2-2), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed. Decorative symbols All symbols are temporarily displayed lighter than normal darkness. In addition, the figure shows the scene where the lord collapsed. In FIG. 86 (A 14-2-3), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in normal darkness, and in the same figure (A 14-2-4), the wipe effect is displayed. This is performed, and switching between the super reach effect scene (effect display) and the normal background (background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 85 (A1) and the like) is performed. In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (A14-2-5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is once displayed as a wipe with no pattern and the same color. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. In addition, the model title is displayed in the left corner. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be displayed. In FIG. 86 (A14-2-6), the wipe-out is performed, the background returns to the normal background, and the display mode of the navigation character YM also returns to the default display mode. The display mode of the navigation character YM may return to the default display mode at the start of the wipe effect (timing of FIG. 86 (A 14-2-4)). In FIG. 86 (A 14-2-7), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 sways and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss. There is. In addition, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and both the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are displayed. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 86 (A14-2-7) remains in the red display mode, but may return to the default display mode, or the variable icon h0 itself may be erased. Good. On the other hand, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the display mode wearing the red kimono. In this example, the display that returns to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed cannot be visually recognized because the navigation character is hidden, but the display that returns to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed is displayed. May be visible. (For example, a display in which the display mode of the navigator character changes from the changed state to the default state, an animation display in which the display mode of the navigator character changes to the default state, and the like can be mentioned.)
At the time of wipeout (Fig. 86 (A14-2-6) to Fig. (A14-2-7)), the variable icon h0 and / or the navigation character YM is displayed, but it is not displayed. In some cases, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be performed without fail, and when it is not displayed, the revival effect may or may not be performed.

Further, in FIGS. 86 (A14-2-1) to FIG. 86 (A14-2-3), a part of the holding frame UI (pedestal hs0'and right base icon bIr) is displayed, but the holding frame is displayed. The entire UI may be hidden, or only part of it may be hidden. Further, the variable icon h0 may be hidden, or the navigation character YM may be hidden. Alternatively, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden. Also, if the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may also be hidden. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden if they have been displayed so far.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 85.

Following FIG. 85 (A16-1), the display as shown in FIGS. 87 (A16-2-1) to FIG. 87 (A16-2-2) may be performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (A16-2-2), the entire screen has begun to become thin. After that, it may disappear once by the re-lottery effect, and the screen (screen of victory of the lord) shown in FIG. 87 (A 16-2-1) may be displayed again, or FIG. 85 (A 14-2-3) may be displayed. ) May be displayed, or a combination of decorative symbols (in the case of a jackpot combination or a loss) in a normal background as shown in the same figure (A16-2-3). A screen may be displayed in which (may be a combination) is swayed.

Further, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are also displayed on the redisplayed screen, and if the display mode of the navigation character YM and / and the variable icon h0 is a red display mode, an advantageous jackpot confirmation (for example, probability change) A big hit or a big hit with a long number of rounds) may be fixed. Alternatively, if the display mode has not changed, the advantageous jackpot is not fixed, but if the display mode is promoted, the advantageous jackpot may be fixed, and the display mode is a gold or rainbow-colored premium. If so, an advantageous jackpot may be fixed.

Further, FIGS. 87 (I 1) to 87 (I 12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations and also functions as a look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 87 (I1), the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

In FIG. 87 (i2), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigator character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 87 (I3), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed.

In FIG. 87 (I 4-1), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started. That is, the navigation character YM of the lord, who had been standing facing the front (initial posture) until then, changes to a pose in which the variable icon h0 is turned and the sword is pulled out. In FIG. 87 (15), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, but in the figure (i 6), the display mode of the variable icon h0 remains the default, and the change effect ends in failure. There is. In FIG. 87 (I7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono is displayed again in the initial posture.

In FIG. 87 (I8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even when the third symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 87 (i9), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started again. In FIG. 87 (I11), the variable icon h0, which had been white until then, has changed to red, and the normal notice has started. In FIG. 12 (i12), the navigator character YM returns to the initial posture while wearing the red kimono. After that, although not shown, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display currently being performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 87 (I 4-1), in the same figure (I 4-2-1), the navigation character YM moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the hold icon display area HIS during the symbol variation display. , In the figure (I4-2-2), the change animation for the hold icon has started. The movement of the navigator character YM may be an animation, or the display position may be switched instantaneously. Further, when the navigation character YM goes out of the effect icon display area DIS, another display (for example, "Business trip" on the signboard is displayed at the position (initial position) where the navigation character YM was displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The icon display) described as "Medium" may be displayed.

It should be noted that the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, even if it always succeeds (the display mode of the hold icon changes). Good. Further, the change effect may be performed only on the hold icon to be read ahead. For example, only in the state where the number of holds is 1, the first hold icon h11 may be targeted, or a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons) may be targeted. Further, the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may be performed as many times as necessary until the display mode changes (successfully) with respect to the look-ahead target hold, and if it fails once, it may not be performed again. ..

Further, the change effect may be performed again on the hold icon whose display mode has changed once due to the change effect. This applies not only to the hold icon but also to the variable icon h0.

Further, the navigation character YM may move from the effect icon display area DIS even in the change effect for the variable icon h0. Further, the navigation character YM may move within the effect icon display area DIS even if it does not exit the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the navigation character YM may be movable only within the hold frame UI, or may be movable outside from the hold frame UI.

In this example, the change animation of the variation icon h0 using the navigation character YM is performed every time from the next variation of the variation in which the color of the navigation character YM turns red to the variation of the hold of the look-ahead target. There may be a change in which the change animation is not performed between the change after the change in which the color of the navigation character YM turns red and the change in the look-ahead target. Further, a change animation may be performed for the fluctuation in which the navigation character YM turns red.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a change effect of the hold icon and a change effect of the variable icon by the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 88 (c1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

In FIG. 88 (U2), the effect icon (here, the UFO icon UFI) appears outside the hold frame UI and approaches the hold frame UI. The effect icon may appear in the hold frame UI. As shown in FIG. 88 (U3), a white beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI toward the second hold icon h12, and as shown in FIG. 88 (U4), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is , The display mode changes from the default display mode to the display mode of blinking white. That is, it has succeeded in promotion production. In addition, there are a plurality of types of effect icons, and the success probability of the promotion effect may change depending on the effect icon that appears. For example, if the first effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be successful, and if the second effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be 80% or more successful. If a third effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be less than 50% successful. In FIG. 88 (U4), the UFO icon UFI has disappeared. In FIG. 88 (U5), the three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. In FIG. 88 (U6), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 88 (U7), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started, and in FIG. 88 (U8), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 88 (9), the navigation character YM in the default display mode changes to a bow-drawing pose, and the promotion effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM is started. The promotion effect here is also an animation display. In FIG. 88 (U 10), an arrow is fired, and the arrow flies over the variable icon h0, and in FIG. 88 (U 11), it hits the first hold icon h11, which is a display mode of blinking white. In FIG. 12 (U12), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from blinking white to a blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. The promotion effect here may also fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, it may always succeed (change the display mode of the hold icon). Further, as long as the number of holds is 1, the first hold icon h11 may be targeted, or a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons) may be targeted. Further, the promotion effect may be performed as many times as necessary until the display mode changes (successfully) with respect to the look-ahead target hold, and if it fails once, it may not be performed again. Further, the promotion effect may be performed again on the hold icon whose display mode has changed once due to the promotion effect. Note that the promotion effect by the navigation character may be an effect performed only on one of the hold icons, even if a plurality of hold icons are displayed (that is, the position of the hold icon A moves as the hold decreases). However, the promotion effect by the navigation character is performed only for the hold icon A), and the effect may be performed for a plurality of hold icons and / or variable icons displayed in the hold icon display area. .. In FIG. 88 (U13), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture, in FIG. Has been done. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 88 (U 15), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started, and in FIG. 88 (U 16), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed in the initial posture. The variable icon h0 is an icon changed from the first hold icon h11 that changed to the blue display mode in the previous promotion effect, and is also displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the blue display mode.

In FIG. 88 (U17), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (U18), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box appears. Icon I1 remains. In FIG. 88 (U19), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, a smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and a part or all of the navigator character YM is hidden by the smoke image, and the navigator character YM is hidden. Is clearly less visible than it was before the smoke image appeared. In FIG. 88 (U 20-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. At the timing of FIG. 88 (U21), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and only the navigator character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The color of the display mode of the navigator character YM represents the reliability (expected degree) of the jackpot of the symbol variation display currently being performed. Alternatively, it may represent the ease (promotion) of change in the display mode of the variable icon. Further, although the hold icon is not displayed here, when the hold icon is displayed, it may represent the ease (promotion) of change in the display mode of the hold icon.

In FIG. 88 (U 23), the reach state is entered, and in the figure (U 24), the super reach effect is developed. When the super reach effect is developed, the left base icon bIl of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold frame UI disappear, and if the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (U24), the right base icon bIr disappears, and the foot portion of the navigator character YM wearing a red kimono disappears. Further, although the pedestal in the variable icon display area CIS has sunk, the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 88 (U25) during the super reach, the navigation character YM disappears completely, and the blue variable icon h0 in the display mode is displayed on the lowered pedestal hs0'. Although the navigation character YM has disappeared here, it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 85. Further, both the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 may disappear, or only one of them may disappear.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (U27-1), a duel scene in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy are confronting each other is displayed on the background screen h of the wilderness as a continuation of the super reach effect. .. Again, both the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 are displayed.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 88 and a modified example.

In FIG. 89 (U29), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed lighter than the normal darkness, and the scene in which the lord collapsed is displayed. Again, both the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (U30), the super reach effect is completed, the background is returned to the normal background, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display, the pedestal hs0'and the variable icon h0 are displayed. There is. In FIG. 89 (U31), the display of the left symbol and the right symbol has been restored, and the pedestal that had been sunk until now has begun to rise with the variable icon h0 on it. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (U32), the combination of decorative symbols is shaken and displayed, and the hold frame UI is also redisplayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

Further, instead of FIG. 88 (U 20-1), in FIG. 89 (U 20-2), the navigation character YM is changed to the display mode wearing the premier rainbow-colored kimono. In this case, the jackpot is confirmed because the display mode of the navigation character YM is rainbow color regardless of the display mode (color) of the variable icon h0. The display mode of the variable icon may also be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color. Further, when the navigation character YM functions as a look-ahead notice, the display mode of the hold icon to be read ahead may be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color.

Further, instead of FIG. 88 (U27-1), in FIG. 89 (U27-2), the right base icon bIr is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and further, the navigation of the display mode wearing a red kimono. The character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM displayed here is only displayed and does not have to do anything. Alternatively, the navigation character YM itself may independently promote its own display mode or change the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be changed by another notice display.

Here, the notice by the effect icon (here, UFO icon UFI) and / or the change notice display (here, treasure box icon I1) is performed before one decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol) becomes a temporary stop display. It is configured so that after one decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, no notice is given by the effect icon and / or change notice display, but one decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. After that, the effect icon and / or the change notice display may be performed. Although described as one decorative symbol, it may be a plurality of decorative symbols or all decorative symbols. Further, when the symbol (variable display by the special symbol display device) is completely stopped, the effect icon and / or the change notice display is configured so as not to give a notice, but it may be done.

FIGS. 89 (E1) to 89 (E4-1) are examples in which the navigation character YM itself changes its own display mode.

In FIG. 89 (E1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 89 (E2), the pose of the navigation character YM changes, and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 89 (E3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a gray smoke image, making it difficult to see, and in FIG. 89 (E4-1), the display mode changes to a red kimono. ing.

Further, instead of FIG. 89 (E 3-1), in the same figure (E 3-2), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a red smoke image, and after that, the navigation character YM is a red kimono. It changes to the display mode wearing. In this way, the change animation itself may foretell the display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes. Further, the red smoke image may be a notice display for notifying that the display mode will be changed to red or higher if the navigation character is successfully changed, and it is confirmed that the display mode will change to red or higher. It may be a notice display.

Further, instead of FIG. 89 (E 3-1), in the same figure (E 3-3), the navigator character YM itself is wrapped in a rainbow-colored smoke image, and the pattern variation display currently being performed, or The big hit is confirmed (the big hit may be rich) in the symbol variation display started after this. In this way, the change animation itself may give a normal notice or a look-ahead notice. The rainbow-colored smoke image may be a display for notifying that the display mode will be changed to the rainbow-colored if the navigation character is successfully changed. In this case, even if the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed, the rainbow is displayed. It is not necessary that the pattern variation and / or the holding area where the color smoke image is displayed is confirmed as a big hit (the big hit may be rich).

Further, in the figure (E4-2) instead of FIG. 89 (E4-1), the navigator character is changed to another navigator character. Here, it has changed to a princess navigation character. The type of the character to be changed may be a character set by the player in the character selection in the above-mentioned customization, or may be only a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization.

Further, instead of FIG. 89 (E4-2), in the same figure (E4-3), the navigator character is changed to a navigator character (for example, the character of the bancho) that the player cannot select. In addition, the navigator of the bancho may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon can be performed more easily than the navigator character YM, or the symbol change and / or hold in which the navigator has changed It may be configured so that the expectation of the big hit is high.

In addition, the navigator character of the princess (bancho) may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon can be performed more easily than the navigator character YM, or the symbol variation in which the navigator character is changed and / Or it may be configured so that the expectation of the jackpot in the hold is high, or it is configured so that the notice of the appearance of the princess (bancho) and / or the super reach effect is likely to occur (or will always occur). You may be.

When the navigator character YM changes to another navigator character, it may be configured to change only to the navigator character that can be selected by the player, and the navigator character may be changed to the navigator character that cannot be selected by the player. It may be configured, and may be both a case where the player is changed to a selectable navigator character and a case where the player is changed to a non-selectable navigator character. In both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigator character and the player is changed to a non-selectable navigator character, the player selects the navigator character rather than the navigator character that can be selected by the player. The disabled navigation character may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon is more likely to be performed, and the expectation of the jackpot in the hold and / or the changed symbol of the navigation character is high. It may be configured as follows. On the contrary, in both the case where the player is changed to the selectable navigator character and the case where the player is changed to the non-selectable navigator character, the player plays the game more than the non-selectable navigator character. The navigator character that can be selected by the person may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the fluctuate icon is more likely to be performed, or the symbol change in which the navigator character is changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot in the hold. It may be configured to have a high degree.

Further, instead of FIG. 89 (E4-1), in FIG.

In this example, the navigation character YM itself changes its display mode by itself, and the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is not entangled, but it depends on the color of the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display. , The display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes may be announced. For example, when the red treasure chest icon I1 appears, it may be certain that the navigation character YM changes to red or a display mode of red or higher.

Further, the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box may be used to predict the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display currently being performed or the symbol variation display to be started later. That is, a normal notice or a look-ahead notice may be given depending on the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the holding frame is temporarily invisible.

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (1). Further, the navigation character YM in the initial posture shown in FIG. 90 (1) is the default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

In FIG. 90 (2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 90 (4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed in the initial posture. Further, the background of the sea is still displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (4).

In FIG. 90 (5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started, and the background of the sea is still displayed.

In FIG. 90 (6), the background change notice, which is a kind of pre-reading notice, is started. The target of the background change notice (holding for pre-reading target) here is the holding increased at the timing of FIG. 90 (2) (second holding at this timing). In the background change notice, images of the sliding doors appear from the left and right, and the animation of closing the sliding doors makes the entire display screen an image of the sliding doors (see FIG. 90 (7)). Therefore, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding door and become invisible. Instead of the fusuma image, an image that overlaps from the front side may appear in a part of the hold frame UI, hold icons h11, h12, variable icon h0, and navigation character YM. Alternatively, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM may be produced so that no images overlap.

The background change notice may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 90 (2)). In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the look-ahead target hold.

Further, in the background change notice, the appearance image (here, the image of the sliding door) color may indicate the jackpot expectation of the look-ahead target hold, or if the navigation character YM having the same color as the sliding door color appears. , The navigation character YM functions as a change notice and corresponds to a change notice display. In addition, if the color of the sliding door is green, it may function as a notice of the background itself, such as changing to the background of the mountain. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

In FIG. 90 (8), the sliding doors open, and the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to appear. It's gone. Due to the background change notice, the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has changed to the night background. Further, the navigation character YM after the background change has changed to a character that depends on the changed background. Here, the character of the lord has changed to the character of the robot. In this example, one type of character corresponds to one type of background, but a plurality of types of characters may correspond to one type of background.

In FIG. 90 (11), the reach state is entered. Further, between FIGS. 90 (9-1) and FIG. 90 (11), the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. The display mode of the variable icon h0 may change from the default display mode to the red display mode when the reach state is entered. Although the hold frame UI is displayed, the hold icons h11 and h12 have all disappeared. After that, it develops into a super reach production and changes to the background of the super reach production (here, the background of the wilderness). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (13) shows a scene in which the lord was defeated in the background of the wilderness. In addition, the robot navigation character YM overlaps with the fallen lord, making it difficult to see.

In FIG. 90 (14), the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the wipe display by the wipe-in. As shown in FIG. 90 (15), in the wipe display here, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display disappear, and the model title is in the left corner. Is only displayed. In FIG. 90 (16), the wipeout is performed, the background returns to the night background, and the navigation character YM is also beginning to be seen.

In FIG. 90 (17), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 sways and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss. In addition, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the display of the variable icon h0 in the red display mode and the hold icons h11 and h12 are resumed.

In FIG. 90 (18), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of loss, "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7".

After that, after the first hold is digested and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the next symbol variation display is started as shown in FIG. 90 (20-1). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the first decorative symbol has started, and the symbol variation of the look-ahead target pending has ended, but the background remains the night background.

In FIG. 90 (21), the background change notice is started again, the images of the sliding doors appear from the left and right, and the animation that the sliding doors are closed makes the entire display screen an image of the sliding doors (FIG. 90 (22)). reference). In FIG. 90 (23), the sliding door opens, and the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11, h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to appear. In the same figure (24), the sliding door opens completely, and the sliding door image is It's gone. As shown in FIG. 90 (24), the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has returned to the background of the sea, and the navigator character YM has also returned to the character of the lord.

Further, instead of FIG. 90 (O 9-1), in the same figure (O 9-2), the display mode of the robot navigation character YM is changed to a display mode different from the default. The display mode of the background-dependent character (for example, color, shape, size, etc.) may also change depending on the reliability of the jackpot. Alternatively, it may have changed originally.

The navigation character YM may change depending on the production background regardless of the background of the pre-reading notice. For example, when the coastal background, the castle town background, and the castle background appear in order, the navigation character YM may change depending on each background. The appearance order of the plurality of types of backgrounds may be random. Further, when the effect mode is changed by the player, the navigation character YM may be changed depending on the background change. In addition, a navigation character different from the navigation character depending on the effect background may be displayed. For example, when the navigation character A is displayed in the effect background A and the navigation character B is displayed in the effect background B, the navigation character B may be displayed in the effect background A. Here, when a navigation character that does not match the production background is displayed, the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon is more likely to be performed than when the navigation character that matches the production background is displayed. It may be configured so that the navigation character has a changed symbol variation and / or the expectation of the jackpot in the hold is high (or the jackpot is confirmed (the jackpot may be rich)), or the effect. It may be configured so that the notice that a navigation character that does not match the background appears and / or the super reach effect occurs frequently (or always occurs).

Alternatively, conversely, the type of the navigation character YM may not change even if the background is changed, or it may never change.

FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 91 (or 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 91 (or 2-1), a balloon of a line calling a friend is additionally displayed on the navigation character YM. The display of this balloon corresponds to the notice that another character (old man or princess) is displayed, which is performed by the currently displayed navigation character YM. In addition to the navigation character YM of the lord, the display of the navigation character YM1 of the princess is added to the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-1), and the princess is successfully called. The appearance of the princess character may be an animation display or a mode in which it appears instantaneously. In the case of the animation display, the animation may be an animation in which the character cannot be seen at the beginning by a smoke image, or an animation that appears by walking from the right edge of the screen. This princess navigation character YM1 is also the default display mode.

In FIG. 91 (or 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM of the lord and the navigation character YM1 of the princess, both of which are the default display modes, are displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 91 (or 5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the next symbol variation display is started, the two navigator characters YM and YM1 are still displayed. In this way, the display of the plurality of navigation characters may span a plurality of variations. However, the appearing navigation character YM1 may disappear in the symbol variation display in which the navigation character YM1 appears. Even in this case, the previously displayed navigator character (here, the navigator character YM of the lord) is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In FIG. 91 (or 5), a balloon of a line calling the old man is additionally displayed on the two navigator characters YM and YM1, and the effect icon display area DIS shown in the same figure (or 6-1) is displayed. In addition to the two navigator characters YM and YM1, the display of the grandfather's navigator character YM2 has been added, and the grandfather has been successfully called. In other words, all three are now ready. In this production, the more navigator characters gather, the higher the probability that the variable icon h0 will change, the higher the probability that the color will change to the premiere or a color close to the premiere, and the higher the expectation that the fluctuation will make a big hit. Or the expectation of a big hit after the next fluctuation may be high. In addition, when all three people are present, the rainbow color of the premiere may be confirmed or the jackpot may be confirmed. In FIG. 91 (or 7-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state with all three people aligned, and "decoration 7" is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol.

Further, instead of FIG. 91 (or 2-1), in the same figure (or 2-2-1), a notice other than the navigation character YM itself is given. That is, in FIG. 91 (or 2-1), the navigation character YM
In this example, the roulette display icon RI is additionally displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the roulette notice is started. The roulette notice here may be dedicated to the appearance notice of other navigation characters, or may also give other notices (holding change notice, etc.). In FIG. 91 (or 2-2), the characters of the princess are displayed on the roulette display icon RI. After this, the princess navigation character YM1 may appear, but there may be cases where no navigation character appears (so-called failure), or a different navigation character (for example, the grandfather's navigation character YM2) may appear. It may appear. The roulette display icon RI is configured so that the characters of the characters that have already appeared are not displayed, but the characters of the characters that have already appeared may be configured to appear. In that case, the same character may be displayed more than once according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, if the princess character is stopped and displayed three times on the roulette display icon RI, the princess navigation character is displayed. Depending on the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, 3 people are displayed), promotion effects of characters that have already appeared may be performed (for example, 3 princess characters are displayed on the roulette display icon RI). If the stop is displayed, the princess will appear the first time, the princess's kimono will turn red the second time, and the princess's kimono will change to gold the third time).

Further, instead of FIG. 91 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-2), there is a case where no navigator character appears and it fails.

Further, instead of FIG. 91 (or 3-1), in the same figure (or 3-3), the grandfather's navigation character YM2 appears instead of the princess's navigation character YM1. In this way, the order of appearance is not fixed, and different animations may be performed depending on the navigator characters displayed next to each other. For example, in Fig. 91 (or 3-1), the lord's navigator character YM thought that the princess's navigator character YM1 would come, but the grandfather's navigator character YM2 came and a surprised animation was displayed. It may be a premiere production that the old man comes before the princess. Also, depending on the order in which the characters appear, the probability that the variable icon h0 will change will change, the probability of changing to a premier or a color close to the premier will change, the expectation of a big hit will change due to the change, and the big hit will occur after the next change. Expectations do not have to change or affect them at all.

Further, instead of FIG. 91 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-4-1), the display position may be predetermined depending on the character. That is, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-4-1), the navigation character YM of the lord is displayed at the left end, and the navigation character YM1 of the princess is displayed one person apart. Then, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-4-3), the grandfather's navigation character YM2 is displayed at a position separated by one person. In this way, even if the order of the display positions (lord, grandfather, princess) is fixed, there may be cases where the order is broken (lord, princess, grandfather). In this case, the premiere production (Big hit confirmation effect) or big hit rich.

In addition, instead of FIG. 91 (or 3-1), as shown in the figure (or 3-5-1), when the number of navigation characters increases, the increase is notified by character display (here, "princess stock"). ”), It may be notified by voice from the speaker, or it may be notified by blinking of a lamp or the like. Further, in FIG. 91 (or 3-5-3), it is notified by character display that all the members have gathered. In addition, when all the members were successfully set, a different character display (for example, "Gekiatsu" or "All members reach") was displayed instead of the usual character display of "All members". In that case, it may be a premier effect (big hit confirmed effect), a big hit rich, or a specific reach mode may be always started. Further, here as well, the notification may be performed by voice from the speaker, or by blinking of a lamp or the like, together with the notification of the character display or instead of the notification of the character display.

Also, instead of Fig. 91 (or 6-1), as shown in Fig. 91 (or 6-2), characters other than the lord, princess, and grandfather (here, the haniwa character YM3 that imitates a cactus) have increased. In that case, it may be a premier production (big hit confirmed production) or a big hit rich.

In addition, if "old man" is displayed even though "princess" is specified and called, it may be a premier production (big hit confirmed production) or a big hit rich, and "princess" is called. If the "old man" is displayed more frequently even though it is displayed, if the character ("princess") as called appears, the jackpot may be rich (or the jackpot is confirmed). Further, depending on the display mode of the navigator character (in this example, the lord) that calls another navigator character, the other navigator character may be easy to appear (stock) or difficult to appear (stock). Further, depending on the type of the navigator character that calls the other navigator character, the other navigator character may easily appear (stock) or may not appear (stock) easily. For example, it may be easier for other navigator characters to appear (stock) when the princess navigator character calls it than the lord's navigator character. Further, the characters that appear (stock) are not limited to different types of characters, and may be the same type of navigation character. For example, a plurality of Navi characters YM of the lord may be displayed, or may be described as lord × 3. Further, even if the navigation characters are of the same type, the display mode (color, shape, pose, size) may be different. Further, the effect performed after being displayed may differ depending on the character. For example, when a character is released from the effect icon display area DIS, a pseudo-continuous effect may be started when the lord is released, a hold may be promoted when the princess is released, and a timer notice may be started when the old man is released. .. In addition, a plurality of characters may be emitted. Further, when a plurality of characters are emitted at the same time, an effect different from that of a single character may be emitted. For example, if the lord and the princess are released at the same time, a pseudo-continuous production that is hotter than the lord alone may be started.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a modification and the like shown in FIG. 91.

In FIG. 92 (Ki 1), the navigator character YM of the lord in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, and to the right of the navigator character YM1 of the princess in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. ing. Further, on the right side of the princess navigation character YM1, a treasure chest icon I1 for displaying a change notice is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 92 (Ki 2-1), the treasure box icon I1 opens, and a smoke image appears from the inside. Of the lord's navigation character YM and the princess's navigation character YM1, only the princess's navigation character YM1 smokes. Wrapped in the image. That is, the smoke image does not reach the navigator character YM of the lord. In FIG. 92 (Ki 4), the smoke image disappears, and the princess navigator character YM1 changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In FIG. 92 (ki 5), the treasure chest icon I1 disappears.

In the figure (ki 2-2-1) instead of the figure 92 (ki 2-1), the pose of the navigator character YM of the lord is changed, and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 92 (Ki 2-2-2), the navigator character YM of the lord makes a smoke image appear, and only the navigator character YM1 of the princess is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 92 (Ki 2-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the princess navigator character YM1 changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In addition, the navigator character YM of the lord has returned to the initial posture.

In the figure (ki 3-2-1) instead of the figure 92 (ki 3-1), the smoke image appearing from the treasure box icon I1 is the navigator character YM of the lord and the navigator character YM1 of the princess. It wraps the navigation character. Then, in FIG. 92 (Ki 3-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and both the lord's navigator character YM and the princess's navigator character YM1 are changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono. That is, the display mode of both of them has changed. Here, both of them have changed to the same color, but they may change to different colors. For example, one may turn red and the other may turn gold. Alternatively, both may be wrapped in a smoke image, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

When a plurality of navigation characters are displayed, one navigation character (for example, a princess) may be promoted, and the other navigation character (for example, Yoshimune) may not be promoted. Also, both navigator characters may be promoteable. In that case, the change of one character (for example, a princess) may be hotter than the change of the other character (for example, Yoshimune), and the expectation of the jackpot may be the same. Also, it may be hotter when both characters change than when one character changes. Further, it may be hotter when one character changes depending on the change mode than when both characters change. For example, a combination of the default display mode of the lord's navigation character YM and the display mode of the princess's navigation character YM1 wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, and the display mode of the princess's navigation character YM wearing a red kimono and the same red color. With the combination of the princess navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a kimono, the former combination may be easier to hit than the latter combination. Also, both characters may be made to change without fail. In that case, it may be configured to change to the same color, or it may be configured to change to a different color. Further, the meaning of the changed character may change depending on the changing character. For example, if the navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hot, the fluctuation is hot, and if the navigation character YM1 of the princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is easy to develop into super reach. May be good. In addition, if the navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono is the jackpot confirmed, and if it is the princess navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the rainbow-colored kimono, the jackpot with probability variation is confirmed ( It may be an advantageous jackpot confirmation).

In this example, when one navigator character is always displayed and another navigator character is newly called by the navigator character, or when a plurality of navigator characters are always displayed, the navigator character YM is displayed. This embodiment is also applicable when one or more navigation characters are displayed at a specific timing due to a period during which the characters are not displayed.

FIGS. 92 (1-1) to 92 (7) show an example of an effect in which a button effect is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 92 (ku 1-1), the navigation character YM of the lord in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

The button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 92 (ku 2-1). The button display icon 136D is a balloon display mode and corresponds to a notice given by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In FIG. 92 (K3), the operation validity period is started, and in FIG. 92 (K4), the remaining period meter is slightly decreased. In FIG. 92 (K5), the chance button 136 is operated, and in FIG. It's getting harder. In FIG. 92 (ku 7), it is changed to a navigator character of a lord wearing a red kimono.

In FIG. 92 (Ku 1-2-1), the navigation character YM of the lord in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, but the button display icon 136D is not displayed here. That is, the back button effect is performed, and when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 92 (ku 1-2-2), the chance button 136 is operated in the figure (ku 1-2-3). In response, the change animation of the navigation character YM has started. In this way, the display mode of the navigation character may be changed by the back button effect.

When the back button effect and another button effect (with button display) overlap, both may be changed, the back button effect may be prioritized, or another button effect may be prioritized. Further, the same may be applied when the back buttons overlap.

Further, when the look-ahead button notice and the change button notice (normal notice) overlap, the look-ahead button notice may be prioritized, or the change button notice may be given priority.

Further, instead of FIG. 92 (K 2-1), in the same figure (K 2-2), the button display icon 136D is not added to the navigation character YM, but is located at a position away from the navigation character YM. , The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT are displayed at a position outside the effect icon display area DIS and outside the hold frame UI. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT here is a notice different from the notice given by the navigator character YM itself, and the display mode of the navigator character YM may be changed by this different notice. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed before the valid period starts.

FIG. 93 shows an effect example in which the effect of the button hold icon is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 93 (ku-3-1), the navigation character YM of the lord of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 93 (ku-3-1) is a button hold icon, and the button image 136a is displayed on the white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The operation validity period of the chance button 136 here is within the period of the fluctuation. When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-2a), a smoke image of the effect appears as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-3a), and the smoke image causes navigation. Part or all of the character YM is hidden, making it clearly more difficult to see than before the smoke image appeared. Here, the button image 136a displayed on the first hold icon h11 is erased, and the first hold icon h11 does not change at all (for example, a change in the display mode). That is, when the chance button 136 is displayed while the button hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the navigation character YM is changed, with a pattern in which the change effect by the button hold icon is successful. is there. When the chance button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period, the navigation character and / or the button hold icon itself is configured not to change. However, there may be a case where the state shifts to the same figure (ku 1-3-4) described later via the state shown in FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-3a).

Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-2a), as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-3b1), the button image 136a disappears and the button image 136a disappears with respect to the button hold icon. An effect image may be applied to the first hold icon h11, and a change animation may be started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-3b2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from a white circle display to a blue circle display mode. In addition, there may be a case where the display mode of the white circle display remains (after all, a failed pattern). Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-3b2) without going through the figure (ku 1-3-3b1). As shown, the icon that was the button hold icon may change to a blue circle display mode without a change animation.

Alternatively, from FIG. 93 (K1-3-3b1), as shown in FIG. 93 (K1-3-4), although the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged as a white circle, the navigation character The YM may change to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Here, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM is not a change animation when passing through FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-3b1), but the display mode is momentarily switched, and the same figure (ku 1-3-3b1) is shown. When passing through 3a), it is displayed after the change animation by the effect of the smoke image is executed. However, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed when passing through FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-3b1). The chance button 136 may change immediately after being operated, or may change with a slight delay. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-4) without going through the figure (ku 1-3-3b1). As described above, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change.

Also, even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated (Fig. 93 (ku 1-3-2b1)) and the next fluctuation is started (the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is still started). In the case where the change of the second decorative symbol is started although it is not done), the change icon h0 may become the button hold icon as shown in the figure (ku 1-3-2b2). In this case, the button effect is carried over to the next fluctuation, and when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the button image 136a disappears and as shown in FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-2b3'). , The white circle display on which the button image 136a is displayed may change to the display mode of the blue circle display (success pattern). At the time of change, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. Further, although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, it may change. On the other hand, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the button image 136a disappears with respect to the variable icon h0, but there is no change (for example, a change in the display mode) in the white circle display in which the button image 136a is displayed. It may not occur. That is, it is a pattern in which the change effect from the button hold icon fails. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated and the next fluctuation is started, the button hold icon may be configured so as not to change, and the button hold icon is a chance. It may be configured to change automatically after the next fluctuation is started without operating a button.

Further, even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated (Fig. 93 (Ku 1-3-2b1)) and the next fluctuation is started, the same figure (Ku 1-3) As shown in -2b2'), an effect image may be applied to the variable icon h0, and a change animation may be started. In this case, it may shift to FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-2b3') or to FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-2b3).

The navigator character YM shown in FIG. 93 (ku-3-1) has a default display mode, but the same applies to the navigator character YM in the promoted display mode. That is, in FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-4), the promotion is performed for the second time. When there are a plurality of hold icons, icons other than the button hold icon may be changed. Further, the hold icon that has already changed may be changed by operating the button because the button hold icon is displayed.

When eight hold icons are displayed, for example, when N are accumulated, some or all of the hold icons change to button hold icons, and the hold icon, variable icon, and navigation character YM change according to the button operation. It may be configured to change. This is also applicable when only four hold icons are displayed.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a period during which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (Ke 1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (Ke 1).

In FIG. 94 (Ke 2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 94 (Ke 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 94 (Ke 4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started. Further, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 changes to the blue display mode in response to the start of the symbol variation display. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 94 (ke 5-1), and in the same figure (ke 6-1), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character of the lord is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. YM is displayed. The navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 94 (Ke 6-1) is the default display mode. Here, the navigation character YM is a notice corresponding to the look-ahead target hold (pre-reading notice and / or notice of the change).

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 94 (ke 2)). In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a look-ahead target hold, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won.

In FIG. 94 (Ke 7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode, which is started to be displayed during the symbol variation display stopped and displayed here, is still displayed in the initial posture.

Next, the next symbol variation display is started, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 94 (Ke 9-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is placed next to the navigation character YM in the default display mode. It is displayed. The display mode of the navigator character YM is changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono by the same change animation as the change animation shown in FIG. 85 (A4-1) (Fig. 94 (Ke 11)). Even if the change animation is executed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the default display mode. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed without the treasure box icon I1 appearing. That is, the change notice display may not be performed.

In FIG. 94 (Ke 13), the change of the look-ahead target hold has started, and the change icon h0 of the blue display mode is displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed even during this fluctuation. Therefore, the navigation character YM was not displayed at first, but after being displayed, it is always displayed over a plurality of fluctuations.

The navigation character YM may disappear when the change of the look-ahead target hold that is currently being performed is completed. In this case, the navigator character YM may disappear between the three symbols or the temporary stop (shaking display) and the symbol stop in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on hold for read-ahead, or one or two decorative symbols. May disappear after a temporary stop (first stop or second stop).

Further, the navigation character YM disappears at the timing of the stop display in FIG. 94 (Ke 7), and may not be displayed across fluctuations.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (Ke 5-1), as shown in FIG. 94 (Ke 5-2), the place where the navigation character YM is displayed is not limited to the effect icon display area DIS, but the hold icon. It may be displayed in the display area HIS. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed in a plurality of places, and may be displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Further, the navigation character YM may perform different effects depending on the displayed position. For example, the hold icon may be changed when it is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon may be changed when it is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Further, the probability of changing the variable icon may differ depending on the display position, and the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the display position. The location where the navigation character YM is displayed may always be only one display area (for example, effect icon display area DIS, hold icon display area HIS, variable icon display area CIS, etc.).

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (Ke 5-1), as shown in FIG. 94 (Ke 5-3), the navigation character YM can be moved within the hold icon display area HIS (inside the left base icon bIl). If the hold icon is displayed, the front side of the hold icon may be moved. That is, it is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon from the front side.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 94 (Ke 5-1), as shown in FIG. 94 (Ke 5-4), the navigation character YM may move behind the hold icon. That is, this time, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap the navigation character YM from the front side.

The navigation character may perform an animation to move a plurality of display areas (for example, effect icon display area DIS, hold icon display area HIS, variable icon display area CIS, etc.).

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example in which there is another period during which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-1) displays the navigation character YM in the default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes.

After that, the holding digestion continues, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is swayed and displayed in the state where there is no holding. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-4), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed without holding. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed.

In FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-6), there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, the symbol variation display is started, and the first decorative symbol has not started to change yet, without holding. , The second decorative pattern has begun to change. At this point, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-7), an increasing animation of the hold icon indicating the hold that has already been digested (the hold of the started symbol change display) is displayed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-7) is displayed lightly, and the erasing animation of the navigation character YM has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (ke 6-2-8), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, and the hold icon h11 increased by the hold increase animation is displayed on the first stage hs1. There is. At this stage, the navigation character YM has completely disappeared. Actually, FIGS. 95 (Ke 6-2-6) to FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-8) are events for a moment, but the erasing animation of the navigation character YM may be performed.

Although there is a time lag in the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM disappears when the symbol variation display starts from the state where there is no hold. The timing of disappearing here may be before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol. It may be after the start of. Further, when the hold increase animation is performed, it may be before the start of the hold increase animation, at the same time as the start of the hold increase animation, or after the start of the hold increase animation. Good.

Further, instead of FIG. 95 (ke 6-2-3a), as shown in the figure (ke 6-2-3b1), the reach state may be entered, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is the reach state. Some may be configured to remain unchanged, or conversely, may change during reach. Further, the display mode of the variable icon may also be configured so as not to change during the reach state depending on the navigation character YM, or conversely, it may change during the reach state.

In FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3b2), it has developed into a super reach production, and in the same figure (Ke 6-2-3b3), a duel scene in which the lord and the swordsman who plays the villain are confronting each other is displayed. Also in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3b3), the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

The display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted when it develops into super reach, and conversely, it does not develop into super reach, and in the case of normal reach, the display mode is not promoted. You may. Alternatively, on the contrary, even in the normal reach, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted. For example, it may be promoted as a look-ahead notice after the next change. In addition, if the "Navi character promotion" symbol stops at the middle symbol during normal reach, the display mode is promoted. Further, the display mode may be promoted as a notice of the change (normal notice).

After that, in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3b4), the wipe effect and the like described with reference to FIGS. 86 (A14-2-4) to FIG. (A14-2-6) are executed, and FIG. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the case of 6-2-3b5), "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss, is swayed and displayed. In addition, the display mode of the navigation character YM remains the default display mode. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3b6), the combination of loss, "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the navigation character YM is also the default. Is displayed as it is.

When FIGS. 95 (ke 6-2-1) to (ke 6-2-8) and (ke 6-2-3b1) to (ke 6-2-3b6) are summarized, the symbol change of the look-ahead target pending is completed. , Even if the hold becomes 0, the navigation character displayed as the notice corresponding to the look-ahead target hold (pre-reading notice and / or notice of the change) is not hidden, and the next change is started. It was erased when. Note that the navigation character is used before the end of the symbol change of the look-ahead target hold (for example, before the decorative symbol is displayed as one or more temporary stops, at the same time as the temporary stop, or after the temporary stop, or after the decorative symbol. Before all (in this example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are temporarily stopped, the symbols (special symbols) are displayed as stopped at the same time as the temporary stop. It may be deleted before (such as before), or it may be deleted after the symbol change of the look-ahead target hold is completed (at the same time when the symbol (special symbol) is displayed as a stop or after the display is stopped).

FIG. 96 shows an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed.

In the holding frame UI of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96, a variable icon display area CIS is provided at the left end, and a pedestal hs0 is arranged. Further, the effect icon display area DIS is provided at the right end. The hold icon display area HIS is located between the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS, and the base icon bIm extends. Eight stages are arranged on this base icon bIm, and a hold icon is displayed on each stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (a1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, in the second hold number display, it is displayed that the hold number of the special figure 1 is "3" and the hold number of the special figure 2 is "2", and five hold icons are displayed in total. There is. All of these five hold icons are the default display modes.

In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 96, when there are five holds, the stage corresponding to the sixth hold is displayed in the same display mode (for example, white) as the first to fifth stages, and the seventh stage is displayed. , The eighth stages hs7 and hs8 are displayed in different display modes (for example, gray). Also, until 3 holds are accumulated, the 4th stage is white, the 5th and subsequent stages are gray, and when 4 holds are accumulated, the 5th stage is white, and the 6th and subsequent stages are accumulated. Stage turns gray. In this way, the display mode of the stage changes according to the number of holds, but the stage may always have the same display mode regardless of the number of holds.

Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (a1).

In FIG. 96 (ko a2), the hold of special figure 2 is increased by one, the hold increase animation is performed in the figure (ko a3), and the hold icon is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (ko a4). Is displayed. The added sixth hold icon h6 is also the default display mode. Further, the 7th stage hs7 turns white, and the gray stage becomes only the 8th stage hs8.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (a5), the navigation character YM in the default display mode appears, and a balloon saying "two more are full" is added. The navigator character YM appears when the number of holds is N or more (6 or more in this example).

In FIG. 96 (a6), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (a7), seven hold icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. A balloon saying "One more tank is full" is added to. The added seventh hold icon h7 is also the default display mode. Also, the final 8th stage hs8 has changed to white, and the gray stage has disappeared.

In FIG. 96 (a8), the hold of the special figure 2 is increased by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (a9), eight hold icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. A balloon called "Full tank" is added to. The added eighth hold icon h8 is also the default display mode. In this example, the navigation character YM uses a balloon to notify the number of holds, but it does not have to be.

In this example, the navigation character YM may change when eight holds are accumulated (when the tank is full). In FIG. 96 (a10), the navigator character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image, it does not always change, and it may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may change whenever the hold is full. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 96 (a11), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon saying "The holding is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a look-ahead notice is executed. .. The notice displayed in the balloon may be a notice of the change. In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in the hold may be announced by the advance notice displayed in the balloon. Further, in this example, the navigator character changes due to the symbol change when the hold is full, but the navigator character may change depending on the next change of the symbol change when the hold is full. In addition, the navigation character may change each time the symbol changes, and the change in the navigation character may give a notice of the symbol change.

The change of the navigation character YM is not limited to the color, and may be a display size, a pose, or a shape. In addition, there are a plurality of types of characters that appear, and the heat may differ depending on the character. For example, even if the navigator character of the princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hotter than the navigator character of the display mode wearing a red kimono, or the navigator character of the bancho is hotter than the navigator character of the lord. Good.

FIG. 97 shows an example of an effect in which the navigator character YM is entwined with a decorative pattern of a normal drawing.

In FIG. 97 (kob1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, a circled special figure 1 first hold icon h11 indicating the hold of special figure 1 is displayed. The special figure 1 first hold icon h11 is a default display mode. Further, in FIG. 97 (kob1), the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the roulette display icon RI is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The roulette display icon RI here displays a variable display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure, and the outcomes are "○" and "×", as well as "Geki" as a big hit notice of the special figure of the change. "Atsu" is also included. In FIG. 97 (kob2), “◯” is displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and it is notified that the roulette lottery has been won.

In FIG. 97 (kob3), the navigation character YM appears in the effect icon display area DIS. This navigator character YM is the default display mode, and appears when the general drawing lottery is won. In the following FIG. 97 (kob4), since the general drawing lottery was won, the electric chew is released, and the navigator character YM notifies that the electric chew is being opened. In FIG. 97 (this b5-1), since the electric chew is open, there is a prize in succession to the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 increases to four which are full. In FIG. 97 (this b6-1), the second hold number display shows that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1” and the hold number of the special figure 2 is “4”. Four diamond-shaped hold icons representing the hold of 2 are displayed (special figure 2 first hold icon h21 to special figure 2 fourth hold icon h24). The four special figure 2 hold icons h21 to h24 are all default display modes. This pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, and as for the hold icon, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed with priority over the hold icon of special figure 1, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is the special figure 1. It is displayed so as to overlap from the front side to a part of the hold icon of.

In FIG. 97 (ko b7), the notification during the opening of the electric chew by the navigation character YM is completed, and in the following figure (ko b8), the roulette display icon RI itself disappears downward because the opening time of the electric chew is finished. I'm talking. The roulette display icon RI may be displayed until all the pending symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 are completed. In FIG. 97 (this b9), the roulette display icon RI has completely disappeared.

After that, in FIG. 97 (this b11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 97 (ko b12), the hold of the special figure 2 first hold icon h21 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (ko b13), the variation icon of special figure 2 is started. A diamond-shaped variable icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0.

In FIG. 97 (this b14), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image, it does not always change, and it may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may change whenever the hold is full. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image, or may not change even if it is wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 97 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon saying "this fluctuation is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a normal notice is executed. There is. Further, the notice is usually executed depending on the display mode of the navigation character YM.

Further, instead of FIG. 97 (ko b15-1), in FIG. 97 (ko b15-2-1), the navigation character YM remains in the default display mode, and the change effect fails. In addition, a balloon "This fluctuation is" is added to the navigation character YM.

After that, the pending digestion of Special Figure 2 progresses, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (this b15-2-3) performs the final symbol variation display of Special Figure 2. Here, too, a balloon "This fluctuation is" is added to the navigator character YM, and the navigator character YM continues to produce the effect from FIG. 97 (this b15-2-1). In FIG. 97 (this b15-2-4), a balloon "Farewell" is added to the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the production by the navigation character YM is completed. The navigation character YM disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (this b15-2-5). When it is hot, the navigator character YM does not disappear, and the effect by the navigator character YM may continue, but on the contrary, the navigator character YM may always disappear. Further, even if the super reach effect is started between FIGS. 97 (ko b15-2-1) and FIG. 97 (ko b15-2-4), the effect by the navigator character YM continues and the navigator character YM is displayed. It may continue to be performed, or conversely, the effect by the navigator character YM may end and the navigator character YM may disappear.

The navigation character YM described in FIGS. 97 (b1) to (b15-1) and (b15-2-1) to (b15-2-4) has the variation. Only the advance notice is given and the look-ahead notice is not given, but the look-ahead notice may be given.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example in which the change notice display is displayed on standby.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds of the special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (1).

In FIG. 98 (Sa 2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are also the default display modes. Here, in this example, the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 is the look-ahead target hold.

In FIG. 98 (3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 98 (4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 98 (5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. The treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is a notice display that changes the display mode of the navigation character YM, but in this example, the navigation character YM itself is not displayed. However, with the appearance of the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display, it is notified (notice) that the navigation character YM may eventually appear. The treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display becomes a standby display until the navigation character YM appears. The standby display of the treasure box icon I1 is displayed while riding on the carpet icon I2.

In FIG. 98 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigator character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

In FIG. 98 (8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display remains on standby.

In FIG. 98 (Sa 9-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative symbols. The navigator character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

In FIG. 98 (10-1), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display remains on standby. As described above, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 may be performed over a plurality of fluctuations.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 98 (Sa 11-1), and in the same figure (Sa 12), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM of the lord appears in the effect icon display area DIS. It is displayed. The navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 98 (12) is the default display mode. The smoke image here corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM will appear. However, even if the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM does not always appear, and it may not appear. Further, the smoke image itself may not be displayed, or the smoke image may always be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to always appear when the smoke image is displayed.

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 98 (Sa 2)). In this example, it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, but it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started by the end of the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a look-ahead target hold, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won. In this example, the treasure box icon and the navigation character YM of the change notice display are the same look-ahead notices for the same look-ahead target hold (hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 shown in FIG. 98 (2) in this example). However, the treasure chest icon of the change notice display and the look-ahead target hold of the navigation character YM may be different.

In FIG. 98 (12), when the navigator character YM of the lord appears, only the carpet icon I2 disappears after that, and the treasure box icon I1 remains in the effect icon display area DIS. That is, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display ends.

In FIG. 98 (14), the fluctuation of the look-ahead target hold has started. The change animation using the treasure box icon I1 is performed during the change of the look-ahead target hold. In FIG. 98 (Sa 15-1), the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image comes out from the inside, wrapping the navigator character YM of the lord. In FIG. 98 (16), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the navigator character YM of the lord has changed from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. The navigator character YM, which has changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono, functions as a notice (normal notice) of the change.

The change effect of the navigation character YM using the treasure box icon I1 may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing of FIG. 98 (2)). Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a look-ahead target hold, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won.

Also, instead of Fig. 98 (Sa 10-1), in the same figure (Sa 10-2-1), the Navi character YM of the lord does not appear, but the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure box of the change notice display The standby display of the icon I1 of is finished. A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 98 (Sa 10-2-2), and the smoke image here extends beyond the display position of the navigation character YM to the variable icon h0 and is a navigation character. The display position of YM and the variable icon h0 are covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 98 (10-2-3), the smoke image has disappeared and the navigator character YM has not appeared, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed to the red display mode. Here, the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change, or the navigation character YM may also appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. However, or conversely, the navigation character YM may not appear, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change.

Further, instead of FIG. 98 (Sa 11-1), in the figure (Sa 11-2), the carpet icon I2 disappears while the smoke image is displayed but the navigation character YM is not visible. , The standby display of the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display has ended. As described above, the timing at which the standby display ends may be before the appearance of the navigation character YM. Further, the timing at which the standby display ends may be the same as the appearance of the navigation character YM. Further, it may be the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the timing of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the timing of the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. After the standby display of the change notice display ends, the navigation character is not displayed for the same look-ahead target hold, but even after the wait display of the change notice display ends, the navigation character is displayed for the same look-ahead target hold. (For example, the fluctuation after the fluctuation after the fluctuation in which the standby display is finished, or the fluctuation in the fluctuation in which the standby display is finished can be mentioned). Further, even after the standby display of the change notice display ends, the change notice display is not displayed for the same look-ahead target hold, but the change notice display may be displayed again for the same look-ahead target hold (for example, the standby display). Changes after the next change of the change that ended, and within the change that the standby display ended).

Further, instead of FIG. 98 (Sa 13), in the same figure (Sa 13-2-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed. In 13-2-2), both the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM do not open, the navigation character YM does not change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change. Has disappeared. In this way, although the navigation character YM has appeared, nothing happens and both icons may disappear. In this case, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is a false notice. Of the treasure chest icon I1 and the navigation character YM icon, only the treasure chest icon I1 may disappear, or only the navigation character YM may disappear. If both icons disappear, both icons may disappear at the same time, the treasure box icon I1 may disappear first, or the navigation character YM may disappear first.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an effect example using a holding frame different from the holding frame described so far.

The hold frame UI shown in FIG. 99 (1) is a closed type that extends over the entire effect display area 208d. That is, the holding frame UI and the components (pedestal hs0, etc.) described so far are the same, but in the state of FIG. 99 (1), the area of the holding frame UI in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 , The other areas are firmly distinguished by the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, and the right frame UIf3, the sea background is displayed in the other areas, and the sea background is displayed in the hold frame UI. Is not displayed. The hold frame UI shown in FIG. 99 (1) is the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, and the left base icon bIl and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in white. Is promoted by changing these colors.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Here, the holding frame UI is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol, and the lowermost end portion of the decorative symbol that fluctuates at high speed is overlapped from the front side by the upper frame UIf2 of the holding frame UI. However, on the contrary, the decorative design may overlap the holding frame UI from the front side. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 99 (2-1), the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2, and in the same figure (3), only the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure chest icon I1 appears. , Remains in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 99 (4), the treasure box icon I1 opens, and an icon displaying the characters "frame promotion" appears from the inside to notify (notice) the promotion of the hold frame UI. In FIG. 99 (5), the hold frame UI is promoted, and the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in red. Even if the "frame promotion" icon appears, the hold frame UI may not be promoted. In addition, when the "frame promotion" icon appears, the hold frame UI may be promoted without fail.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (2-1), in the same figure (2-2-1), the lower body of a huge panda is displayed in the area where the background of the sea is displayed. The lower body of this giant panda overlaps the variable display of the first decorative pattern from the front side. However, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed on the front side of the lower body of the panda. This giant panda is passing from top to bottom and eventually enters the area of the hold frame UI, with some or all of the hold frame UI overlapping from the front by the giant panda, FIG. 99. In the state shown in (-2-2), only a part of the upper left and upper right of the hold frame UI has not yet overlapped with the panda image, but the state shown in the same figure (-2-3). Now, the entire hold frame UI overlaps the panda's image. The appearance of a giant panda that covers almost the entire screen is a kind of change notice. The entire hold frame UI is overlapped by a huge panda, but the huge panda may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the entire hold frame UI.

FIG. 99 (2-2-4) shows one aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the huge panda has passed, and the first hold icon h11 changes to the blue display mode (1st hold icon h11). (Promotion), the navigation character YM has also changed (promoted) to the display mode wearing a red kimono, and the hold frame UI has also been promoted to red display. The display mode of the variable icon may be changed (promoted). Further, all of the hold icon, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM such as the left frame UIf1 may be changed, or only a part of them may be changed. For example, only the left frame UIf1 and the like may change to red and the hold frame UI may only be promoted. Alternatively, as will be described later, changes may occur outside the holding frame UI.

FIG. 99 (2-2-4') shows another aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the giant panda has finished passing, in addition to the changes within the hold frame UI. Changes are occurring outside the hold frame UI. That is, the level of the level display Lv attached to each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is increasing. When this level rises, it becomes easier to start the reach effect, the pseudo-continuous effect is more likely to start, and the mode of the symbol is switched to the symbol that appears at the time of a big hit with a probability change. Also, if the reach production is started with this level high, the expectation of a big hit will be high. The background may change.

In the case of a big hit notice, the appearance of a huge panda may be displayed in front of the image of the panda so that the first decorative pattern overlaps the image of the passing panda from the front side, or the big hit. Even if it is a notice, the first decorative symbol may be overlapped with the image of the passing panda.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (2-1), in the figure (2-3-1), a fusuma image for wipe effect is added to the holding frame UI, and the figure (2-3-1). The state shown in 1) is a state in which the fusuma image is fully closed (wipe-in state). On the other hand, the state shown in the figure (2-3-2) is a state in which the fusuma image is fully opened (wipeout state).

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example in which the treasure box icon I1, which has been used as the change notice notification icon, appears as a hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (Su 1-1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, a treasure chest icon is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 100 (Su 2-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 100 (Su 3), the treasure box icon is displayed. The hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. The first hold icon h11 of the treasure box icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as the variable icon h0, but the treasure box icon is also displayed as the variable icon h0 here.

In FIG. 100 (S4), the treasure box of the treasure box icon, which is the variable icon h0, opens, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and the smoke image displays the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the front side. Covering and changing animations are being performed. In FIG. 100 (Su 5), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the navigation character YM is changed by the variable icon h0. The smoke image corresponds to a change notice, but the smoke image does not have to overlap the change icon h0, which is a change candidate, or the smoke image does not have to appear.

Further, instead of FIG. 100 (Su 1-1), in the same figure (Su 1-2-1), the second hold icon h12 of the default display mode is also displayed. The second hold icon h12 is overlapped by the first hold icon h11 of the treasure chest icon. That is, at least a part of the hold icon with a relatively high expectation of a big hit overlaps with at least a part of a hold icon with a relatively low expectation from the front side. It should be noted that at least a part of the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode may overlap with at least a part of the hold icon in the default display mode from the front side. Alternatively, regardless of the expectation of the jackpot, at least a part of the hold icon that is digested first may overlap at least a part of the hold icon that is digested later from the front side. In FIG. 100 (1-2-2), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened and the change animation is executed. That is, a smoke image appears, and the smoke image overlaps with the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 100 (Su 1-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 in which the smoke image overlaps is changed.

Further, instead of FIG. 100 (Su 2-1), in the same figure (Su 2-2-1), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened and the change animation is executed. In the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps with the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and in the figure (2-2-2), the smoke image disappears and both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. The aspect has changed. Here, both change to the same red color, but may change to different colors. For example, one may turn red and the other may turn gold. Alternatively, both may be wrapped in a smoke image, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

Further, instead of FIG. 100 (Su 2-1), in the same figure (Su 2-3-1), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened, and the change animation is also executed here. However, in the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps only the variable icon h0 among the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM. In FIG. 100 (Su 2-3-2), the smoke image disappears, and only the display mode of the variable icon h0 in which the smoke image overlaps is changed.

In addition, the icons (hold icon, variable icon) and / or navigation characters that are not overlapped by the smoke image are also the icons (hold icon, variable icon) and / or navigation that are overlapped by the smoke image after the smoke image disappears. The display mode may change with the change in the display mode of the character (may be at the same time as the change in the display mode or after the change in the display mode).

FIG. 101 shows an effect example in which the navigation character YM is entwined with the meter effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (Se 1-1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two holds of special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and a white meter display MW having a white meter frame mf is displayed next to the navigation character YM. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 101 (Se 1-1) is in an empty state. When the meter display is full, the navigation character YM is promoted. By changing the display mode of the meter frame mf (for example, the color, the shape of the frame, etc.), it is possible to give a notice of the ease of accumulation of the meter, a look-ahead notice, and / or a notice of the change.

In FIG. 101 (se 2), the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (first stop), and "decoration 4" is swayed and displayed. A white meter rising item UpI is added to the design of this "decoration 4", and in FIG. 101 (se 3), the meter rising item UpI moves to the white meter display MW and becomes the white meter display MW. It is displayed in an overlapping manner. As shown in FIG. 101 (set 4), the meter rising item UpI moved to the white meter display MW is incorporated (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is raised by one level. In addition, the degree of rise of the meter differs depending on the color of the meter rise item. The white meter rise item UpI raises the white meter display MW by one level.

In FIG. 101 (se 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (se 5-1), the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold has been exhausted and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started.

In FIG. 101 (Se 7-1), the roulette display icon RI appears on the white meter display MW, and the roulette effect is started. In the roulette production here, there are cases where something always happens (when there is no loss) and cases where something does not happen (when there is a loss). Examples of such things include a change in the hold icon and a normal notice (notice of the change). Also, for example, if there is a character-based super reach including Tono Super Reach, Princess Super Reach, and Grandpa Super Reach as one type of Super Reach, as an example of something above, the type of super reach that develops (for example, Notice of character super reach), notice of specific super reach (for example, Tono Super Reach), etc. can also be given.

In FIG. 101 (set 8), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and in FIG. 101 (set 9), the blue meter rising item UpIb moves to the white meter display MW and is white. It is displayed overlapping with the meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 101, the blue meter rising item UpIb moved to the white meter display MW is incorporated (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by two levels. The blue meter rise item UpIb raises the white meter display MW by 2 levels. As a result, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 101 (set 10) has three levels.

In FIG. 101 (se 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (se 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started.

In FIG. 101 (se 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (se 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started.

The button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 101. The button display icon 136D is a balloon display mode and corresponds to a notice given by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A part of the button display icon 136D overlaps with a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf). The button display icon 136D may overlap the entire meter display, or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

In FIG. 101 (Set 14), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 101 (Set 15), the remaining period meter is decreasing. In FIG. 101 (se 16), the chance button 136 is operated, and in the figure (se 17), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, a meter rise icon MUI as a response display is added to the navigation character YM. The meter rise icon MUI is a display mode of a balloon, and the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 101 (se 17) displays a green meter rise item UpIm. This meter rise icon MUI also overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf) like the button display icon 136D. The meter rise icon MUI may overlap the entire meter display, or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display may or may not be displayed. In addition, the response display may include a display other than the meter rise icon MUI, and if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display is not displayed, but a specific effect (for example, the display of the meter rise icon MUI) is displayed. ) May be displayed as a response display. Further, even if the response display is not displayed, the meter may be configured to increase, or the meter increases only when the response display is displayed and does not increase when the response display is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.

In FIG. 101 (se 18), the green meter rise item UpIm in the meter rise icon MUI is moved to the white meter display MW and displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 101, the green meter rising item UpIm moved to the white meter display MW is incorporated (stocked) into the white meter display MW, the white meter display MW rises by 3 levels, and FIG. 101 The white meter display MW shown in (Set 19) is full. In FIG. 101 (se 20-1), the white meter display MW changes to the character display of "promotion", and a change animation (not shown) is started. In the figure (se 21), the display mode of the navigation character YM is red. It has changed (promoted) to the display mode wearing the kimono. The color of the kimono of the navigator character YM changed here matches the background color of the character display of "promotion" shown in FIG. 101 (se 20-1), and at the stage of FIG. 101 (se 20-1). The display mode in which the navigation character YM changes is foretold. The change animation may be omitted. Further, although the white meter display shown in FIG. 21 has returned to an empty state, it may remain in a full tank state. Further, when the meter display is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed (promoted) without fail, or may not be changed (promoted) (in the case of failure).

Instead of FIG. 101 (Se 1-1), as shown in FIG. 101 (1-2-1), the meter display may not always be displayed. As shown in FIG. 101 (Se 1-2-2), the meter rising item UpI may appear even when the meter display is not displayed. Also in this case, the meter rising item UpI moves to a fixed position in the effect icon display area DIS as shown in FIG. 101 (Se 1-2-3). Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (Se 1-2-4), the meter display (here, the white meter display MW) appears after the movement of the meter rising item UpI is completed. In this case, the appearance of the meter rising item UpI is a notice that the meter display is displayed. Further, the meter display may be displayed according to the appearance of the meter rising item UpI. For example, it may be displayed at the same time as the appearance of the meter rising item UpI, or may be displayed at a timing between FIG. 101 (se 1-2-2) and FIG. 101 (se 1-2-3).

In FIG. 101 (Se 1-2-5), the white meter display MW is raised by one level due to the meter rise item UpI. In the example shown in FIG. 101, when the meter display is displayed, the meter always rises after that, but even if the meter display is displayed, the meter does not rise (corresponding to false). It may be good, or the meter rising item may not appear. Furthermore, the meter may not rise even if the meter rise item appears.

Further, the meter display may be displayed from the symbol fluctuation display before the symbol fluctuation display in which the meter rising item appears. In this case, the meter display is a look-ahead notice that the meter may be accumulated. become. Alternatively, the meter display may be displayed at the same time as the start of the symbol fluctuation display in which the meter rising item appears, or during the symbol fluctuation, and in this case, the meter display may accumulate meters within the fluctuation. It will be a notice that there is.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 101.

Instead of FIG. 101 (Set 1-1), in FIG. 102 (Set 1-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in a state where there is no hold, and the white meter display MW in an empty state is displayed. It is displayed. The white meter display MW displayed in FIG. 101 (Se 1-1) was full at 6 levels, whereas the white meter display displayed in FIG. 102 (Se 1-3-1) was full. MW is full at 5th level.

In FIG. 102 (se 1-3-3a), the meter rise icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM. The golden meter rise item UpIg is displayed on the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 102 (Se 1-3-3a). The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 102 (Se 1-3-4a) is filled up at once by the golden meter rising item UpIg. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge mg) that increases in the meter frame mf is blue, but if it is still stored, even if it is full with the blue gauge. Alternatively, the golden gauge may be full due to the fact that the golden meter rising item UpIg fills the tank at once.

On the other hand, also in FIG. 102 (Se 1-3-3b), the meter rise icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM, and here, the rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 102 (Se 1-3-4b) is also filled up at once by the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. If the item is still stored, the blue gauge may be full, or the rainbow-colored gauge may be full because the rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn fills the tank at once. It may be in a tongue state.

White, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow-colored items are available as meter-raising items. Of these items, only the rainbow-colored meter-raising item UpIn and the golden meter-raising item UpIg are items that raise the meter by 5 levels at once. The white meter rise item UpI is raised by 1 level, the blue meter rise item UpIb is raised by 2 levels, the green meter rise item UpIm is raised by 3 levels, and the red meter rise item UpIr is raised by 4 levels.

In addition, the rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn also functions as a notice of jackpot confirmation. On the other hand, the golden meter rising item UpIg does not have such a function. Therefore, when the meter is full with one rainbow-colored meter rise item UpIn, when the meter is full with one gold meter rise item UpIn, or in other colors (white, blue, green, red). The meaning is different from the case where the meter is filled with a combination of meter rise items.

In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge) that increases in the meter frame mf is white, blue, green, and red meter rising items, and when the meter rises or becomes full, It may be a blue gauge.

In addition, the color of the meter rising item may also have a function as a normal notice or a look-ahead notice. In addition, the expected degree of big hit may be expressed by the color.

Further, the color of the meter rising item and the color of the display mode of the navigation character YM may be linked, or may be always linked. For example, when the golden meter rising item UpIg appears, the navigation character YM also easily changes to the display mode wearing a golden kimono, or always changes, and conversely, the display that the navigation character YM wears a golden kimono. In the aspect, the golden meter rising item UpIg may easily appear or may always appear.

Further, the order of appearance and the color combination of the meter rising items may function as a look-ahead notice or a normal notice. In addition, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may represent the degree of expectation of a big hit. Or, conversely, the order of appearance and color combinations of meter-raising items may be completely independent of the jackpot expectation.

Further, in this example, the meter is accumulated until it reaches 15 (the meter is full three times). In the meter display that fills up at 6 levels in FIG. 101, the meters are stored until the meter reaches 18 (also the meter is full 3 times). Here, if the meter overflows due to the meter rise item being displayed (for example, if the red Up icon is displayed when three meters are accumulated), the meter is set to 0 while promoting the navigation character. You may try to save what you haven't saved. For example, if the red meter rise item UpIt is displayed when three meters are accumulated, the meter is filled once and the meter is further accumulated by two levels.

If the meter overflows when the meter is full twice, the meter may be filled and the amount that has not been accumulated may be displayed on the meter. For example, the meter may be returned to 0 when the look-ahead target change or the change ends, or the meter may remain displayed regardless of the look-ahead target change or the change. In addition, the portion that has not been accumulated may be truncated. For example, when the meter is stored, the meter at that time may be in the 0 state, may be in the full tank state, may have a special display, or may be in the meter non-display state. Good. Furthermore, it may be configured so as not to overflow. For example, when three items have already been accumulated, only two white meter rise items UpI or one blue meter rise item UpIb are displayed.

In the example starting from FIG. 102 (Set 1-4-1) instead of FIG. 101 (Set 1-1), in the figure (Set 1-4-2), a red beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI. , Is irradiated toward the navigation character YM in the default display mode, and as shown in Fig. 1-4-3, the navigation character YM changes to the display mode wearing a red kimono, and "Up high accuracy is in progress." "Is attached. By this "Up high accuracy middle", it is notified that the meter rising item is in a state where it is easy to accumulate.

Depending on the display mode of the notice that changes the navigation character YM, the notification of "Up high accuracy" may occur or may always occur. Further, when the navigation character YM changes, the notification of "Up high accuracy" may be performed without fail, or a plurality of types of effect display (notice display) including the notification of "Up high accuracy" may be performed. , The effect display including the notification of "Up high accuracy" may not be performed.

Further, the effect performed by the navigation character YM may differ depending on the display mode (color) of the navigation character YM. For example, if the red navigation character YM is used, "Up high accuracy is in progress" is notified, if the gold navigation character YM is used, the intense heat display is displayed, and if the rainbow-colored navigation character YM is used, the iron plate display is displayed. May be done. In addition, the navigation character YM having a different display mode may give the same notice (notice of the same type).

Instead of FIG. 101 (se 5-1), in FIG. 102 (se 5-2-1), the gauge of the white meter display MW is blinking white at one level, and the kimono of the navigator character YM is also blinking white. There is. After that, once the meter was full and returned to an empty state, in FIG. 102 (Se 5-2-3), the display mode of the navigator character YM changed to a display mode wearing a green kimono. The gauge of the white meter display MW has also changed to green and has risen to 3 levels. After that, after the meter became full again and returned to the empty state, in FIG. 102 (Se 5-2-5), the display mode of the navigator character YM changed to the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , The white meter display MW gauge also changes to rainbow color and is full. In this way, the state of accumulation of the meter and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be configured to match. Further, the color of the gauge and the color of the navigation character YM may also correspond to each other.

It should be noted that when all the meters are accumulated, a pattern in which the jackpot is confirmed or the expectation of the jackpot is high and a pattern in which the meters are accumulated and released to produce the effect may be separately prepared. As an example of the latter, for example, when the meter is discharged up to the 2nd level, an effect equivalent to blue is performed, and when the meter is released when the meter is accumulated up to the 4th level, an effect equivalent to red is performed. Is done.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing still another modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 101.

Instead of FIG. 101 (set 6-1), in FIG. 103 (set 6-2), the roulette display icon RI and the meter rising icon MUI are placed on the white blinking meter display MW'where the meter frame mf blinks white. Is displayed, but a part of the meter rise icon MUI overlaps a part of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. 103 (se 6-2) is shown in FIG. 101 ( It is more difficult to see than the roulette display icon RI shown in 7-1). On the other hand, the green meter rise item UpIm is displayed on the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 101 (Set 7-1). The meter rising icon MUI may overlap all of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and conversely, at least a part of the roulette display icon RI may overlap from the front side at least a part of the meter rising icon MUI. You may wrap it. As for the priority to be displayed on the front side, the icon added to the navigation character YM may be higher than the other icons. In this example, when a notice is given that the meter rise icon may be displayed, such as when the roulette display icon is being displayed, the meter rise icon is displayed by displaying the white flashing meter that blinks the meter frame in white. Although it is informed that it may be displayed, it may not be notified by the meter frame even if a notice is given that the meter rise icon may be displayed, and it may not be notified by the meter frame. It may be configured so that it is not notified that the meter rise icon may be displayed. Further, the notice that the meter rise icon may be displayed may be given not only by the meter frame but also by other display or production means.

Instead of FIG. 101 (set 7-1), in FIG. 103 (set 7-2), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. However, it is difficult to see because the meter rise icon MUI still overlaps. In this way, the meter rise icons may overlap. When the meter rise icons overlap, the priority displayed on the front side may be the display order of the meter rise icons, the one with the higher meter rise may be prioritized, or the meter rise may be prioritized. The lower one may be prioritized. Further, the meter rise icon does not overlap from the front side on the navigation character YM, but it may overlap.

Further, instead of FIG. 101 (se 7-1), in FIG. 103 (se 7-3-1), an image up that notifies (notices) that the meter rise icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. 'Is displayed. However, at this stage, it is unclear how many colors of the meter rise icon will be displayed, and after that, some color of the meter rise icon will be displayed in the roulette display icon RI. In this way, when it is notified that the meter rise icon is displayed in the roulette effect, although it is unknown what color it is, as shown in FIG. 103 (se 7-3-2), the roulette display icon RI The effect display Ed1 with an aura is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the following FIG. 103 (se 7-3-3), the effect display Ed1 changes, and the display looks like an enlarged blue meter rise icon. At this stage, it is unknown how many colors of the meter rise icon are displayed in the roulette display icon RI. At this stage, a blue meter rising icon may be displayed in the roulette display icon RI.

In FIG. 103 (se 7-3-4), the display that overlaps the roulette display icon RI and looks like an enlarged blue meter rise icon becomes the blue meter rise icon UpIb, and the white blinking meter display MW. It moves to'and is displayed overlapping with the white flashing meter display MW'. In addition, the roulette display icon RI fades out, the display becomes faint, and it gradually disappears. It should be noted that the color of the meter rising item displayed in the roulette display icon RI may remain unknown. After that, the blue meter rising item UpIb is taken in (stocked) in the white blinking meter display MW', and the white blinking meter display MW' is leveled up.

In addition, a blue meter rising item UpIb may appear in the roulette display icon RI, and it may be incorporated into the white blinking meter display MW'. In this case, the blue meter rise item UpIb may be displayed in the roulette display icon RI before the effect display Ed1 is displayed, or may be displayed at the same time as the effect display Ed1 is displayed. It may be displayed after being displayed. Alternatively, in the roulette display icon RI, a display in which the blue meter rise item UpIb is displayed as if the blue meter rise icon is enlarged may be displayed before it is displayed, or it may be displayed at the same time as it is displayed. It may be displayed, or it may be displayed after it is displayed.

Instead of FIG. 101 (se 20-1), in FIG. 103 (se-20-2-1), the white meter display MW in the full tank state is once changed to the character display of "stock", and is in an empty state. Returning to the white meter display MW, the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. In this example, although the meter is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change until the treasure box is opened, and the change of the display mode of the navigation character YM is delayed. When the treasure box icon I1 is opened, only the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed, and icons other than the navigation character (holding icon, variable icon) and other effect displays may be changed.

As described above, the description regarding the meter display described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 39 can be applied to the description using FIGS. 101 to 103. That is, all the descriptions including the description that the rise rate of the meter is different when the color of the meter frame is different can be applied. Alternatively, conversely, the matters described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103 can be applied to the description with reference to FIGS. 14 to 39.

FIG. 104 shows an example of an effect in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (No. 1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two holds of special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 104 (No. 2-1), the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed in characters that the navigation character YM may change, which corresponds to an example of a change notice display. For example, a display such as "Navi character change high accuracy in progress" or a character display such as "Navi character change high accuracy in preparation" is displayed from the right to the left of the screen. In addition to this, the telop display trp is plain and no characters are displayed, and depending on the telop display, "○○ high accuracy", "XX & ○○ high accuracy", "○○ high accuracy" It may be notified in advance that "preparing", "XX or XX high-accuracy preparation", "high-accuracy preparation", etc. may be displayed. Even if the plain telop display trp is displayed here, "○○ high accuracy medium", "XX & ○○ high accuracy medium", "○○ high accuracy preparation", "XX or ○○ high accuracy preparation" , "Highly accurate preparation", etc. may not be displayed. In addition, "○○ high probability preparation", "XX or ○○ high probability preparation", "high probability preparation", etc. are displayed, and a high probability state may occur for the telop-displayed production from now on. You may notify that in advance. "XX" and "○○" described here are various effects (for example, hold (hold icon and / or variable icon) change, pseudo-ream, notice in high expectation color, high expectation for big hit The name of the notice (so-called super hot notice) is shown.

It should be noted that the high-probability state for the effect described here is an effect in which the notice notified as the high-probability state by the telop display is notified by the telop as compared with the case where the high-probability state is not notified by the telop display. It shows a state in which it is performed more frequently. That is, "Navi character change high accuracy" in FIGS. 104 (1) to (14), (2-2), 2-3 (2-3), and (8-2). "" Indicates a state in which the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to change than when the telop display does not notify "Navi character change is highly accurate". In addition, "high probability preparing" included in "○○ high probability preparation", "XX or XX high probability preparation", "high probability preparation", etc. mentioned above is notified by telop display. The effect being performed is in a high-probability state. Changes after the next change of the change in which the display of the telop including "Highly accurate preparation" is started or the change in which the display of the telop including "Highly accurate preparation" is started. (Inside) (or there is a possibility of becoming a high-probability state) is notified.

In FIG. 104 (No. 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The telop display trp is displayed in front of the second decorative symbol, and the lower end portion of the second decorative symbol is overlapped from the front side by the telop display trp. However, on the contrary, the second decorative symbol may overlap the telop display trp from the front side.

In FIG. 104 (No. 4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol variation display is also started in FIG. 104 (No. 6). The telop display trp is ongoing.

In FIG. 104 (No. 7), the change animation of the navigator character YM is started, and the navigator character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 104 (No. 8-1), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigator character YM has changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Even if the change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is still ongoing. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display is started in FIG. 104 (No. 10), and the telop display trp is still continuing in FIG. 104 (No. 11).

The treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display may appear, the change animation may be started, the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon I1 may be opened, and the navigation character YM may be changed. In this case, it can be said that the display such as "Navi character change high accuracy" of the telop display trp foretells the appearance of the treasure box icon I1 or the start of the change animation.

In FIG. 104 (12), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started again, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 104 (No. 13), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigator character YM has changed to a display mode wearing a golden kimono. Even if the second change effect of the navigator character YM is successful, the telop display trp is still ongoing.

While the telop display trp is being displayed, the navigator character YM may be changed many times. However, if the navigator character YM is changed once while the telop display trp is being displayed, the navigator character YM is changed thereafter. It may be configured not to.

In FIG. 104 (14), the reach state has been entered, but the telop display trp is still ongoing. The timing at which the telop display trp disappears is when the super reach starts (for example, FIG. 88 (U24)) and when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (for example, when the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop]. , Symbol stop character, when the next fluctuation starts, etc.

In this example, the change effect is performed by the navigation character itself, but the navigation character may be changed by the change notice display, and the navigation character is changed only by the change notice display. It may be configured so that only the change effect by the navigation character itself is performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 104 (No. 2-1), as shown in FIG. 104 (No. 2-2), the telop display trp may be performed in two upper and lower stages. Then, different contents may be displayed between the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp.

In the telop display, the high-accuracy middle display may be displayed for other notices. As long as they are for the same look-ahead target hold, they may be displayed at the same timing, and one may be later than the other. In addition, when one telop display of "○○ high accuracy is in progress" is displayed, the telop display may not be displayed or may be displayed for another look-ahead target hold. In that case, the telop display related to the same notice (for example, "Navi character high accuracy") may be displayed separately, or the display period of the same telop display may be extended. Further, the display position of the telop display may be determined in the order of starting the display, or the display position for each telop may be fixed.

Further, instead of FIG. 104 (No. 2-1), the same content may be displayed on the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp as shown in the same figure (No. 2-3). That is, the same telop display may be displayed more than once. It may be possible to appeal that the expectation of a big hit is higher when a plurality of displays are displayed than when only one is displayed. However, even if a plurality of them are displayed, the expectation of the jackpot may be the same as when only one is displayed. Further, the same telop display may be repeatedly displayed. That is, each time the display of the telop display is started, a plurality of telop displays having the same content may be displayed.

Further, instead of FIG. 104 (No. 8-1), as shown in the same figure (No. 8-2), when the navigation character YM is changed (one or more times), it should not be changed any more. May be notified by a telop display trp. In this example, the character display "completed" is displayed. However, even if this notification is performed, the navigation character YM may be further changed.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b).

FIG. 105 (1a-1) shows a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N. The second decorative symbol and the second reserved number are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four hold icons in Special Figure 1 are stored, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 105 (Ta 2a-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and "Decoration 7" is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In FIG. 105 (Ta 3a), the supermarket is displayed. The shift to reach production has shifted, and all the displays have disappeared from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the first decorative symbol, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 to h14, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM have disappeared.

In FIG. 105 (4a), the pattern of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed on the entire screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the other hand, the reduced first decorative symbol, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be displayed on different decorative symbol display devices.

In FIG. 105 (5a), the background of the wilderness, which is the background display of the super reach effect, is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. In addition, the first decorative pattern display device 208L displays a duel scene in which the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy are confronting each other.

Here, instead of FIG. 105 (Ta 1a-1), in FIG. 105 (Ta 1a-2), a part of the holding frame UI is enlarged and displayed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display are displayed. It is displayed across the device 208L. That is, the hold icon display area HIS is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon display area CIS is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the fourth hold icon h14 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third hold icon is displayed. h13 is enlarged and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a frame surrounding the display screen, this frame interferes with the image displayed across the display screen.

Further, although the right base icon bIr is not displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N in which the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed, the right base icon bIr may also be enlarged and displayed together with the navigation character YM.

In addition, even if it is not enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 105 (1a-2), it may straddle a plurality of display devices. For example, a pattern that straddles from the beginning of display, a pattern that moves from the original position and is displayed straddling, a pattern that changes the image and is displayed straddling, or an image that is enlarged and displayed straddling. On the contrary, there are patterns in which the image is reduced and displayed across the image. Further, when the enlarged display is performed as shown in FIG. 105 (1a-2), the expectation of the big hit is high, the hold icon is easy to change, the variable icon is easy to change, or the navigation character YM. May be easy to change. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. Here, when the effect display is displayed across a plurality of display devices and a part of the display area of the display device B is overlapped by the display device A in the foreground, the display device B A part of the image displayed in the display area of the display device B may be displayed in the display area overlapped by the display device A in the above.

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 105 (1a-2) can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 105 (Ta 1a-1), in FIG. 105 (Ta 1a-3), a part of the holding frame UI is moved and displayed. That is, the effect icon display area DIS has moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the right base icon bIr is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The navigation character YM is also displayed above the right base icon bIr.

In this way, when the navigation character YM moves to another display device, the navigation character YM may change easily, the expectation of a big hit may increase, or a change in other effects (for example, hold) may occur. Changes in icons and variable icons, etc.) may be facilitated. In addition, depending on the destination of the navigation character YM, the ease of change of the navigation character YM, the high degree of expectation of a big hit, and the ease of change of other effects (for example, the change of the hold icon and the variable icon) are easy. They may be different or they may be the same with no effect. For example, when moving to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the probability that the navigation character YM changes may be higher than when moving to the second decorative symbol display device 208L. The movement of the navigation character YM has been described above, but the same applies when the hold icon moves to another display device or the variable icon moves to another display device.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 105 (1a-3), it can be seen that the holding frame UI is divided (broken). That is, although the effect icon display area DIS is broken and moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be moved to another place of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 105 (1a-3) can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 105 (Ta 1a-1), in FIG. 105 (Ta 1a-4), the navigation character YM is split when it moves. That is, when moving from the first decorative symbol display device 208L to another display device, it is divided into two and displayed on both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This can also be seen as an increase in the navigation character YM.

In this way, when the navigator character YM is divided (increased), the navigator character YM may be easily changed, the expectation of the big hit may be high, and other changes in the production (for example, the hold icon or the like) It may be easier to change the variable icon, etc.).

Further, since the right base icon bIr is also displayed at the place where the navigation character YM is displayed, it can be said that the effect icon display area DIS is also divided (increased).

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 105 (1a-4) can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later. That is, in other production examples, the navigation character YM may be divided (increased), and may be always divided (increased).

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of another effect in which the navigation character YM is entwined by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b).

In FIG. 106 (1b), the background of the sea is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. Further, in the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four hold icons in Special Figure 1 are stored, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 106 (2b), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image. Further, in the left and right second decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 106 (2b), the background display of the sea has disappeared.

In FIG. 106 (3b), the smoke image disappears, the navigation character YM disappears from the effect icon display area DIS, and the icon of the signboard "Searching" is displayed instead. In addition, the same character (Den-sama) YM'as the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side where the background display of the sea has disappeared, and is running. In addition, a character display indicating that the search is in progress is displayed above it. Similarly, the silhouette display slt is displayed together with the image of the question mark on the second decorative pattern display device 208M on the left side where the background display of the sea has disappeared.

The icon of the signboard "Searching" may be a notification indicating that there is a high possibility that the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM will be successful. In addition, the success rate is higher when the signboard color is blue than white, and the success rate is higher when the signboard color is red than blue. If it is red, promotion may be confirmed. Further, the color, display characters, and the like of this signboard may change, but may not change. In addition, it may suggest a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change depending on the display mode of the signboard. For example, if the signboard is blue, the navigator character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono.

In FIG. 106 (4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the fully open state (initial state), are in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to approach each other. Will move. It should be noted that this period corresponds to the period of the fanning production.

In FIG. 106 (5b-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position and stop. Here, it moves to a fully closed position (maximum movement position) in contact with each other and stops, but it may be a position before contact.

FIG. 106 (6b-1) is a diagram showing an example of a promotion success pattern. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the running character (lord) YM'poses a pose with his thumb raised, and above that. A character display indicating level up is displayed in. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to the actual display, and a thousand-car box is displayed. It should be noted that the display mode of the Senryo box may suggest a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change. For example, if the Senryo box is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono. Further, the color, open / closed state, and the like of this thousand-box box may change, but may not change. In FIG. 106 (7b), the character (lord) YM'displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono.

Then, in FIG. 106 (8b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each move in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to be separated from each other, and return to the initial state. .. When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each return to the initial state, the wipe effect is performed by the respective decorative symbol display devices 208M and N, respectively. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 106 (9b) are in the middle of the wipe-in, and in the same figure (10b), the wipe-in is completed and the second decorative symbol display device 208M Also, the third decorative symbol display device 208N also displays a wipe display in which only the model title is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 106 (10b), a smoke image is displayed at a position where the signboard icon has been displayed until then.

In the effect icon display area DIS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 106 (11b), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, wipeout has been started in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, respectively. In this example, the wipe-in animation (animation that closes from the left and right) and the wipe-out animation (animation that opens from the inside to the outside) are different, but they may be the same animation. In FIG. 106 (12b), the wipeout is completed and the sea background is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. In addition, in one decorative symbol display device, the effect display displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices of this example may be performed. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be replaced with one or more effect movable bodies that do not include the liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect movable body performs the effect operation). And, there is a production that promotes the navigation character.)

The change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 106 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect example described later.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect in which the navigation character YM is entwined by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b).

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 107 (1a-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four hold icons in Special Figure 1 are stored, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are the default display modes. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 107 (Ta 1a-3-2), a movement animation is displayed in which the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 107 (Ta 1a-3-2), the navigation character YM is located exactly between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Also here, since there is a frame surrounding the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, this frame interferes with the navigation character YM displayed straddling the display. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (1a-3-3) displays a navigation character YM having the same display size as that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

On the other hand, in FIG. 107 (1a-3-2'), the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In 208N, an example of enlarged display is shown. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (1a-3-2') displays only the toes of the right hand and the right foot of the navigation character YM, but the toes of the right hand and the right foot are enlarged and displayed. The navigation character YM is immediately enlarged and displayed from the portion that has entered the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (1a-3-3') displays a navigation character YM having a display size larger than that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. When the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed in this way, the navigation character YM may change more easily than when it is not enlarged, the expectation of a big hit may be higher, and others. Changes in the effect of the above (for example, changes in the hold icon and the variable icon) may be facilitated, or may be the same without any influence. Further, when the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may or may not be enlarged.

The movement animation of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 107 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 106 (8b), FIG. 107 (5b-2) shows a pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM has failed. In FIG. 106 (4b), when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving so as to approach each other, and both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position. Is a failure. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are stopped on the way, also return to the initial state, but the notification of the failure of the change effect (promotion effect) is performed after returning to the initial state. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (5b-2), the character (lord) YM'is in a depressed pose facing backward. Note that the failure notification may be started in the middle of returning to the initial state. Alternatively, the failure notification may be started when the vehicle has stopped before reaching a certain position.

Further, if both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position, it may always fail, but the navigation character YM may be promoted. Further, even if this change effect (promotion effect) fails, the navigation character YM may be promoted by another effect. This is also true for the success and failure productions described so far.

In addition, if the change effect (promotion effect) here fails, the navigation character YM may change for the time being (for example, until the background display changes, or from the promotion failure until the end of N times of fluctuations). Changes may be restricted until the end of the look-ahead hold fluctuations associated with the promotion failure, etc.).

Further, instead of FIG. 106 (Ta 6b-1), FIG. 107 (Ta 6b-2) shows the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol up to a certain position (for example, the position in the fully closed state). A pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) fails even though the display device 208N has moved is shown. Similarly to the previous case, the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (6b-2) also displays the character (lord) YM'in a pose that faces backward and is depressed. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to the actual display, and the mandarin orange box is displayed there.

In this way, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the promotion effect may fail. Alternatively, conversely, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the navigator character YM may be promoted without fail. Further, the navigation character YM may be promoted even in the state shown in FIG. 107 (6b-2), and conversely, in this state, the failure may be confirmed.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigator character YM by the effect device 206 provided with the second display device below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device).

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (1c). On the other hand, the background of the sea is not displayed on the second display device 208S provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device), and the hold frame UI is displayed on the second display device 208S. ing. That is, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The second display device 208S may be fixed or may be able to move up and down.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (1c), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the second display device 208S. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is also displayed on the second display device 208S.

A sliding door image for wiping effect is displayed on the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (2c), and the state shown in FIG. 108 (3c) is a state in which the sliding door image is fully closed (wipe-in state). Is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (4), the wipeout is started, and in the second display device 208S shown in the figure (5c), the sliding door image is fully opened (wipeout state). The second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (5c) at which the wipe effect is completed does not display the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, or the navigation character YM. The animation of the mini game by is displayed. That is, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are hidden by the wipe effect, and the golf mini bet (promotion) on the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM. The game has started. Even if it is the same mini-game, there may be a mini-game in which a successful super reach production is started. At the stage of FIG. 108 (4c), it can be seen that the mini-game is started on the second display device 208S, but it is not known what the bet (fortune-telling) mini-game is, and the mini-game of FIG. 108 (5c) is shown. I don't know until the stage. For this reason, it may be possible to pay attention to at least the second display device 208S until the explanation about the mini game (here, "promotion of Yoshimune if it enters the cup") is given.

The second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (6c-1) succeeds in cup-in brilliantly. When the cup-in is successful, the wipe effect is started again, the fusuma image starts to close again in FIG. 108 (7c), and the state shown in the figure (8c) is the state in which the fusuma image is fully closed (wipe-in state). is there. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (9c), the wipeout is started, and in the second display device 208S shown in the figure (10c), the sliding door image is fully opened (wipeout state). In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (10c) wiped out again, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed. After the wipeout is completed in this way, the change animation of the navigation character YM is displayed on the second display device 208S (FIG. 108 (11c)). In the change animation here, the navigator character YM is overlapped by the smoke image, and in FIG. 108 (12c), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM is changed to the display mode of the red kimono.

Further, instead of FIG. 108 (6c-1), in the same figure (6c-2), the cup-in fails. In this way, if the mini-game betting on the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM fails, the navigation character YM may never be promoted, but may be promoted. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 (6c-1), when the mini game is successful, the navigation character YM may be absolutely promoted, but may not be promoted.

It should be noted that, when wiping out from FIG. 108 (8c), the wipe effect may be able to suggest to the player the possibility that the navigation character YM may be promoted, or the display mode in which the navigation character YM changes may be displayed. It may be a wipe effect that can be suggested.

Further, the navigation character YM may have already changed (promoted) at the time of wiping out in FIG. 108 (10c).

Further, the second display device 208S may perform an effect operation during the execution of the mini game. In addition, when it succeeds (in this example, Fig. 108 (6c-1)) and when it fails (in this example, Fig. 108 (6c-2)) and incitement (in this example, Fig. 108 (5c)). A different production operation may be performed in. In addition, instead of the second display device 208S, the effect operation by the effect movable body may be performed.

The mini-game described with reference to FIG. 108 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of a case where another effect is executed during the execution of the effect selected by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 in this description, the above-mentioned customization settings are performed. That is, 07 "Copanda" is set in "Character selection" shown in FIG. 73 (b), 02 "Hold frame B" is set in "Hold frame selection", and 02 "Hold frame B" is set in "Hold display selection". The "icon C" of 03 is set, and the "background E" of 05 is set in the background display selection.

The hold frame UI of the hold frame B is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (a1), and the copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is stored, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (a1), the background (empty background) of the background E is displayed.

In FIG. 109 (a2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. The Copanda navigation character YM is also displayed.

In FIG. 109 (Aa3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (Aa4-1), the carpet icon I2 appears. Disappears, and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. In FIG. 109 (a5), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides a part or all of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is hidden. Is clearly less visible than it was before the smoke image appeared. The change animation may be started by operating the chance button 136. In this case, the back button may be used, or the operation promotion notification may be performed. In FIG. 109 (a6), the smoke image disappears and the navigator character YM changes from copanda to bancho. As shown in FIG. 73 (b), the Bancho character in the navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected by the player. The character may be changed to a character that can be selected by the player (for example, an old man or a princess), or may be changed to a character that cannot be selected by the player.

In FIG. 109 (A7), the treasure chest icon I1 disappears, and in FIG. 109 (A8), the reach state is entered. A balloon icon of "NEXT" suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect is added to the navigator character YM of the number length shown in FIG. 109 (a8).

In FIG. 109 (a9), the pseudo-continuous symbol (the symbol of the character of the lord) is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol, and in the same figure (a10), the character of the lord and the character "continue" are displayed. A cut-in display consisting of is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a variable display mode of a decorative symbol in which the variable start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times in one variable display of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the easier it is to win a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (a11), the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the variable display of the first decorative symbol. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap with the first decorative symbol. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (a12), the display of "x2" is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

The balloon icon of "NEXT" suggesting the pseudo-ream effect is added again to the navigator character YM of the Bancho shown in FIG. 109 (a13), and the continuation of the pseudo-ream can still be expected. After that, after the temporary stop display is performed 0 times, 1 time or a plurality of times, the player enters the reach state and further develops into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). The background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (a15) changes to the background of the wilderness, which is the background display of the swordsman reach effect, and the decorative symbol display device 208 contains the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The duel scene facing each other is displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 have disappeared. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on the pedestal hs0. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the chief navigator character YM is displayed on the right base icon bIr.

A balloon icon of "chance" to incite a big hit is added to the bancho navigator character YM shown in FIG. 109 (a16), and the bancho navigator character YM is performing a fanning effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (a18) displays a scene after the lord and the swordsman slash each other in the super reach effect. Here, the lord is lying down, and the left and right as the middle symbol. "Decoration 6", which is different from the design ("Decoration 7"), is displayed large (shaking display). Although the height of the pedestal of the variable icon display area CIS is low, the lowered pedestal hs0'is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on the pedestal hs0'. In addition, the navigator character YM of the Bancho is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. After that, the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (a 19) is in the middle of the wipe-in, and in the same figure (a 20), the wipe-in is completed, and then the wipe-out is started. In the figure (a21), the background of the background E (the background of the sky) is returned, and the navigation character YM of Copanda is also beginning to be seen. In FIG. 109 (a22), the wipe effect is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 sways and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loss. In addition, the hold frame UI of the hold frame B is also displayed, and the display of the variable icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is resumed. Further, a blue hold icon (look-ahead hold icon) is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

As shown in FIGS. 89 (2) to 89 (4-1), the navigation character YM itself may change its display mode independently. In this example, the change animation using the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is executed but lost, but the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed by the effect using the treasure box icon I1. It may be easier to finally shift to a state advantageous to the player than when changing (for example, changing by oneself) without using the treasure box icon I1. The advantageous state referred to here includes a transition to a jackpot gaming state, a transition to a jackpot gaming state with a large number of balls, and a transition to a probability change state or an electric support state.

In this example, even if the hold is increased while the hold icon is hidden, when the hold icon is displayed from hidden, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden is displayed. Pre-reading notice may be given. If the hold increases while the hold icon is hidden, it may be until the hold is exhausted (it may be displayed in the variable icon display area, or it may be deleted from the variable icon display area). It may be configured to regulate look-ahead notice and / or notice of the change by the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden, or subject to changes with increased hold. The look-ahead notice by the hold icon may be regulated so that the look-ahead notice and / or the notice of the change may be given after the next change of the change in which the hold is increased.

In this example, the look-ahead notice by another hold icon may be given while the look-ahead notice by one hold icon is being executed, but the look-ahead notice by another hold icon is given while the look-ahead notice by another hold icon is being executed. , It is regulated until the hold corresponding to the one hold icon is exhausted (it may be displayed in the variable icon display area or deleted from the variable icon display area). May be good.

In this example, the navigation character selected by the player may give a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice, but the navigation character selected by the player gives a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice. You may not let it break. In addition, the tutorial display may be performed by the navigator character selected by the player (for example, the tutorial display is performed by the balloon icon), but the tutorial display is performed by the navigator character selected by the player. You may not let it break. Further, in this example, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may give a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice, but the notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice may not be given. Further, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variable icon is more easily performed than the navigation character that can be selected by the player, or the navigation character is changed. It may be configured so that the expected degree of big hit in the symbol fluctuation and / or hold is high (or the big hit is confirmed (the big hit may be rich)), and the notice and / or the appearance of the navigator character. It may be configured so that the super reach effect occurs frequently (or always occurs).

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 109.

Instead of FIG. 109 (a3-1), in FIG. 110 (a3-2), a change notice is displayed by light emission of the light guide plate IL instead of the treasure box icon I1. That is, the change of the navigation character YM may be announced by an effect means different from the effect means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) on which the navigation character YM is displayed.

Further, instead of FIG. 109 (a3-1), in FIG. 110 (a3-3), instead of the treasure box icon I1, a change notice display is displayed by the effect operation of the movable means (here, the family crest accessory 224E). It is carried out. That is, the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps with the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM. There is no hold icon here, but if there is a hold icon, it also overlaps with the hold icon. After that, the family crest accessory 224E rotates clockwise (see the arrow in the figure). The family crest accessory 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may vibrate with or in place of rotation. Further, it may be performed only ascending and not rotating or vibrating. Further, the navigation character YM may be changed during the overlap, or may be changed after the effect operation of the family crest accessory 224E is completed, that is, after the family crest accessory 224E returns to the initial position. Further, the easiness of change to the navigator character YM and the color of the display mode after the change may be notified by the light emitting effect by the LED provided on the family crest accessory 224E.

Further, instead of FIG. 109 (a3-1), in FIG. 110 (a3-4), the change notice is displayed by the sound output from the speaker 120 instead of the treasure box icon I1. The change notice may be displayed by the game board lamp 442 or the game underframe lamp 452.

Further, instead of FIG. 109 (a4-1), as shown in FIG. 110 (a4-2), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS while the treasure box is displayed. In some cases, the icon I1 rides on the carpet icon I2 and flies away. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Further, instead of FIG. 109 (Aa6-1), in FIG. 110 (Aa6-2), the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change even though the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is opened. Also corresponds to the so-called failure pattern.

Further, instead of FIG. 109 (aa6-1), in FIG. 110 (aa6-3), the copanda's navigation character YM is the same copanda, but the clothes are different in color (here, red clothes). It has changed to Copanda) and succeeded in the change production (promotion production) of the navigation character YM.

Further, instead of FIG. 109 (Aa3-1), in FIG. 110 (Ab1), as in the example shown in FIG. 108, the second display device 208S is below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). Is arranged, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided in the second display device 208S, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. .. Further, in the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. In addition, the navigation character YM of Copanda is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (Ab1), a conversation notice is given by a notice of the character display of the grandfather character and the character display "Navi character changes", and the change notice display is performed by this conversation notice. It has been. That is, the change of the navigation character YM is foretold by an effect means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) different from the effect means (here, the second display device 208S) on which the navigation character YM is displayed. There is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 110 (Ab2), the navigation character YM is changed from a copanda to a bancho, which is a character that cannot be selected by the player.

Further, instead of FIG. 109 (a2), the speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 110 (ac1). Further, the volume level set by the player in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 75 (9) and the brightness (light amount) level set in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 75 (3) are set as "user set values". It is written on the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. In this example, both are 3 levels. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the volume and brightness set by the player are forcibly changed at the time of execution for the production and output from the speaker 120, or for the game board lamp 442 and / and the game underframe. Since an LED such as the lamp 452 may emit light, it is described as an "actual set value" at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. This also applies to the following examples. In FIG. 110 (ac2), the speaker 120, which is a production means different from the production means in which the “super heat” notice may be given, notifies that the “super heat” notice may be given. ing. The volume (actual set value) of the speaker 120 at this time matches the user set value. After that, in FIG. 110 (ac3), the "extreme heat" notice is executed, the word "extreme heat" is displayed in large size on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sound is output from the speaker 120, and the sound is output from the speaker 120. The lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are emitting light. The volume (actual set value) at the time of executing the "super heat" notice exceeds the user set value and is level 5, and the brightness (actual set value) also exceeds the user set value and is level 5. That is, it is output at a volume higher than the volume level set by the player, and emits light at a brightness higher than the brightness level set by the player. In addition, when the effect is executed, the volume and brightness may exceed the user-set value or forcibly fall below the user-set value (hereinafter, the same applies). Further, the timing at which the volume and brightness are forcibly changed is not limited to this example, and for example, the brightness may be changed at the timing when the sound during intense heat approaching is output, or the sound during intense heat approaching. The volume and brightness may change while is output. Further, at the time of executing a specific effect, only the volume of the volume and the brightness may be output exceeding the user set value, or only the brightness may exceed the user set value and emit light. In some cases, both exceed.

Note that the volume and brightness user settings may be possible even on a game console that does not have a convenient volume adjustment window VW or brightness adjustment window BW as described with reference to FIG. 75, and the player can set the volume and brightness. Any game console that can set the volume and brightness will do. Further, the technical idea here can be applied even when the player can set (adjust) the resolution of the image, the color tone of the image, and the like referred to here (hereinafter, the same applies).

As described above, the various technical ideas described with reference to FIG. 110 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

FIG. 111 is a table summarizing the music that can be output from the speaker 120.

In the game console in the example here, the user may be able to select the music output from the speaker 120. The serial numbers 1 to 11 in the table of FIG. 111 are songs that can be selected by the user according to the number of consecutive villas in the jackpot. For example, if you don't hit the jackpot 15 times in a row, you can't select the song "Large board behavior". In addition, a plurality of songs may be selectable. For example, if the jackpot is 15 consecutive villas, all the songs with serial numbers 1 to 11 can be selected.

In addition, the 12 songs with serial numbers are songs that can be selected by operating the chance button 136 five times during the big hit start interval (during the big hit start production), and when the back button navigation mode is set, the big hit The guidance for operating the chance button 136 is notified during the start interval, but is not notified when the back button navigation mode is not set. The guidance may not be notified even when the back button navigation mode is set, and conversely, the guidance may be notified even when the back button navigation mode is not set.

In addition, the songs with serial numbers 13 and 14 are songs that can be selected on condition that a big hit is made with a specific reach. The "collaboration SP" here is a super reach production in which multiple characters co-star (for example, a super reach production in which Yoshimune and Panda co-star in the swordsman reach), and "Kaede appears during SP reach. "Big hit" means that the premier character "Kaede" appeared in the cut-in image during Super Reach and made a big hit.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example in which the music selection described with reference to FIG. 111 is performed.

In FIG. 112 (a 1), it is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), and the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. The second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (a 1), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is also. It is 3. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, and in FIG. 112, only the hold icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are shown. All of these three hold icons h21 to h23 are the default display modes. In addition, it is the third big hit. Further, the song title display unit MN on the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (a1) shows the song title of the currently output song (here, the default “may be there”). Is displayed, and the music of the song title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music output here is the music output in the probabilistic state. Further, the icons of the up and down keys 137u and d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the music name display unit MN, and it is notified that the music can be selected by operating the up and down keys 137u and d. Further, the background screen of the universe is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the background screen of the universe is a background screen for a probabilistic state.

In FIG. 112 (a 2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in FIG. 112 (a 3), the song name of the song name display unit MN is changed to “mega giga summer”. Since the music is output from the speaker 120 with a slight delay from the music selection operation (for example, 500 msec), there is a period in which the music name of the music name display unit MN and the music actually output from the speaker 120 are different. It should be noted that the music title of the music title display unit MN may be configured to match the music actually output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 112 (a4), the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is also output from the speaker 120. When the music is changed, the music is output from the beginning. For example, when the timing and time of the music is determined by turning on the power or producing the RTC (Real Time Clock), or when the music is output from the continuation of the previous output. If so, it may be output from the middle.

In FIG. 112 (a 5), the number of holdings of special drawing 2 increases, and special drawing 2 becomes full (the number of holdings displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol event device 208 is updated to 4). , The display start of the 4th hold icon is slightly delayed from the update of the hold number display to 4, and in the figure (a 6), the 4th hold icon 24 of the look-ahead notice display mode (blinking white) is displayed. Has been done. After that, three reservations of the special figure 2 are exhausted, in FIG. 112 (a 8), the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. There is. The number of remaining holds in FIG. 2 is 1, and the first hold icon h21 has changed to a red display mode.

In FIG. 112 (a 9), the last hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of the decorative symbol. Even in the state of FIG. 112 (a 10), the selected music is still "mega giga summer", and in the same figure (a 11), the chief character C11 appears and the music change notice is given. The music change notice is a big hit notice including an effect of forcibly changing the song selected by the player to another song, and may be a normal notice or a pre-reading notice. .. In this example, since the music change notice is displayed, the big hit confirmation (or big hit rich) is announced for the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed, but the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed is missed. May be the case. For example, if "Todoroki DREAM", which is the theme song of the character's chief who appeared, is output, it is successful (high expectation of big hit or big hit confirmed (may be big hit rich)), but "Todoroki DREAM" If "" is not output, it may be a failure, and the symbol variation in which the music change notice is displayed may be missed. Even if "Todoroki DREAM" is not output and the music change notice fails, it may be notified that the big hit has been confirmed by another effect (for example, a resurrection effect). In addition, by displaying the music change notice, the jackpot is confirmed (or the jackpot is rich) after the next change of the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed, or the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a notice other than the music change notice is given. A look-ahead notice may be given to announce that the degree is high. Further, even if the music change notice fails, it may be configured so that another effect (for example, a resurrection effect) always notifies that the jackpot is confirmed. However, the music change notice may be annoying to the player in some cases that the music selected by the player is forcibly replaced. Therefore, as a compensation, if the music change notice is started, it will be a big hit. It may be confirmed.

The music change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 112 (a 12). Further, although the music of "Mega Giga Summer" output by the speaker 120 is not output, the music of "Mega Giga Summer" may be output. The Bancho character C11, which appeared in the music change notice, raised one hand, and that hand overlapped with a part of the music title display unit MN.

In FIG. 112 (a 13), the song name of the song name display unit MN is changed to “Disstance”, but no music is output from the speaker 120. Even if the output of the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is continuously output as it is in FIG. 112 (a 12) to the figure (a 15-1) during all or a part of the period. Alternatively, the output of the "Disstance" changed by the music change notice may be started from the speaker 120. Here, as shown in FIG. 111, "Disstance" is not a song released after "Mega Giga Summer", but a song different from "Todoroki DREAM". However, "Disstance" is the song immediately before "Todoroki DREAM" in the order of opening. In the music change notice here, the music of "Distance" is sandwiched between them, and finally "Todoroki DREAM" is output. At the stage of FIG. 112 (a 13), "Todoroki DREAM" may be displayed on the song title display unit MN.

In FIG. 112 (a 14), the song change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 again, and the character C11 of the bancho raises one hand. Although the music of "Distance" is not output from the speaker 120 even after a certain period of time has passed since the music name of the music name display unit MN was changed to "Distance", the music of "Distance" may be output.

In FIG. 112 (a 15), the song name of the song name display unit MN is changed to "Todoroki DREAM", and the song change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 again. At the stage when "Todoroki DREAM" is displayed on the song name display unit MN, the music change notice may be successful, and in FIG. 112 (a 16), the music of "Todoroki DREAM" is output from the speaker 120. That is, when "Todoroki DREAM" is displayed on the song title display unit MN, the song "Todoroki DREAM" is always output from the speaker 120. Even if "Todoroki DREAM" is displayed, there may be a case where the music of "Todoroki DREAM" is not output from the speaker 120 and fails.

Further, in this example, when the music change notice is displayed, "Todoroki DREAM" is always output, but in FIG. 112 (a15), the original "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed on the music title display unit MN. If this is the case, it is a failure (missing), and then the speaker 120 may also output "mega giga summer". Alternatively, if "Distance" is still displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing of FIG. 112 (a 15), it is also a failure (missing), and then the speaker 120 may also output "Distance". , The original "Mega Giga Summer" may be displayed on the song title display unit MN selected by the player, and the output of the "Mega Giga Summer" song may be started.

Depending on whether "Disstance" is displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing of FIG. 112 (a 13) or "Kimi no Kakera" to be released next to "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed. It may represent the expectation of a jackpot for fluctuations and / or symbol fluctuations in hold. That is, the expectation of a big hit may be higher when "Disstance" is displayed than when "Kimi no Kakera" is displayed.

In addition, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be expressed for the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation in the hold depending on the number of times the music is changed due to the music change notice. For example, it may be configured so that it is easier to make a big hit about the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation in the hold when the music is changed twice than when the music is changed once due to the music change notice. .. Further, when the music is changed a specific number of times (for example, 7 times) due to the music change notice, the change and / or the symbol change in the hold may be a big hit confirmed (or a big hit rich). On the contrary, when the music is changed a specific number of times (for example, once) due to the music change notice, the loss may be confirmed.

Further, the animation of "Todoroki DREAM" is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (a 16). Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (a 19), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of jackpots with probability variation, is swayed and displayed. In 20), the combination is confirmed and displayed. In this example, when the music change notice is displayed, the music is always changed to "Roaring DREAM", and then the music of "Roaring DREAM" is output from the speaker 120, and the "Roaring DREAM" music is output to the decorative symbol display device 208. An animation (including lyrics display) is displayed and it becomes a big hit. Even if the music change notice is displayed and the music becomes "Roaring DREAM", the music of "Roaring DREAM" is output from the speaker 120 and / or the decorative symbol display device 208 of "Roaring DREAM". It may be configured so that the animation may not be displayed. That is, even if the music change notice is displayed and the music is changed to a specific music, it may be lost if the production display corresponding to the music is not performed next.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 112.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (a 21) displays the start screen of the jackpot game, and the jackpot start BGM is output from the speaker 120 during the jackpot start interval (during the jackpot start effect). Is.

The timing in FIG. 113 (a 22) is the timing immediately after the start of the first round. In the jackpot game production in this example, the first round and the second round are the music selection periods. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 automatically displays the music selection screen. The music selection may be started at the player's will, and in this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. Even during the music selection period, when the music selection is completed, the music selection screen disappears and the round production is started. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed (“1R”) indicating that it is the first round and the number of balls (number of prize balls) displayed (0 pt).

The music release list GR is displayed on the music select screen. Since we achieved 4 consecutive villas in this big hit, "Kiseki no Uchu" has been newly added to the music release list GR and can be selected. The "Kiseki no Universe" display is marked with "New". In this example, since the newly added music is configured to be displayed in the second stage of the music release list GR, it is already released "may be there" and "mega giga summer". "Is hidden. Here, the newly opened "Kiseki universe" is selected, and the rust portion of the "Kiseki universe" is output from the speaker 120. The previous "Todoroki DREAM" is not displayed in this music release list GR, and "Todoroki DREAM" cannot be selected. However, when the production of "Todoroki DREAM" is executed, "Todoroki DREAM" may be released. In this case, the display position of "Todoroki DREAM" in the song release list GR may be the position directly under the song ("Kimi no Kakera") released up to the previous time, or the position of "Kiseki no" released this time. It may be located directly below the "universe". Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 113, since the opening order is the sixth song, it may be the position of the sixth song counting from the first song, but in this case, three question marks are displayed side by side. You will be caught. In addition, when the production of "Todoroki DREAM" is executed, the music released according to the number of consecutive villas this time ("Kiseki no Uchu") and the music of "Todoroki DREAM", "Todoroki DREAM" Only may be released, or both songs may be released.

In FIG. 113 (a24), the down key 137d is operated to move the cursor csd to the display in which three question marks under the display of "Kiseki no Uchu" are arranged in the music release list GR. The display with three question marks lined up is an unreleased display, and the song title is unknown. That is, it is unclear what songs are scheduled to be released in the music release list GR in the future. At the timing of FIG. 113 (a 24), the game ball has begun to win the attacker.

When the cursor csd is placed on the display in which three question marks are lined up, scrolling downward is automatically started (Fig. 113 (a25)), and the cursor csd goes to the end and is "there" at the beginning. Maybe "return to. In addition, instead of automatically scrolling downward, the player may operate the scroll by himself / herself. In addition, instead of displaying three question marks side by side, the title of a song scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed lightly. Or conversely, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that is not open. That is, the music release list GR may not display the display itself in which three question marks are lined up, but may display only the released music title.

Even in FIG. 113 (a-27), the automatic scrolling is not completed, and the rust portion of the “Kiseki universe” is repeatedly output from the speaker 120. During song selection, a part of each song (the chorus part in this example) is output so as to loop, but it is not necessary to loop. For example, when the output for a certain period is completed, the next song It may be automatically moved to, or the music may not be output until the next is selected. In addition, all of the music may be output from the beginning, or the entire music may be output from the middle of the music (for example, the chorus part).

Also in FIG. 113 (a 28), the automatic scrolling has not ended, and the cursor csd has not returned to the head "may be there", but from the speaker 120, instead of "the universe of miracle", " The output of the chorus part of "May be there" has started. It should be noted that the music of "may be there" may not be output until the cursor csd is moved to "may be there". FIG. 113 (a 30) shows how the cursor csd has reached the end of the music release list GR by automatic scrolling, and in FIG. 113 (a 31), the cursor csd may be at the beginning “may be there”. It has returned to "I don't know" and the automatic scrolling has ended. It corresponds to the display of the music from the speaker 120 after the cursor is set to the display of the music to which the cursor csd is originally targeted (it may be at the same time as the setting or before the setting). The output of the music is started, but since "may be there" is output in the middle of automatic scrolling, the music that was output at the time of FIG. 113 (a 31) in FIG. 113 (a 31). The continuation of is output as it is. After the cursor csd is set to "may be there" (it may be at the same time as it is set or before it is set), a new "may be there" is added. The song may be newly started from the beginning of the chorus part of "may be there" (that is, the beginning of the song output by the song select).

After that, the down key 137d is operated once, and the cursor csd is set to the display of "mega giga summer" as shown in FIG. 113 (a 33). In this state, as shown in FIG. 113 (a 34), the chance button 136 is operated to determine "mega giga summer". In the music release list GR shown in FIG. 113 (a 35), the determined "mega giga summer" display is displayed in red, and the music determination sound is output from the speaker 120.

When the music is decided in this way, the music selection screen is switched to the round production screen. The second round effect screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (a 36), and the title of the selected song “Mega Giga Summer” is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been done. Further, the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is output from the speaker 120. The selected music is output from the beginning at the start of the round production. When selecting a song, if not only the chorus part but all the songs are output from the beginning of the song, it may be output from the continuation at the start of the round production.

Further, instead of FIG. 112 (a 15-1), in FIG. 113 (a 15-2-1), the song title of "CREA" is displayed on the song title display unit MN of the decorative symbol display device 208. The music with this song title is a music not included in the table shown in FIG. 111. That is, it is a song that the player cannot select. The music of "CREA" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 112 (a 15-2-2), and the animation of the character of "CREA" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "CREA" is displayed. The lyrics of the song "CREA" are also displayed. In this way, when a music that cannot be selected by the player is output, the expectation of a big hit may be high, or the big hit may be confirmed. However, it may include a case of loss. Further, in the subsequent music selection by the player, since the music of "CREA" has been output once, it may be added as one of the music that can be selected in the music release list GR, or vice versa. , Addition may be prohibited. In addition, it may be possible to select a song during a jackpot game and not select it when selecting a song during a symbol change, or conversely, it may not be selectable when selecting a song during a jackpot game and select it when selecting a song during a symbol change. It may be possible.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of the effect produced by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (wa1), the first decorative symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is stored, and the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

Further, in FIG. 114, similarly to FIG. 110 (ac1), the “user setting value” of “volume” and “luminance” is written in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 of each figure, and “volume” is shown in the lower right. And the "actual setting value" of "brightness" is described. In addition, the types of "BGM", "SE (sound effect)", and "light emission" among the actually executed effects are also described.

In FIG. 114 (wa1), the symbol variation BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are output according to the symbol variation lamp pattern. It emits light with the same 3 levels of brightness as the user set value.

In order to forcibly set the volume and brightness to the actual set values, the effect control data itself may be instructed to ignore the user set values and execute at the values specified in the effect data, or the user settings may be performed. The sub-control units 400 and 500 may be self-managed by a table in which the effects of ignoring the values are summarized, or may be managed based on a command from the main control unit 300.

In FIG. 114 (wa3), it has evolved into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and the left symbol temporarily stopped by the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is also temporarily stopped. The right symbol moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 114 (wa3), the super reach development BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 follow the super reach development lamp pattern. However, it emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value.

In FIG. 114 (wa4), the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate, and each advances from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to reach the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps from the front side. In this state, the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In FIG. 114 (wa4), the BGM disappears, and the sound effect during the movement of the accessory during super reach development is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp during movement of the accessory during super reach development. According to the pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value. As described above, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light guide plate IL perform the directing operation, but the volume and the brightness remain the user-set values.

The 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd temporarily return to the initial positions at appropriate timings.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (wa6), a scene is displayed on the background screen of the wilderness after the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy battle, and the lord and the swordsman slash each other. In FIG. 114 (wa6), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are output according to the super reach lamp pattern. It emits light with the same 3 levels of brightness as the user set value.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (wa7-1), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 114 (wa8), the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is started, in FIG. 114 (wa9), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and then as shown in FIG. 114 (wa10). , The chance button 136 is operated at the timing within the operation valid period. During this period (FIGS. 114 (wa7-1) to 114 (wa11-1)), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the super reach result fanning sound effect is output. Is also output from the speaker 120 at the same 3 levels as the user-set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light at the same 3 levels of brightness as the user-set value according to the symbol variation lamp pattern. It should be noted that the button effect may correspond to a suggestion that an effect in which the volume and brightness settings are changed may start.

In response to the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 114 (wa10), the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (wa11-1) displays an effect image from the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slash each other. The display is switched to Ed2. In FIG. 114 (wa11-1) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136, the BGM disappears, and the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at 5 levels exceeding the user set value, and is for jackpot confirmation. According to the lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 also emit light with five levels of brightness exceeding the user-set value. That is, both the volume and the brightness are forcibly increased.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the effect described in FIG. 114 (wa11-1) is executed. However, if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped to perform the revival effect.

In FIG. 114 (wa12), the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate again, and each advances from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device. It overlaps with 208 from the front side. Then, in FIG. 114 (wa13), the Senryo box accessory 224H operates and moves downward from the initial position, and the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In the figure (a14), the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is performed again, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is shown on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. During this period (FIGS. 114 (wa12) to 114 (wa14)), as in FIG. 114 (a11-1), the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at 5 levels exceeding the user set value. Then, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 also emit light with a brightness of 5 levels exceeding the user set value according to the jackpot confirmation lamp pattern.

In addition, even when the accessory does not perform the effect operation due to a failure or the like, the volume / brightness may be changed from the user-set value, or in this case, the user-set value may be left unchanged.

Further, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the button image 136 as shown in FIG. 114 (wa7-1) is displayed. That is, the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed before the effect of operating the accessory is performed. The change here becomes a notice of the result of the button effect (by extension, a notice of the big hit), and such a previous change may be treated as one of the big hit confirmed effects.

Further, here, although the volume and brightness are forcibly changed according to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button production, the operation of the accessory such as the Senryo box accessory 224H is started and the movement to the effect position of the accessory is completed. The volume and brightness may be forcibly changed according to the above, and the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed at a timing other than the operation timing of the accessory. Further, the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed a plurality of times with one symbol change, or the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed only once with one symbol change. Further, here, the volume and the brightness are changed in the same manner, but only the volume may be changed, or only the brightness may be changed (the same applies thereafter).

Eventually, in FIG. 114 (wa15), the light emitting of the light guide plate IL ends, and the sub-control unit 400,500 receives a command to return the Senryo box accessory 224H to the initial position, and the Senryo box accessory 224H moves upward. It starts moving toward and returns to the initial position. Here, the jackpot confirmation sound effect from the speaker 120 is reduced to the user-set value, and the brightness of the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 that emit light according to the jackpot confirmation lamp pattern also reaches the user-set value. It has been lowered. This is returned to the user-set value when the sub-control unit 400,500 side receives a command to return the Senryo box accessory 224H to the initial position.

Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (wa16), the effect image Ed2 fades out, becomes thinner, and gradually disappears, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (wa17), with the lord. The display of the scene after the swordsmen slash each other fades in. Further, at this timing, the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd have begun to return to the initial positions. During this period (FIGS. 114 (wa16) to 114 (wa17)), as in FIG. 114 (wa15), the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at the volume set by the user, and the jackpot is output. The game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452, which emit light according to the confirmation lamp pattern, also emit light with the brightness set by the user.

Note that the volume and / or brightness changes from the user-set value during the period of the same sound data and / or light emission data as shown in FIGS. 114 (a11-1) to 114 (wa17), and different sound data. The volume and / or brightness may be configured to return to the user-set value when switching to and / or light emission data. On the contrary, the volume and / or the brightness may be changed from the user set value over a period in which the sound data and / or the light emission data is switched once or a plurality of times.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 114.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (wa18), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is completely restored. Further, at this timing, the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd are stopped at the initial positions. In FIG. 115 (wa18), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are output according to the super reach win use lamp pattern. However, it emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value. The timing at which the volume and brightness return to their original values is not limited to the timing shown in FIG. 114 (wa15) (the timing at which the accessory (Senryo box accessory 224H) starts returning from the production position to the initial position), and this timing (background). It may be the timing of switching the display), the timing of confirming the victory of the duel scene (the timing of FIG. 115 (wa19-1)), or the timing of stopping and displaying the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols. It may be.

In FIG. 115 (wa19-1), a scene in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role collapses and the main character, the lord, wins is displayed, and the lord's navigator character YM also poses for victory. In FIG. 115 (wa19-1), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same 3 levels as the user set value, and the voice of the main character "Yatte" is also the same as the user set value 3. The level is output from the speaker 120, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value according to the super reach win use lamp pattern.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is stopped and displayed, and the final display is performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 114 (wa11-1), in FIG. 115 (wa11-2), after the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 114 (wa10), the lord and the swordsman slash each other. The display of the scene is switched to a display in which a symbol (“decoration 6”) different from the left and right symbols (“decoration 7”) is greatly displayed (shaking display) as the middle symbol. This is a display suggesting a button effect failure. At this time, the super reach defeat BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same 3 levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 follows the super reach defeat lamp pattern. And the game table frame lamp 452 emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user-set value. In this way, when the production fails, or when the loss is rich or the loss is confirmed, the volume and / or the brightness does not have to be changed from the user set value, but the volume and / or the brightness is changed from the user set value. May be good.

Further, instead of FIG. 114 (wa11-1), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (wa11-2') is the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (wa11-2). This is the same as the display screen of, but in this example, the volume is at a level lower than the user-set value, and the brightness is also at a level lower than the user-set value. In this way, the volume and / or the brightness may be lowered when the production fails, or when the loss is rich or the loss is confirmed. Further, the volume and / or the brightness may be lowered when the production is successful, or when the big hit is rich or the big hit is confirmed.

Instead of FIG. 114 (wa7-1), in FIG. 115 (wa7-2-1), the button effect is not started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (wa7-2-2), the button effect is not started. The character of the main character, the lord, is displayed in an enlarged display to inform that he has won. In this way, even when the effect using the operating means such as the chance button 136 or the accessory (movable means) such as the Senryo box accessory 224H is not involved, when a specific effect display is displayed, the effect is displayed. Volume and / or brightness may be forcibly changed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (wa7-2-3), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is returned, and the volume and brightness are also returned to the same level as the user set values. ing.

It should be noted that the volume and / or the brightness may be forcibly changed according to the production by other production means, not limited to the accessory and the display. Examples of the other production means referred to here include a light guide plate IL, a versa writer (POV display), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps), a second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), and the like, and are specific. The volume or / and brightness may be forcibly changed according to the winning of a winning opening (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, an attacker) or the passage of a specific gate. Further, the volume and / or the brightness may be forcibly changed in the effect performed when the game ball enters the effect sensor.

Further, instead of FIG. 115 (wa19-1), in the example following the figure (wa19-2-1), it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the figure (wa19-2-1). The display of the scene where the main character's lord won is faded out as shown in the figure (wa19-2-3), and then the first decorative pattern is displayed as shown in the figure (wa19-2-4). The combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is displayed in a swinging manner. In this example, after forcibly changing the volume and brightness in FIG. 114 (wa11-1), the state is continued until FIG. 115 (wa19-2-3), and then the value is returned to the user set value. That is, the state in which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed is continued until the super reach effect is completed or until three of the same decorative symbols are lined up and the shaking display is started. Further, it may be continued until the shaking display is completed. Further, the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed until the final judge effect is completed.

Although the volume or / and the brightness are forcibly increased during the operation of the accessory, it may be decreased. Further, when the user set value is the maximum value or the minimum value, the volume and / and the brightness do not have to change. Alternatively, the player prepares a volume or brightness that cannot be set, and in this case, the value may be changed to a value larger than the maximum value set by the user or a value smaller than the minimum value set by the user. Good.

Further, the brightness may be high and the volume may be low, and conversely, the volume may be high and the brightness may be low. Further, the brightness may change and the volume may not change, and conversely, the volume may change and the brightness may not change. Further, when the volume or brightness adjustment (setting) screen is displayed when the volume or brightness changes, the value set by the player may remain as it is, or the value forcibly changed is displayed. You may. Further, the volume or brightness may be adjusted by the player when the volume or brightness changes, or may not be adjusted when the volume or brightness changes.

FIG. 114 (c) is an example in which the volume and / and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed. It may be when the display mode of the variable icon changes. In addition, there may be a change in the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon in which the volume and / and the brightness are not forcibly changed. For example, when the expectation of the jackpot changes to a display mode that is not so high, the volume and / and the brightness need not be forcibly changed. For example, if the expectation of a big hit goes up in the order of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow color, the volume or / and brightness must be forcibly changed unless the change is more than red. May be good. Alternatively, conversely, when the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes, the volume and / and the brightness may be forcibly changed.

FIG. 114 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed when an effect (hot effect) with a high expectation of a big hit appears. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (c), a conversation notice surrounded by a red frame appears. As the hot effect, red, gold, and rainbow colors are used, and in this case, the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed. Further, the amount of change may be different depending on whether it is red (for example, 1 level up), gold (for example, 2 levels up), or rainbow color (for example, up to the maximum level), and is the same. There may be.

FIG. 114 (ud) is an example in which the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the revival effect is started after the lost decorative symbol is temporarily stopped once. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (Ud-2), a revival effect accompanied by a wipe effect is subsequently executed. In this case, the volume and / and the brightness may be changed before the result display. That is, the volume or / and the brightness may be forcibly changed at the same time as the start of the revival effect.

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example in which the holding frame selected by the player is changed.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, the above-mentioned customization settings are performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 73 (b), the "copanda" of 07 is set, and in the "hold frame selection", the "hold frame D" of 04 to which the fusuma image for the wipe effect is added is set. It is set, and 03 "icon C" is set in "hold display selection", and 05 "background E" is set in background display selection.

In the explanation here, the colors used in the production represent the high degree of expectation of the big hit, and the degree of expectation of the big hit increases in the order of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow color. For example, a color or the like as a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon can be mentioned. Hereinafter, the change in color in the direction of increasing the expectation of a big hit may be referred to as promotion. This also applies to the following description. This also applies to the above description.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (d1) displays the hold frame UI of the hold frame D, and the copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, one hold of the special figure 1 is stored, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (d1), the background (empty background) of the background E is displayed.

After that, the number of hold icons in Special Figure 1 is increased by two, and three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during stop display shown in FIG. 116 (d3). Here, the hold of the look-ahead notice target is the hold of the second hold icon h12.

In FIG. 116 (d4), one hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (d4), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, but the second decorative symbol has started to change. Further, the movement of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement of the hold icons h12 and h13 have not yet started.

In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 116 (d5), the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 are started, but the sliding door for the wipe effect is started. Images appear from the left and right. During the appearance of the fusuma image for the wipe effect, the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 may not be performed. In FIG. 116 (d6), the sliding door image is in a fully closed state (wipe-in state), and the holding frame UI is not visible. In FIG. 116 (d7), the first decorative symbol also starts to fluctuate, and in FIG. 116 (d8), the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed. Also in FIG. 116 (d8), the holding frame UI is in the wipe-in state).

In FIG. 116 (d9-1), the wipeout is started and the fusuma image for the wipe effect is starting to open, and in the figure (d10), the fusuma image is fully opened (wipeout state). In the wipe effect here, the hold frame has changed. That is, the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 116 (d10) is a "hold frame R" different from the "hold frame D" selected by the player in the customization setting, and is a hold surrounded by a red frame. It becomes a frame. The "holding frame R" is a holding frame that cannot be selected in the customized settings, but it may be made selectable. The legs of the navigation character YM are not visible due to this red frame. The "hold frame R" is a hold frame having a function of notifying that the display mode of the hold icon is in a state where it is easy to change, and next to the copanda of the navigation character YM, "hold change !? Time" is called. The character display is displayed. The hold for the look-ahead notice is the hold of the first hold icon h11 because one hold has been exhausted in FIG. 116 (d4). Here, the "pending change !? Time" corresponds to the above-mentioned "high probability state of production".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (d12), the bomber icon I3 appears from the right end and passes over the hold frame UI. The bomber icon I3 launches a missile at the hold icon, which hits the hold first hold icon h11, which is subject to pre-reading notice. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 hit by the missile has changed, and the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 116 (d13) has changed to a blue display mode, and the promotion effect has been successful. In addition, even if the bomber icon I3 appears, the missile is not launched, the missile does not hit any hold icon or variable icon, or the display mode does not change even if the missile hits. There may be. All of these correspond to the failure of promotion production.

In FIG. 116 (D15), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 116 (D16), the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The hold change symbol has a red symbol and a blue symbol. When the red hold change symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the hold icon is promoted by two stages, and when the blue hold change symbol is temporarily stopped, the hold icon is displayed. The display mode is promoted by one level. In FIG. 116 (D16), the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 116 (D17), the pending change animation is started. That is, the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 116 (d17) is overlapped from the front side by the effect image Ed3, and in the figure (d18), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 is The display mode has changed to red. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (d19), the medium symbol, which has been a red pending change symbol, is changed to "decoration 2", and "decoration 1"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 1". The combination of is displayed in a variable manner (temporary stop). In FIG. 116 (d20), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed.

In FIG. 116 (d22), the red hold icon, which has been the first hold icon 11, has moved to the pedestal hs0 and is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. Even if the hold for the look-ahead notice is exhausted, the character display "Hold change !? Time" continues to be displayed on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 116 (D23), a golden light ray is emitted from the navigation character YM toward the variable icon h0, and in FIG. 116 (D24), the variable icon that was previously red is changed to gold.

In FIG. 116 (D26), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 116 (D28), the super reach effect is developed. In the super reach production, the background of the sky is switched to the background of the wilderness, and the duel scene is displayed. In the super reach state, the hold frame UI has disappeared except for the pedestal hs0, and the hold icon has also disappeared. However, the variable icon h0 has not disappeared, and the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0. The pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 116 (d28) is the pedestal of the “holding frame D” before it is changed by the wipe effect. That is, the original pedestal. However, it may be the pedestal of the "holding frame R" after the change due to the wipe effect. Further, the pedestal hs0 and the variable icon h0 may not be displayed during the super reach or from the normal reach state (FIG. 116 (d26)). In addition, the entire hold frame UI and the hold icon may not be displayed. Further, when the super reach effect is completed, hidden items such as the hold frame UI and the hold icon may be displayed, and after the super reach effect is completed, the hold frame R is displayed and the next symbol change. The holding frame D may be displayed from the start of the display.

In this example, the color of the frame of the hold frame UI remained red even in the reach state, but if the color of the frame of the hold frame UI also changes, the expectation of the jackpot will increase. May be good.

It should be noted that the hold frame not selected by the player (for example, "hold frame R") is more important than when the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in the hold frame selected by the player (for example, "hold frame D"). When the look-ahead hold icon is displayed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed more easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon, or the hold frame selected by the player. When the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in the hold frame (for example, "hold frame R") which is not selected by the player, than when the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in (for example, "hold frame D"). However, even if the display mode of the look-ahead hold icon is the same, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed in the final symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 116.

Instead of FIG. 116 (d 9-1), in FIG. 117 (d 9-2-1), both the hold icon and the variable icon are once changed to a special mode (character). In addition, the navigation character YM has also changed to a panda. In this example, after that, the display mode of each color changes to reflect the expectation of the jackpot. Here, the ease of changing to a color with a high expectation of a big hit is determined by the mode of the character once displayed.

In FIG. 117 (D-9-2-2), a mini game with the panda of the navigation character YM is played. The character who wins the mini-game changes to a color icon (hold icon or variable icon) with high expectation of a big hit. The grandfather character has a 50% chance of winning, the princess character has a 75% chance of winning, and the lord character has a 100% chance of winning. In addition to the character of the lord, a premier character may be provided. The premier character changes to an icon with a color that confirms the jackpot (here, rainbow color).

In FIG. 117 (D-9-2-3), a rock-paper-scissors game was played as a mini-game, and everyone played rock-paper-scissors all at once. As a result, both of the grandfather's characters lost, and the lord's character won. In addition, a plurality of characters may win.

In FIG. 117 (d-9-2-4), the wipe effect is started again, and the fusuma image in the figure (d9-2-5) is completely closed (wipe-in state) and then wiped out (the figure). (D 9-2-6)) In the hold frame UI shown in the figure (D 9-2-7), the second hold icon h12 is changed to a blue hold icon. The hold frame UI remains as "hold frame D".

FIGS. 117 (e1) to 117 (e12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display are displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (e1) displays the hold frame UI of the hold frame D, and the copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. In addition, two holds of special figure 1 are stored, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which are the default display modes of the icon C, are displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (e1), the background (sky background) of the background E is displayed.

In FIG. 117 (e2), the hold of special figure 1 is increased by one, and the third hold icon h13 is increased. Here, the hold of the look-ahead notice target is the hold of the third hold icon h13. In FIG. 117 (e3), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, in the same figure (e4), one hold is exhausted, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (e4). , The variable display of decorative patterns has started. In FIG. 117 (e5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS. In this example, the treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed on standby. After that, one hold is exhausted, and the hold subject to the look-ahead notice becomes the hold of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 117 (e7), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, and the treasure box icon I1 continues to be displayed while riding on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 117 (e9), the hold of the first hold icon h11, which is the hold for the look-ahead notice, is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (e9) starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. ing. In the effect icon display area DIS, the treasure box icon I1 is still displayed while riding on the carpet icon I2, and the treasure box icon I1 is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. In FIG. 117 (e10), the carpet icon I2 disappears, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 ends, and the change animation starts. That is, in FIG. 117 (e11), the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is wide, a smoke image appears from the inside, and the navigator character YM is covered with the smoke image from the front side. In FIG. 117 (E12), the smoke image disappears, and the Copanda navigation character YM selected by the player in the above-mentioned customization setting is changed to the Bancho navigation character YM. The Bancho navigator character YM is a character that cannot be selected in the customized settings, but it may be made selectable.

In this example, in addition to the navigation character YM, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is also displayed across the true symbol variation display such as the symbol variation display of the special figure, but it is a temporary stop in the pseudo continuous production. The navigation character YM and the change notice display may be displayed across the re-variation. For example, the change notice display (treasure box icon I1, carpet icon I2) is displayed due to the change, and the navigator character YM that is always displayed changes due to the change notice display at the third pseudo-ream, or before the change. The change notice display (treasure box icon I1, carpet icon I2) is displayed due to fluctuations, the change notice display continues to be displayed until the second pseudo-ream, and at the third pseudo-ream, the navigation character YM that is always displayed by the change notice display is displayed. It may change.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of production in a pachinko machine set to the auto button mode.

The pachinko machine 100 in this example is set to the auto button mode, and it is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 that the pachinko machine 100 is set to the auto button mode.

In FIG. 118 (A1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed on the background of the sea from the combination of lost decorative symbols. In addition, one hold of special figure 1 is stored, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode, is displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the hold frame UI. Further, a chance button 136 is shown at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button shown in FIG. 118 (A1) is normally lit in white. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is always lit even outside the valid period of the chance button operation, but the chance button lamp is always off outside the valid period of the chance button operation. It may be.

In FIG. 118 (A2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, the symbol variation display is started, and then the conversation notice is started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" displayed together with the character of the lord is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed, and is displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the character of the grandfather. At the same time, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the button effect image is displayed is displayed. The button effect image is an image that urges the chance button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period, and is formed by a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is configured. At the timing shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. In addition, the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1), at least a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more than the case where they are not overlapped. The display mode of the conversation image CI1 is difficult to see. In this example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord may not be reduced and displayed, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be deleted. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (larger or smaller) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. It may be different in size (larger or smaller) from the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (A6). By operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 118 (A6), the player may be able to see the effect corresponding to the operation. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 118 (A6) is white and starts blinking.

At the timing of FIG. 118 (A7), the hold of special figure 1 increases. However, the hold icon has not yet begun to appear at this time. In addition, the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced because the time has passed since the operation valid period was started. In FIG. 118 (A8-1), the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon shown in FIG. 118 (A8-1) is a button hold icon, and the red button image 136a is displayed on the white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 118 (A8-1) turns blue and starts vibrating in response to the appearance of the button hold icon.

In FIG. 118 (A10), a certain period of time elapses from the start of the operation valid period of the button effect in the conversation notice. Then, the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, and as shown in FIG. 118 (A11), the old man's conversation image CI2 is updated, and the response display for the auto button is "Summer vacation still?" The character display is displayed. As for the button hold icon, the auto button mode is not functioning, and the response display is not displayed unless the player actually operates the chance button 136. As shown in FIGS. 118 (A12) to 118 (A13), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being lit in blue as an operation promoting mode for the button hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (A15), the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 118 (A15) has finished vibrating and has returned from the blue lighting to the normal white lighting. More specifically, at a certain timing in FIG. 118 (A14), the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting. This is because the operation validity period of the button hold icon has expired. The operation validity period of the button hold icon may be terminated, for example, when a predetermined validity period has elapsed, may be terminated when the decorative symbol is first stopped, or the decorative symbol may be terminated. It may end when the confirmation display is performed. However, the first hold icon h11 is still a display mode of the button hold icon. Then, in FIG. 118 (A16), the hold of the first hold icon h11, which is the button hold icon, is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (A16), the second decorative symbol has started the variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started the variable display, and the button hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon h11 is still displayed.

In FIG. 118 (A17), the hold reduction animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the button hold icon starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and in FIG. 118 (A18). , The button hold icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0, and the change animation is started on the pedestal hs0 in the figure (A19). In the figure (A20), the change icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. It's changing.

FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 118.

After that, in FIG. 119 (A22), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 119 (A23), the first decorative symbol is performing high-speed fluctuation.

In this example, the auto button mode is set all the time, but the chance button 136 was not operated until the symbol change display changed to the button hold icon was confirmed regardless of whether the auto button mode was set or not. In that case, the display mode changes automatically after the hold reduction animation. That is, while the hold icon is in the display mode of the button hold icon, the hold icon changes to the blue display mode in response to the operation of the chance button 136, but when the hold reduction animation is started (variable icon h0). (When the variable icon h0 is displayed), the display mode does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

Further, the auto button mode may be terminated by operating the chance button 136 during the auto button mode. In that case, the auto button mode may not be terminated even if the chance button 136 is operated while the remaining period meter MT is being displayed, or the chance button may be configured even while the remaining period meter MT is being displayed. The auto button mode may be terminated by operating 136.

Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated, the variable icon h0 may be displayed in the same manner as the button hold icon, or the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode may not be changed, or the default. It may change to the variation icon h0 of the display mode of. Further, even if the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting, the operation valid period may not have ended. Further, the fact that the change icon h0 in the blue display mode does not change when the chance button 136 is not operated is the same regardless of whether it is in the auto button mode or the non-auto button mode. However, it may be changed, and further, it may change during the auto button mode but not during the non-auto button mode, or vice versa.

Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period in the state where the auto button mode is not set, as shown in FIG. 118 (A11), the characters "Summer vacation still?" Are displayed. The old man's conversation image CI2 is not updated. However, it may be updated.

Further, instead of FIG. 118 (A5-1), in FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-1), a button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-1), the meter display MW'is also displayed. The button display icon 136D is a notice that does not change unless the chance button 136 is operated, and may be a notice of the change. In FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-2), the button display icon 136D is displayed together with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the button effect image is displayed. As described above, since the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, the button display icon 136D shown in FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-2) overlaps with the notice that changes even if the button is not operated. There is.

Further, instead of FIG. 118 (A5-1), in FIG. 119 (Aa5-3), a plurality of button effect images (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In this case, it is necessary to operate the chance button 136 a plurality of times, and the auto button function does not have to work even when the chance button 136 needs to be operated a plurality of times. After the operation is performed a specific number of times (for example, once), the auto button function may be activated for the remaining button effect images.

Further, instead of FIG. 118 (A5-1), in FIG. 119 (Aa5-4), a button effect image (button) is displayed on the second display device 208S arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). Image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 119 (Aa5-4), one button effect image is displayed on the second display device 208S, but one or more button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S are auto. The button function may not work.

Further, instead of FIG. 118 (A5-1), in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-1), a notification for prompting the decorative symbol display device 208 to repeatedly press the chance button 136 is performed. In FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-2), the button continuous striking effect is started, and the button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) and the continuous striking meter RHM are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The auto button function does not work for the button repeated pressing effect, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-2) starts vibration and changes to blue lighting to prompt the operation. Eventually, in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-5), the continuous striking of the chance button 136 is started, the continuous striking meter RHM shown in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-6) is raised, and the response is displayed. The chance button 136 is repeatedly hit in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-5), and a response display such as an increase in the continuous hit meter RHM is also performed. However, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-6) is shown. The vibration continues and the blue lighting continues. In the examples so far, it was sufficient to operate the chance button 136 once, but in this example, since it is necessary to repeatedly hit the chance button 136, the vibration of the chance button 136 and the blue lighting are continued. In addition, even in the case of long pressing, the operation of the chance button 136 becomes long as in the case of repeated hits, so that the technical idea here can be applied. The timing of FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-7) is the moment when the operation valid period has elapsed and the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0. The vibration of the chance button 136 and the blue lighting continue until the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0. After this, the chance button 136 immediately stops vibrating and returns to white lighting. It should be noted that the auto button function may be configured to operate when the operation is performed once or more. Also, in this example, the auto button function does not work, but the long press auto continuous hit function is configured to work, and by performing the long press for a certain period of time, the same response display as when performing the continuous hit operation is displayed. However, if the auto button function does not work, the long press auto continuous hit function may not work either.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 118.

In the example following FIG. 120 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 118 (A8-1), after the operation valid period of the button hold icon has started, for the button effect in the conversation notice. This is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated once before the auto button function of is activated. In this case, both the response effect of the button hold icon and the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice are displayed. That is, the button hold icon is changed as the response effect of the button hold icon, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is updated as the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice. The change of the button hold icon corresponds to the look-ahead notice, and the update of the old man's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice also corresponds to the look-ahead notice. The conversation notice may be a normal notice. Further, the change of the button fluctuation icon in FIG. 118 (A20) corresponds to a normal notice.

It should be noted that only the response effect of the person whose auto button function does not work may be displayed. That is, only the change animation of the button hold icon may be displayed, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may not be updated. Alternatively, conversely, only the response effect of the person whose auto button function works may be displayed.

Further, one operation of the chance button 136 may display only the response effect of the person whose auto button function does not work, and the second operation may display the response effect of the person whose auto button function works. However, on the contrary, in the one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who works the auto button function is displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who does not work the auto button function is displayed. It may be.

Further, the above description using FIGS. 120 (A8-2-1) to (A8-2-4) was given while the auto button mode was set, but the auto button mode was not set. The same applies to.

Further, instead of FIG. 118 (A8-1), in FIG. 120 (Aa8-3), the chance button 136 vibrates and emits light in a special color (blue in this case) even when the auto button mode is not set. Is shown. Note that different notifications may be given when the auto button is not set and when the auto button is set.

Further, instead of FIG. 118 (A8-1), in FIG. 120 (Aa8-3'), when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and emits light in a normal color (blinking white here). An example is shown.

Further, as another example, in FIG. 120 (Ab1), a notification is given to prompt the decorative symbol display device 208 to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 during the big hit game. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (Ab2) displays a button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) together with the display of the third round, but the auto button function is displayed during the jackpot game. May not work, or conversely, the auto button function may work.

FIGS. 120 (Ba1-1) to 120 (Ba5) are diagrams showing an example of an effect relating to the back button. When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 120 (Ba1-1), the effect by the navigation character YM is started. However, the chance button 136 is normally lit in white, does not vibrate, and the back button is not notified. In FIG. 120 (Ba2), when the button hold icon (first hold icon h11) in which the auto button function does not work appears, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt the operation. In FIG. 120 (Ba3), the chance button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11, which is the button hold icon, is changed (see FIG. 120 (Ba1-5)).

FIG. 120 (Ba1-2) is the same state as shown in FIG. 120 (Ba1-1), but the only difference is that in FIG. 120 (Ba1-2), the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. It turns blue and is a point that notifies the back button.

The remaining period meter MT representing the remaining period of the operation valid period described so far will be described in more detail. The description here can be applied to any of the production examples in which the remaining period meter MT described above is displayed. The display mode of the remaining period meter MT changes according to the passage of time (in this example, a decrease display is performed), and the remaining time display area MT1 and the display mode located behind the remaining time display area according to the passage of time. It is composed of two elapsed time display areas MT2 in which is changed (in this example, an increase display is performed). Here, the display mode (for example, color, shape, etc.) of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 may be displayed in a special display mode different from the default display mode. For example, when the display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in red instead of the default color (blue in this example), or the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is red instead of the default color (white in this example). For example, when it is displayed in. When the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a special display mode and the remaining time display area MT1 is reduced and displayed with the passage of time, it is displayed in a special display mode with the passage of time. Since the area to be displayed is reduced, it may be possible to draw attention to the display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example). On the contrary, when the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in a special display mode and the display area of the elapsed time display area MT2 is increased with the passage of time, the time elapses. As the area displayed in the special display mode increases, the player who wants to see the special display mode by the elapsed time display area MT2 does not immediately operate the operation means (chance button 136, etc. in this example). It may be possible to increase the variation of how to enjoy and improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. The display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 is such that the remaining time meter is displayed first when the remaining time meter is first displayed (in the case of the remaining time display area MT1). In the case of the elapsed time display area MT2, it may be the time when the elapsed time display area MT2 becomes visible only after the remaining period display area MT1 decreases.) The display mode may be displayed, or may be configured to change from the default display mode to a special display mode when a certain period of time has elapsed after the operation valid period has elapsed.

In addition, the navigation character YM described so far will be further supplemented. The description here can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the navigation character YM described above is displayed. First, it may be configured so that various notices are not given by the navigation character. Further, while the navigation character (hereinafter, "navi character A") is being displayed, another navigation character (hereinafter, "navi character B") may be displayed. In that case, the navigation character B displayed later may be configured to overlap with the navigation character A displayed earlier, and conversely, the navigation character B displayed later may overlap first. It may overlap with the displayed navigation character A, or may be displayed at a position where the navigation character A and the navigation character B do not overlap each other. For example, there may be a case where the constantly displayed navigation character YM is overlapped by a navigation character that gives a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice during one or more fluctuations. Further, the change notice display may be performed by performing the effect display suggesting that the change notice display may be displayed by the navigation character.

FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating an overlap relationship between the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the dish full tank error and the other display of each of the brightness adjustment windows BW.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The symbol change display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, both the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display has not started since the final display of the stop symbol of the special symbol is performed, and the menu icon MI, so as to overlap the lower part of the first decorative symbol from the front side. The volume adjustment icon VI and the brightness adjustment icon BI are displayed. In addition, a ball removal notification such as "Please remove the ball" is displayed at the bottom of the first decorative pattern so as to overlap from the front side. The display of the ball removal notification is a little transparent, and when the display of the ball removal notification is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the display on the back side becomes a little visible. Hereinafter, the fact that they are displayed so as to overlap from the front side or that they are displayed on the front side layer may be simply expressed as "overlapping". The display of the ball removal notification may be such that the display on the rear side is completely invisible. Further, a voice such as "Please pull out the ball" is output from the speaker 120.

The display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the second decorative symbol on the upper left and the second hold number display on the upper right, and these displays do not overlap. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second decorative symbol and / and the second hold number display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is not overlapped with the frame RW at the upper right of the screen for notifying the current setting state, and does not overlap with this frame RW. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the frame RW, or may overlap. In addition, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the hold frame UI, and does not overlap with this hold UI. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the holding frame UI, or may overlap with each other.

In FIG. 121 (α2), the lower key of the operation key unit is operated and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed. The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed after the display of the ball removal notification, but the display of the ball removal notification has priority, and the brightness adjustment window BW is placed on the layer behind the display of the ball removal notification. It is displayed. That is, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the brightness adjustment window BW.

Eventually, the symbol variation display is started, the brightness adjustment window BW, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are hidden, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α3), the first 1 The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. However, the ball removal operation has not yet been performed, and the display of the ball removal notification is continued. The same applies to the case where the dish full tank error is once resolved by performing the ball removal operation, but the dish full tank error occurs again, and the display of the ball removal notification is newly displayed. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 121 (α3), the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated, and a bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed on the hold frame UI. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol, at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. In the following description, when the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed, it is assumed that the left and right keys are operated and displayed each time. In addition, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit, the bar display for brightness adjustment can be displayed, and this bar display for brightness adjustment is displayed at the same position as the bar display VB for volume adjustment. , The following description of the volume adjustment bar display VB can be applied to the brightness adjustment bar display. However, the bar display for brightness adjustment and the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed at the same time. Further, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume or the bar display for adjusting the brightness may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed only for a certain period of time. Further, it may be possible to display only while operating the left / right key or the up / down key.

Further, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume and the display of the ball removal notification are displayed at positions where they do not overlap. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the bar display VB for adjusting the volume, or may overlap.

Further, the display position of the ball removal notification is shifted between the hold icon and the variable icon, and does not overlap with these icons. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the hold icon and / and the variable icon, or may overlap. Further, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the navigation character YM, and does not overlap with the display of the navigation character YM. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the navigation character YM, or may overlap.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α4), a super reach effect is performed, and a duel scene in the background of the wilderness is displayed. Here, too, the display of the ball removal notification is displayed, and the left design of "Decoration 7" moved to the upper left, the right design of "Decoration 7" moved to the upper right, and the display of the ball removal notification overlap. ing. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness. The volume can be adjusted even during super reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α4) displays a bar display VB for volume adjustment. This volume adjustment bar display VB also overlaps with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α5) displays the start screen of the big hit game, but the display of the ball removal notification also overlaps with the big hit start effect display here. Further, the volume can be adjusted even during the big hit game, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α5) displays a bar display VB for adjusting the volume. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume also overlaps with the jackpot start effect display. On the other hand, the display of the ball removal notification is different from the right-handed suggestion display (display different from the right-handed warning. Corresponding to the mini right-handed display in FIG. 71 (52) described above) at the upper left of the screen. It does not overlap with the right-handed suggestion display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the right-handed suggestion display, or may overlap. The right-handed suggestion display may not be displayed on the start screen of the jackpot game.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α6) displays a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to right-handed. In this example, the right-handed instruction screen is the first big hit (normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) to the first big hit (first consecutive villa), but the latent probability change state. The first big hit (1st consecutive villa) from (special high accuracy Fuzu low accuracy) and the 1st (1st consecutive villa) big hit from sudden change state (special high accuracy Fuzu high accuracy) It may be included. Note that the latent probability change state and / or the sudden probability change state described above indicates only the state shifted from the normal state, and excludes the state that occurred in the probability change state and the time saving state). However, a right-handed instruction screen may be displayed for each jackpot. On the right-handed instruction screen here, the display of the ball removal notification is overlapped, while the right-handed suggestion display is not overlapped by the display of the ball removal notification. In this example, the right-handed warning display (corresponding to the right-handed notification in FIG. 70 (60) described above and the liquid crystal display when the right-handed warning in FIG. 126 is described later) is displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Although it is not performed, a right-handed warning display may be performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Further, the left-handed warning display (corresponding to the liquid crystal display at the time of left-handed hitting warning in FIG. 126, which will be described later) is not displayed during the display of the right-handed instruction screen, but it may be displayed. Further, although the right-handed suggestion display is performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed, the right-handed suggestion display may not be performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed.

In FIG. 121 (α7), the first round is started and the round effect is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of the round effect. The display position of the ball removal notification is different from the round number display on the upper right of the screen, and does not overlap with this round number display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the number of rounds display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is not overlapped with the ball ejection number display (0pt) at the lower right of the screen because the display position is deviated from the ball ejection number display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the number of balls released, or may overlap.

In FIG. 121 (α8) of the 4th round, a promotion effect is performed to suggest whether or not there will be a big chance that the 2nd variable winning opening will be open for a long time and it will be easy to pass through V in the 5th round. As a result, a success production indicating that the promotion production was successful is being executed. That is, it is notified that the game is a big hit game in which the probability variation transition condition is easily satisfied. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of this success effect. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α8), the display of the star “V chance GET” has also started to be displayed. The display of the ball removal notification is different from the display of "V chance GET" of this star mark, and does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the star "V chance GET", or may overlap.

In FIG. 121 (α9), the fifth round is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the fifth round of the jackpot game, and prompts the player to pass V in this round. The display "Aim for V" is displayed. As a result, it may be possible to ensure that the player passes through the V. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of "Aim for V".

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (α10), the game ball has passed (V-passed) to the probability variation operation region in the second variable winning opening, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the probability variation acquisition has been confirmed. The display of "V" is displayed in a large size. That is, the display of "V", which is a notification that the acquisition of the probability change has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that the V has passed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of "V". At the timing shown in FIG. 121 (α10), the display of the star “V chance GET” may be hidden.

When the fifth round is completed, the end effect of the big hit game is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 121 (α11). In the above-mentioned big hit game, since the probability change transition condition is satisfied by passing V in the fifth round, the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure) while the symbol variation display is performed a certain number of times after the end of the big hit game. High probability state). Therefore, in the end effect of the jackpot game, the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating the transition to the probabilistic state is performed (probability change effect). The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush". Even in the end effect of the big hit game, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, but it does not have to be displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α12) displays a prepaid card forget-to-remove warning display (corresponding to the above-mentioned warning display in FIG. 71 (57)). The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with this prepaid card forget-to-remove warning display. Even in the end effect of the prepaid card forgetting warning display, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, but it does not have to be displayed.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α13), a display (BONUS × 3) of the number of jackpot consecutive villas is displayed immediately below the right-handed suggestion notification on the upper left of the screen. In addition, the song title display unit MN is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and the icons of the up and down keys of the operation key unit are displayed on the left side. Further, the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

The display position of the ball removal notification is different from the display of the number of jackpot consecutive villas, and does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the number of jackpot consecutive villas, or may overlap. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the song title display unit MN, and does not overlap with the song title display unit MN. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed on the song title display unit MN so as not to overlap, or may overlap. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the up / down key icons, and does not overlap with the up / down key icons. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the icons of the up and down keys, or may overlap. In addition, the display position of the ball removal notification is different from that of the second hold number display at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap with the second hold number display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second hold number display, or may overlap.

Further, although the volume adjustment bar display VB shown in FIG. 121 (α13) overlaps a part of the hold icon, it may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap.

Further, in FIG. 121 (α14), the start screen of the big hit game is displayed, and the music selection screen shown in FIG. 113 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α15). The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the music release list GR.

Further, in FIG. 121 (α16), music selection is completed and round production is started. The title of the currently selected song is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α16). The display position of the ball removal notification is different from the song title display, and does not overlap with this song title display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the song title display, or may overlap.

Further, in FIG. 121 (α17) of the fourth round, the display “Aim for V at the next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and in FIG. 121 (α18) of the fifth round, “Aim for V at the next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen. The display "Aim for V" is displayed, and the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with these displays displayed on the right side of the screen. Here, FIG. 121 (α17) may correspond to the end of the remaining ball detection period of the main control unit 300 at the end of the four rounds. Further, FIG. 121 (α18) shows the start of 5 rounds, and may correspond to the time when the special electric service operating signal of the main control unit 300 changes from off to on. In this case, the period between FIGS. 121 (α17) and 121 (α18) corresponds to the period of the inter-round interval from the end of 4 rounds to the start of 5 rounds, and the special electric function operating signal of the main control unit 300 is output. It will be the period from on to off.

Further, in FIG. 121 (α19), a display of “V” based on the passage of V is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of “V”. ing. However, the bar display VB for volume adjustment does not overlap with this "V" display.

Note that FIG. 121 (α20) may be a state in which a certain period of time has elapsed since the passage of V during the execution of 5R, or at the end of 5 rounds (for example, the remaining ball detection period of the main control unit). It may be in the state of (the period corresponding to the end).

After that, the jackpot game progresses to the 15th round (FIGS. 121 (α21) to (23)), and in FIG. 121 (α24), the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush” is displayed (directed during probabilistic change) as in FIG. 121 (α11). ) Is displayed, and the display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap with the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush". In FIG. 121 (α24), the jackpot end display period is started and displayed after the end of the inter-round interval.

Since a command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 receives the command, and various controls are performed, there is a time lag between the timing of the main control unit 300 and the actual timing.

Further, in FIG. 121, the previous round display is displayed as it is during the inter-round interval. For example, "5R" is displayed during the inter-round interval between the 5th and 6th rounds, but all or part of the round display may be hidden during the inter-round interval. For example, only R may be displayed and the number portion may be hidden.

The same applies to the end of 15 rounds, and the rounds may be displayed or hidden during the inter-round interval period.

In this example, a right-handed warning display may be displayed during a big hit, but on the other hand, a left-handed warning display may not be displayed, but a left-handed warning display may be displayed. It may be configured so that the warning is not notified.

Although the display of the ball removal notification has been described above as an example, the description here is not limited to the display of the ball removal notification, and other errors (for example, various errors listed in the list of FIGS. 124 and 125). It can be applied to the display of notifications about.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a display example of the ball removal notification.

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (β) is such that the display behind the display of the ball removal notification is completely invisible.

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ1) overlaps with the volume adjustment icon VI in addition to the brightness adjustment window BW. That is, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ1) overlaps a part of the brightness adjustment window BW and a part of the volume adjustment icon VI. The display of the ball removal notification may overlap all of the brightness adjustment window BW, or may overlap all of the volume adjustment icon VI. Further, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ1) is a slightly transparent display similar to the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 121, and the display on the rear side is slightly visible. However, the display on the rear side may be completely invisible, as in the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (β).

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ2) overlaps with the volume adjustment bar display VB displayed during the symbol variation display. The display of the ball removal notification does not overlap with the navigation character YM, but the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps with the navigation character YM. Further, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ1) may be a display in which the display on the rear side is completely invisible, as in the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. ,the same.). Not limited to the volume adjustment bar, the functions that can be set by the player during the symbol change and the display related to the above-mentioned Daitomo, etc. (the effect customization screen shown in the above-mentioned FIGS. 75 (V) and (V'), etc., List of missions achieved by the player's operation regardless of the fluctuation status of the symbol while the song title display unit MN, the brightness adjustment bar, and the user mode (Daitomo) shown in FIG. 112 (a 1) and the like are being set. Display that displays the game history (number of rotations, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of big hits in this play, maximum number of consecutive villas in this play, etc.), characters and backgrounds set by the user, hold frame, hold display, etc. It can also be applied to displays that can be set and changed).

The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ3-1) overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM, respectively. Then, when the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated in the state shown in FIG. 122 (γ3-1), the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed. As shown in the figure (γ3-2), In the display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume, the display of the ball removal notification has priority and is displayed on the front side. In addition, the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed on the front side with priority. Further, in any case, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume also overlaps with the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM, respectively, and may also overlap with the hold icon h11.

In FIG. 122 (γ4), contrary to FIG. 122 (γ3-2), the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the bar display VB for adjusting the volume.

In FIG. 122 (δ3-1), the navigation character YM is displayed on the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. 122 (δ3-2), the navigation character YM jumps by animation to notify the ball removal. It overlaps with the display of. Here, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the navigation character YM, but the navigation character YM may overlap with a part of the display of the ball removal notification. Further, the navigation character YM may not perform an animation that overlaps all or part of the display of the ball removal notification. This technical idea can also be applied to other error indications described below.

In FIG. 122 (ε), the display of the ball removal notification is displayed only in characters without a frame display.

FIG. 122 (ζ1) shows an example in which the display of the ball removal notification is composed of a character display and a peripheral image display 132G around the ball discharge lever 132 (see FIG. 1). A part of each of the first decorative symbol, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is overlapped by the peripheral image display 132G.

In FIG. 122 (ζ 2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps with the same character display as the character display of “Aim for V” shown in FIG. 121 (α9) to hide the character display.

In FIG. 122 (ζ3), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the same display as the display of “Aim for V at the next R” on the right side shown in FIG. 121 (α17).

In FIG. 122 (η1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps over the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of the star mark “V chance GET”.

In FIG. 122 (η2), the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap with the display of “Aim for V at the next R” displayed on the right side.

In FIG. 122 (θ1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment and hides a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment. That is, in this example, only the entire gauge portion is hidden. However, the peripheral image display 132G may overlap with all of the bar display VB for volume adjustment. In this example, the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap with the character display of "Aim for V" and the display of the star "V chance GET".

In FIG. 122 (θ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the entire gauge portion of the bar display VB for volume adjustment and a part of “Aim for V at the next R” on the right side.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed.

An example of errors A to E shown in FIG. 123 will be described later. The ball removal notification may or may not be included in these errors A to E.

In FIG. 123 (ι1), the transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and the warning sound of the error A notification is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 123 (ι1'), the opaque display of the error A notification is displayed.

In FIG. 123 (ι2), the transparency display of the error A notification overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM, respectively, as in FIG. 122 (γ3-1). Is the same as the description in FIG. 122 (γ3-1).

In FIG. 123 (ι3-1), a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. That is, the newly generated error is displayed below, and in this example, the first error that occurs becomes error A. The latest error E warning sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that warning sounds may be output in the order in which all the displayed errors occur.

In FIG. 123 (ι3-2), since the error E is resolved, the transparency display of the error E notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error D is output from the speaker 120. That is, when the last error that occurred is cleared, the warning sound of the error that occurred before that is output.

In FIG. 123 (ι3-2'), the volume adjustment bar display VB overlaps a part of a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification). Here, the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps with the transparency display of the error E notification at the bottom, and the character display of the error E is hidden. It should be noted that a plurality of types of error displays may overlap with the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

In FIG. 123 (ι4-1), when an error occurs in the order of error ABCDE, the error with the highest priority to be notified is displayed at the top, and the warning sound of the error with the highest priority is output from the speaker 120. Will be done. The high-priority error is a high-priority error (for example, a serious error for a game store), and specifically, it may be in the order of the list shown in FIG. 124. In FIG. 123 (ι4-1), error B has the highest priority.

In FIG. 123 (ι4-2), since the error B is resolved, the transparency display of the error B notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error E, which has been the second so far, is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 123 (ι5-1), error A occurs, the transparency display of error A notification is displayed, and the warning sound of error A notification is output from the speaker 120. In this state, error Z occurs. Error Z is an error for stopping the game, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (ι5-2) has a blue screen, and all the displays are not displayed except for the display related to error Z. ing. The error of stopping the game referred to here is an error in which the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error). That is, it is an error that the main control unit 300 cannot perform various lottery, or even if it can be performed, it is not performed. An error displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 such as error Z is not limited to an error of stopping the game, but is, for example, an error of the effect movable means described later or an error of stopping the payout operation. May be good. Further, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 126, which will be described later, may be error Z, but conversely, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 126 may be errors. May not be displayed in the display mode of error Z. Further, when the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery, commands are not transmitted to the sub control units 400 and 500, and as a result, the sub control units 400 and 500 also do not perform various lottery.

In FIG. 123 (κ1), the position of the error display is changed. That is, a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification opaque display) are displayed in the order of error occurrence at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The error display in FIG. 123 (κ1) is such that the display behind the error display is completely invisible, but it is a little transparent so that the display of the ball removal notification overlaps from the front side. If it is displayed in, the display on the back side may be slightly visible.

In FIG. 123 (κ2), the display of the ball removal notification is added in the state shown in FIG. 123 (κ1). Here, the ball removal notification error (dish full tank error) is not included in the plurality of types of errors (error A to error E), but is included in the plurality of types of errors (error A to error E). May be good. In addition, instead of the error of the ball removal notification, an error having a high frequency of occurrence may be displayed separately from a plurality of types of errors (errors A to E).

Some of the ball removal notification errors shown in FIG. 123 (κ2) are overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end. It should be noted that all of the ball removal notification errors may be overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

On the other hand, the error of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 123 (κ2) overlaps with the plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

The error notification display related to the control of the sub control units 400 and 500 may be overlapped by the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300, or vice versa. For example, the hitting warning display may be overlapped by the ball pulling notification display, or conversely, the ball pulling warning display may be overlapped by the hitting warning display. Further, both error notification displays are displayed at positions where the error notification display related to the control on the sub control units 400 and 500 side and the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300 do not overlap each other. You may.

FIG. 123 (λ1-1) is in the process of displaying the symbol variation, and the simultaneous effect executed on the plurality of game consoles is started from the middle of the symbol variation display. FIG. 123 (λ1-2) shows an example of the display screen of the simultaneous effect in the normal state (no error occurs and before the first stop). As shown in FIG. 123 (λ1-2), in the normal state, the background display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is replaced with the background display of the simultaneous effect. The bar display VB for adjusting the volume may be displayed so as to overlap the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the opposite may be true. Further, regarding the error display, there is an example shown in FIG. 123 (λ2') described later, but the error display may be displayed so as to overlap with the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the opposite may be true.

FIG. 123 (λ2) shows an example when a simultaneous effect occurs during the super reach effect. During the super reach effect, the display of the simultaneous effect is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can enjoy the super reach effect and also see the simultaneous effect. be able to. If the game table is equipped with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the simultaneous effect display is displayed on the display devices 208S, 208M, 208N. You may.

FIG. 123 (λ2') shows an example when a simultaneous effect occurs during the error notification display. Here, the situation that the super reach effect is being produced also overlaps, but it may be the same even before the first stop of the decorative symbol or in the normal reach state. The display of the simultaneous effect is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD, and multiple types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the same manner as before the simultaneous effect occurred, and the separate frame display unit The display of the simultaneous effect in OFD overlaps with a plurality of types of error displays.

The bar display VB for adjusting the volume may overlap with the display of the simultaneous effect on the separate frame display unit OFD. Alternatively, conversely, the display of the simultaneous effect on the separate frame display unit OFD may overlap with the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

Further, in a game table provided with a second display device 208S, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, or a third decorative symbol display device 208N, those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N (hereinafter, referred to as "second display means"). When the decorative symbol display device 208 or the first decorative symbol display device 208L (hereinafter referred to as “first display means”) overlaps with each other, the first display is made according to the movement of the second display means. A part of the display in the means may be displayed in the second display means. In this case, the error display may be displayed on the second display means, or only the error display may not be displayed.

As described above, the words "error" and "warning" are used in the explanations using FIGS. 121 to 123, but it is not necessary to distinguish between the two, and it is a notification that an error has occurred. It may be a notification that there is an error or that the error has been instructed to be resolved. Moreover, what is described as an error may be set with a higher priority than what is described as a warning.

<Error notification / Error that can be detected by the main control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

The errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example include a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) unconnected error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, and a prize. Rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (electric chew), big winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, big winning opening excess discharge error, big winning opening winning excess error, impact abnormality error, solenoid abnormality error, etc. can be mentioned.

A magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and that state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), and the power is turned on again. This is an error that returns when A switch (sensor) disconnection error is when the power is turned on (PW_WATCH signal is on) and one of the special figure 1 and 2 start port, normal figure start port (gate), and attacker is not connected (harness is broken or connector is disconnected). This occurs when the above state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms), and the unconnected devices (special figure 1 and 2 start port, normal figure start port, attacker) are connected in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on). This is an error that returns when it is detected. The magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when the magnetic field (radio wave) is detected by the magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor.

A switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a big ball is suspected. Among the winning rate abnormal errors, the general winning opening error is an error that occurs when the number of winnings in the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226 shown in FIG. 3) is an abnormal value, and is an error of the starting opening 2. The error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected when the ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second special figure starting port 232 shown in FIG. 3) is not operating, and is an error of the big winning opening. Is an error that occurs when the number of winnings in the large winning opening (for example, the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 3) is an abnormal value.

The large winning opening excess discharge error occurs when the number of discharges> the number of balls entered during the probability variation area valid period and outside the probability variation area valid period, and the next main control unit timer in which the large winning slot discharge excess error occurs This error returns when interrupt processing occurs.

The large winning opening winning excess error occurs when the number of balls entered> the number of ejected balls after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special electric function operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls entered = the number of ejected balls. This is an error that returns when the power is turned on again. In the recovery process of the large winning opening winning excess error, the number of passes related to the probability variation area is set to 0.

An impact abnormality error is defined as a state in which the level of the impact sensor changes from OFF to ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (= power is ON) and during the valid period of the probability variation area (specific area). It is an error that occurs when the time (for example, 12 ms) continues, and returns when the level of the impact sensor changes from ON to OFF, or when it changes from the probabilistic region valid period to the outside of the probabilistic region valid period.

The solenoid abnormality error occurs when the photosensor does not perform the operation of changing from OFF to ON or the operation of changing from ON to OFF even once during the valid period of the probability variation region, and the following solenoid abnormality error occurs. This error returns when timer interrupt processing occurs.

In this example, the uppermost stage (magnetic (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 124 is the highest priority error because the operation of the main control unit 300 is prohibited (gaming is not possible), and thereafter, the error is prioritized toward the lowest stage. Although the degree is low, the other error may be the highest priority error, and the high priority does not have to be in the order of the list shown in FIG. 124. The details of the error occurrence condition, the return condition, the detection operation of the main control unit 300, and the return operation of the main control unit 300 are as shown in the figure. In addition, "when the end display period of the big hit or small hit ends" of the recovery condition of the winning rate abnormality error of the big prize opening (attacker) is when the end display period of the big hit or the small hit ends.

<Error notification / error that can be detected by the payout control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

The errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example include a lower tray full tank error (lower plate full tank error, plate full tank error), a payout number shortage error, a payout quantity switch error, an illegal payout error, and a payout excess. Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 cannot be received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example)), CR unit unconnected error, glass frame open error , Inner frame opening error, door opening error, magnetic abnormality error, external clock abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, switch level abnormality error, switch disconnection error, impact sensor error, etc., which are not shown.

Further, the conditions for generating each error, the return conditions, the payout operation in the payout device 152, and the launch operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 125 (a). In addition, "stop" described in the item "launch stop" shown in the figure is synonymous with turning off the launch permission signal.

FIG. 125 (b) is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which are conditions for generating a door opening error. The door open error is in the generated state when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error is in the generated state, and is in the released state when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error are in the released state. It is an error.

<Error notification / other examples>
The above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection error includes other errors (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch disconnection error (error related to connector disconnection or disconnection of the device controlled by the main control unit), impact abnormality error, etc. The error may have a higher priority than the payout control communication error, switch level error, winning rate error, door opening error, and upper plate full tank error), but the priorities may be the same.

Further, for example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and a low priority error occur at the same time and the magnetic field (radio) detection error satisfies the output condition first, the operation for the magnetic field (radio) detection error is performed. After that, the operation of the magnetic (magnet) detection error may be executed. In that case, all the devices (decorative symbol display device) in which the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 are notified from the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to the magnetic (magnet) detection error. 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, and speakers 120, etc.) may be configured to switch (overwrite data), with only one or more devices (eg, speaker 120) being overwritten and others. One or more devices may continue to notify for magnetic field (radio) detection errors.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode>
Next, a specific example of the notification mode of the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100.

The liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 126 indicates an error display by a display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example), and displays the character display described in "". Here, the error display by the display means is displayed until the error is cleared, and is hidden when the error is cleared. However, even after the error is cleared, it is displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). ) May be displayed, or may be hidden after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the error occurred even if the error was not cleared. The display by the display means is not limited to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be an error display by lighting a segment or various lamps, a light emission display by a light guide plate, or a display by a POV display.

The sound effect shown in FIG. 126 may be a notification by a sound output means (speaker 120 in this example), and the sound in "" is repeatedly output by voice. Here, the voice notification is configured to be repeatedly output until the error is cleared, but a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the error occurred even if the error was not cleared. Then, the sound may not be output, or the sound may be output for a certain period of time (for example, 15 seconds) after the error is cleared.

The error lighting LED shown in FIG. 126 is an LED provided on the front side (position visible to the player) of the front frame door 106, and is configured to light only when an error related to payout occurs. However, it may be configured to light up part or all of various errors related to power supply, main control, and sub-control (sub-control), or it may be configured not to light up partly or all. Good. Further, in the warning related to the sub control (in this example, the impact warning and the striking method warning), the error lighting LED is configured not to be turned on, but it may be turned on. The error lighting LED may be in a constantly lit state, or may be turned off when an error occurs to notify that an error has occurred. The payout lighting LED shown in FIG. 126 is an LED provided on the front side (position visible to the player) of the front frame door 106, and is lit during the payout period by the payout device 152. , The light is turned off during the period when the payout device 152 is not paying out. Further, the payout lighting LED is turned on even when a part of the payout error (in this example, the payout number insufficient error) occurs, but it may be turned on only during the payout period by the payout device 152. It may be configured to light up when an error related to payout occurs. The decorative LED shown in FIG. 126 is a game board 200 or a frame (in this example, the frame lamp 122 of the front frame door 106. The decorative LED is provided on the main body 104 (inner frame) and / or the outer frame 102. It may be a lamp provided in (may be configured so as not to be provided), and a light emitting effect is performed according to various effects. Further, the decorative LED shown in FIG. 126 may stop the light emitting effect and light up in a light emitting pattern for the error even if the light emitting effect is performed when an error occurs. (As an example at the time of recovery, the light emission effect may be advanced in another layer even during an error, and the light emission effect at the time of recovery from the error may be restored when the error is recovered. It may be configured not to perform the light emitting effect until the timing when it is easy to recover (for example, at the start of a new light emitting effect), or it may be configured to recover from the effect data at the time when the error occurs. (Good) Here, the error notification by turning on various LEDs is configured to light or blink until the error is cleared, and then turn off when the error is cleared, but even after the error is cleared. It may be configured to light or blink for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), or it may be configured to turn off after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the error occurred even if the error was not cleared. You may be.

The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 in this example are (1) an error related to payout (payout control unit 600), (2) an error related to the power supply (power supply control unit 660), and (3) main control (main control unit 300). It can be roughly divided into four types: an error related to the above, and (4) a warning related to the sub control (first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500). Each will be described below.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error related to payout>
First, the error related to the payout will be described. The "errors related to payout (payout control unit 600)" in this example include a lower tray full tank error (hereinafter, also referred to as a dish full tank error), a glass frame opening error, a payout number shortage error, a payout excess error, and an illegal payout error. The number of payouts switch error, main control communication error, CR unit non-connection error, CR unit communication error, door opening error can be mentioned. Here, the payout error display 7-segment LED is provided on the payout control board (payout board 170) and is visible (transparent or highly transparent) only when the main body 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102. (Visible via a payout substrate case 172 made of resin).

In this example, when a bottom pan full tank error occurs, the number "2" is added to the light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). By displaying the sound, the light emitting means is used for notification, and the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is used for notification (in this example, a character indicating that a lower tray full tank error has occurred) and a sound output means. (In this example, the speaker 120) notifies (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a lower saucer full tank error has occurred) is performed. In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128, when the lower plate 128 is full, a case where a lower plate full tank error occurs is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having only the upper plate 126 (one storage plate), this error (dish full tank error) may occur when the upper plate 126 is full. ..

When a glass frame opening error occurs, the number "1" is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed to notify the user by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp in this example)) (in this example, the decorative LED (decorative LED). Blinking of the frame lamp and board lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (in this example, a display indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example). Then, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the glass frame opening error has occurred) is performed.

When a door opening error occurs, the number "1" is added to the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). By displaying, notification is performed by the first light emitting means, and notification by the second light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example) (in this example, decorative LED (frame)). Blinking of lamps and panel lamps), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (in this example, a display indicating that a door opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example, display of a door opening error). Notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed.

Further, the notification of the door opening error may be the notification of the glass frame opening error, and the notification mode of a part of the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error (for example, notification by the display means) is different. , Other notifications may be the same, or all notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the payout of the game ball may be interrupted, and when the inner frame is opened, the payout of the game ball may be continued.

When an error of insufficient number of payouts occurs, the number "3" is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for displaying the payout error provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed to notify the user by the first light emitting means and the third light emitting means (in this example, the LED for payout lighting) (in this example, the LED for payout lighting). It should be noted that other error notification modes related to payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 126.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error related to power supply>
Next, an error related to the power supply will be described. Examples of the "error regarding the power supply (power supply control unit 660)" include a blown fuse 1, a blown fuse 2, and a blown fuse 3. In this example, when an error related to the power supply occurs, the error notification is not performed. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 126. Although the error related to the power supply is not notified in this example, it may be notified by a display means, a sound output means, or various LEDs. Further, the power supply board may be provided with a power supply status confirmation LED. Here, the power status confirmation LED is always lit from power-on and may be configured to be turned off when an error occurs, or conversely, when the power is turned off and an error occurs. It may be configured to be lit.

<Error notification / Specific example of notification mode / Error related to main control, etc.>
Next, errors related to main control and the like will be described. The "errors related to the main control (main control unit 300)" in this example include magnetic (magnet) detection error, external clock error, magnetic field (radio) detection error, switch level error, switch disconnection error, and impact error. Examples include an error, a winning rate abnormal error, a large winning opening winning excess error, a large winning opening excessive discharge error, and a solenoid abnormal error (large winning opening abnormal error).

In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs, it is notified by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (frame lamp in this example). Flashing of the panel lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (in this example). In this example, the speaker 120) notifies (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred) is performed.

In addition, when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, a notification is provided by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp in this example). Blinking of the lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio) detection error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (in this example). Then, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred) is performed. If the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically cleared after 30 seconds have passed.

In addition, when an impact abnormality error occurs, the light emitting means (in this example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) notifies (in this example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)). Blinking), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that an impact abnormality error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (speaker 120 in this example). Notify (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that an impact abnormality error has occurred) is performed. If the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically cleared after 30 seconds have passed.

In addition, when a large winning opening winning excess error occurs, a notification is provided by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example). (Lamp) blinking), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a large prize opening winning excess error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example). Then, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the sound effect indicating that the large winning opening winning excess error has occurred) is performed.

In addition, when a large winning opening excess discharge error occurs, the error notification is not performed. Note that the error notification (light emitting means (in this example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) is used for notification (in this example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp) blinks) and the display means ( In this example, the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of the character indicating that the large winning opening emission excess error has occurred) and the notification by the sound output means (speaker 120 in this example) (this example). Then, a sound effect to the effect that an excess emission error of the large winning opening has occurred)) may be performed.

In addition, when a solenoid abnormality error (large winning opening abnormality error) occurs, notification by light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (in this example) Blinking of the frame lamp and board lamp), notification by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (book). In the example, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the solenoid abnormality error has occurred) is performed. If the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically cleared after 30 seconds have passed.

In addition, the winning rate abnormal error includes a general winning opening (general winning opening 226 in this example), a starting opening 2 (in this example, the second special drawing starting opening 232), and a large winning opening (variable winning opening in this example). Although it is configured to perform the same error notification for 234), different error notification may be performed depending on the winning opening in which the error occurs. In addition, there is an abnormal winning error as another error corresponding to the winning rate error. An abnormal winning error is a target winning opening (for example, general winning opening 226, second special figure starting opening 232, variable winning opening 234, etc.) under certain specific conditions (for example, when N balls are launched, during a big hit). Other than this, it is an error that occurs when a specific number or more of prizes are detected in the electric support (other than during the high accuracy state of the normal figure). When an abnormal winning error occurs, the state, notification, and measures of the gaming machine may be the same as the winning rate abnormal error.

The error related to the main control or the like may include a door opening error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, a notification is provided by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp in this example)) (decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) in this example). (Blinking), notification by display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (indication that a door opening error has occurred in this example), and notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example). (In this example, a sound effect is output to the effect that a door opening error has occurred). In addition, the notification mode of other error notifications related to the main control and the like, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 126.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / Warning / error related to sub-control>
Next, warnings and errors related to sub-control will be described. Examples of the "warning / error related to the sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500)" include an impact warning, a striking method warning, and an effect movable means error. In this example, when an impact warning occurs, the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) notifies (in this example, a character indicating that an impact warning has occurred) is performed, but the light emitting means. Will not be notified by.

In addition, when a hitting warning occurs, a notification by a display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) (in this example, a character indicating that a hitting warning has occurred) and a sound output means (in this example) In this example, the notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound effect of the hitting warning has occurred) is performed, but the notification by the light emitting means is not performed.

The effect movable means error is various effect movable means (in this example, the effect movable body 224, the shielding means 246, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryo box. The effect movable means provided on the game board such as the accessory 224H (in this example, the front frame door 106. It may be provided on the main body 104 or the outer frame 102). The effect movable means is provided on the frame. If so, it is determined that there was an abnormality when the initial operation of the frame is included, but it is not necessary to include the effect movable means, and the frame may not be provided with the effect movable means). This is an error that occurs in some cases. The abnormality referred to here indicates a case where the initial operation is not performed normally. For example, the sensor at the initial position of each effect movable means (ON when it is at the initial position) is in the OFF state. It may indicate the case where it does not turn ON even if the retry operation is performed one or more times, or the case where it is determined that the sensor continues to be ON. Further, the initial operation may be composed of all or any one or two operations of the origin return operation, the sensor check operation, and the full stroke operation. Here, the origin return operation is an operation of confirming the state of the sensor at the initial position and returning only the effect movable means in which the sensor at the initial position is OFF (not at the initial position) to the initial position. Further, the sensor check operation is an operation for confirming a failure of the sensor, and is an operation for performing the minimum operation for switching the sensor from ON to OFF. Further, the full stroke operation is an operation of moving to the maximum position where the effect movable means can operate and returning to the initial position. The origin return operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. (For example, the effect movable means that is not at the origin position is returned to the initial position, and the full stroke operation is performed as it is.) Further, the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. Further, after the origin return operation is performed for all the effect movable means, the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation may be performed in a predetermined order. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C, and the effect movable body B is not in the initial position, the origin of the effect movable bodies A to C is After the return operation is performed (appearingly, the effect movable body B is operated), the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C. Further, it may be configured to perform the initial operation for the other effect movable means after the effect movable means not at the origin position is performed in the initial operation. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C, and the sensor at the initial position of the effect movable body B is OFF, the initial operation of the effect movable body B is started. The operation is performed, and then the initial operation of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body C is performed.) When it is determined that the plurality of effect movable means are not in the initial positions, the effect movable means having the highest priority is initially performed. It may be configured so that an operation (initial operation including origin return operation or origin return operation) is performed.

Further, the effect movable means error is caused by the case where the connector of the effect movable means is not connected correctly, the harness of the effect movable means is broken or the connector is damaged, and the effect movable means has various circuits (for example, the drive circuit of FIG. 45). This is an error that occurs even when the connector is not normally connected to (422, etc.). In addition, "error related to connection failure (wiring failure) of the effect movable means" and "error that occurs when it is determined that there is an abnormality when the initial operation of various effect movable means is performed when the power is turned on" are separate errors. It may be notified separately.

Further, the effect movable means error is an error that may be displayed during the display of the returning display, which will be described later, but may be configured so as not to be displayed during the display of the returning display.

Note that the error related to the sub control may be displayed in the same display mode (display area, font size, color, image shape, display position, etc.) as the error related to the main control or payout, and may be displayed in a different display mode. An error message may be displayed with. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the sub control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the main control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the payout control, but may be displayed in the same display mode.

Further, due to an error related to sub-control (in this example, an error of the effect movable means), in addition to the error display by the display means, even if the decorative LED provided on the frame or the game board 200 is configured to light or blink. Alternatively, the sound output means may be configured to notify the error, or both may be performed.

Further, the error notification regarding the sub liquid crystal may be configured so that a part or all of the error notification is terminated by the operation of the operating means (for example, the effect button 136 (chance button)) by the player. (When a part of the error notification ends, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the effect movable means error is occurring, the error display is displayed as it is, but the error notification by the sound output means ends, and the game The blinking display by the decorative LED on the board ends, a part of the decorative LED on the frame goes out, and the blinking by the other part continues as it is. By operating the operating means in this way, an error in the effect means A It is conceivable that the notification continues, the error notification of the effect means B ends, a part of the effect means C ends, and the other part continues as it is. The effect means A to C are sound output means, display means, and so on. Decorative LEDs, etc. are applicable.)
When the liquid crystal loading display is displayed when the power is turned on, the error display may not be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, or may be displayed. Here, the liquid crystal loading display is a display indicating a state in which the data stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is being read. When the reading of the data stored in the RON506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, the symbol stop display (symbol stop display displayed between the demo screen or the symbol fluctuation display) or the returning display (preparing display) is displayed. To. The returning display is a display displayed when the game control is restored during a symbol change or a big hit, and if the symbol is changing, until the symbol stops (until the special symbol display confirmation timer reaches 0). If it is a big hit, it is displayed until the big hit ends (until the hit end display timer becomes 0). In addition, it may be configured to return from the returning display to the symbol variation display at a specific timing during the symbol variation (for example, the start of the super reach effect or the temporary stop display of the three decorative symbols). In addition, various jackpot displays may be displayed from the returning display at a specific timing during the jackpot (for example, start or end of a specific round, start or end of the jackpot start effect, start or end of the jackpot end display). Here, during the display of the returning display, all or part of the above-mentioned error display may be displayed, but all or part of the other error display is not displayed. You may. Further, although all the above error displays are not displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display, some or all of the error displays may be displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display. ..

The change effect display may be a change notice display.

When the display mode of the hold icon is selected as the icon A by the player, the icon A is forcibly changed to the icons B to G that can be selected by the player when the hold look-ahead notice is started. Or, when the hold look-ahead notice is started, the icon A may change to an icon mode that the player cannot select.

In addition, a plurality of operation means related to the effect may be provided. Here, when the operation means A (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation means B (lever) are provided, an image prompting the operation of the operation means A (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means A or an "operation means". Character display such as "press A". Hereinafter, when "operation means image A") is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the operation means B (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means B or "" Character display such as "press the operation means B". Hereinafter, "operation means image B") may be configured so as to be easier to confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode in the end than when the display is displayed. The image relating to the operating means in which the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed may be reversed, and the ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed may not change. Here, the auto button function works for the operation means A, but the auto button function does not need to work for the operation means B, the operation means for which the auto button function works may be reversed, and the auto button for both operation means The function may work, and the auto button function may not work for both operating means. Further, the display of the operation means image B may be configured so that the change of the display mode of the navigation character is more successful than the case where the operation means image A is displayed, but the opposite may be true. , The success level of the change in the display mode of the navigation character may not differ depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, the display mode of the navigation character changes to a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher when the operation means image B is displayed than when the operation means image A is displayed. It may be configured to be easy, but it may be reversed, and it may be configured so that the display mode in which the navigation character is easily changed does not differ depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, the frequency at which the operation means image A is displayed is higher than the frequency at which the operation means image B is displayed, but it may be reversed or the same. .. In addition, an effect (promotion effect or demotion effect) in which the operation means image A is changed to the operation means image B may be performed. Here, the period during which the operation means image A is promoted to the operation means image B may be outside the valid period of the operation valid period of the operation means A and before the operation valid period of the operation means B is started. It may be outside the period of the operation valid period of A and during the period of the operation valid period of the operation means B, during the period of the operation valid period of the operation means A and outside the valid period of the operation valid period of the operation means B. It may be during the operation valid period of the operation means A and during the operation valid period of the operation means B. The same applies to the case where the operation means image B is changed to the operation means image A. In the above description, two operating means, the operating means A and the operating means B, have been described as an example, but the same applies to three or more operating means.

In addition, the effects that can be selected by the player are the special figure start port, the normal figure start port, the general prize opening and / or the effect gate (even if the player enters the gate and the sensor detects it, the prize ball is not performed and only the effect is produced. It may increase depending on the points obtained by passing through the gate). Here, the number of points obtained by passing and the effect obtained may have a one-to-one relationship, and when the points obtained by passing become specific points, for example, on the decorative symbol display device 208. A "display (gacha effect) for performing an effect of drawing the effect to be acquired from now on" may be performed, and the effect won by the effect lottery by the first sub-control unit 400 may be acquired.

The display and non-display of the navigation character may be switched by the player operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). It may be possible to switch the display / non-display of the navigation character at all times, or it may be possible only while the navigation character is displayed, until a certain period of time elapses from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol (for example, one or more, or It may be possible (for example, all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped), and it may be configured so that the display / non-display of the navigation character cannot be switched during the execution of the super reach effect, and the super reach effect is being executed. It may be configured so that the display / non-display of the navigation character can be switched, and the display / non-display may be switched only when the symbol is stopped (when the special figure is stopped).

The example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (pachinko machine) has been described in detail above, but the game console of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to the spinning machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko machine (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used, and a slot or the like (1 type + 2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot, Jankyu) is fine. More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is internally determined by an internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, a winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, and when a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a specified number of medals are paid out. It may be a reeling game machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are fired into the game area to play a game, and the player is given a predetermined game value based on the fact that the enclosed balls win a prize in the predetermined approach area. It may be an enclosed ball type game table that can be circulated by firing the enclosed ball that has won the prize in the predetermined approach area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game consoles, and will be described in more detail below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 127 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 127, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 into the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 42 are not provided.

FIG. 128 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 128), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged are stored on the outer peripheral surface of the slot machine 1000. It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a backlight (not shown in FIG. 128) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, the down winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that this game can be re-played (no medal insertion is required) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and two are inserted when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal slot 1034 is a slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034, and the insertion means that both are included. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is executed in which a lottery is performed to determine which of the plurality of types of combinations is won, and the slot machine 1000 is operated. It is decided whether to make the state relatively advantageous or relatively disadvantageous to the player.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 is provided.

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1080 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 composed of two right doors 1063a and a left door 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) arranged on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and the left door 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). It has a structure that appears on the side). It should be noted that even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured so as to be able to display various production images and various game information. It may be a display device or the like. In addition, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 described above, as the operation means, the bet button 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop button 1037 to 1039 and the like, and the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And the effect button 1091 (an example of the second operating means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, the display panel 1070 displaying the title of the device or the like can be projected toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 128 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, a pushing operation can be performed, and the display panel 1070 functions as an operating means (button) in the same manner as the transparent portion 191 and is an example of the operating means (for example, the first). It corresponds to an example of one operating means) and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. It is a game table equipped with [208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first icon [for example, the variable icon h0].
The first icon is an icon related to the running symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display] (hereinafter, referred to as “variation icon”).
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default (white) display mode].
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.].
When the variable icon of the second display mode is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the variable icon of the first display mode is displayed [for example, , High expectations for big hits],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM].
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, FIGS. 87 (1) to 12 (12), etc.].
The second icon is an effect of changing the variable icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 87 (i-9) to 11]. It is an icon that may be used for
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a lord, a display mode of a copanda].
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow-colored kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a bancho, a robot. It is an icon that may be displayed in [Display mode].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Here, the variable icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area of the display means, and the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area. .. Further, the variable icon and the second icon may be icons that may be displayed at the same time in the icon display area. That is, the second icon may be an icon that is displayed simultaneously with the variable icon in the icon display area during the first period. Further, the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed outside the icon display area. Alternatively, the icon display area may be a movable display area, or may be a display area that may be divided and moved to different positions.

In addition, "straddling" means sandwiching a period of stop display (fluctuation stop period) of the symbol. Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the icon may be continuously displayed even while the stop display of the symbol is being displayed, may be an icon that disappears temporarily in the middle, or an icon that continues to disappear while the stop display is being displayed. It may be.

Further, the "icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays" is an "icon that is always displayed and may be erased and then redisplayed". ..

In addition, the second icon may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of displays.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second icon may be an icon displayed when a certain condition is satisfied. As an example of a certain condition referred to here, there are n or more holds, there is a hold for which a look-ahead notice is being made, customization is being made by the player, and a certain notice (for example, a timer notice, etc.) (Conversation notice, etc.) is displayed, the second icon is a look-ahead notice notice display, the second icon is in stock, and the expectation of a big hit in the running symbol variation display is It is possible to list things such as high prices and winning the advance notice lottery. That is, the above-mentioned certain conditions may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, grandfather character. Conversation notice including the character display "Navi character changes", fusuma image, fusuma image for wipe production, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 85 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6), FIG. 86. (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 93 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure (K 1-3-4), the meter effect shown in FIG. 101. 99 (2-2-1) to (2-2-3), 110 (ab1) to (b2), 90 (6) to (8), 117 (8). D 9-2-1), etc.], which is an indication that may be used.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the change effect display may be displayed in a state where the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, and the change effect display is a display of the second icon. It is a notice display about the change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

Further, the change effect display may be an icon that may be used for an effect that changes the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, conversely, the change effect display may be an icon that is not used for the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon. In this case, the change effect display is the display of the second icon. It may be an icon used only for the effect of changing the mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode when the change effect display is displayed.

Further, the change effect display may be a display that may be displayed even when the second icon is hidden.

Also,
"When the display mode of the second icon does not change even if the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 85 (3-2-1) to (3-2-2), FIG. 93 ( 1-3-1) to the same figure (1-3-3b2), 110 (A4-2), 110 (A6-2)] are also icons.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"Finally, the jackpot symbol mode is displayed when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, as compared with the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. Is easy to confirm [for example, high expectation of big hit],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means "the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, and the second icon is the second icon." It may be "when the display mode does not change to the fourth display mode".

Further, the state in which the second icon is displayed in the third display mode has a final jackpot symbol mode as compared with the state in which the second icon is displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be difficult to confirm the display.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display [for example, FIG. 88 (U 20-1), FIG. 97 (ko b15-1)] about a big hit in the running symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the second icon may be a notice display for a jackpot in the running symbol variation display," means "the notice of the jackpot in the running symbol variation display is the second icon. It may be "done by".

Here, the third display mode may be the default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a notice display mode for a big hit in the running symbol variation display.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a look-ahead notice [for example, FIG. 93 (ke 5-1) to the same figure (ke 13), FIG. 96 (koa 11)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the second icon may be a notice display of the look-ahead notice" may mean "a look-ahead notice is given by the second icon".

Here, the third display mode may be the default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be the look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that also functions as the variable icon. That is, in this case, two types of variable icons are displayed by the first icon and the second icon.

Further, when both the icon of the variable icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both icons are not displayed is more than the case where both icons are not displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed.

Further, when both the variable icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, one of the two icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when only the icon is displayed.

Further, when one of the variable icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, none of the icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode than in the case.

Further, when both the icon of the variable icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both icons are not displayed is more than the case where both icons are not displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed.

In addition, the variable icon of a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon of the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) are displayed. In this state, the variable icon in the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the second display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the fourth display mode) are displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than the state in which both of the icons are displayed.

Or conversely, the variable icon in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon in the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) The displayed state is the variation icon of the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the fourth display mode). It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than the state in which both of the second icons are displayed.

Further, the variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and when the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is always confirmed and displayed in the end. You may. Further, the second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the sixth display mode, and when the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed. It may always be confirmed and displayed. Even if the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the second icon may be displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. Good. Further, even if the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the variable icon may be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. Good.

Further, the variable icon may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and the second icon may be displayed in the sixth display mode. In this case, for example, an advantageous jackpot is confirmed (for example, a jackpot with probability variation, a jackpot with a long round is confirmed), a rare reach (for example, a full rotation reach) is likely to appear, or another premier production appears. It may be easy to make a big hit, or it may be easy to make a big hit. Or conversely, it may be difficult to make a big hit. In addition, the mode of the operating means may be changed (for example, the button may pop out, rotate, or be recessed, or the built-in lamp may emit light in a rare light emitting mode (for example, a rainbow light emitting mode that changes to seven colors)). .. You can also get the benefits of customizing the production, increase the number of productions you can select during the jackpot game, start a special super reach, and open a special jackpot round (for example, a second attacker opens). Round) may be started.

In addition, the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon may suggest the type of effect (for example, the type of super reach). For example, when the display mode of the variable icon is the lord and the display mode of the second icon is the swordsman, it may be suggested that the swordsman reach where the lord and the swordsman duel. Alternatively, when the display mode of the variable icon is a helmet and the display mode of the second icon is a lord, it functions as a notice of the change (normal notice) only when the two icons are displayed. It may be configured in.

Further, the reliability (expected degree) of the jackpot may differ depending on the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, the combination of the variable icon in the first display mode, the second icon in the fourth display mode, the variable icon in the second display mode, and the variable icon in the third display mode. The reliability (expectation) of the jackpot may be different from that of the second icon combination.

Also,
"When the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variable icon is the second icon than when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. It is easy to change from one display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the probability that the variable icon of the first display mode changes to the second display mode is such that the variable icon of the first display mode is determined by the second icon of the fourth display mode. The case of changing to the second display mode is more likely than the case where the variable icon of the first display mode is changed to the second display mode by the second icon of the third display mode. It may be expensive.

Here, "than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means "the variable icon is changed from the first display mode by the second icon of the third display mode". It may be "more than when the effect of changing to the second display mode is performed".

Further, when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variable icon may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode. Further, when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, the variable icon does not necessarily have to change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may change.

Further, when the second icon of the sixth display mode is displayed, the variable icon is the fifth, as compared with the case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed. It may be easy to change to the display mode of.

As described above, when the display mode of the second icon is changed, the display mode of the variable icon may be easily changed, and the display mode of the variable icon is always changed. May be good.

Further, the variable icon in the easily changeable display mode may differ depending on the display mode of the second icon. In addition, the notices that are likely to appear (pseudo continuous notice, timer notice, look-ahead notice) may change depending on the display mode of the second icon.

Also,
"There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, an example shown in FIG. 91, an example shown in FIGS. 92 (ki 1) to (ki 5), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying a plurality of the second icons, it may be easy to make a big hit, or the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may be easily changed.

Further, depending on the combination of the plurality of the second icons (the combination of the second icons in the same display mode or the combination of the second icons in different display modes), it is easy to make a big hit, or the hold icon or the variable icon The display mode of is easily changed, or the notice (pseudo-continuous notice, timer notice, look-ahead notice) that is likely to appear may be changed.

Also,
"Equipped with an operating means [for example, chance button 136, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate.
The second icon is an icon in which the display mode changes when the operating means is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 92 (1-1) to 92 (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, for example, the display mode may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode according to the operation of the operating means.

Further, the second icon is a display mode relating to the operation means, and the display mode may be changed according to the operation of the operation means. The display mode relating to the operation means may be a display mode that imitates the operation means, or a display mode that encourages the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display mode). It may be a display mode relating to the operation validity period of the operation means (more specifically, a display mode of the remaining period of the operation validity period (remaining period display mode)), or a display mode reminiscent of the operation means. It may be a combination of these display modes, or it may be a display mode including at least one of these display modes.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying the meter display, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted according to the state of the meter display and the operation of the operation means is accepted, the second icon The display mode of is may change.

Further, when the operating means is operated in the so-called back button state in which the notification prompting the operation of the operating means is not made even during the operation valid period of the operating means, the display mode of the second icon is displayed. May change.

In addition, the display mode of the second icon may change according to the change in the effect mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon whose display mode can be changed by a customized operation by the player.

Also,
"The third display mode is a display mode selected by the player [for example, character selection of 73 (b)].
The fourth display mode is a display mode not selected by the player [for example, the display mode of the number length shown in FIG. 89 (E4-3)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third display mode is a display mode that can be selected by the player, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode that the player cannot select, or the game. It may be a display mode that can be selected by a person.

Also,
"When the display mode of the second icon changes without being accompanied by other display effects [for example, FIG. 89 (E1) to FIG. (E3-1), FIG. 92 (K2-1). ) ~ Figure (ku 7)] is an icon,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the second icon may change without being accompanied by an effect of another display" means that "the display mode of the second icon may be changed by the effect of the second icon". May change. "

Also,
"The variable icon is an icon having [for example, FIG. 100 (Su 3) to Fig. (Su 4)] when the display mode changes without being accompanied by an effect by another display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the variable icon may change without being accompanied by an effect of another display" means that "the display mode of the variable icon may change due to the effect of the variable icon". It may be that.

Also,
"The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a third icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.].
The third icon is an icon according to the number of reserved balls (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon”).
The hold icon has a plurality of types of display modes [for example, icons A to G of the hold display selection in FIG. 73 (b), FIG. 88 (U2), FIG. (U3), FIG. It is an icon that may be displayed in the default display mode, blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, and the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode. You may.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. It is a game table equipped with [208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first icon.
The first icon is an icon related to the hold display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24, variable icons h0, etc.].
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default (white) display mode].
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM].
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, FIGS. 87 (1) to 12 (12), etc.].
The second icon is an effect of changing the first icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 87 (i-9) to (11)). Etc.], which is an icon that may be used for
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a lord, a display mode of a copanda].
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow-colored kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a bancho, a robot. It is an icon that may be displayed in [Display mode].
The second icon is an icon that may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the display mode of the second icon changes without being accompanied by other display effects [for example, FIG. 89 (E1) to FIG. (E3-1), FIG. 92 (K2-1). ) ~ Figure (ku 7)] is an icon,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained. Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, grandfather character. Conversation notice including the character display "Navi character changes", fusuma image, fusuma image for wipe production, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 85 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6), FIG. 86. (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 93 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure (K 1-3-4), the meter effect shown in FIG. 101. 99 (2-2-1) to (2-2-3), 110 (ab1) to (b2), 90 (6) to (8), 117 (8). D 9-2-1), etc.], which is an indication that may be used.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the display mode of the second icon does not change even if the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 85 (3-2-1) to (3-2-2), FIG. 93 ( There are also icons from 1-3-1) to the same figure (1-3-3b2, FIG. 110 (A4-2), FIG. 110 (A6-2))].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display [for example, FIG. 88 (U 20-1), FIG. 97 (ko b15-1)] about a big hit in the running symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a look-ahead notice [for example, FIG. 96 (a11)] in FIGS. 93 (Ke 5-1) to (Ke 13).
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, an example shown in FIG. 91, an example shown in FIGS. 92 (ki 1) to (ki 5), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"Equipped with an operating means [for example, chance button 136, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate.
The second icon is an icon in which the display mode changes when the operating means is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 92 (1-1) to 92 (7)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first icon is an icon having [for example, FIG. 100 (Su 3) to FIG. (Su 4)] when the display mode changes without being accompanied by an effect by another display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the first icon may change without being accompanied by an effect of another display" means "the display mode of the first icon is given by the notice of the first icon". May change. "

Also,
"The" icon related to the hold display "described above is the" icon of the concept including both the hold icon and the variable icon ".
The hold icon is an icon representing an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24].
The variable icon is an icon [for example, the variable icon h0] representing a held hold that has been digested.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The" icon related to hold display "described above is the" hold icon ".
The hold icon is an icon representing an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The "icon related to the hold display" described above is a "variable icon", and the variable icon may be an icon representing a digested hold [for example, the variable icon h0]. Good.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Production means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. 208S, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, game underframe lamp 452, Senryo box accessory 224H, etc.]
Operation means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.]
With
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
When the operation of the operating means is performed during the first period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect [for example, “Summer vacation is not yet done?” In FIG. 118 (A11). ~ "Response display] may be executed,
In the auto button mode, when the first time [for example, the auto button function activation time (time from FIG. 118 (A6) to immediately before FIG. (A11))] elapses from the start of the first period, the said The first production may be performed,
When the operation of the operating means is performed during the second period [for example, the operation valid period (the period from FIG. 118 (A8-1) to FIG. (A14)]] in the non-auto button mode, the second operation means is performed. [For example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode, a response display in which the continuous striking meter RHM of FIGS. 119 (Aa5-5-6) to FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-7) rises] is executed. In some cases,
In the auto button mode, even if the second time [for example, the auto button function activation time] elapses after the start of the second period, the second effect is not executed [for example, FIG. 118]. Example, the state of the continuous striking meter RHM of FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-2) and FIG.
In the auto button mode, if the operation of the operation means is performed from the start of the second period to the elapse of the second time, the second effect is executed. And
The state of the operating means can be changed from one of the first state and the second state [for example, white lighting] to the other state [for example, special color (blue) lighting].
When the state of the operating means is changed from the one state to the other state during the period of the second period in the auto button mode [for example, FIGS. 118 (A8-1) to FIG. In the case of A14), etc.]
A game table characterized by that. "
Was explained.

According to the invention described in this description, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic operating means. More specifically, since the state of the operating means may change during the period of the second period in the auto button mode, the operating means is guided to the line of sight to encourage the operation of the operating means. May be possible.

Here, the auto button mode is a mode in which an effect may be performed according to the operation of the operating means even if the operating means is not operated. The non-auto button mode is a state in which the auto button mode is not set.

Even during the auto button mode, the operation of the operation means may be accepted (not invalidated), may or may not be accepted, or may not be accepted at all. The case of accepting and the case of not accepting may be accepted in the production of A and not accepted in the production of B, or may be accepted in the period of A and not accepted in the period of B. Furthermore, the operation of the operation means of A (for example, the chance button 136) is accepted, and the operation of the operation means of B (for example, the operation key unit 137, the second chance button, the lever type operation means, etc.) is not accepted. May be good.

Further, during the period of the second period, the effect means other than the operation means (for example, display by display means, movable means, light emitting means, etc.) may be configured to change.

Also,
"When the state of the operating means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, in the case of FIG. 120 (Aa8-3)). ] There is
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

By doing so, the state of the operating means may change during the period of the second period in the non-auto button mode, so that the operating means can be guided to the line of sight to encourage the operation of the operating means. You may be able to do it. In addition, regardless of whether or not the auto button mode is set, it is necessary to notice that the second effect is not executed unless the operation means is operated during the second period, and to improve the motivation to operate the operation means. May be possible.

Also,
"At least a part of the first period may overlap with at least a part of the second period [for example, just before FIGS. 118 (A8-1) to (A11), FIG. 119. (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 120 (Aa8-2-1)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Also,
"A period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period in the auto button mode overlap [for example, FIGS. 118 (A8-1) to 118 (A11)). In the period up to immediately before, in FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 120 (Aa8-2-1)], when the operation means is operated, the first effect and the second effect At least one of these effects is executed [for example, FIG. 120 (Aa8-2-3) to FIG. 120 (Aa8-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. May be good.

If the operating means is operated from the start of the first period to the elapse of the first time, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. However, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed.

For example, when two button displays are displayed in the auto button mode, the function of the auto button mode works for one button display, the response display is displayed according to the button operation, and the other button display is auto. The button mode function does not work, and there is a sense of incongruity that you have to operate the buttons yourself, which may improve the interest of the game.

Also,
"When the operation means is operated in a period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period in the non-auto button mode overlap, the first And at least one of the second effects are executed.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. May be good.

Also,
"If the operation means is not operated during the period of the first period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect is not executed.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

The first effect may be executed even if there is no operation until the end of the first period.

Also,
"If the operation means is not operated during the second period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the second effect is not executed.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

In addition, the second effect may be executed even if there is no operation until the end of the second period.
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (all of them). (Including), 2nd display device 208S, etc.]
The plurality of types of effects are a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a response display.
The response display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated.
The first effect is the first response display of the response effects [for example, the response display of "Is summer vacation still?" In FIG. 118 (A11)].
The second effect is a second response display of the response effects [for example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Also,
"A display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an operation display, and is an operation display.
The operation display is a display related to the operation of the operation means.
When the first operation display [for example, the button effect image (button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT) shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1)] is displayed as the operation display, the operation display is described. When the operation of the operating means is performed, the first response display may be displayed.
When the operation of the operation means is performed when the second operation display [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 118 (A8-1) or the like] is displayed as the operation display, the first operation display is performed. A second response display may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

The operation display may include an image [for example, button image 136a] showing the appearance of the operation means, or a display prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, remaining time display meters MT, PUSH]. Character display, character display of "press", display of an arrow indicating the operation direction, etc.] may be included.

Also,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on the running symbol variation display [for example, a notice effect on a jackpot in the symbol variation display (normal notice)].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

It should be noted that both the first effect and the second effect may be so, only the first effect may be, and only the second effect may be. You may.

Also,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on the symbol variation display that is being executed and then started [for example, the symbol variation that is started next. It is a display, a symbol variation display that starts next, or a notice effect (pre-reading notice) about a big hit in the symbol variation display that starts next next.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

It should be noted that both the first effect and the second effect may be so, only the first effect may be, and only the second effect may be. You may.

Also,
"The first period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as" first operation valid period ").
The second period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation valid period").
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

A meter display indicating at least one of the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period [for example, the display of the remaining period meter MT shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1)]. ] May be displayed even during the auto button mode. In addition, the display of the remaining period meter MT may be added to the button hold icon shown in FIG. 118 (A8-1).

Further, the meter display may be a gauge display (bar display that increases or decreases), or a display in which the shade of the display color changes with the passage of time and is grayed out when the remaining period is exhausted, for example. Good.

Alternatively, conversely, the meter indicating the operation validity period may be displayed only in the non-auto button mode and may not be displayed in the auto button mode. For example, the remaining period meter MT is omitted from the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1) in the auto button mode, and conversely, the button shown in FIG. 120 (Aa8-3) in the non-auto button mode. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the hold icon.

Further, regardless of whether or not the auto button mode is set, when the meter indicating the operation validity period is displayed [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 118 to 120] is not set [for example, FIGS. 118 to 118]. There may be a button variable icon or a button hold icon shown in 120].

Also,
"The operating means is a means that may perform an effect operation [for example, light emission, vibration, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Further, the first state is a state in which the effect operation is not performed [for example, a light-off state, a white lighting state, and a vibration stop state], and the second state is a state in which the effect operation is performed [for example. , Lighting state, blue lighting state, vibration state].

Further, the first state may be a state in which the operating means is stopped.

Further, even if the effect means is provided with an effect movable means [for example, an oscillator] inside, and the effect operation is an operation [for example, vibration] in which the effect movable means operates. Good.

Further, the second state is a state in which the effect movable means is operating [for example, an advancing state, a retreating state, a vibrating state, a rotating state, and a curing state]. Etc.].

The operating means may be a means provided with a light emitting means.

The light emitting means is a means capable of executing a driving operation such as turning on, blinking, or turning off.
The first state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in the first aspect.
The second state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in the second mode.
The first aspect and the second aspect may be different aspects.

The first aspect may be a mode in which the light is off, and the second aspect may be a mode in which the light is on.

The first aspect may be a mode in which the light is lit in the first color, and the second aspect may be a mode in which the light is lit in the second color.

The second aspect may be a blinking aspect.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Production means [For example, only the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device. A game table equipped with 208S, a speaker 120, a game board lamp 442, a game table frame lamp 452, a thousand-car box accessory 224H, etc.]
The effect means is a means capable of performing at least a plurality of types of effects.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect.
The first effect is an effect selected by the player [for example, (b) effect by each option of character selection in FIG. 73 (b), (c) effect by each option of reservation frame selection, ( e) Production by each option of hold display selection, (f) Production by each option of background display selection, music output production of song title shown in FIG. 111].
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect by the navigation character YM, a music output effect, a hold frame UI effect, a hold effect, a background effect,].
When the third effect [for example, change notice by treasure box icon I1, music change notice, wipe effect, background change notice, etc.] is executed during the execution of the first effect, the first effect is described. When changing to the second effect [For example, FIGS. 109 (a3-1) to the same figure (a6-1), FIGS. 112 (a11) to the same figure (a15-1), and FIG. 116. For example, when the background A is selected by the player in FIG. 90 (1), the background change notice (wipe-in and wipe-out of the 襖 image for the wipe effect) in the figures (6) to (7). ), The background of the look-ahead notice displayed in the figure (8) to the figure (21) changes].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Here, the third effect may be one of the plurality of types of effects, and may be an effect executed by the effect means. Alternatively, the third effect may be an effect that is not executed by the effect means (for example, display means) but is executed by another effect means (for example, sound output means) different from the effect means. ..

Further, the first effect may be a customized effect that can be selected in the demonstration mode in which the symbol variation display is not started for a certain period of time, or an effect that can be selected even during execution of the symbol variation display. May be good. Further, the first effect may be a super reach effect or a round effect during a big hit game, which can be selected by the player.

Further, the third effect may be, for example, an effect of notifying the remaining time until the simultaneous effect such as the island simultaneous effect is started.

As an example of the effect means, display means (for example, liquid crystal display device, dot matrix display device, 7-segment display device, organic EL display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, projector, etc.) , Light emitting means, sound output means, movable means and the like can be listed. Further, as an example, a light guide plate in which light is incident from the side and emits light toward the front, and a POV display capable of displaying a pattern by an afterimage effect can be listed. As the effect means, all of those listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applicable.

Further, the effect means may be a device that performs a light emission effect, and in this case, a light emission mode (color, lighting pattern, light emission display displayed depending on the light emission color, etc.) may be different depending on the mode. ..

Also,
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). ), Second display device 208S, etc.]
The first effect is the first effect display [for example, the effect display by each option of (b) character selection in FIG. 73 (b) or the effect display by each option of (c) holding frame selection, (e). The effect display by each option of the hold display selection, (f) the effect display by each option of the background display selection, the song name shown in FIG. 111 displayed on the song name display unit MN of FIG. 112].
The second effect is the second effect display [for example, the effect display by the navigation character YM, the effect display by the hold frame UI, and the song title display unit MN "Disstance" in FIGS. 112 (a 13) to (a 14). , The song title display unit MN "Todoroki DREAM" in FIG. 112 (a 15-1)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the effect means may be a plurality of image display means.

Also,
"The third effect is the third effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, grandfather character" Navi character Conversation notice including the character display "change", image of 襖, image of 襖 for wipe production, character C11 of the chief of Fig. 112 (I11) to Fig. (I15-1)].
The third effect display may be performed by the image display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, at least a part of the third effect display and at least a part of the first effect display may overlap. That is, there may be a case where only a part of the third effect display and a part of the first effect display overlap, or only a part of the third effect display and the first effect display. May overlap with all of the third effect display, or only a part of the first effect display may overlap with all of the third effect display, or may overlap with all of the third effect display. In some cases, all of the first effect displays may overlap. Further, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap at least a part of the first effect display from the front side (player side), and conversely, the first effect display may overlap. At least a part of the above may overlap with at least a part of the third effect display from the front side (player side).

In addition, the image display device displays a variable display of the decorative symbol, a stop display of the decorative symbol, an icon (hold icon) according to the number of reserved balls, and an icon (variable icon) related to the running symbol variable display. May occur. The third effect display may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable display of the decorative symbol, or closer to the first effect display than the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the hold icon, or it may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable icon. It may be done.

Also,
"Even if the third effect is not executed, the first effect may be changed to the second effect [for example, FIGS. 89 (E1) to 3-1). FIG. 92 (KU 2-1) to FIG.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operation means provided at a position where the player can operate may be provided, and the first effect may be changed to the second effect when the operation means is operated. ..

Further, the change from the first effect to the second effect may be a change of the effect mode, the first effect corresponds to the effect mode set by the player, and the change of the effect mode is Even if the change is made according to the operation of the operation means, for example, the change is made according to the start of execution of the look-ahead notice (entering the look-ahead mode (corresponding to the second effect display)). Good.

Also,
"When the first effect is changed to the second effect due to the execution of the third effect [for example, in the case of FIGS. 109 (a4-1) to (a6-1)". ] Is changed from the first effect to the second effect without executing the third effect [for example, in FIGS. 89 (E2) to (E4-1)). In the end, it is easier to shift to a state that is advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit game state, a big hit game state with a large number of balls, a probability change state, an electric support state].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the configuration may be such that when the third effect is executed, the state always shifts to a state advantageous for the player. Alternatively, conversely, even if the third effect is executed, it may not shift to a state advantageous to the player.
Further, as the advantageous state, if the symbol variation display is being displayed, a big hit game state can be mentioned. Further, it may be in a super reach state or a pseudo continuous production state. On the other hand, as the advantageous state, if the big hit game is being executed, a probability change state or an electric support state after the end of the big hit game can be mentioned. Further, the round promotion state may be in which the number of rounds is apparently increased.

Also,
"Equipped with an operating means [for example, chance button 136, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate.
There is a case where the first effect is selected when the operation means is operated [for example, in the case of FIGS. 76 (37) to (50)].
When the operation means is operated, the third effect may be executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"During the execution of the first effect, even if the third effect is executed, the first effect is not changed to the second effect [for example, FIGS. 85 (3-2-1) to FIG. 9 (3-2-2), FIG. 93 (K 1-3-1) to FIG. 9 (K 1-3-3b2), FIG. 110 (A4-2), FIG. 110 (Aa6-2). If] there is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, when the effect means is a display means, even if the third effect is executed, the effect may not be changed from the first effect display to the second effect display. When the means is a light emitting means, even if the third effect is executed, the first light emitting effect may not be changed to the second light emitting effect, and the effect means may output sound. In the case of means, even if the third effect is executed, the first sound output effect may not be changed to the second sound output effect, and the effect means is a movable means. In some cases, even if the third effect is executed, the first operation effect may not be changed to the second operation effect.

Alternatively, conversely, if the third effect is executed during the execution of the first effect, the first effect may be changed to the second effect without fail.

Also,
"The second effect is one of the effects that can be selected by the player.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Alternatively, on the contrary, the second effect may be an effect that cannot be selected by the player.

Also,
"A sound output means [for example, a speaker 120] capable of outputting music is provided.
The effect means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying the music display [for example, the music name display unit MN of FIG. 112 (a 15-1), the same figure (a 16) to the same figure (a 18), etc.].
The music display is a display related to a music output by the sound output means [for example, display of a music title or lyrics].
The first production is the first music display [for example, "Mega Giga Summer"].
The second production is a second music display [for example, "Todoroki DREAM"].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first effect is an effect in which the second icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] is displayed in the third display mode [for example, the default display mode].
The second effect is an effect in which the second icon is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow kimono]. That is
The second icon is an icon that has a case where it is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, in the case of FIGS. 109 (a1) to 109 (a2)].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, "straddling" means sandwiching a period of stop display (fluctuation stop period) of the symbol. Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. Further, the icon may be continuously displayed even while the stop display of the symbol is being displayed, may be an icon that disappears temporarily in the middle, or an icon that continues to disappear while the stop display is being displayed. It may be.

Also,
"The effect means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). , Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons.
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is the first icon.
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a second icon.
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a third icon.
The first icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter, referred to as “variation icon”) [for example, variation icon h0].
The second icon is an icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays.
The third icon is an icon corresponding to the number of reserved balls (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon”) [for example, holding icon h11].
The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon, and is different from the hold icon.
The variable icon is displayed in the icon display area [for example, the variable icon display area CIS of the hold frame UI having the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS] in the display means. Is an icon that may
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the effect icon display area DIS in the hold frame UI].
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the hold icon display area HIS in the hold frame UI].
The first effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in the first mode [for example, "holding frame D"].
The second effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in the second mode [for example, "holding frame R"].
The first aspect and the second aspect are different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon display area may be an area in which the area icon is displayed, an area in which the hold frame is displayed, or an area in which the user interface (UI) is displayed. It may be. The area icon may be a base icon, a stage icon, a frame icon, or the like. Further, the area icon may be composed of a plurality of icons. Further, the icon display area may be an area including a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and a second icon (for example, a navigator icon) display area.

Further, the third effect may be an effect of switching the mode of the icon display area. Further, the third effect may be an effect in which a display overlapping from the front side is displayed in the icon display area.

Also,
"One of the above-mentioned multiple types of production is the fourth production,
The fourth effect is a notice effect [for example, the telop display trp shown in FIG. 104] that the third effect is executed before the third effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The third effect is a notice effect for a big hit in the running symbol variation display [for example, a normal notice effect by the color of the treasure box icon, a big hit confirmation (or a big hit rich) notice by the character C11 of the bancho]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The third effect is the effect of pre-reading notice [for example, the effect of pre-reading notice by the color of the treasure box icon].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the above description of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the variable display of the symbol (more specifically, the special symbol), and the description of the stop display of the decorative symbol is the symbol (more specifically). Specifically, it may be a stop display (special figure).

In addition, "may be" in the above may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", and "○○ is possible" in the above. It may be replaced with "must be XX".

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix R0-1)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the fourth meter display.
The final big hit is when the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state. It is structured so that the design can be easily displayed.
The final big hit is when the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state. It is structured so that the design can be easily displayed.
The fourth meter display displayed in the empty state is configured to be more easily changed to the full tank state than the first meter display displayed in the empty state.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons.
The icon of one of the plurality of types of icons is the first icon.
When the first icon is displayed, the meter on the first meter display is configured to rise by the first amount.
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise by a fourth amount.
The fourth amount is a larger amount than the first amount.
The fourth effect may be started while the first meter display is displayed.
The fourth effect is an effect in which the fourth display changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-2)
The game console described in Appendix R0-1.
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed.
The size and display position of the first meter display and the fourth meter display are the same.
The first meter display and the fourth meter display differ in some or all colors.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-3)
The game console described in Appendix R0-1 or R0-2.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display on a certain background screen.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fourth meter display on the certain background screen.
The certain background screen is a background screen in a certain production stage, and is
In the certain effect stage, if the first meter display is not displayed, the fourth meter display may be displayed, and if the fourth meter display is not displayed, the first meter is displayed. The display is configured to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-4)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-3.
It is configured such that the first meter display in the empty state may change to display the fourth meter display in the empty state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-5)
The game console according to any one of Appendix R0-1 to R0-4.
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon.
When the second icon is displayed, the meter on the first meter display is configured to rise by a second amount.
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise by a fifth amount.
The fifth amount is a larger amount than the second amount.
The second amount is a larger amount than the first amount.
The fifth amount is a larger amount than the fourth amount.
A game table characterized by that.

Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be changed to another embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendix, etc. are applied to other embodiments, the embodiment, and the modification. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, appendices, etc., it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Chance button 137u Up key 137d Down key 137l Left key 137r Right key 208 Decorative icon display device 208L 1st decorative icon display device 208M 2nd decorative icon display device 208N 3rd decorative icon display device 300 Main control unit 400 1st sub-control unit 500 2nd sub-control unit 600 Payout control unit 1000 Slot machine pd3 3rd symbol pd4 4th symbol pd5 5th symbol UI Hold frame HIS Hold icon Display area bIl Left base icon hs1 to hs4 1st stage ~ 4th stage h1-h4, h11-h14, h21-h24 Hold icon CIS variable icon display area hs0 pedestal h0, c variable icon YM navigator character I1 treasure box icon DIS effect icon display area bIr right base icon MW white meter display MR red Meter display UpI White meter rise item UpIb Blue meter rise item UpIm Green meter rise item UpIr Red meter rise item UpIg Golden meter rise item MI Menu icon VI Volume adjustment icon BI Brightness adjustment icon VW Volume adjustment window BW Brightness adjustment Window VB Bar display for volume adjustment

Claims (5)

Display means and
Operation means and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display as the meter display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second meter display as the meter display.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises.
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises.
When the meter of the first meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game which is advantageous to the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full.
When the meter with the second meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter with the second meter display is not full.
The first display may be displayed depending on the operation of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that. Display means and
Operation means and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display as the meter display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second meter display as the meter display.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises.
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises.
When the meter of the first meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game which is advantageous to the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full.
When the meter with the second meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter with the second meter display is not full.
The first meter display may change to the second meter display depending on the operation of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that. It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display as the meter display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second meter display as the meter display.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises.
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises.
When the meter of the first meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game which is advantageous to the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full.
When the meter with the second meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter with the second meter display is not full.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a change display that changes the first meter display to the second meter display.
A game table characterized by that. It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display as the meter display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second meter display as the meter display.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises.
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises.
When the meter of the first meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game which is advantageous to the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full.
When the meter with the second meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter with the second meter display is not full.
When the game ball wins the winning opening, the first display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a meter display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display as the meter display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second meter display as the meter display.
When the first display is displayed while the first meter display is displayed, the meter of the first meter display rises.
When the first display is displayed while the second meter display is displayed, the meter of the second meter display rises.
When the meter of the first meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game which is advantageous to the player than when the meter of the first meter display is not full.
When the meter with the second meter display is full, it is easier for the player to start a special game that is more advantageous to the player than when the meter with the second meter display is not full.
When the game ball passes through the gate, the first display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.